Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D01-038 - TOYS R US - REMODELD01-6038 Toys R Us D • to 1— tu ui 16700 F g u s5 z • u) P F 0 Southeenter Py City of Tukwila Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite I ()' • hik.vila, t t! �s!ringi 7 r O? 1 WARNING: IF CONSTRUCTION BEGINS BEFORE APPEAL PERIOD EXPIRES. APPLICANT IS PROCEEDING AT THEIR OWN RISK. Parcel No: 262304 -9128 Permit No: DO1 -038 Address: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY St: 01 Status: ISSUED Suite No: Issued: 03/19/2001 Location: Expires: 09/15/2001 Category: ARET Type: DEVPERM Zoning: TUC Const Type: Occupancy: STORE Gas /Elec.: UBC: 1997 Units: 001 Fire Protection: SPRINKLERED Setbacks: North: .0 South: .0 East: .0 West: .0 Water: TUKWILA Sewer: TUKWILA Wetlands: Slopes: N Streams: Contractor License No: REYMABCO27LP DEVELOPMENT PERMIT (206) 431 -3670 OCCUPANT TOYS R US Phone: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 OWNER REAL PROPERTY WEST INC 101 CALIFORNIA ST, SUITE 2525, SAN FRANCISCO CA 94111 f CONTACT CARON STEVENSON Phone: 314 - 821 -1100 10877 HATSON RD, ST LOUIS MO 63127 CONTRACTOR RAYMAN BROS CONSTRUCTION INC Phone: 775 -356 -0150 151 S 18TH, SPARKS NV 89431 *************************************************** * * * * * ** *k *k *k* * * ** * * *k * ***k * * *k kA Permit Description: INTERIOR REMODELING -NEW LIGHTING, PARTITION WALLS, FINISHES. ***************************************************** ** * *A * *** * * * *k * * * * * * * *k * * * * **AA Construction Valuation: $ 100,000.00 PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS: *(Water Meter Permits Listed Separate) Eng. Appr: Curb Cut /Access /Sidewalk /CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: N No: Size(in): .00 Flood Control Zone: N Hauling: N Start Time: End Time: Land Altering: N Cut: Fill: Landscape Irrigation: N Moving Oversized Load: N Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: N No: Sewer Main Extension: N Private: N Public: N Storm Drainage: N Street Use: N Water Main Extension: N Private: N Public: N *************** * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * *A * * * * * * * * * * * ** ****** * ** * * * * * * * * *A ** ** * * * * * * * * * * * * ** TOTAL DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FEES: $ 1,64 .19 ********************* * * * * * * * * * * * ***,*tt* * * ** * ** ***** * ***** **k* * ** * *** * ** **** * * *k**k Permit Center Authorized Signature j I hereby certify that I have read.. -amend examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this development permit Signature: Print Name: This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. (_. t4 2 l! C Tenant: k 4 4 4 4 k 4 4 4 4 4 4 k 4 4 F 4 4 !. • A. 4: 1 4 a 4 1 4 r, Permit }t f_ :)!ld i t i.:'t�;' 1. 'S+:' .Yl1311Q:,s bH t 1-' made lr. f, r, .+1•i'• • Enrainizer an d the ihi ;?u i I`.1 irt!J . i ' i. 2. When 's);'C i a 1 is si.i$ c* i cfr. is r cu i t• & e i t' architect f' en9ineer aript't i n t•i+i n r of the the 1 .t in i'rtct 7' ir1pe;t1or: report .s she + l sub:l)i teed t' i. Bu fiiv in ti i,i9.if)C'i`. w t'. t_ .hall , :r.ntaio project name. t . /s . rl! i ''r.t'�ii.' _ . .f� 1 r pet'for red. 5. The special iii r.:-c t, :rr f :t! _ tat ilt) whether y th ti.: the best • :t :its mil t i.' ftt?'H {r.jf,. ij' ,wh,c(c with apprcored i.+ f :n: a r ' , : ?OtC ' t i . ,'st _i f). t•t: : • .'.a`'r , wo- ..'knian :.hiv cti, r, + ? i t)? ti•N f ►r+ 4. An: new ceilin9 ,fit. :.r and 1 .w~r,..! +.'_e • 7 r.... 31 i .1tis:'r! r t ? U i r e ;i to m e e t l a t ' : : i ( L' + i t s i t .. t: is , - fiY+' ti t _ t ZLti1)u .3 5. Partition walt or; t •'t , ++1 braced it isr t'r'71zt t?'., r In l vi t6 6. All c o n s t r u c t i o n !• , :, his done i 1 Y : r n ., •_', r ?t i a f '. C_ •. i f h � 1 ? i plans 3nd .'tsl3ti i •''?Ilit''is t _ of Y ne i,it: ' T +Si ti i 1 9 )! Ed ition as 3iiiNr, ed, t.lnifoi m ilec laol:. i i, l :.'l'1. J itiotr' and 11{a::hifl9t.;)rr c!'. Eirti .7 \' +(f; i ( ;; +,' ,lit i•.;t', i . ‘J 3 1 1 ti i t'v of P t rt t. Tl i e t+t:. V t t � c: plans, i.'t' _+ f i a t i t•f= _. 6h1 etr'tied to be .a iJe, riii: T_ . _i` ..r at;f., C : +ci i tt fa l.aY of any of the i.) i ' t) v i _ .' r'r _ C`' t h t ;) s.t i i t! t r i o other or''i iti,att t' of r' i_ ihr i. • _ t o. +31 ;te at,thor'itt, to .'iclat 4'1 r: .tF'l.'l ! +" '"ot.i.. ! rt ;i_ code Sha1T be L': 1 id 3 . E 1 t L t1' 1 c.a l tiisr fil i 1_ i ? :t { s t Yotaihe,.1 ! ). r i e .. ; )ton State D i v i s i o n of a tt •' r and .i '.S a;. r` *_" . C wt)r}., w i l l be iti_tt:'ctr_'d t,v that at)t:!;. ._-{3 CSC' t`l. 9. L',1i mechanical td' ..sic: l be t!t•' ,r' __i.+-:i+:fit_ .G`'i?'it i__+•1:?+.: the City of Tukwila. 10. All permits. Yri nec.ti :+n T'.-cti!•S.i:S. Ctr`i1 :it.L, _v_t5 t': ti available at t!it :co site u 6 to t•�3 r :5 ,•. j. _t; ul-t l+3ri. These d-: r O aaf, t.ii able unt i i final i.._ iii _ t au o. rt { is 21. •' a 4 EFRE DEt i-+r' Th1ENI 1 2 . This attached set . t e l a n !: +^: en t ? . , NV, n _ v f) f i ? P r e v e n t i o n Bureau and .i. y _ _ : - i •:il!' _ :1 , : Fi r;ie concerns: 23. The tL'.t:a . Y'!li'Y:,i!V( of 7Th _ , ,.t 1Cii7ti i:.if:'r : rt'Ji ' establishment is calculated j!' ore t •.t i, :i! �': t T -i 3000 :CI. •ft. of area. The ' .? ii ll :,i?r. _!7_.i,`_i .,, $ "Pll P(rpose" i24. 10:C ) dry chemi t Tc3 distance to any fire , F)prinouiLher must. b 7 or iNFPA. 10. 3•1.1) 14. Portable fire eytio9uishers shall be :e..7.0retv tritalled the han9er or in the ti t. 0!.3i.:ed in , :abire (.)r wall receszes. The hanQe• oc .shall be and proper1 ,! anc.i to tne mountinu :urfek:e in a with the manufacturer' in:trution!,. The e.)tin ,Sha11 be installed that the n of th not more than 3 feet above the tne i:1earan.cv between the bottom of the etI o?ut:hei 2 Che shal' not be It: than 4 inne.:). 15. E-Ain9visheYs be :oceted :o a: - r LIAin view (if ay all pi. or if not in OiAi -, t 1 V be idehtitled with a 319i■ :r3ttn, "7ire flii with an arrow bointin9 to the unit. ‘W 106,3, Standard 10-1; 16, Clear to Fire *? i2 3t, 311 times. rney may not b hidden or obsti'w.:Ced. 17. Fire e..ti reuuire month1)., and They musf have a or 1abel securei:v rhar Indioate the month 3nd ve3r th tne in:yeetion performed and :hall identify the c.on,Lon% •c vecri performin9 the servi.7 iNIEPra. 10. 4. 4-4 3n0 4-4. Ever' six vear:— jr ,„ cheinial and nalon t flr)? extinquishers shall be rI!mptIed and :uoiected to the applicable rechar9e Prooedurs. (%; 10. 4-4 1) 1 reouired monthly and vaarl in of the five e7.t.IncYuiser(s) ace not 3 o)- the insbeci:ion is noT ...00lpiet e. a reputebl: fire extinQut, will be ,uire: co oonduct these (et;!red 141=P A 1 4-3. 4 13. Maintain •il'e ecnieraue rnroorJt. 19. No point in an unsbriokleced buildino, ma be o!o:e feet from an e—Ht. mea: uAth 1004.2.5.2.1; 20. No point in a ‹ be lio tnar feet from exIt. meesured a'on.) toe ueth of )U51: 21. E.. 1 t doors shall swin9 in direJc!t..41 e\it tca serv1n9 an.) haz,..rdc.tis area of when Of O OC 22. E doors shall be obenat tne use of a ke:. or :In:: . .F0E—jicl 000• S t)e , Doked, , J.hainad. o:teo. Ca oi:herwe oe'a2 L:-72 :n: be ol 3!, apur:;.ed " 23. •Oead bolts ai ( allowed unle.ss — the dead bolt: . 1 4 automaticall retracted,. the dc'.. handle is en-:; fi :r. i& the 1207. 24. When two or more ..> t from a Itorm slgwr, shall be nst:illed at the recuired eits whe,e otherwise neceslary to clearly indi the olr .!PC When two or more , e , ts from 6 stor',, ,T1nu two or more ei.its fr., 6 (00Y. an area e,ir sgns :hall be illuminatd. fUPC. 26. Internally illuminated , *.ian - = shall eta:6. working at all t iie. LlEC 27. E,,its shall be illuminated anv time the building is occupied with light havina an intensitv 0/ rt le.Ls t foot candle at floor level. Fl.,,tures reouired or illumination shall be supplied from senarate :oh:ces o' power for Group 1. Civision 1.1 and oc a all other occupancies where the s.stem serves' occupant load of 100 or mo-e. 2 3. The power Suopiy for means of egress illumination sall normally be provided by the pre electric In theevent of It failure. illominal:son automatically pr from an emergency syste: f , : ,,- Group 1. OfOsions 1.1. and 1.2 occupancies and for occupancies where the means of egress ss. serves an occupant loao of 100 )e more, ..:,uon shal be installed in accofdance with the 1003.9.2) All e.Y.ic signs shall be illuminated at all tmes. ensure continued illuninatich for a duration of not less than 1 •/2 •our.s. In oa of pr;mary oower tne signs shall als b connected to an ez:lecenc-, P system uro from storage batteries. unit. e..Tuibmer o an or) site generator 'S and the .=, h. 1 be installed in acoo! with the eletiHca3 code. %..:SC 30. Maintian sprint 7 !ar covecai:,e ber N.F.P.4, Addition/relocation of walls. closets or parritic‘os require relocating and'or addinQ sofini,lec heads. 31. 'prinkler oi'otecton be •::—..ence,.1 to r,.loOrej. and under ole: 9reater tnae tour Teet w•ce. 13-4-5.5.3.1) 32. All new sorinr systems and ell modift;lbn to e'..LFtInd sprinkler syst shall have fire depertTent review anri abproval of drawinds •t to installation or oiodiicetion. New sprinl.ler s and all modifications to sp,.int: ler s involvind more than 50 heads shall have tht.1 approval of the W.S.R.S.. Factari. Mutual. Industrial Ri.zi Insurers, Kemner or ails] ether repre desinated •nd/or recordnized by the City of T(kwila. beior tc submittal to the Tukwila Fire Fceyention Eureau. No sprinkler woe' shali commence without 3C tCity Ordinance 41901) 33. All sprint system cac.:;ations the contractors Materials 2..t10 Test Certificates submitted the Tukwila Fire Prefention Bureau must be :temped th aoprooriate level of competency seol. tWAC 212-S01 34, Maintain automatic fire detector , :cverade oer Addition/relocation of walls.. closets or parti.. %iiay reduire relocatinq and/cr addind automatic fire deteci'ler. 35. Maintain souare foot coverade :f detectors Dtar ManUfaCtUrO( ''S soecifications in all areas in.2!uon,1: closets, elevator :hafts. top stairwells. et., 72. 5•1.4.,2) 36. All new 1: re s oe odificattcns tu systems shall have the sritten apncoeal of tne lt Prevention Eureeu. No wort commence until a fire department permit hes been obrair;ed. Ce #1900; (OF': 1001,3' 37. All electrical wcpri and eduiniwant :14.0! the -:tandards of The t4aional Electrical 40 70, 38. An aisle to and .,,,;(act ind shail be or each electrical panel. .Th width P.ot le'zz than '4 h'fche- shall provide access tu the bane! and 30 ine.he. of wci space shall be pcovided directly in f of the panel. (NEC i10-16(ai. NEC 110-16(c) 39. Each circuit breaker shall be m:Artao z ind .:ata it's purpose. NE.:. 40. Reoiiired resistive construction. icit.o.l!nd .ccoba'ncy separations. area sepion location on pfopert fi resistive reAureioeers e t' : c. t o r, t t _ _ . _ _ • Code and Fire,!:lode and shall bt occDe.;*. oc replaced Wr \'damaged. alteced. breach removed c( imi;roperly (UFC 1111.i) 41. The ma0mum flame tE,t2ire!td :,sed on int:erior walls and , 1 1 nct e that iet f in Table Ns,. *2.-e, of the Uniforv:, 0!EC 42. YOOr street address must be i.onspLuously p.:,-zted or tt,e buildina and shall be plaivl!.. :i3ible an6 leoible from the street. Numbers shall ocntrast witt. thetr (UFC 901.4.4) 43. In order to Provide vcw with the at u: '.:t and l'ire protection under emeroency plea:e pdst ,00r suite. room apartment rumber in :1 conspicuous place 1. 71f the main entry door. qwf: 44. Fire Department loci box,es shall be provided foc all fire alarm panels and sprinkler cise.l. The apprOori6te kev(s) for At7+.7 shall be placed in the lockbot Lockbov order fo be obtained Tukwila Fire Department. iCitv J13fl $11400. 45. Contact the Tukwila Fire rrention tc reduired insoections and tests. q17 10.SC3. Ordinance C900 and #1901) 46. This review limited to specu!ativo tenant t - special fire Permits mav be necessacv depending ..0) JetaHe description of intended use. 47. An overlooked hazardou:, condition 7 i,,Hat!..1r of th,. adopted Fire or Building $:00e.::. doe: not approval of such condition or violation. 48. The plans were cevied by If t',2tvt questions. please call the Taiwila Fire l::event 6Jreau at (206)575-4407. I hereby certify that I have read these ,..°11%;:tion: and will compl: with them as outlined. All provisions of law ai this work will be complied with, wherher The granting of thts permit does not presione aJthcrity violate or cancel the provisins & any othei wcci regulating construction r..t4 oerf.:Nr Signature: Print Name: Project Name/Tenant: — VoYs ea 45 Existing use: El Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse ❑ Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other Value of Construction: t 60 660 ,60 Site Address (include suite number) I to S. G g. 7At2 1 1 ty State/Zip: Tax Parc q Property Owner: TO US r Phone: 1 -0 1 5 I _ O / 4 � Street Address: 'ILO r' r-t 2ois.0 1 C'A1Z,AMus. hlj \ City State/Zip: `.D Fax #: Contractor: '• Phone: Street Address: C Fax #: Arc ttect: G-A s �o Phone: 3 v it S21 -1 ioa Fax #: S t `f' S 21 -41 Col_ Street Address: 10 8 y.� ATSo4 e.9 , 5'�' Louts , M I City (p312 - 1 Engineer: Phone: Street Address: City State/Zip: Fax #: Contact Person: 4∎1204•-1 S /ENSaN c e..s.5:o) Phone: 314 .32l - ) 1 ad Street Address: 1 o 5'11 WA'T5o1�4 1217 ST Lou (S_ k" t I City State/Zip: 693 I2 Fax #: 31 di 62.. ` i up c. Description of work to be done (please be specific): 114 .g.to Z R Et1ot7E Li +4(4 _ 1.1041 LIGl+fl I4Cs PAt;1 ii - IO►4 WILL S, r( uiSNrt: - 5 Existing use: El Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse ❑ Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other Proposed use: Ca Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi - family ❑ Warehouse Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College/University ❑ Other 5 45 Building Square Feet: 61,115 existing No. of Stories: Area of construction (sq ft):C3 Arr71' Will there be a change of use? ❑ yes , i. no If yes, extent of change: (Attach additional sheet if necessary) Will there be rack storage? ❑ yes ❑ no Existing fire protection features: sprinklers ❑ automatic fire alarm ❑ none ❑ other (specify) Will there be storage of flammable/combustible hazardous material in the building? ❑ yes ❑ no Attach list of materials andstora :e location on se arate 8 1/2 X 11 • a er indicatin. t uantities & Material Safet Data Sheets CITY OF TUI("ILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Project Number: Permit Number: 01 � ����� Commercial I Multi- Family Tenant Improvement / Alteration Permit Application Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or facsimile. r APPLICANT REQUEST FOR PUBLIC WORKS SITE/CIVIL PLAN REVIEW OF THE FOLLOWING: (Additional reviews ma be determined b the Public Works De artment) ❑ Channelization/Striping ❑ Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk ❑ Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: Size(s): ❑ Land Altering 0 Cut cubic yds. 0 Fill cubic yds. ❑ Sanitary Side Sewer #: in Sewer Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public ❑ Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public ❑ Water Meter /Exempt #: Size(s): 0 Deduct 0 Water Only ❑ Water Meter /Permanent # Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est. quantity: gal Schedule: ❑ Miscellaneous Date ap ation pd: �1 - I1 /JO /OO cipermir.duc Date a cation pyr ❑ Flood Control Zone I ❑ Hauling ❑ Landscape Irrigation Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. Aplica taken by: (initials) PLEASE SIGN BACK OF APPLICATION FORM . Z W ce 6 2 J U O 0 to V) W W y J 1.-. U) u. w • < = • a W Z = F— 0 Z • W U O — O F_ W I— • O Z W O ~ Z BUILDING 0 NER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT: Date: 2, 3 ,4;' Signature: C Print name: \el 4. pG Ph S; Fax #: s • 3 . 46 Address City /State/Zip APPLICATI • UST BE SU$MITTED WITH TH ' LLOWiNG: • ALL DRAWINGS TO BE STAMPED BY WASHINGTON STATE LICENSED ARCHITECT, STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR CIVIL ENGINEER • ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED N/A SUBMITTED ❑ Complete Legal Description ❑ Metro: Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification if there is a change in the amount of plumbing fixtures (Form H -13). Business Declaration required (Form H -10). Four (4) sets working drawings (five(S) sets for structural work), which include• Site Plan (including existing fire hydrant location(s) 1. North arrow and scale 2. Property lines, dimensions, setbacks, names of adjacent roads, any proposed or existing easements 3. Parking Analysis of existing and proposed capacity; proposed stalls with dimensions 4. Location of driveways, parking, loading & service areas 5. Recycle collection location and area calculations (change (*use only) 6. Location and screening of outdoor storage (change of use only) 7. Limits of clearing/grading with existing and proposed topography at 2' intervals extending 5' beyond property's boundaries 8. Identify location of sensitive area slopes 20% or greater, wetlands, watercourses and their buffers (change of use only) 9. Identify location and size of existing trees that are located in sensitive areas and buffer (TMC 113.45.040), of those, identify by size and species which are to be removed and saved 10. Landscape plan with irrigation and existing trees to be saved by size and species (exterior changes or change of use only) 11. Location and gross floor area of existing structure with dimensions and setback 12. Lowest finished floor elevation (if in flood control zone) 13. See Public Works Checklist for detailed civil /site plan information required for Public Works Review (Form H -9). Z I-z w cc 2 6 00 w 0 CO LU LU_ ❑ Floor plan: show location of tenant space with proposed use of each room labeled in LL ❑ ISd Overall building floor plan with adjacent tenant use; identify tenant space use and location of storage of g any hazardous materials; dimensions of proposed tenant space. g Q ❑ rr Vicinity Map showing location of site ! O I— Ili El Storage: If adding new racks or altering existing rack storage, provide a floor plan identifying rack Z '- layout and all exit doors. Show dimensions of aisles, include dimensions of height, length, and width of Z O rack. Structural calculations are required for rack storage eight feet and over. w w ❑ CEr Indicate proposed construction of tenant space or addition and walls being demolished U 0 O N O N ww u- z W U= 17- ~ z ❑ , Construction details m ❑ Sprinkler details - details of sprinkler hangers, specifically penetrations in structure, i.e., roof; size of water supply to sprinkler vault with documentation from contractor stating supply line will meet or exceed sprinkler system design criteria as identified by the Fire Department. ❑ Er Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code Data shall be noted on the construction drawings. l ❑ SEPA Checklist - if intensification of use (check with Planning Department for thresholds). 71 ❑ Attach plans, reports or other documentation required to comply with Sensitive Area Ordinance or other land use or SEPA decisions. 13 ❑ Food service establishments require two (2) sets of stamped approved plans by the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health prior to submitting for building permit application. The Department of Public Oealth is located at 999 Third Avenue, Suite 700, Seattle, WA or call (206) 2964787. (Form H -5) ❑ ❑ opy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If no contractor has been selected at time of application a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building Owner/Authorized Agent If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect /engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal ! HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PER JURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. 11/30/00 clpermii.doc O moo Fria ' rir moo r_ _! raw vela Falla , vim �a - 4 4 4-4.kttk414 11-44%4•r-, t t t I. ': II v ( 1 L Of. - 4 14 A 4 A A * A .4 A 4 -4 ..1 4 4 t A A .4 A A t •■ 4 - 4 it A 4 . '4 11.,,40E;t111 rivrIber 1. . J r“ t' , /rm ti ti {: i PI Of; I (' 0 0 „ 1 0 0 :3 0 4 " " : r, r .• ^ ,. • • • - 1 1.7 - ,) .1* 1 : P It 11 r, 1' t 1." F E. r S; r i .4 • 4 { 1 ik FIE' !'■ 1 I: e- 13 r) t. „ 13 U L. L t1C, - r 1-4 r L ti It t. !=i it 't i; r , 4 ' hii ****#.1cOirAiik*At-A***WA_JkAki#***A* vrOt#rt Lift' 01• fONN(LA. WP PCI—C . 3 , ----, ii CRAW:Mir NumbOr: ROL001)4 Omount: 1..4,. Q.: 'H L'.,:.1' Ho./frient ME•thoti: l HE Cl - Not i.i ; on: ( i-ii ( -I) lnitl 1LE Permit Oti: lvoe: 12EVPEPti HoELOVNEW fq.1 Parcel No: J.b2:104-91.28 1iite Adciresb: 16 fAUTHCENTEP St; 01 1 Pitymeht 00:1.94 ******i*****1%0c****h**Ik****#*f******A*wki:Aft**91 Accoltnt Coati ! 000/34: PLAN CHECK - NOE!, 1 lotz.1 ALL l'mti-; Tf_ITCIL Project,— Type Inspecti Date -- : 4 J _ _..- -,,,,/ Address: "} Special instructions: Date wanted: / /-- 7 -L21 1. Requester. Phone: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. CO MENTS: _ .— -,-. ./'-- AP / . --_ _ ._dH(((L _'1 / . LL 'LOT I INSPECTl9NNO. INSPECTION RECORC Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188. PERMIT NO. (206)431 670 / - -7 -r'2 r n $47.00 ' EINSPECTION € REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee ust be �id at 6300 Southcenter Blv Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Inspector: Date: Projects ---- - / I i i -- ?S Type of Insp�sajon: � r ' Addre c (n 4 Date caltefi: 4 wanted: 1 a.m. Spe4a1 instructions: 7Date Requester_^ . / , Phone: 77 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 COMMENTS: Inspect $47.00 REINSPECTION at 6300 Southcenter Blv INSPECTION RECORL Retain a copy with permit Date: PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 1. E1 Approved per applicable codes. ciit Corrections required prior to approval. /4-• E REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid ., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: COMMENTS: T of Inspection: rn. rn 1 n q L 1 0 pecial instructions: Al Allign1111.1=1 ,,, or 1_•_ ,. , d. AeA l r t 4 , C.1(...."1--- i o r i - . T' J rr� I ro ct: US T of Inspection: rn. rn 1 n q L Address. a+ SL P Date c.. led: • 1 A m, pecial instructions: Date w nted: CI p.m. Reque er: Dr ym Anen t Phone: r INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188` ZL Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORE Retain a copy with permit C : :O PERMIT NO. (206)431 -367 Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector; LI $47.00 REINSPECTIO FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter'Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: :z4 ? el 5 Type of Inspection: 6-4 ci y.- . Dade called: Special instructions: Z /O ,tj . kt Date want d: ��- yy a�t14. Requester: Phone: -0 El Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Inspector: INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECOR Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98185! PERMIT NO. (206)431 -367 Corrections required prior to approval. 5 e et:5 Date 4 `' $47.00 REINSPECTION EE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: f; . Project. -- ' � , ` (7 a ) t Type.of Inspection: !2 VIA% 0 c, Address: �� (b700 S oJ hco4, i ,' P( .('��1 Date z alled: t J1 7 _ 0 j Special instructions: Date ted: 21 L' 1 a.m. ( p.m ') Re ue e : 1p1 Pho' : - Tic - :? -( t Cep( -0 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION INSPECTION RECORD 0 a I — o s;? Retain a copy with permit 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 (206)431 -36 Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: ❑ $47.00 REINSPECTION FE EQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Corrections required prior to approval. PERMIT NO. Project' / (v , (S it_ Type -of Inspection: Q L a i k ^' `141 1 • ll) � � Address: 44 1 � Date called: Special instructions: Date wanted: a.m. ?I 71 ( p.m., R uester: `-..-----' Phone:, `- `7' - 6ot(9 cc c( INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECOR Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 90 k PERMIT NO. (206)431- Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: ' Corrections required prior to approval. Inspect - Z,,,„(t, Date: 0 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Project Name - Address /(_ i Authorized Signature FINALAPP.FRM City of Tukwila Fire Department Sprinklers: kr Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM X Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued / T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief j' /- :':,' U co. W � Permit No. '��' Suite # . Da'e Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Part East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 5754439 2 N w w O t UJ zE w n o O N of w O tu U= O 1- z )4_ MEM u iTO ROSENAU & ASSUCI'ATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Mdterisi Testing 6747 M . King Way Sou:h, Seattle, Washrrgt:,r 9f 118.3216 Tel ?203; 725.4e00 • T:,li Free (O88) OTTO•4 LS • Fex (2061 723 2221 • V/ebs"e o "cromnau mn WEE vi2=59t2 84 • `1VAEO Registered Age Icy • ALA Acc•e ted ,.abcram. L'6/14f2eO1 13:32 206 CTTO P 1SENAU 45'SOO'=S June 14, 2001 City of Tukwila Building bivision 6200 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 Project: Toys R Us Address: 16700 Southcenter Parkway We state that the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of our knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provision of the building code. Our knowledge is limited to the contents of our handwritten reports. All typewritten reports have been mailed to your office or are enclosed. All reports appear to be complete. This report should not be considered as a warranty for conditions and /or details o; The building. Items inspected are: 1. Puddle Welds on Mezzanine Sincerely, OTTO ROSENAU dr ASSOCIATES. INC. S.c,vo n Qt r w- fl eT Susan Rosenau -Moser Vice President SRM/sem cc: Rayman Brothers Permit Num Job Number` F ADE o 0 , r0 ROSENAU & AS,,JCIATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118 -3216 Tel:(206) 725 -4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO-4-US • Fax:(206) 723 -2221 • Website: www.ottorosenau.com WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory June 14, 2001 City of Tukwila Building Division 6200 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 Project: Toys R Us Permit Number: b01 -038 Address: 16700 Southcenter Parkway Job Number: 01 -152 We state that the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of our knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provision of the building code. Our knowledge is limited to the contents of our handwritten reports. All typewritten reports have been mailed to your office or are enclosed. All reports appear to be complete. This report should not be considered as a warranty for conditions and /or details of the building. Items inspected are: 1. Puddle Welds on Mezzanine Sincerely, OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. .,1A)a.n Qranau- f(Yar Susan Rosenau -Moser Vice President SRM/sem cc: Rayman Brothers Conies to: O . ROSENAU & ASS ,CIATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118 -3216 Tel:(206) 725.4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO.4 -US • Fax:(206) 723.2221 • Website: www.ottorosenau.com WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory Report Number. 001 - Amended Inspection Performed: Structural Steel Erection / Welds Project: Address: Client: Contractor: Inspector and Date Nile Plouffe -26-01 Toys R Us 16700 Southcenter Parkway Rayman Brothers Rayman Brothers CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Permit Number: Job Number: Architect: Engineer: Inspection Results On site to inspect mezzanine addition pr A1.1 and details 1, 2 and 3 / A1.1. Welding and steel is per plans and acceptable to contract documents. Upon receipt of welder certification. Note: these were no acceptable details for puddle welds on deck. I contacted Shelby Drueshell with Casco who gave the verbal OK for as built as follows W puddle weld at each flute landing on perpendicular members. No seam welding or button punching, with % puddle weld at 24°oc on outside. Also need fax of welder certification with ID to verify WABO welder. 423-01 Note from Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. office: Verified the WABO certification of welder William (NMI) Schmidt (renewed to expire 01 APR 02, card number SCH 38 3813). Reviewed by. D01 -038 01 -152 e /I/ GCE vc4rL/ This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 Owner x Contractor Architect x Building Dept. Engineer Conies to: O . ROSENAU & ASS ,CIATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118 -3216 Tel:(206) 725.4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO.4 -US • Fax:(206) 723.2221 • Website: www.ottorosenau.com WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory Report Number. 001 - Amended Inspection Performed: Structural Steel Erection / Welds Project: Address: Client: Contractor: Inspector and Date Nile Plouffe -26-01 Toys R Us 16700 Southcenter Parkway Rayman Brothers Rayman Brothers CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Permit Number: Job Number: Architect: Engineer: Inspection Results On site to inspect mezzanine addition pr A1.1 and details 1, 2 and 3 / A1.1. Welding and steel is per plans and acceptable to contract documents. Upon receipt of welder certification. Note: these were no acceptable details for puddle welds on deck. I contacted Shelby Drueshell with Casco who gave the verbal OK for as built as follows W puddle weld at each flute landing on perpendicular members. No seam welding or button punching, with % puddle weld at 24°oc on outside. Also need fax of welder certification with ID to verify WABO welder. 423-01 Note from Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. office: Verified the WABO certification of welder William (NMI) Schmidt (renewed to expire 01 APR 02, card number SCH 38 3813). Reviewed by. D01 -038 01 -152 e /I/ GCE vc4rL/ This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 Project: Address: Client: Contractor: Inspector and Date Nile Plouffe 3 -26-01 Copies. to: Report Number: 001 Inspection Performed: Structural Steel Erection / Welds Owner Architect Engineer Contractor Budding Dept. 0, f0 ROSENAU & ASSJCIATES, INC Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South. Seattle, Washington 98118 -3216 Tel:(206) 725 -4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO.4 -US • Fax:(206) 723 -2221 • Website: www.ottorosenau.com WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Labaret ;, .— A CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Toys R Us Permit Number: 001 -038 16700 Southcenter Parkway Job Number: 01 -152 Rayman Brothers Architect: Rayman Brothers Engineer: Inspection Results On site to inspect mezz.anine addition pr A1.1 and details 1, 2 and 3 / A1.1. Welding and steel is per pl.r,s and acceptable to contract documents. Upon receipt of welder certi',. - .'ion. Note: these were no acceptable details for puddle welds on deck. I contacted Shelby Druesheil with Casco who gave the verbal OK for as built as follows W puddle weld at each flute landing on perpendicular members. No seam welding or button punching, with' /.' puddle weld at 24 "oc on outside. Also need fax of welder certification with ID to verify WABO welder. Reviewed by: Page 1 of 1 0EVELC.. r This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. 0 AIPH R. SHAW E OF WASHINGTON PROJECT MANUAL for 5E) C3 REMO ®EL '702 r \ . V . ";i� -7 BID /PERMIT ISSU `C February .4 001 GHITECT Tukwila, WA PROJECT NO. 800603 RECEIVED ;rrf OF TU"W'lA €HrM z W IY 6 0 0 J F- W 0 2 N D I I- W I- w U� O - O - =W - r- W vN o z GENERAL INDEX PAGE -1 (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE SPECIFICATION SECTION IS GENERIC) TLE DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 'Construction Agreement Between Owner & Contractor Pages 1 thru 3 'Supplemental Conditions Pages 1 thru 15 1A 'General Provisions and Bidding Information 1A -1 thru 1A -8 1B 'General Provisions for Mechanical & Electrical Work 1B -1 thru 1B -5 1C 'General Provisions for Remodeling Work 1C -1 thru 1C -5 10 'Proposal Form 1D-1 thru 1D-6 1E 'List of Drawings 1E -1 1F 'Exhibit "C-1" Guarantee 1F -1 'Exhibit 'C -2' Affidavit 1F -1 'Exhibit *C-3" Final Release 1F -2 'Exhibit "C-4" Section 1245 — Tax Form 1 F -3 thru 1F-5 1G NOT USED 111 NOT USED 11 NOT USED 1J NOT USED DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK - NOT USED DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 3A NOT USED 38 'Concrete Patching 38 -1 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 4A 'Unit Masonry Work 4A -1 thru 4A -8 48 NOT USED DIVISION 5 - METALS 5A "Structural Steel 5A -1 thru 5A -3 58 NOT USED 5C NOT USED 5D 'Metal Roof Deck 5D -1 thru 50.2 5E 'Miscellaneous Metals 5E -1 thru 5E -5 5F 'Cold Rolled Structural Metals 5F -1 DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY 6A 'Carpentry 68 Architectural Woodwork 6C NOT USED DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE CONTROL 7A NOT USED 7B NOT USED 7C NOT USED 7D 'Roofing, Flashing. & Associated Sheet Metal 7E 'Waterproofing 7F 'Roof Patching 7G 'Joint Sealants 7H NOT USED 71 Entrance Canopies (Use for 083 & 087 stores only) 7J 'Exterior Insulation & Finish System (Use for 083 & 087 stores only) REMODEL PROTOTYPE PAGE NOS. 6A -1 thru 6A-4 6B -1 thru 6B -3 7D -1 thru 7D -6 7E -1 thru 7E -3 7F -1 7G -1 thru 7G -2 71 -1 thru 71 -2 7J -1 thru 7J -3 09/22/00 GENERAL INDEX PAGE -2 TITLE PAGE NOS. DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS 8A 'Hollow Metal Work 8A -1 thru 8A -3 8B NOT USED BC 'Glass and Glazing 8C -1 thru 8C -2 8D NOT USED BE NOT USED 8F 'Sliding Automatic Entrance /Exit Doors 8F -1 8G 'Special Doors 8G -1 8H 'Rolling Fire Shutters 8H -1 81 'Finish Hardware 81 -1 8J NOT USED 8K Wood Doors 8K -1 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 9A 'Cement Plaster (Stucco) 9A -1 thru 9A -5 9B 'Gypsum Drywall 9B -1 thru 9B-4 9C NOT USED 90 'Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Systems 9D -1 thru 9D -3 9E 'Resilient Flooring 9E -1 thru 9E -2 9F Carpeting 9F -1 thru 9F -2 9G NOT USED 9H 'Painting 9H -1 thru 9H -5 91 'Special Coatings 91 -1 thru 91 -3 9J NOT USED 9K Main Entrance Comprehensive Repaint System 9K -1 thru 9K -3 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10A NOT USED 10B NOT USED 10C NOT USED 10D 'Wall & Storefront Protection 10E Portable Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL WORK 15A 'Basic Materials. Methods and Requirements 15B 'Basic Requirements for Piping Systems 15C NOT USED 15C NOT USED 15D 'HVAC Systems and Equipment 15E 'Air Distribution Systems and Accessories 15F 'Fuel Systems 15F Fuel Systems (DEV) 15G 'Fire Protection Systems DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL WORK 16A Basic Materials, Methods and Requirements 16B Technical Requirements 16C 'Lighting Systems 16D NOT USED 16E Special & Auxiliary Systems REMODEL PROTOTYPE 100 -1 10E -1 15A -1 thru 15A -2 15B -1 thru 158.5 15D -1 thru 15D -4 15E -1 thru 15E -3 15F -1 15F -1 15G -1 thru 15G3 16A -1 thru 16A -7 168 -1 thru 16B -2 16C -1 thru 16C -2 16E -1 thru 16E -2 09/22/00 The basis of payment per this agreement is a STIPULATED SUM. This AGREEMENT is made as of the day of Hundred and Ninety Nine between the Owner and the Contractor. The Project is: The Owner is: The Contractor is: The Architect is: The Engineer is: CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Toys "R" Us Tukwila, WA Toys "R" Us, Inc. 461 From Road Paramus, New Jersey 07652 CASCO 10877 Watson Road St. Louis, MO 63127 The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth in the following pages: in the year of Nineteen z re U 00 Na CO ILI 9 0 LL u1 0 Q ND W z � O • uJ 0 O - CI F- w W U. O ui 0 z Sheets: ARTICLE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, miscellaneous Accounting Forms, the conditions of the contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, all Addenda issued prior to and all modifications (Change Orders) issued after execution of this Agreement. These form the Contract and all are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. An enumeration of the above Contract Documents, except for Modifications (Change Orders() issued after execution, are listed as follows: 1.1.1 Architectural Plans and Specifications issued by the Architect by the Architect dated 1.1.2 Site and Grading Plans issued by the Engineer. 1.1.3 special Conditions provided in the Bid Package. 1.1.4 Bid Form dated and executed by 1.1.5 Addenda: # Dated: Addenda: # Dated: ARTICLE 2 2.1 The Contractor shall perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents for construction of a Toys 'R' Us located at , complete, operable and ready for its intended use. ARTICLE 3 TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The Work to be performed under this contract shall be commenced not later than and, subject to authorized adjustments, Substantial Completion shall be achieved not later than ARTICLE 4 CONTRACTOR SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the performance of the Work, subject to additions and deductions by Change Order as provided in the Contract Documents, the contract Sum of and No /100 Dollars (50.00) In Witness Whereof, the parties have hereto set their hands Page 2 of 3 W:\TRU\2001 REMODEL PROGRAM \800782 ROSEVILLE. CA \SPEC\CONSTAGREE.DOC Rev. 01/27/99 ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment properly submitted to the Owner by the Contractor and subject to revision and/or approval by the Owner, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the contract Sum to the Contractor as provided in the Contract Documents for the period indicated on the Application for Payment as follows: Not later than twenty (20) days after the first day of the next month following the period covered by the Application for Payment, ninety percent (90 %) of the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to labor, materials and equipment incorporated in the Work and ninety percent (90 %) of the portion of the contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment suitably stored at the site or at some other location agreed upon in writing, for the period covered by the Application for Payment, less the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner, to the contractor. Upon Substantial Completion of the entire Work, a sum sufficient to increase total payments to one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract Sum, less such amounts as the Owner shall determine and withhold (place on 'Hold') for all incomplete Work and unsettled claims as provided in the Contract Document. ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT 6.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the contract Sum, shall be paid by the owner to the Contractor in accordance with Article 5 as final and complete Payment provided the Work, including all Change Orders, and punch list items, has been completed, the Contract fully performed and the Final Application for Payment, including release of funds withheld (placed on 'hold') per Article 5, has been approved by the Owner. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Terms used in the Agreement. which are defined in the Contract Documents, shall have the meanings designated in those Contract Documents. 7.2 The Contract Documents, which constitute the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, are identified in Article 1. 7.3 The following enumerated Miscellaneous Provisions are herewith made part of the Contract Documents and are therefore fully a part of this Agreement as if identified in Article 1. Not applicable. and seals effective on the day and year first above written WITNESS /ATTEST TOYS "R" US, INC. Dan Booher Vice President Design and construction DATE: WITNESS /ATTEST CONTRACTOR President DATE: Affix Corporate Seal over signature when Contractor is a Corporation. Page 3 of 3 W: \TRU\2001 REMODEL PROGRAM \800782 ROSEVILLE. CA \SPEC\CONSTAGREE.DOC Rev. 01/27/99 SUPPLEME .\L CONDITIONS Page 1 ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 The Contract Documents consist of the following: The Construction Agreement and the Drawings and Specifications identified therein. 1.2 In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between: (a) The Construction Agreement and the Drawings or the Specifications, the Construction Agreement shall control; (b) The Drawings and the Specifications, the Specifications shall control; however, notes or other details on Drawings shall control over Specifications if such notes or details are not explained in the Specifications; (c) Larger scale drawings and smaller scale drawings, the larger scale drawings shall control. 1.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered In the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent herewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents. Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.4 Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications, and if, in order to install any materials or finish, it is necessary to temporarily omit certain portions of the Work in any sections thereof. Contractor shall cause such portions of the Work to be omitted until the materials and finish have been installed, and then to be completed without delay or extra cost to Owner. 1.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall be furnished, free of charge, all copies of the Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Owner may, at his option, furnish Contractor with one (1) sepia transparency of the Drawings, in which case the Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for furnishing all further copies of the Drawings. Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, alter the sepia transparency in any way whatsoever. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK 2.1 All work required pursuant to the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, all labor, materials and equipment utilized or incorporated therein, is herein called the "Work ". ARTICLE 3 ARCHITECT 3.1 The architect for the Project is identified in the Construction Agreement. 3.2 Owner may, from time to time and at any time during the construction of the Project, designate a 3.3.9 Architect will review and approve or take REMODEL PROTOTYPE new Architect, and, in the event of such designation, Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof. 3.3 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.3.1 Owner's Representative will administer the Contract Documents in accordance with the provisions hereof. As used herein, "Owner's Representative" shall mean Owner's Construction Project Manager or any other employee or designee of Owner. Owner's Representative will have authority to act on behalf of Owner only to the extent expressly provided in the Contract Documents. Owner's instruction to Contractor may be forwarded directly by Owner to Contractor, or through Owner's Representative. Any action, duty or responsibility authorized by Owner to be performed or undertaken by Owner's Representative may in Owner's discretion, at any time and from time to time, be performed or undertaken in whole or in part directly by Owner, in lieu of or in conjunction with Owner's Representative. 3.3.2 Architect and /or Owner's Representative may visit the Site during construction to observe the progress and quality of the Work, to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents, to protect Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and to establish the "Substantial Completion Date" and "Completion Date" (as those terms are hereinafter defined). 3.3.3 Neither the designation of Owner's Representative, nor any action taken or duty performed by Architect or Owner's Representative shall relieve Contractor of any of its responsibility hereunder. 3.3.4 Architect, Owner's Representative and Owner shall at all times have access to the Work, and the contractor shall provide facilities for such access. 3.3.5 Owner's Representative will, pursuant to the provisions of Article 11 recommend to Owner the amounts to be paid to Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts as provided in said Article 11. 3.3.6 Claims, disputes and other matters in question between Contractor and Owner relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents may be referred by Owner to Architect for his recommendation, but no such recommendation shall be binding upon Owner unless Owner shall accept same, in writing, and shall notify Contractor of such acceptance. 3.3.7 All interpretations and recommendations of Architect shalt be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be furnished in writing or in the form of drawings within a reasonable time after submission to Architect. 3.3.8 Owner's Representative and /or Owner will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 7.6.2 whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. other appropriate action upon items submitted by 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Contractor, including without limitation Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The approval by Architect, of a specific item shall not constitute approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 3.3.10 The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of Architect and /or Owner's Representative during construction as set forth in the Contract Documents may be modified in any respect by Owner, and Contractor shall be given notice by Owner of any such modification. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES 4.1 Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with, and shall in all respects comply with, the Contract Documents. 4.2 REVIEW OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.2.1 Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall immediately report to Owner and Owner's Representative any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. Except as may otherwise be provided in this Agreement, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 4.2.2 Before ordering any material or performing any of the Work. Contractor and each Subcontractor shall verify measurements at the building which apply to them, and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of any inconsistency between actual measurements and the measurements indicated on any Drawing. 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4.3.1 Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures (including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, all safety precautions and programs) and for coordinating all portions of the Work. 4.3.2 Contractor shall be responsible for the acts and omissions of his employees. subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with, or otherwise on behalf of, Contractor. 4.3.3 Contractor shall not be relieved from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of Owner's Representative in his administration of the REMODEL PROTOTYPE Page 2 Contract Documents, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed pursuant to Section 7.6. 4.3.4 Contractor shall establish permanent benchmarks in not less than two widely separated places; shall establish the lines and levels of the Work upon substantial batter boards, and shall be responsible for their continued accuracy during the progress of work. 4.3.5 Contractor shall at all times keep on the Site a complete and accurate level transit and rod in good working condition and shall allow Architect and Ownerfs Representative the unrestricted use of the same. 4.3.6 Owner or Architect shall provide Contractor with a survey of the Site showing, among other things. property lines, corner stakes, roads, utilities and sewer facilities. Using the established survey points, Contractor shall locate the building, sewer lines and other construction features at locations to be approved by Owner. Contractor shall set up batter boards as required by Paragraph 4.3.4 and shall establish and maintain the elevation called for. Upon completion, Contractor shall furnish Owner with reproducible sepias of 91) a site plan accurately marked to show all buried services and facilities, (2) as built drawings showing the location of the facilities within the structure, and 93) a final survey, prepared by a surveyor licensed to do business in the state in which the Project is located, indicating the exterior location and layout of all buildings, structures and other improvements comprising the Project. Contractor shall be liable for failure to maintain the minimum clearance, setbacks and similar requirements of applicable codes, ordinances, leases, or other agreements and /or governing authorities. 4.3.7 Contractor shall be responsible for all locations, dimensions and levels, and no instructions or orders received from any source, other than the information contained in the surveys, plot drawings and Specifications or on written orders of Owner, shall justify departure from the dimensions and levels required by the Drawings. 4.3.8 Contractor shall employ a competent surveyor, licensed by the state in which the Site is located and acceptable to Owner, to take measurements at the Site and establish all lines, levels and benchmarks, all of which shall be verified with drawings. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall be responsible for the proper laying out and location of the Work. 4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 4.4.2 Contractor shall at all times enforce strict 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him. 4.4.3 All material shall be arranged and maintained in an orderly manner on the Site. The streets, sidewalks, and other passageways are to be left open for traffic, or maintained in accordance with instructions of local building authorities. Contractor shall allot suitable and proper space to his subcontractors for storage of their materials, equipment, and supplies. 4.4.4 Contractor shall use local labor and materials to the extent possible and practicable without causing any delay in or damage to the Work. Owner assumes no responsibility and shall not be deemed to have any liability for any delays, poor workmanship or faulty materials resulting from or in any way attributable to such use. 4.4.5 Contractor and any Subcontractor shall make all provisions necessary to avoid any disputes with labor unions and shall be responsible for any delays. damages, or extra costs incurred as a result of such disputes. 4.4.6 Contractor shall keep the working areas of the Site free from standing water, providing all pumps, maintenance and means of removal necessary to accomplish same, and also shall arrange for the removal of snow and ice from the approaches to the Site in order to keep the Site clear and unobstructed. 4.4.7 Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, alter and remove all runways. planks, walks, ladders, rigging, barricades, shores, rails, hoists, derricks, scaffolding, and other equipment and apparatus necessary for the proper and expeditious performance of the Work, in compliance with all applicable laws. 4.4.8 Contractor shall remove all rubbish resulting from the performance of the Work on a daily basis, and shall keep all adjacent streets and driveways clear and unobstructed at all times. Upon completion of construction, Contractor shall remove all waste, surplus material, debris, construction equipment, machinery and tools relating to this Contract from the Site and the Project. Adjoining land shall be left in a clean and neat condition. Contractor shall wash and /or clean all floors, walls, ceilings, and both sides of glass and glazing. before final acceptance of the Work by Owner. 4.4.9 Water required for the performance of the Work shall be provided by Owner who shall pay maintenance costs, obtain necessary permits, pay all fees required, and provide temporary water where necessary. 4.4.10 Contractor shall provide and install ample temporary toilet accommodations, in accordance with all applicable governmental requirements, for the use of all workers at the Site and shall maintain same in a clean, sanitary and functioning condition at all times. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove all temporary toilet accommodations. 4.4.11 Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for all temporary wiring, transformers, meters, lamps, lighting and electric power in sufficient amount required for the performance of the Work, and shall provide temporary electric light and power sufficient in OwnerOs REMODEL PROTOTYPE Page 3 judgment for store fixture installation in the building. 4.4.12 Contractor shall pay all charges for utilities up to and including the date prior to the date on which the Work shall be fully completed. Contractor shall cause all utilities to be connected, turned on and ready for use by Owner by the date prior to the Substantial Completion Date. 4.4.13 Contrntor shall furnish, pay for and maintain temporary heat for all workers at the Site when the outside tempe• ature is below 50 degree. T. in order to protect the Work iron 4, Y....7.7 - 4) and to prevent any delay in the performance of the Work. 4.4.14 Contractor shall arrange for the heating and ventilating equipment in all areas to be in operation as soon as the building interior is complete, and shall provide meter and electrical service for temporary power for these areas until completion. Prior to completion of the building interior, Contractor shall provide Owneres personnel with proper instruction for the operating procedures for all such equipment. 4,4.15 Contractor shall cooperate with and work in harmony with all other contractors engaged in the installation of features not included in the Construction Agreement, but necessary or proper, in Owner's sole judgment, to the completion of the Project. Any dispute or misunderstanding relating to the foregoing shall be submitted to Owner, and Contractor shall comply with Owner's directions given in connection therewith. 4.4.16 If any exterior areas are designated on the site plan for the storage and transporting of materials and equipment, Contractor shall utilize only such areas for such purposes. 4.4.17 Prior to 'Final Payment" (as hereinafter defined), Contractor shall deliver to Owner's Representative all books, brochures and lists of manufacturer's operating instructions for all operable equipment included under this Contract. 4.5 WARRANTY 4.5.1 Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished pursuant to the Contract Documents will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may, at Owner's Representative's discretion, be considered defective. If required by Owner, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Section 15.2. 4.5.2 OwnerOs Representative will receive and forward to Owner written warranties and related documents required by the Contract Documents to be provided by Contractor. 4.6 TAXES 4.6.1 Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes relating to the Work or portions thereof performed by Contractor, provided such taxes 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS had been legally enacted at the time bids were received. but regardless of whether or not they were effective at such time. 4.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall secure the building permit at Ownerfis expense and shall secure at Contractorfls expense all other permits and governmental fees, licences and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, including, without limitation, any permit, license or inspection which may be necessary to allow Owner to commence its fixturing and merchandising operations and other preparatory work necessary or proper to enable the Project to be in full operation for its intended purposes no later than the Completion Date, and a permanent certificate of occupancy (or its local equivalent, if certificates of occupancy are not issued in the jurisdiction). 4.7.2 If Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance in any respect with applicable laws, ordinances. rules, regulations or orders of any governmental authority, he shall promptly notify Owner's Representative to enable Owner to make any necessary or appropriate modifications. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for and bear all costs attributable to the performance of any Work known by Contractor to be contrary to any such laws. ordinances, rules, regulations or orders, unless prior written notice to such effect has been given to Owner's Representative and Owner, and Owner has failed or refused to make necessary or appropriate modifications. 4.8 ALLOWANCES 4.8.1 Contractor shall include in the Project Cost all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as Owner may direct. 4.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, these allowances are intended to cover the actual cost to Contractor of the materials and equipment covered by the allowance, reflecting any applicable trade discount and including the cost of delivery to the Site and all applicable taxes. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowance shall be included in the Project Cost and not in the allowance. Whenever the actual cost is more than or less than the allowance, the Project Cost shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. 4.9 SUPERINTENDENT AND PROJECT MANAGER 4.9.1 Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent, a competent project manager and necessary assistants ( all of whom must be acceptable to Owner) to supervise the Work, and who shall be in attendance at the site until completion of the work. The superintendent and the project manager shall represent Contractor and all communications given to either the superintendent or the project manager shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. Unless otherwise REMODEL PROTOTYPE Page 4 provided herein, all such communications shall be in writing. The names and qualifications of the superintendent and the project manager which Contractor wishes to employ shall be supplied to Owner simultaneously with Contractor's execution of this Agreement. 4.9.2 Neither the superintendent nor the project manager shall be transferred from this Project to another without the consent of Owner. 4.9.3 Without limiting Contractor's obligations pursuant to Paragraph 4.2.1, the superintendent and the project manager shall carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications and advise Owner's Representative of any inconsistency or discrepancy that may appear before proceeding with the Work. 4.9.4 The superintendent and the project manager shall, at all times, enforce good order among all workers, and shall relieve from employment on the Project any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him. 4.9.5 Owner shall have the right to refuse admittance to the Site to any employee of Contractor or its Subcontractors whose presence Owner or Owner's Representative, In either's sole judgment, deems hostile to Owner's interest. 4.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4.10.1 Contractor, simultaneously with the execution of this Agreement, shall submit to Owner a proposed progress schedule for the Work providing for the expeditious and practicable performance thereof and setting forth commencement and completion dates for the different portions of the Work, broken down according to the Specifications subsections (which progress schedule, as approved by Owner, is herein called the "Progress Schedule "). 4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.11.1 Contractor shall maintain at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to Architect, Owner and Owner's Representative, and shall be delivered to Owner upon completion of the Work. 4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.12.1 Shop Drawings schedules and other data Work by Contractor manufacturer, supplier or portion of the Work. are drawings, diagrams, specially prepared for the or any Subcontractor, distributor to illustrate a 4.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for a portion of the Work. 4.12.3 Samples are physical examples which 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Page 5 illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.12.4 Contractor shall thoroughly review all Shop Drawings, clearly marking all discrepancies of design concept, compliance with Contract Documents, dimensions, fabrication processes, techniques of construction and coordination of the work of all trades, and shall stamp drawings with corrections or approval noted thereon, and submit five (5) copies of same to architect with reasonable promptness, in order to avoid delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. 4.12.5 Shop Drawings of all Subcontractors shall be thoroughly reviewed, approved and submitted by Contractor to Architect and Owner's Representative, all in accordance with Paragraph 4.12.4 hereof. 4.12.6 Contractor's approval and submission to Architect of Shop Drawings. Product Data and Samples shall constitute a representation by Contractor that he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto. and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained therein with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 4.12.7 Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Architect's, Owner's or Owner's Representative's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Paragraph 3.3.9 unless Contractor has specifically informed Architect and Owner's Representative in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect and Owner have given written approval specifically thereto. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by Architect's Owners or Owner's Representative's approval thereof. 4.12.8 Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions, other than those requested by Owners Representative on previous submittals. 4.12.9 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing. Product Data or Sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by Architect, Owner or Owners Representative as provided in Paragraph 3.3.9. All such portions of the Work shall be performed in accordance with approved submittals, as such approvals may, from time to time, be modified by Owner. 4.13 USE OF SITE 4.13.1 Contractor shall confine operations at the Site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site with any materials or equipment. 4.14 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.14.1 Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold Owner harmless from loss on account there )f, except that Owner shall be responsible for all suco loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular REMODEL PROTOTYPE manufacturer or manufacturers is specified; but if Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified Is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he shall promptly give such information to Architect and Owner. 4.15 INDEMNIFICATION 4.15.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Architect and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is alleged or claimed to be caused in whole or part by any willful or negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, Owner or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not alleged or claimed to be caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 4.15.2 In any and all claims against Owner or Architect or any of their agents or employees by any employee of Contractor. any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligations under this Section 4.16 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any Subcontractor under worker's or workmens' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 4.15.3 Nothing contained in this Section 4.15 shall constitute, or be deemed or construed to constitute, a modification, alteration or limitation of Contractor's liability and responsibility as set forth in Sections 6.2 and 10.3 hereof, it being understood and agreed by Contractor that such liability and responsibility shall be in addition to Contractor's obligations under this Section 4.15. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITION 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the Site or to furnish any materials or equipment to the Contractor, whether at the Site or elsewhere. 5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the Site or to furnish any materials or equipment to such Subcontractor, whether at the Site or elsewhere. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITInNS Page 6 Documents, simultaneously with Contractor's execution of this Agreement Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a list setting forth the names of the proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers, with no more than three (3) names for each portion of the Work. Owner or Owner's Representative shall, promptly thereafter, notify Contractor if he objects to any such proposed Subcontractor, it being understood and agreed that Owner or Owner's Representative has the right, in either's sole discretion, to reject any proposed Subcontractor. Within five (5) days after Contractor's execution of this Agreement, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative, in writing, of the specific Subcontractors and Suppliers selected by Contractor. 5.2.2 If Owner or Owner's Representative objects to any such proposed person or entity, Contractor shall delete his name from the list of proposed Subcontractors, and shall submit the name of a substitute for acceptance by Owner. Owner shall have the right, at no increased cost to Owner. to require Contractor to subcontract with any such proposed Subcontractors designated by Owner. 5.2.3 The subcontracting of any portion of the Work and Owner's approval thereof shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for the improper performance thereof or any other responsibility under the Contract Documents. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume for the benefit of Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has assumed. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in said agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against Contractor that Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against Owner. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with his Sub-subcontractors. Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound pursuant to this Section 5.3, and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such documents available to his Sub-subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 Owner reserves the right to perform portions REMODEL PROTOTYPE of the Work required to complete the Project with its own forces or separate contractors, and to award separate contracts in connection therewith. Any claim by Contractor that such action by Owner will result in delay or additional cost shall be made as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITIES 6.2.1 Contractor shall afford Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate the Work with their work as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If any part of the Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon the work of Owner or any separate contractor, Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify Owner's Representative of any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of Contractor to give such notice shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of its right to object that such work was not fit and proper to receive his work, except as to defects which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others. 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be bome by the party responsible therefor, except that each Contractor shall be responsible for all work performed by him or by any of his Subcontractors. 6.2.4 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to any of the work or property on the Site, Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage in accordance with Paragraph 12.2.5. 6.2.5 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, Contractor shall promptly correct same at his sole cost and expense. If such separate contractor sues Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by Contractor, Owner shall so notify Contractor who shall defend, indemnify and hold Owner harrnless from and against any and all claims. judgments, awards or other liability resulting from damage caused or allegedly caused by Contractor. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 GOVERNING LAW 7.1.1 This Agreement shall be govemed by laws of the state where the Site is located. 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2.1 Owner and Contractor each binds himself, his heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, Contractor shall have no right to assign this Agreement. 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Page 7 7.3 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES 7.3.1 Should either party hereto suffer injury or damage because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of his employees, agents or others for whose acts he is liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such injury or damage. 7.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.4.1 If required by Owner, Contractor shall, at Owner's expense, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of this Agreement and the payment of all obligations arising hereunder. Such payment and performance bonds shall be in such amounts and issued by such bonding or surety company or companies as may be designated by Owner. 7.5 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7.5.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available at law. 7.5.2 No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract Documents, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence to any breach thereunder, except as may otherwise be expressly provided in this Agreement or specifically confirmed in writing. 7.6 TESTS 7.6.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authonty having jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, Contractor shall give Owner's Representative timely notice of its readiness so that Owner's Representative and/or Architect may observe such inspection, testing or approval. Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspecting, tests or approvals conducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Owner shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests or approvals. 7.6.2 It Owner's Representative determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Paragraph 7.6.1 does not cover, he will, upon written authorization from Owner, instruct Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and Contractor shall give notice as provided in Paragraph 7.6.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including inspection fees and compensation for Architect's additional services made necessary buy such failure: otherwise Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.6.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by Contractor and promptly delivered by him to Owner's Representative. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 7.6.4 If Architect and /or Owner's Representative is to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he shall do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. 7.6.5 Contractor shall not be entitled to interest on any monies due hereunder or any monies due as a result of any claim, dispute or other matter in question. 7.7 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS 7.7.1 Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative certificates or affidavits from all manufacturers of materials used, certifying that materials conform to the requirements of the Specifications. 7.8 USAGE 7.8.1 Wherever the words or equal," "similar to," or words of similar meaning are mentioned, they shall mean that the quality of materials, appliances or workmanship to which they refer shall be equal in the opinion of Owner. 7.8.2 Contractor shall base his bid on the name or make of any article, device, material, form of construction, fixture, or similar item specified in the Specifications unless the term or equal" is used. 7.8.3 After entering into this Agreement, substitutions will be considered for proprietary brands specified, other than those listed on a "Substitution Sheet" submitted with the bids, only if evidence that the proposed substitution is equal to the specified item Is submitted to Owner's Representative and such substitution is approved in writing by Owner. 7.8.1 Owner reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, to reject any and all bids. 7.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 7.9.1 The Construction of the Project shall be solely at Contractors risk concerning the damage or loss of any equipment or materials incorporated into the Work or located on the Site, except to the extent such damage or loss is to real property covered by the insurance Owner is required to carry pursuant to Paragraph 13.1.1 7.9.2 Owner's Code of Ethical Standards and Business Practices and Conduct (the "Policy ") requires that the selection of a vendor or other supplier of goods and services to Owner must be based on quality, need, performance and cost. Owner's Policy further prohibits the acceptance from suppliers by Owner's employees or agents of gifts or gratuities, whether in the form of money, merchandise, services, lavish entertainment, travel or any other form. If any employee or agent of Owner shall solicit from Contractor, or any of Contractor's employees or agents, any such gifts or gratuities, it shall be Contractor's obligation and responsibility to promptly notify Owner of any such solicitation. Such notice shall be sent to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Section 18.1 hereof, except that no copy of such notice shall be sent to Owner's Representative. 09/22/00 Z I a W t 00 00 W N u W o QQ W = ,3 LLI O W U� 0— 0 I— WW Z U O Z SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Page 8 ARTICLE 8 TIME OF PERFORMANCE 8.1 COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION 8.1.1 The Work shall be commenced within three (3) calendar days after Owner's Representative notifies Contractor (which notice may be given verbally) that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon, and shall progress in accordance with the Progress Schedule. If the Site is not ready for the Work to be commenced, then all dates in the Progress Schedule, the Substantial Completion Date and the Completion Date shall automatically be deemed extended for a period equivalent to the number of days between said date and the date that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon. 8.1.2 Owner's Representative's determination that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon shall be binding upon Contractor unless. within twenty -four (24) hours after receipt of notice of such determination, Contractor notifies Owner of its objection thereto (which notice shall be given verbally, but shall immediately thereafter be followed up in writing in accordance with Article 18). 8.1.3 The Work shall be substantially completed to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof no later than the ()Substantial Completion Date° herein called the 'Substantial Completion Date" noted in the Construction Agreement), The Work shall be fully (a) give notice to Contractor compelling him to perform the Work on an overtime basis (which shall include weekends. if necessary), at no additional cost to Owner, in order to assure that the Substantial Completion Date and Completion Date are met, and Contractor shall promptly comply with any such notice, whether or not Owner shall have exercised the foregoing right; or (b) assume responsibility for the construction of the Project in accordance with Article 20 hereof and Contractor shall be liable to Owner for all damages sustained by Owner as a result of Contractor's failure to so comply. In addition, Owner shall have the right to apply amounts previously retained from the Progress Payments to costs incurred by Owner in performing the Work. Failure of Owner to exercise its rights pursuant hereto shall not be deemed a waiver thereof. nor prevent Owner from exercising such rights at a later date. Contractor shall insert in all agreements between Contractor and any Subcontractor a provision whereby the Subcontractor recognizes the right of Owner to assume responsibility for the construction of the Work, with such agreements to continue as direct agreements between Owner and the Subcontractor. 8.1.6 Unless otherwise provided, all of the dates and time periods set forth herein are of the essence of this Agreement. 8.2 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.2.1 If Contractor is materially delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or negligence of Owner or an employee of Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by Owner, or by changes ordered REMODEL PROTOTYPE completed, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, no later than two (2) weeks after the substantial completion date, (herein called the "Completion Date "). Contractor shall complete the work on all such punch list items within the time period specified in Paragraph 11.5.1, except that no such work shall be performed during the months of November and December without the prior written consent of Owner. 8.1.4 The Work shall be deemed to be substantially completed when the Work has been completed (including the procurement by Contractor of a Certificate of Occupancy or other occupancy permit. if required by the governmental authority having jurisdiction) to such an extent as to allow Owner, without interference or interruption resulting from continuance of the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor, to commence and perform its fixturing and merchandising operations and other preparatory work in order that the Project may be in full operation for its intended purposes (including the issuance of a permanent certificate of occupancy or its equivalent) no later than the day following the Completion Date, with nothing other than minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, remaining to be done on the Completion Date, and Owner's Representative has certified to such effect. 8.1.5 If the Work is not being performed in compliance with the Progress Schedule, Owner shall have the right. in addition to any other rights it may have, to: in the Work, or by delay authorized by Owner. then the dates in the Progress Schedule, the Substantial Completion Date and the Completion Date shall, subject to Paragraph 8.2.2, be appropriately extended. 8.2.2 Any claim for extension of time shall be made in wnting to Owner's Representative not more than two (2) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of any such delay on the progress of the Work at the time such claim is made. 8.2.3 This section 8.2 does not exclude the recovery of damages for the delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICI&9 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE 9.1 Contractor acknowledges that before making his proposal he carefully examined the Contract Documents, the Site and the surrounding area, and that he is fully informed regarding all of the conditions affecting the work to be done and labor and materials to be furnished in connection herewith. Contractor further acknowledges that he has not relied on any representations or estimates which may have been made by Owner or Architect (or any of its or their representatives, agents or employees), and Contractor shall make no claim against Owner by reason of any such representation or estimate. ARTICLE 10 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS LIEN RIGHTS 10.1 Contractor hereby stipulates and agrees that any and all of its lien rights, however created, now existing or which may exist in the future, are and shall be subject and subordinate to: (a) all existing mortgages affecting the Site, including future advances thereon; (b) all interim, construction and permanent mortgages, Including future advances thereon, given in connection with the financing of (or reimbursement for) all or any part of the cost of the acquisition of the Site and the construction of the Project; (c) all existing or future grants, easements, rights of way, and dedications affecting all or any part of the Site; (d) all existing or future leases covering all or any part of the Site; (e) all renewals. replacements, extensions or modifications of any of the foregoing. 10.2 Contractor shall not, at any time, suffer or permit any lien, attachment, notice of intention to lien, stop notice, mechanic's lien or other similar lien or encumbrance permitted under the law of the jurisdiction in which the Site is located (all of the foregoing being herein individually and collectively called "Contractor's Lien") filed or served upon Owner by or on behalf of any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, to remain on file against the Site, the improvements thereon, or money due or to become due for any work performed or materials furnished in connections with the construction of the Project, or to otherwise establish or create any liability or potential liability as between Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. In the event a Contractor's Lien is so filed or served, whether during or after the performance of the Work, Contractor shall cause same to be released or ARTICLE 11 PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR 11.1 PROJECT COST 11.1.1 Contractor agrees to perform the Work and to complete the Project, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for the total cost (the "Project Cost ") set forth in the Construction Agreement. Contractor acknowledges that the Project Cost includes all costs and expenses, including, without limitation, for labor, material, equipment rentals and payments to Subcontractors, plus profit and overhead. Owner shall pay to Contractor the Project Cost, as hereinafter provided. Except as provided in Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof, Owner's liability for payment to Contractor pursuant hereto shall in no event exceed the Contract amount. 11.1.2 If Contractor's costs and expenses exceed the Project Cost, then the amount of such excess shall be paid by Contractor without reimbursement by Owner; except that, if Owner, pursuant to approved change order(s), has required changes in the scope of the Work, and if such changes have resulted in a net increase in Contractor's costs and expenses (after taking into account all such changes), then Owner shall pay Contractor the net amount by which Contractor's cost and expenses were thereby increased. REMODEL PROTOTYPE discharged of record or otherwise eliminated, by bonding or otherwise, at no cost or expense to Owner, within ten (10) days after Contractor receives notice of such filing or service, failing which, until same has been so released, discharged or eliminated. Owner may, at its option, in addition to any other remedies available to it, withhold any payments then or thereafter due by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement or cause same to be so released, discharged or eliminated, in which event Contractor shall, promptly on demand, reimburse Owner for all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection therewith, failing which, Owner may deduct all such costs and expenses from any payments then or thereafter due by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement. 10.3 Contractor hereby agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner from and against any and all loss, cost, damage or expense (including attorneys' fees) arising out of or in any way resulting from any claim, suit, action or other proceeding instituted against Owner or the Project by or on behalf of any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, whether or not such claim, suit, action or other proceeding shall be instituted in connection with any Contractor's Lien. 10.4 In the event either party to this Agreement shall institute any claim, suit, action or other proceeding involving the other party hereto, then the party prevailing in such claim, suit, action or other proceeding shall be entitled to recover and receive from the non prevailing party all costs and expenses (including attorneys' fees) actually incurred by the prevailing party In prosecuting or defending, as the case may be, its interest In such claim, suit, action or other proceeding. Such recovery shall be in addition to and not In limitation of any other relief to which the prevailing party may be entitled In such claim, suit, action or other proceeding. 11.2 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 11.2.1 Owner's Representative may withhold his Certificate for Payment, in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner, if, in Owner's Representative's opinion, he is unable to represent to Owner that: (i) the Work has progressed to the point indicated in the Draw Request; (ii) to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to later evaluation, to subsequent tests, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications set forth in his Certificate); and (iii) the Contractor is entitled to payment. If Owner's Representative is unable to make such representations and to certify payment in the amount of the Draw Request, he will notify Contractor of same. If Contractor and Owner's Representative cannot agree on a revised amount, Owner's Representative will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount, if any, for which it is able to make such representations to Owner. Owner's Representative may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, he may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: Page 9 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Page 10 (a) defective work not remedied; (b) third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; (c) failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; (d) reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Project Cost; (e) damage to Owner or another contractor; (f) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed in accordance with the Progress Schedule; or (g) persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 11.3 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 11.3.1 Within thirty (30) days after receipt by Owner of a Certificate for Payment, Owner shall either (i) approve same and pay Contractor the approved amount less ten (10 %) percent of said amount, which shall be retained until the Final Payment is made (such payment being herein called a "Progress Payment") or (ii) disapprove same and notify Contractor in writing of the reasons for such disapproval. 11.3.2 Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, on account of that portion of such Subcontractor's work completed through the date of Contractor's then current Draw Request, the amount to which such Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments by Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work. Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Subsubcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.3 Owner's Representative may, at its discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor information regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts applied for by Contractor and the action taken thereon account of work done by such Subcontractor. 11.3.4 Owner shall have no obligations to pay or to see to the payment of any money to any Subcontractor or Sub.subcontractor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner may, in his discretion, make all or any portion of any Progress Payment by check payable jointly to the order of Contractor and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor which is entitled to payment on account of such Subcontractor's or Sub - subcontractor's work. Nothing herein shall be construed to permit Contractor to withhold or delay payment to any Subcontractor not involved in disputed amount pending receipt of payment to Contractor by Owner. 11.3.5 No Certificate for Payment, nor any Progress Payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by Owner, shall constitute an acceptance by Owner of any Work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents. 11.4 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 11.4.1 If Payments are not made in a timely manner per Paragraph 11.3.1, Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days° written notice to Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been made. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 11.5 PUNCH LISTS 11.5.1 Within a reasonable time after the Substantial Completion Date, Owner's Representative may prepare a punch list setting forth those items of work remaining to be completed, or those items to be repaired or replaced. Subject to Paragraph 8.1.3, Contractor shall promptly perform all work set forth on said punch list, completing same within fourteen (14) days after receipt thereof, failing which, without the giving of additional notice to Contractor, Owner shall have the right to perform same and deduct the cost hereof from the Final Payment. Nothing herein shall limit Contractor's obligations pursuant to Section 15.2. 11.5.2 Upon full completion of the Work, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, and upon application by Contractor and certification by Owner's Representative, Owner may, at Owner's discretion (but taking into account any bonds of the type enumerated in Paragraph 11.8.2(f) still outstanding) make payment reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided in the Contract Documents. 11.6 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 11.6.1 Upon completion by Contractor of all work, set forth on the punch list referred to in Paragraph 11.5.1 hereof, Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a final Draw Request. Upon approval by Owner's Representation of said final Draw Request and receipt thereof by Owner, Owner shall promptly make or cause to be made a final inspection of the Work and, if, in Owner's view, the Work has been fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items) in accordance with the Contract Documents and Contractor's obligations thereunder have been fully performed, he will make the 'Final Payment" (as hereinafter defined), in accordance with and subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.6.2 hereof. 11.6.2 Owner shall pay the entire amount remaining to be paid pursuant to this Agreement, including any retainage. (herein called the 'Final Payment "), within thirty (30) days after all of the following shall have occurred: (a) Receipt by Owner of a permanent certificate of occupancy (or its local equivalent, if certificates of ccupancy are not issued in the jurisdiction) permitting the use of th3 Project for its intended purposes. (b) Receipt by Owner of the final Draw Request, setting forth the amount of the Final Payment and approved by owners Representative (which approval shall indicate that to the best of Owners Representatives knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of his observations and inspections, the Work has been fully completed, including the completion of all punch list items, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the Final Payment is due and payable). (c) Receipt by Owner of an affidavit of Contractor that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, and usch other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS obligations, such as receipts, unconditional releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract Documents, to the extent and in such form as may be required by Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to fumish a release or waiver required by Owner, Contractor, at no cost to Owner, shall fumish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. If any such lien is filed and remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, Contractor shall refund to owner, promptly on demand, all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys° fees; (d) Receipt by Owner of consent of the surety, if any, to Final Payment; (e) Receipt by Owner of all warranties and guarantees relating to the Work required under the Plans and Specifications or under any of the other Contract Documents; (1) Acceptance by Owner of the Work as being fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items), which acceptance shall be acknowledged in writing; (g) Retum to Owner of all payment or performance bonds (or other security) paid for by Owner and deposited with any govemmental authority having jurisdiction to secure the performance of any portion of the Work required by such govemmental authority. (h) Completion of Toys 'R' Us Remodel Section 1245 — Tax Form (Exhibit 'C-4' in Specifications. 11.6.3 Contractor shall deliver to Ownerfs Representative, together with his final Draw Request. his written guarantee, made out to Owner and in a form satisfactory to Owner. guaranteeing ail of the Work under the Contract Documents to be free from faulty materials and workmanship, watertight and leakproof in every particular. Contractor shall also agree to replace or to re- execute without cost to Owner such Work as may be found to be defective, and to make good all damage caused to other work or matenais due to such required replacement or re- execution. This Agreement shall cover all Work under the Contract Documents and shall tun for a period of one (1) year from the date the Project has had its Grand Opening, except as may be otherwise noted in the Specifications, or for a longer period where so stipulated in the Contract Documents. 11.6.4 The making of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver by Owner of all claims against Contractor arising out of the performance of the Work, except those arising from: (a) unsettled liens filed prior to the date Final Payment is made, all liens filed thereafter; (b) Faulty or defective Work, regardless of when appearing; (c) failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; (d) terms of any special warranties or guarantees required by the Contract Documents; (e) claims relating to the liability of Contractor under the Contract Documents which, either by their nature or pursuant to the contract Documents, are intended to survive Final Payment; or (1) any audit by Owner of ContractorOs books and records relating to sums paid by Owner to Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof. REMODEL PROTOTYPE Page 11 11.6.5 The acceptance of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims against Owner arising out of the performance of the Work. ARTICLE 12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 12.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 12.1.1 Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 12.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 12.2.1 Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) all employees performing any portion of the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; (b) all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and (c) other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks. pavement, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 12.2.2 Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 12.2.3 Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work. all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other wamings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 12.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 12.2.5 Subject to Section 13.2, Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property referred to in subparagraphs (b) and (c) of Paragraph 12.2.1 caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable and for which Contractor is responsible under subparagraphs (b) and (c) of Paragraph 12.2.1, except damage or loss attributable to the fault or negligence of Contractor. The foregoing obligations of Contractor are in addition to his obligations under Section 4.16. 12.2.6 Contractor's superintendent, or another 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Page 12 responsible member of Contractor's organization at the Site designated by Contractor in writing to Owner shall be responsible for the prevention of accidents. 12.2.7 Contractor shall: (a) Protect the excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, back up from drains and sewers and all other water. (b) Provide all shoring, bracing and sheathing required for the proper execution of the Work, and have same removed when the Work is completed; (c) Provide and maintain guard lights at all barricades, railings, obstructions in the street, sidewalks and all trenches or pits adjacent to walks or streets, in accordance with all applicable codes or requirements; (d) Protect all underground and above ground utility lines, including gas. telephone, electricity, water, sewage and storm drains. In addition, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative of any utility encountered which is not indicated or is indicated incorrectly; (e) Provide protection against the elements at all times, so as to maintain all Work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage therefrom. At the end of each day, all new work likely to be damaged shall be covered; (1) Provide and maintain suitable fire protection equipment which shall be subject to approval of the local fire authorities: (9) Erect and maintain all necessary and proper temporary dustproof enclosures, screens, fences, barriers, guards, lights and other protective devices for the prevention of accidents and for the protection of the workmen and the public in accordance with the requirements of all governmental authorities having jurisdiction. and post danger signs warning against the hazards created by performance of the Work. Contractor shall observe all laws and regulations relating to obstructing the street, keeping passageways open and protecting the same where they are exposed and may be dangerous to the public, the Work or employees of other contractors. Contractor shall take any such measures as may be necessary to prevent accidents from operations relating to this Contract. All excavations, embankments, materials, rubbish heaps and other obstacles, and encumbrances incident to the Work must be strongly barricaded and their presence clearly indicated by red or amber blinking or burning lights, which shall continuously operate between sunset and sunrise; (h) Be responsible for the management, care and maintenance of the Site as applicable, and except as may be otherwise expressly provided herein, shall be solely responsible for damage thereto as a result of this contract and pay for any and all injury to persons or property incident to or on account of the execution of the Work as a result of this Contract, and shall adjust all claims or suits arising therefrom, without loss, expense or annoyance to Owner or Architect. 12.3 EMERGENCIES 12.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall take such measures as may be reasonably necessary to prevent potential damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by REMODEL PROTOTYPE Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 14 for changes in the Work. 13.1 PROPERTY INSURANCE 13.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Owner may, but shall not be required to, maintain with respect to the entire Work at the site property insurance coverage of such type and in such amount as Owner, in its sole judgment, shall deem proper. Any such policy shall name as insureds Owner, Contractor and any other party or parties which Owner may deem appropriate. as their interests may appear, and the proceeds of any loss shall be payable in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 13.2.3. If Owner does not intend to maintain such insurance, he shall inform Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of himself, his Subcontractors and the Subsubcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to Owner. If Contractor is damaged by failure of Owner to maintain such insurance and to so notify Contractor, then Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner's insurance shall not cover hoists or equipment (including tools) belonging to Contractor or any Subcontractor or any other person or entity acting through or under Contractor or any Subcontractor. 13.1.2 Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. The Policies shall name as insureds Owner, Contractor and any other party or parties which Owner may deem appropriate, as their interests may appear. 13.1.3 Any loss insured under Paragraph 13.1.1 or 13.1.2 is to be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by Contractor, and by appropriate written agreement, shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 13.1.4 Owner hereby waives all rights against Contractor, his Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors, and their agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance maintained by Owner pursuant to this Article 13. Contractor hereby waives all rights against Owner, Owner's Representative, Architect and separate contractors, if any, and their respective subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance carried by Contractor. Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of Architect, separate contractors, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors, by appropriate written agreements, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Paragraph 13.1.4. ARTICLE 13 INSURANCE 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 13.1.5 Owner shall have the right to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers in any manner it deems appropriate. 13.1.6 Owner shall have the right to use or occupy portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion thereof provided such use or occupancy shall not unreasonably interfere with Contractors performance of the Work. The insurance required hereunder shall not lapse or be canceled on account of such use or occupancy. 13.2 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 13.2.1 to the extent of any insurance proceeds actually received by Owner with respect hereto, Owner waives all rights of actiona gainst Contractor for loss of use of his property due to fire or other hazards, including consequential losses. 13.3 SELF - INSURANCE 13.3.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, Owner shall have the right to be a self - insurer with respect to any insurance which Owner may carry hereunder. ARTICLE 14 CHANGES IN THE WORK 14.1 CHANGE ORDERS 14.1.1 A Change Order is a written order to Contractor signed by Owner and/or Owner's Representative, issued after execution of this Agreement, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Project Cost or in the time for performance of the Work. There shall be no deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents except as authorized by Change Orders. A Change Order signed by Contractor indicates his agreement with respect to the items contained therein. 14.1.2 Owner, without invalidating this Agreement. may from time to time and at any time, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Except as may be set forth in a Change Order, Owner shall have no liability whatsoever to Contractor as a result of any such changes. notwithstanding that said changes may result in, among other things, loss of anticipated profits or variations between estimated actual work required to construct the Project. 14.1.3 The cost or credit to Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by the Owner in one or more of the following ways, in Owner's discretion: (a) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; (b) by determination in a manner agreed upon by the REMODEL PROTOTYPE Page 13 parties of a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or (c) by the method provided in Paragraph 14.1.4. 14.1.4 Contractor shall promptly comply with all Change Orders notwithstanding that no agreement may have been reached with respect to determination of the cost or credit to Owner as provided in Paragraphs 14.1.3. The cost of such Work shall then be determined on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, and in such case Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as Owners Representative may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate data for inclusion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited as set forth in Section 14.1.6 hereof. Pending final determination of the cost or credit to Owner, payments on account shall be made on portions of Certificates for Payment relating thereto that are approved by Owner. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Project Cost will be the amount of the actual net savings, determined, to the extent possible, in accordance with the above. 14.1.5 All 'extras" must be authorized by Owner on a duly executed Change Order form signed by Contractor and any one of Owner's Representative, Owners Vice President • Architecture & Construction or Owners Senior Vice President - Real Estate. No other representative of Owner shall be authonzed to sign any Change Order on behalf of Owner unless such authorization is set forth in writing signed by Owner's Vice President - Design and Construction. 14.1.6 All "extras" shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative no later than five (5) days after the work covered by such "extra" is commenced, in either or both of the following ways, as specified by Owner: (a) Lump sum proposal outlining the work to be performed; or (b) Labor and material plus overhead and profit: general contractor, subcontractor and subordinate subcontractors shall all agree to be limited to and perform any additional work which may be ordered In accordance with this Article 14 and the following conditions: 1. The total number of tiers involved in performing 'extras" shall be limited to a maximum of three (3) (the Contractor, One Subcontractor and one Sub - subcontractor). 2. Overhead and profit shall be allowed only in accordance with the following schedule: (a) Single tier (Contractor only) - 10% upon all materials, labor and /or rentals supplied. (b) Double tier (Contractor and Subcontractor) Subcontractor may increase price upon materials, labor and/or rentals supplied by 10 %, with the Contractor being permitted a 5% increase thereon (Total overhead and profit 15.5 %). (c) Triple tier Sub - subcontractor may increase price of any materials, labor or rentals supplied by 10 %. The Subcontractor may increase such price by 5% and the Contractor may thereafter increase such price by 5% (Total 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Page 14 overhead and profit - 21.25 %). In determining overhead and profit, the foregoing percentages shall be applied to the net cost of materials. labor and rentals only, and such percentage shall be deemed to include all overhead and profit of every type and nature. The net cost of labor shall include the cash wages and ordinary benefits actually paid. Persons performing services other than so-called 'trade persons' and 'foreman' including and not limited to office, support and supervisory staff shall not be included in any calculation of the cost of labor and shall be deemed a part of overhead profit included in the foregoing percentages. 14.2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 14.2.1 Should concealed conditions be encountered in the performance of the Work below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent In work of the character provided for in this agreement, be encountered, the Project Cost shall be equitably adjusted by Change Order upon claim by either party made within two (2) days after the observance of the conditions. 14.3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST 14.3.1 It Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Project Cost, he shall give Owner's Representative written notice thereof within two (2) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim (including, without limitation, a claim arising out of (I) any written interpretation pursuant to Paragraph 3.3.7, (ii) any order by Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section 15.3 where Contractor was not at fault, or (iii) failure of payment by Owner as provided in Section 11.6, but excluding any claims pursuant to Section 14.2). This notice shall be given by Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property, in which case Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Section 12.3. No such claim shall be valid unless made in accordance with the foregoing. Any change in the Project Cost resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order. ARTICLE 15 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 15.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 15.1.1 If any portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of Owner's Representative or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, said Work shall, at the direction of Owner's Representative, be uncovered for inspection and then replaced at Contractor's expense. 15.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been REMODEL PROTOTYPE covered which Owner's Representative did not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, Owner's Representative may direct that such Work be uncovered by Contractor for inspection. If such Work is found to be in accordance with The Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall be charged to Owner by appropriate Change Order. If such Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay such cost unless this condition was caused by Owner or a separate contractor as provided in Article 6, in which event Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 15.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 15.2.1 Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by Owners Representative as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of and expenses relating to the correction of rejected Work, including, without limitation, compensation for Architect's additional services, if any, made necessary thereby. and the costs of transportation incident to the repairing or replacement of defective work, removal and reinstallation as well as any damage to the work or property of others resulting from, or specifically attributable to, the remedial or corrective work. 15.2.2 If. within one (1) year after the date on which the Work, or any designated portion thereof. has been fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items), or within one (1) year after acceptance by Owner of designated equipment or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct same promptly after receipt of a written notice from Owner or Owner's Representative to do so. This obligation shall survive termination of this Agreement. 15.2.3 Contractor shall remove from the Site all portions of the Work which are defective or nonconforming and which have not been corrected under Paragraphs 15.2.1 and 15.2.2, unless such removal has been waived in writing by Owner. 15.2.4 If Contractor fails to correct defective or nonconforming Work in accordance with this Section 15.2, Owner may correct it as provided in the Article. 15.2.5 If Contractor does not proceed with the correction of such defective or nonconforming Work within the time fixed by written notice from Owner or Owner's Representative, Owner may remove same and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of Contractor. If Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten (10) days after demand therefor is made, Owner may. upon ten (10) additional days' written notice, sell such Work at auction or at private sale. If the proceeds of such sale are not equal to or greater than all the costs that should have been borne by Contractor, including compensation for Architect's additional services, if any, made necessary thereby, the deficiency shall be charged to Contractor 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay such amount to Owner promptly on demand. 15.2.6 Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such correction or removal. 15.2.7 Nothing contained in this Section 15.2 shall be construed as establishing a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which Contractor may have under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.5.1 hereof. Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that the establishment of the time period on one (1) year after the date on which the Work has been fully completed (including the completion of punch list items), or after the date of acceptance, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents, shall relate only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and shall not constitute a limitation upon the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor upon the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to his obligations ( other than specifically to correct the Work). 15.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 15.3.1 If Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with Contract Documents or fails to correct defective Work as required by Section 15.2, Owner, by written notice, may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other person or entity. 15.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 15.4.1 If, within three (3) days after written notice from Owner, Contractor fails to commence to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or to correct any defective Work as required by Section 15.2, and thereafter to complete said performance or correction with due diligence, Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, perform or correct said Work on behalf of Contractor. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due Contractor all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection therewith, including, without limitation, compensation for Architect's additional services made necessary thereby. If the payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner promptly on demand. 15.5 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NONCONFORMING WORK REMODEL PROTOTYPE Page 15 15.5.1 •Owner may, in his discretion, accept defective or nonconforming Work, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Project Cost where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not Final Payment has been made. Owner shall not be deemed to have accepted any defective or nonconforming Work unless such acceptance has been specifically acknowledged in writing. ARTICLE 16 ACCOUNTING RECORDS 16.1 Contractor shall keep and maintain complete and accurate books and records in accordance with sound accounting principles, relating to the cost and/or performance of the Work and the materials and supplies incorporated therein. Owner shall have the right, on ten (10) days prior notice given at any time and from time to time, to audit such books and records relating to the Project Cost (including any additions or reductions thereof pursuant to Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof), the Work, the Project and all such other matters relating to this Agreement. The books and records required to be maintained by Contractor in accordance with this Section 16.1 shall be kept and preserved at Contractor's principal place of business for a period of not less than three (3) years after the date upon which Final Payment is made. ARM Lei/ LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION 17.1 Contractor acknowledges that Owner is relying upon Contractor to perform the Work and construct the Project in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, and that Owner may suffer damages (whether by loss of sales and profits, increased costs or otherwise) in the event completion is delayed. 17.2 In view of the difficulty in ascertaining the actual damages Owner may suffer as a result of such delay, Contractor and Owner hereby agree that a sum, as specified in the Construction Agreement, represents a fair measure of such damages (said sum being fixed as liquidated damages and not as a penalty). In accordance therewith, if by the Substantial Completion Date the Work has not been substantially completed to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof: or, if by the Completion Date the Work has not been fully completed, then in either such event Contractor shall pay Owner same for each calendar day after the Substantial Completion Date until the Work is fully completed. Owner may take and retain such amount from any payment to be made to the Contractor hereunder, and in the event of a deficiency, Contractor shall pay the deficiency to the Owner promptly upon demand. 17.3 Owner hereby agrees that if Contractor shall substantially complete the Work to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof prior to the Substantial Completion Date, and shall fully complete the Work within fourteen (14) days after the Work is substantially completed as aforesaid, and provided that Contractor 09/22/00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS has otherwise fully and faithfully performed and discharged all of its obligations and responsibilities under this Agreement, then Owner shall pay to Contractor, in addition to all other sums payable by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement, an amount as specified in the construction Agreement for each calendar day by which the date on which the Work is so substantially completed precedes the Substantial Completion Date. Such amount shall be paid by Owner to Contractor at the same time as, and subject to the same conditions pursuant to which, the Final Payment is made. ARTICLE 18 NOTICES 18.1 Unless otherwise provided herein, all notices, consents or other communications given under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed given if sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage paid, to the addresses on the Construction Agreement. ARTICLE 19 QVERiIfV 19.1 Contractor shall omit any markup for overhead and profit for any overtime labor (premium time only) for which Contractor is compensated. ARTICLE 20 TERMINATION 20.1 TERMINATION CONTRACTOR 20.1.1 If the Work is stopped for period of thirty (30) consecutive days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of Contractor or Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with Contractor or a Subcontractor, or if the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days by Contractor because Owner's Representative has not issued a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 11.6 or because Owner has not made payment thereon as provided in Section 11.6, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days' written notice to Owner terminate this Agreement and recover from Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no such termination shall occur if, within said seven (7) days, either Owner's Representative issues the Certificate for Payment or Owner makes the payment. 20.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER REMODEL PROTOTYPE BY Page 16 20.2.1 If a petition under any federal bankruptcy law or an action under any insolvency law or statute is filed by or against Contractor and not dismissed within ten (10) days after such filing, or if Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractor or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or is otherwise in violation of any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have and after giving Contractor and his surety, if any, forty -eight (48) hours written notice, terminate the employment of Contractor and take possession of the Work and of all materials thereon owned by Contractor, and thereafter Owner may finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any payment then or thereafter due under this Agreement. 20.2.2 If, after termination of this Agreement by Owner (other than a termination pursuant to Paragraph 20.23), the cost to Owner of completing the Work, including compensation for Architect's additional services, if any, made necessary thereby, exceeds the Project Cost, Contractor shall pay such excess to Owner promptly on demand. This obligation for payment shall survive the termination of this Agreement. 20.2.3 Without limiting the generality of Paragraph 20.2.1, if Contractor fails to deliver to Owner, at the time or times required by this Agreement, any items or information required to be delivered prior to the commencement of the Work (including, without limitation, the name and qualifications of his superintendent and the project manager, the proposed progress schedule and manpower chart, the name of his Subcontractors and the schedule of values for the portions of the Work), Owner may, at any time until the commencement of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 8.11. or seven (7) days after all of such items or information have been submitted, whichever occurs first, terminate this Agreement by giving Contractor written notice to such effect. In the event of the giving of such notice, this Agreement shall be deemed terminated and neither party shall have any further rights, obligations or liability hereunder. 09/22/00 DIVISION 1" 1. REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS 1.1 Throughout the drawings and specifications, addenda and other Contract Documents, the term "Owner shall mean 'Toys "R' Us'. 1.2 Throughout the plans, specifications, addenda, and other Contract Documents, the term "Contractors" shall be taken to mean the Contractor or his Subcontractors. 1.3 In the plans, specifications, addenda, and other Contract Documents, the abbreviation CONTR is used. CONTR shall be taken to mean the Contractor. 1.4 The term "Owner's Representative" shall be taken to mean the person or persons authorized by the Owner to act in his behalf. 1.5 The words "plans" and "drawings' shall be taken to have the same meaning, unless in context specifically referencing plan view or views. 1.6 The drawings and specifications are complementary each to the other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. However, the drawings and specifications shall be considered inseparable documents and the Contractor shall consider both instruments in order to perform the work in accordance with their combined intent. 1.7 References to the "Project Manager" in the specifications or on the drawings shall be taken to mean an authorized professional representative of the Owner. 1.8 In case of discrepancies in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall first consult with the Owner and Project Manager for clarifications, revisions, or further action as may be required. Any discrepancy which results in any claim for additional time or money must be addressed to the Owner in writing. 2. PROPOSALS 2.1 Proposals are to be received by each respective area construction office. Contact your Construction Project Manager for address and due date. Costs to be received by each respective area construction office. See Bid Letter for address and C.P.M. contact. 2.2 Proposals shall be submitted in duplicate on the enclosed "Proposal Form" sealed in an opaque envelope marked "Proposal ". Proposals will not be accepted over the telephone. No exceptions to procedure will be allowed and any bid received after the specified time will be subject to rejection. To be considered a valid bid, proposals must be filled in completely including category breakdowns and qualification data. 2.3 All proposals shall be in accordance with all re- quirements of all contract documents and subject to all conditions provided in same.01/27/99 2.4 All proposals shall be in a lump sum and shall cover and include all materials, accessories, tools, equipment, expendable equipment, insurance, taxes, overhead, profit and performance of all services and labor required to completely execute the work in accordance with the contract documents. REMODEL PROTOTYPE NERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING DRMATION 'SECTION 1A -1 2.5 Each bidder shall break his proposal into the categories per of the Proposal Form (Exhibit 'A"). This categorization is requested only to further clarify bids as well as assure understanding of the scope of work. These categories will not be considered as fixing the basis for any contract adjustment. 2.6 The base bid shall be a complete and total package but to avoid price duplications shall exclude those items for which alternates are requested. Each alternate price shall be a total including all charges associated with adding the said item to the scope of work such as general conditions, overhead and profit. Reference Section 1A, Paragraph 11. 3. SCHEDULE 3.1 This is a "Time is of the Essence" project. Con- struction time shall not exceed 120 days, or the time period set by the owners Representative at the time of bidding. 3.2 Due to the nature of the Owner's retail market this project must be completed in accordance with the agreed construction schedule. Sitework must be so scheduled as to have asphaltic base course installed as early as possible in the job schedule. 3.3 Contractors shall carefully schedule and coordinate work so as to provide the maximum cooperation and the minimum of interference with the work of others. Scheduling shall be approved by the Owner. 3.4 Contractor shall submit prior to the start of the work a schedule showing the various phases and indicating the starting and completion dates of all phases of the contract work. 3.5 After the work is commenced, the Contractor shall conduct weekly jobsite meetings with all major subcontractors and shall advise the Project Manager in writing with a copy to the Owner as to the then current status of the schedule, and indicating whether or not the Contractor contemplates, as of that time, any future deviation from the schedule. Such reports and meeting minutes shall include a statement indicating that the report is based on the then current information furnished by all subcontractors and material suppliers and shall be issued promptly after the weekly meeting. If contractor determines that any part of the project has fallen behind schedule, he will, within 24 hours of discovery, forward a corrective plan of action. This plan will specifically identify what contractor actions will be taken to restore the project schedule. 3.6 Progress photos shall be taken biweekly, date stamped and forwarded to the Owner. Photos should be selected to accurately depict job status (elevations, sitework, interior, etc.) and shall be identified as to the job location on the rear of the photo. Said photographs are not to be of professional quality but may be snap shots taken by the job superintendent. 3.7 No extension of time beyond date stipulated in proposal will be allowed on account of inclement weather or other causes which could have been avoided by exercise of reasonable foresight on contractor's part. 3.8 Any problems developing during the course of the job that would affect the schedule shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative immediately. 4. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.1 Before submitting proposal, each Bidder should carefully examine all drawings, specifications, addenda (if any), and all other Contract Documents. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' GENET INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORI "ION 'SECTION 1A -2 4.2 All inquiries regarding the meaning of drawings, specifications, and/or other Contract Documents shall be addressed to: Architectural Project Manager Toys `R' Us 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 OR THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 4.3. BIDDERS NOTE: 4.3.1 INQUIRIES SHALL BE LIMITED TO CALLS FROM PRE - QUALIFIED GENERAL CONTRACTORS BIDDING THIS PROJECT. SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL MAKE CONTACTS ONLY THROUGH ONE OF THESE CONTRACTORS. 4.3.2 BIDDERS SHALL NOT RELY ON VERBAL REPLIES. SHOULD CLARIFICATIONS OR REVISIONS BE REQUIRED, THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS WILL BE MODIFIED BY WRITTEN ADDENDUM DISTRIBUTED TO ALL BIDDING CONTRACTORS. 4.3.3 NQ PRE - APPROVALS WILL BE GIVEN FOR SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, OR METHODS. REFER TO SEPARATE PARAGRAPH THIS SECTION FOR SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE. 4.3.4 BIDDERS ARE HEREBY INSTRUCTED TO QUALIFY THEIR RESPECTIVE BIDS IN WRITING FOR ALL CONDITIONS NOT CLARIFIED TO THEIR SATISFACTION BY THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS. ANY SUCH QUALIFICATIONS MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. DEVIATIONS SHALL NOT BE CLASSIFIED AS A CLARIFICATION. 4.3.5 THE OWNER HAS A COMMITMENT TO THE MINOR- ITY COMMUNITY. ONE ASPECT OF THAT COMMITMENT IS TO MAKE EVERY EFFORT TO ENSURE THAT A FAIR PORTION OF MONIES EXPENDED FOR CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS BE DISTRIBUTED TO MINORITY CONTRACTORS. BIDDERS' ASSISTANCE IN HELPING MEET THAT COMMITMENT IS REQUESTED. EACH BIDDER SHALL SUBMIT AT THE TIME OF BID THE NAME(S), TRADE(S), AND DOLLAR AMOUNT(S) THAT WILL BE AWARDED TO MINORITY CONTRACTORS IF THE CONTRACTOR IS THE SELECTED BIDDER. EVERY SUCH LISTED MINORITY CONTRACTOR SHALL BE CERTIFIED AS A BONAFIDE MINORITY OWNED AND MANAGED FIRM. INFORMATION RELATIVE TO CERTIFIED MINORITY CONTRACTORS MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF MINORITY CONTRACTORS 5. SITE INSPECTION 5.1 Each bidder shall visit the project site prior to the preparation of his bid to investigate and determine all conditions on and near the site which could affect the execution of the work. Any Contractor's failure to fully acquaint himself with existing conditions under which the work is to be performed will not be justification for additional compensation. 5.2 The location of the underground utilities, such as sewers, electrical power, water piping, conduits, etc., indicated on the drawings is as exact as can be determined from available information but its accuracy or completeness cannot be guaranteed. Exact location of these utilities shall be verified by the Contractor prior to starting work. Contractor shall exercise special care when excavating at or near the general location of underground utilities for the safety of workers, as well as for protection of the utility services. 5.3 Any connections to or relocation of any existing utility line requiring temporary discontinuation of utilities which are in active use shall be scheduled and coordinated with the utility companies and /or the representatives of the Owner. All premium time required for the installation of any such connections and /or relocations shall be included in Contractor's bid. In no case shall the utilities be left disconnected at the end of a working day or weekend unless authorized by repre- sentatives of the utilities and the Owner. Any existing utilities damaged due to the operation of any Contractor shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and utility company or agency, by the Contractor causing the damage, at no increase in the contract cost. 6. INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION 6.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. 6.2 Contractor shall advise Owner's Representative immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between matenals or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and Contractor to any claim of incompa- tibility. 7. WORK OF THE CONTRACTOR 7.1 Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required to perform and complete all work as shown and described in the Contract Documents, including all work indicated or specified in addenda, bulletins, accepted alternates or amendments. 7.2 The scope of work shall include all work noted in the plans or these specifications with the following clarifications: 7.2.1 Verification of the site conditions is the responsibility of the Contractor and no extra (time or money) shall be approved due to this contractor's failure to review conditions under which the work will be performed unless identified specifically by written exception as a part of his proposal. 7.2.2 The Contract Documents are intended to describe a total and completed facility. The specifications describe the various items of work, character of materials and quality of workmanship. Any appurtenances, parts, finish work, etc., essential to the entire completion of the work. though not specifically shown or specified shall be covered by the contract sum. 7.2.3 The Contractor will be required to furnish and install all temporary piping, power, electric wiring, lighting, etc., that is necessary to perform his work and shall remove same upon completion of the work. Point of connection, route and method of extension must meet the approval of the Owner's Representative and the utility. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01 /03/00 DIVISION 1' 7.2.4 Contractor shall repair and continuously maintain all existing pavements in a condition passable by automobile traffic. Temporary repairs shall be made at the end of each working day as a minimum. At the completion of construction. any and all existing pavements damaged shall be restored to their original condition (paving type, thickness, finish. striping. base and subbase) as part of the base bid work at no additional cost to Owner. 7.2.5 The Contractor is required to track the project schedule , by trade, and is required to chart this information in the format provided by the owner. These charts shall be maintained on a daily basis. 8. PAYMENTS 8.1 Within two weeks after award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit a breakdown of the costs of the work including those of all the vendors and subcontractors. 8.2 The Contractor shall furnish the initial breakdown on A.I.A. Form G702 with the complete breakdown of the contract price so arranged and itemized as to meet the approval of the Project Manager. 8.3 All subsequent applications for payment will be submitted on A.I.A. Form G702 or a reasonable facsimile thereto, and shall be accompanied by Certificate A.I.A. Form G703. 8.3.1 Column B, Description of Work, on Form G703 shall be listed by Sub - contract and spec division and shall include material supplier items. 8.3.2 Column C, Schedule Value, on Form G703 shall be the actual sub - contract value and not the estimated value for the corresponding line item of work. 8.4 Submit two (2) embossed, notarized copies of applications with original signatures on each. 8.5 Contractor shall submit with the first application for payment a copy of the proposed lien release form for approval by the Project Manager. Contractor shall also submit along with this payment application a copy of the State Lien Law regulations. Lien release forms shall comply with State Lien Law regulations and shall include the following items: 8.5.1 Date of release and type (partial or final) of release. 8.5.2 Type of work or description of material for this release. 8.5.3 Project name and address including the County and State. 8.5.4 Name of the Owner for whom the lien waiver is releasing all claims. 8.5.5 Total amount of partial lien waiver. 8,5.6 Total amount of partial lien releases to date for the work described. 8.5.7 Total contract amount. 8.5.8 Total amount of the lien waiver that pertains to Change Orders. Indicate the corresponding Change Order number(s) for which work was performed. 8.5.9 Total amount of releases to date for Change Orders and the Corresponding Change Order Numbers. 8.5.10 State lien law verbiage. REMODEL PROTOTYPE NERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING . DRMATION 'SECTION 1A -3 8.5.11 Notarized with an embossed seal. 8.5.12 Signature and name of the Contractor or subcontractor and/or material supplier company. 8.6 Payment applications shall be accompanied by conditional partial lien waivers (submitted in duplicate) for the application being submitted, and unconditional lien waivers for any previous draw. These partial lien waivers shall equal the total dollar amount for each line item listed under 'Description of Work, Column 8, Form G703 ", for which the Contractor is seeking payment. Final pay application will include all final waivers of liens. 8.7 Payment applications will not be processed until all such partial and /or final lien waivers have been submitted to the Owner's Representative. Partial and final lien waivers shall be accompanied by an itemized index of waivers which covers the application for which payment is being made. 8.8 Payments to be made as follows: 8.8.1 The Contractor shall prepare a statement each month of all work performed the preceding month including all acceptable materials suitably stored on the site at that time. 8.8.2 When the statement is approved, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90 %) of the amount due. 8.8.3 Release of retained funds shall be contingent upon receipt of all tax forms, guarantees, warranties, As -Built Drawings, and service /operating manuals. Release of retained funds will also not be approved until all final lien waivers have been submitted and the time period for which a lien can be filed against the project from the date of substantial completion, as described by State Law, has lapsed. 8.8.4 Miscellaneous Provisions: Contractors and material suppliers shall not be entitled to service charges or interest on any monies due and not paid and on any monies due as a result of any claim, dispute or other matter in question. 8.8.5 All Change Order cost breakdowns shall be notarized and shall be included on the Application for Payment Form G702 and G703. 8.8.6 The Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due to him under the Contract Documents without prior consent of the Owner, nor shall either party to the contract assign the contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other. 9. INSURANCE 9.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain during the life of the contract, insurance with insurers satisfactory to the Owner and with not less than a B+ rating as established by "Best Insurance Rating." Coverages noted below shall be provided. Any Contractor not having these limits shall so state in his proposal, otherwise it will be assumed the noted coverages are to be provided. 9.1.1 Workers Compensation and Employer's Liability - Workers Compensation as required by statute and, if such exposures exist, Contractor's liability under the Federal Longshoremen and Harbor Workers Act. Employer's liability shall be for a minimum limit of $100,000. In case any work is sublet, the Contractor shall require any and all of his subcontractors similarly to provide such coverages for all the latter's employees employed in connection with the work, unless such employees are covered by the protection of the Contractor. Provide similar coverage for any class of 01/03/00 DIVISION 1* employees engaged in work at the site, not protected under the applicable workers' compensation statute. 9.1.2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, including contractual liability coverage, in an amount not less than 9.1.4 Certificates of insurance, satisfactory to Owner and naming Owner as an additional insured, shall be delivered to Owner prior to the commencement of work, and said certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled without thirty (30) days' prior written notice to Owner. All insurance required to be carried by Contractor pursuant hereto shall be taken out with insurance companies approved by Owner in advance. 9.1.5 Builder's Risk Insurance - The Owner shall maintain a policy for the duration of the project upon all structures and upon all materials in or adjacent thereto which are to be made a part of the insured structure to the insurable value thereof less a deductible amount of $100,000.00 (Owner paid) for each occurrence. This coverage will not include Contractors and subcontractor's equipment, and may not necessarily be all inclusive as to Contractor's desired protection. 10. SPECIFIED MANUFAC TURERS. SUBSTITUTIONS, AND ALTERNATES 10.1 The following provisions shall govern the bidding of all work. The provisions specified below shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting other requirements set forth elsewhere in the Bidding or Contract Documents. 10.2 When a brand name is not specified: 10.2.1 Product used shall meet the specified standard, such as ASTM, etc., if specified, and shall be of the appropriate design, configuration, type, and finish as required to meet the requirements of the intended service. 10.3 When two (2) or more brand names are specified without further qualifying stipulations: 10.3.1 In all cases, the first - namgd brand or manufacturer's equipment has been used for the basic design and to determine the space requirements. 10.3.2 Any one of the specified brands or manufacturer's products equivalent to the first -named may be used for the base bid price. 10.3.3 Should other than the first -named brand be used in preparation of the bid, the Contractor shall be responsible to determine and assure that the product or equipment being bid will fit and function in the space allocated. Submission of shop drawings to the Contractor shall be construed as evidence that the Subcontractor has made this determination and that the equipment will fit and function in the allocated space. 10.3.4 In all cases, the product used shall meet the requirements of the intended service, including specified optional accessories, performance, and basic features. Should one of the named manufacturers offer a range of quality for a particular item, the Contractor shall provide the selection of equal or greater quality compared with the first -named brand in the specifications. All equality determinations rest with the Project Manager, and his decisions shall be final. REMODEL PROTOTYPE GENEF INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORt - ION *SECTION 1A -4 $3,000,000.00 for personal and bodily injury to all persons in any one occurrence and for damage to property. 9.1.3 Motor Vehicle Liability Coverage, with coverage limits not less than the amounts required by paragraph 9.1.2 above. 10.4 When one (1) brand name only is specified without further qualifying stipulations: 10.4.1 Contractor's base bid price shall be based on the product specified. 10.4.2 The Contractors are invited and encouraged to propose, as Substitutions, the products or equipment of other manufacturers potentially suitable for the intended services and/or applications. See paragraph below regarding Substitutions for further requirements. 10.5 Substitutions 10.5.1 Any material, product, or equipment (other than specified materials, brands, or manufacturers) proposed by the Contractor shall be considered a Substitution. 10.5.2 Except as otherwise specified herein below, in order to qualify for review by the Project Manager for a decision on approval, a Substitution shall be submitted at the time of bidding. The proposed Substitution shall be clearly identified and shall include the respective add or deduct to the contract base bid amount as defined above. The Contractor shall submit complete data (including samples, if requested) regarding the Substitution to the Project Manager for review and decision. 10.6 Alternates /Unit Prices 10.6.1 When requested in the specifications or on the drawings, Contractor shall include the appropriate add or deduct to the contract amount for the Alternate as specified. The add or deduct shall include all related charges including general conditions, overhead and profit. 10.6.2 Requested Alternates shall be numbered and shall be clearly identified in the Contractor's bid. 10.6.3 Each bidder is encouraged to submit any voluntary alternates he feels appropriate. 10.7 Associated Costs and Delays 10.7.1 All additional costs associated with the use of any product. material, or equipment (other than the first -named brand. a specified material, or a requested Alternate) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor making the Substitution or electing to use other than the first -named brand. 10.7.2 For example, if a Contractor elects to use the third -named brand in the specifications covering a particular item of equipment, and the choice of that brand necessitates an increase in electrical feeder size, additional structural support, access panels, or any other changes whatsoever in this work and /or the work of others, the Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of all such changes. 10.7.3 The approval of a Substitution and /or the discovery of associated costs during construction shall not relieve the Contractor from paying for changes in his work and/or the work of others. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 10.7.4 To avoid the associated costs as described above due to an untimely discovery of necessary changes, the Contractor may be permitted to revert to the use of the specified product, material, or equipment provided a delay in the project does not result. The Project Manager shall first be consulted and his decision regarding the interpretation of "delay" shall be final. 10.7.5 It shall be further understood that the use of any approved Substitution or other than the first -named brand in the specifications shall involve no extension of the project completion date and /or shall not cause delays in the work of other Contractors unless otherwise stipulated in writing with the respective Contractor's bid and/or proposal for Substitution. 11. Sl1BSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD In the event the Contractor (or his subcontractors) proposes substitutions to the Project Manager or to the Owner after the Contract has been awarded, the Project Manager will record all time used by him, his employees. and/or his consultants in the evaluation of each such proposed substitution. 11.2 Regardless of whether or not the Project Manager approves a proposed substitution, the Project Manager shall be reimbursed at the rate of two and one -half (2.5) times the direct cost for all time spent by the Project Manager and /or his consultants in evaluating each proposed substitution. A Change Order will be issued to reduce the Construction Contract by an amount equal to the fees charged by the Project Manager for reviewing one or more proposed substitutions. The Project Manager will be reimbursed by the Contractor in accordance with the Change Order amounts. 12. MODEL NUMBERS AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 12.1 References used throughout the specifications are made to manufacturer's names and model numbers in conjunction with a written specification description of the product. In the event any specified model number has been superseded and/or been rendered out of date by the manufacturer's product line revisions, or in the event any specified model number identifies a product which is not identical with the specified written description in all respects, the Contractor shall notify the Project Manager for clarification and directions prior to ordering and /or purchasing the product in question. Contractors failure to consider the combined intent of model numbers and specified product descriptions shall not be justification for additional payments. 13. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL DATA 13.1 After award of the Contract, the Contractor and each sub - contractor shall promptly prepare and submit to the Architectural Consultant complete lists of all products and equipment proposed for use in constructing this project. 13.1.1 The required lists shall include the equipment mark noted on the drawings (if applicable), the manufacturer's name and model number, and /or a brief description of the product, equipment, or material. 13.1.2 The lists shall clearly identify any and all deviations from the drawings and specifications, if applicable. 13.1.3 If use of the first -named brand in the specifications is proposed by the Contractor or required by the Contract Documents, the required lists may include the specification page and paragraph reference to augment or replace the product description. REMODEL PROTOTYPE NERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING ORMATION 'SECTION 1A -5 13.1.4 Any and all Substitutions accepted at the time the Contract was signed and appropriately identified in the Contract shall be identified on the lists as "Accepted Substitutes ". 13.1.5 For construction based on a "Performance Speci- fication" such as lawn irrigation systems. the lists shall include a line item for each product plus separate line items for hydraulic calculations and detailed shop drawings. 13.1.6 Structural systems shall be entered on the lists by categories or types of shop drawings required to properly fabricate, install, and erect the systems. 13.2 Each list shall be accompanied by a notarized certification signed by the Contractor and subcontractor (as applicable) attesting to the fact that the products, equipment, and materials will be furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents and the list, including all specified options, features, characteristics, and performance. The Contractors certification shall be construed and interpreted to mean that the Contract Ooc ments are clearly and fully understood and that Corrections to non- comolving work will be made promptly withjut delaying the project completion schedule and without additional costs to the owner, unless otherwise qualified or stipulated. 13.3 Upon receipt of the required list of products, materials, and equipment. The Architectural Consultant will review same and exercise the option to request selected shop drawings and /or submittals for review. 13.3.1 The Contractor should anticipate that selected shop drawings /submittals will be requested. The following list represents the minimum required submissions. The Contractor will verify all submittal requirements with the project specification and construction documents. 13.3.1.1 Selected reinforcing and structural steel shop drawings. 13.3.1.2 Block and other exterior material samples. 13.3.1.3 Sprinkler shop drawings. 13.3.1.4 Lawn irrigation system (if applicable). 13.3.1.5 Storefront shop drawings. 13.3.1.6 Roofing system submittals and specialty roof top accessories (clerestories, etc.). 13.3.1.7 Hollow metal, hardware, and specialty submittals. 13.4 All shop drawings, submittals, or product data shall be submitted to the Architectural Consultant for review. The TOYS "R' Us Project Manager will not review shop drawings, submittals. or product data. Submittals received by the Toys 'R' Us Project Manager will be returned to the Contractor without review or comment. Contractor will copy the Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager on transmittal only for all submittals. 13.4.1 Contractor's request for clarifications and /or interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be made in writing on an individual and specific basis. All such requests shall first be reviewed by the Contractor. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 13.4.2 In the event specific approvals are required by the manufacturer of a product, material, or fabrication, the Contractor (and his subcontractors) shall provide said "approval" of the shop drawings or submittals as required to release for fabrication and /or shipment on a timely basis. The Contractor and subcontractors shall advise suppliers, vendors. distributors, and manufacturer's of the terms stated in this paragraph regarding release or 'approval' for manufacturing, fabrication, and /or shipment to insure timely delivery of respective products, materials, equipment, and fabrications. 13.5 The above stated procedures and policies regarding shop drawings and submittals are intended to simplify and expedite the construction process and emphasize the Contractors role and responsibility for coordinating the work of all trades in a proper and timely manner consistent with the Contract Documents. In keeping with this intent and concept, review comments received by the Contractor (and Subcontractors) from the Architectural Consultant on selected and requested shop drawings and /or submittals shall not be interpreted or construed as relieving the Contractor (or his subcontractors) from complying with the requirements set forth in the Contract Documents. 13.6 For all shop drawings, or product data, including those requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall review same thoroughly and carefully, clearly marking and /or noting all discrepancies and deviations from the Contract Documents, and affixing an appropriate review stamp, signed and dated. Contractors review (and submittal if requested) shall constitute a representation by the Contractor that he has verified compliance with the Contract Documents; and that he has determined and /or verified that field measurements, coordination, materials, and requirements relating to the work and information contained therein are consistent with the project criteria and Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible to distribute all shop drawings and product data to the appropriate subcontractor, as applicable, on a timely basis after his review. 13.7 Requested shop drawings and submittal data shall be mailed with a transmittal letter or form prepared by the Contractor which shall include the number of copies and identification of each item submitted. The transmittal shall not be used as the only source for identifying deviations, if any, from the Contract Documents. 13.8 Requested shop drawings for inter - related equipment must be submitted at one time, since the performance of one piece of equipment must be matched in performance by all other equipment of the overall system. 14. EXPEDITING PRODUCT DELIVERIES 14.1 Contractor shall be responsible for ordering and purchasing products, equipment, and materials on a prompt and timely basis to avoid delays in construction due to deliveries. 14.2 Contractor shall submit the lists of products, equipment, and materials within not more than l4 calendar days after award of contract. 14.3 Orders shall be placed with suppliers immediately upon return receipt of the above referenced lists" from the Architectural Consultant and /or upon return receipt of requested submittals reviewed by the Architectural Consultant, as applicable. No excuse for delivery delay will be entertained unless the following items have been previously submitted to the Architectural Consultant. GENET INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFOR' 'ION 'SECTION 1A -6 14.3.1 Photocopy of the order form forwarded not later than seven days after placement of the said order. 14.3.2 Letter from the supplier explaining the said delay. 15. OWNER - FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND /OR MATERIALS 15.1 The Contractor shall receive, unload, inventory, rig temporarily store and safeguard, uncrate, erect, install, and place into proper operation all Owner - furnished equipment, material and accessories in accordance with the drawings and specifications and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's detailed working drawings and installation recommendations. Contractor shall provide all materials, accessories, devices, and equipment as required to properly install and place into operation all Owner - furnished material and/or equipment. 15.1.1 For Owner- supplied safes, Contractor shall have on hand at the time of delivery a forklift or similar equipment capable of transporting and placing a 4200 lbs safe in the vertical position. 15.2 The material and equipment furnished by the Owner will carry the manufacturer's standard warranty. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative should any defective components or feature be discovered during receiving, inventory, uncrating, installation, or testing. All packing slips, bills of lading, and related paperwork must be held for the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all shortages and damages after accepting delivery, NO EXCEPTIONS. The Owner will notify the manufacturer for replacement or repairs. 15.3 Any repairs and /or replacements required due to Contractor's negligence shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 15.4 The Contractor shall provide all labor and work for repairs and/or replacements related to Owner- furnished material and equipment during the term of the manufacturer's warranty, including warranty extensions (if any), purchased with the equipment. All work, materials, and labor related to repairs and /or replacements excluded from the manufacturer's warranty shall be provided by the Contractor for all defects. malfunctions, or deficiencies occurring within the full warranty period. 15.5 The maintenance service requirements specified on the drawings and/or in the respective sections of the specifications shall apply to all Owner- furnished equipment, unless noted or specified otherwise. 15.6 Data relating to Owner- furnished equipment shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals provided by the Contractor in accordance with this section of the specifications unless noted or specified otherwise. 15.7 Each item of Owner - furnished equipment and /or material is shown or identified on the drawings and/or in the appropriate Section of the specifications. 15.8 The Contractor shall make notifications and coordinate with the Owner's Representative and the manufacturer to assure a timely, properly functioning installation of Owner - furnished material and equipment. 15.9 Contractor is responsible for complete installation of material or equipment, unless otherwise specified. If additional information is required this must be made known at bidding time as an extra for this work will not be considered by Owner. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 1* 15.10 All surplus owner- supplied equipment and material shall be stored and safeguarded during the course of the work in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be permanently stored and/or distributed as directed by the Owner's Representative at Final Completion. 16. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 16.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for complete and absolute compliance with all provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, including all amendments, pertaining to the work. 16.2 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain for his portion of all the work all danger signals, signs, lights, guard barricades, etc., required by good practice and by law during the entire period of his contract. The Contractor shall confine his equipment, storage of materials and the operations of his workmen to limits indicated by law. No Contractor shall load or permit the loading of any part of the structure with a weight that will endanger its safety. 16.3 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper protection of all materials and equipment delivered to the site from the time of such delivery until final approval and acceptance by the Owner. This protection and security provision shall include all Owner supplied items. 16.4 The Contractor shall, at all times, protect the excavations, trenches and /or the portions of the building pertaining to his work from damage from rainwater, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water. He shall provide all pumps and equipment and enclosures to provide this protection. He shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep excavations free of water. 16.5 The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing and sheathing as required for safety and for the proper execution of the work, and have it removed when the work is completed. Special attention shall be given to foundations for buildings and basements. Where cuts for utilities exceed 4', they shall be sloped or shored as required by a registered Engineer, in accord with both OSHA and local regulations. 16.6 Any work damaged by failure to provide protection as required above shall be removed and replaced with new work at the Contractors expense. (Special attention is drawn to this provision as it relates to Owner supplied items including lighting fixtures and lamps.) 17. PERMITS. REGULATIONS. CODES AND STANDARDS 17.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all required permits necessary for the prosecution of his work. 17.2 The Owner is responsible for filing the plans for the Building Permit. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in expediting acquisition of this Permit. The main Building Permit fee shall be paid by the Owner; any other fees are to be paid for by the Contractor or his subcontractors. No extra for such fees or one time charges will be considered. 17.3 Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn or specified. 17.4 All work installed by the Contractors shall be in compliance with governing Federal, State and Local Codes. All electrical work shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC - latest); except where more stringent Local or other Codes must govern. If any REMODEL PROTOTYPE NERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING ORMATION 'SECTION 1A -7 portion of work called for in the specifications or shown on the drawings is deemed contrary to the Codes and requirements, Contractor shall be required to bring the matter to the attention of the Contractor prior to roughing -in so that same can be reviewed for clarification or revision. Installations made without regard to Code requirements must be corrected by the Contractor or Con- tractors without an increase in the contract amount. 17.5 Existing fluorescent fixtures to be removed or relocated may have ballasts containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Handling and disposal of such ballasts is regulated by federal and /or state agencies. It is the responsibility of the contractor to determine if fixture ballasts contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or flourescent lamps require special handling, and, If so, to handle and dispose of them properly and in accordance with all applicable regulations. 17.6 Any "Standard" (ASTM, ASA. etc.) referenced in these specifications shall be based on the edition and /or amendments of the Standard as specified herein. In cases where the edition or date of the "Standard' is not specified, the edition and /or amendments of the Standard which are current on the date the bids are submitted shall govern. Should a more current edition of a Standard become effective during construction, the Contractor may, with the approval of the Engineer apply the latest edition of the specified Standard. 18. SUPERVISION. COORDINATION AND LAYOUT 18.1 All work included in the respective contracts shall be under the constant supervision of qualified superintendents or foremen. 18.2 Considering the Time of Essence Contract the Contr- actor shall conduct weekly job meetings with ?II major subcontractors in attendance for the purpose of coordination and expediting. The Toys `R` Us Construction Project Manager will be copied on minutes of these meetings. 18.3 The Contractor will be required to submit the name of all subcontractors to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to awarding of the subcontract work. The Owner reserves the right to approve or disapprove any subcontractors. After their approval and the subsequent award of subcontracts, the Contractor shall provide a type written list of the subcontractors with their work identified, address. phone number(s). and prime contact(s) to both the Owner and the Project Manager. 18.4 In order to maintain proper coordination and con- tinuation of all branches of work, job superintendents or foremen shall not be replaced without prior notice to and approval of the Owner's Representative. 18.5 The Contractor shall carefully examine ALL drawings and specifications for the total project and coordinate his work with others to avoid delay and shall be responsible to ascertain that the work he installs does not interfere with work of other Contractors. If work is installed which does interfere, it shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Preoccupation of space by any Contractor or subcontractor does not give him the right of priority to the space. 18.6 When piping, conduits, ducts or other items are to run in the same general direction, elevation or location, the Contractors involved shall request the Contractor to arrange a conference to determine the proper allocation of the space or position. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 18.7 When work is to be installed above ceilings, adequate clearance must be maintained to allow for access, repairs, and removal of all devices. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting his installation from being blocked off by others. Should this condition occur, he shall bring the matter to the attention of the other Contractor for correction. 18.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for any layout associated with the performance of his work. Should a subcontractor's work be subsequent to and contingent upon layout by another, he shall check said layout prior to proceeding with his work, reporting any discrepancies to the Contractor. Proceeding with the layout shall be considered as acceptance of the layout. 19. CUTTING. PATCHING. AND CLEANING 19.1 No Contractor shall endanger and /or damage any work by cutting, drilling, digging or other actions. No Contractor shall cut or alter the work of another Contractor without prior written approval by the Owner's Representative. 19.2 Any cost caused by defective and /or ill -timed work shall be borne by the Contractor responsible therefore. 19.3 In no case shall any Contractor cut into any structural element, beam. or column without prior written approval from the Engineer. 19.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to follow the progress of the project to assure that his portion of the work is installed at the appropriate time to avoid unnecessary cutting, patching, or modifications to his work and /or the work of other Contractors. (Special effort shall be undertaken to ensure that all conduit and embedded items are properly installed in the masonry work.) 19.5 In case any Contractor is required to cut existing work in order to install the work required under his portion of the contract, the Contractor requiring the cutting shall bear the expense of the cutting and all subsequent repairing, patching, and/or replacement. All cutting, patching, repainng, and/or replacing shall meet with the approval of the Owner's Representative, Project Manager, and Engineer. 19.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up packing materials, trash, and any debris related to his portion of the work and/or generated by his workmen. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning walls, floors and other finished surfaces soiled as a result of his portion of the work or due to his workmen. All work by the Contractor shall be clean at the completion of the respective portion of the contract. (Special attention shall be given to cleaning dirt, stains, etc. from interior and exterior masonry.) 19.7 The subcontractor or material supplier shall promptly correct all work rejected by the Project Manager or the Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The subcontractor or material supplier shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected work or materials, including the cost of the Project Manager's additional services thereby made necessary. 19.8 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or nonconforming work or materials, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the contract sum, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the subcontractor or material supplier. GENE . INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFOR TION 'SECTION 1A -8 20. OWNER OCCUPANCY 20.1 The Owner reserves the right to take initial occupancy of the building at the earliest possible date, particularly with regard to delivery and installation of fixtures, and merchandise. Depending on the progress of the subcontractor's work, this may or may not create some inconvenience. The subcontractor should anticipate this possibility. Claims for time delays and/or extra costs due to such inconveniences will not be allowed. 20.2 When the Owner takes beneficial occupancy and begins receipt of merchandise, the site shall no longer be considered as a construction site. Subsequent to beneficial occupancy the contractor will be subject to the rules of the store management regarding access, security, smoking, etc. 21. FINAL INSPECTION 21.1 As the work nears completion, the Contractor shall review the requirements of the Contract Documents, inspect the work, and inform all parties involved of work to be corrected or completed before the project can be deemed substantially complete. 21.2 When, in the opinion of the Contractor, the project is substantially complete. he shall notify the Project Manager in writing of this fact, listing those items of work remaining incomplete, the reason therefore, and the anticipated date that all remaining work will be completed. Final inspection of the project will then be scheduled. 21.3 The Owner's Representative reserves the right to cancel and reschedule the inspection in the event considerably more work remains to be completed or corrected than indicated on the written request. 21.4 A representative of the Contractor shall be present at the time of inspection. 22. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS (NOT REQUIRED) 23. GUARANTEE 23.1 General Guarantee - See Section 1F, Exhibit "C -1 ". 23.1.1 The Contractor and /or his subcontractor shall guarantee his work in writing, including labor and materials, for a period of one (1) year, or longer if so specified elsewhere, from the date of final completion of the contract by the Contractor or from full occupancy of the building by the Owner, whichever date is earlier. 23.1.2 However, if at the time of full occupancy of the building by Owner, a portion of the work has not been completed or is found to be defective, the starting date of guarantee for the defective or incomplete portion shall be effective only after same has been completed or corrected by the Contractor. 23.1.3 If a portion of the building and /or the work is turned over to the Owner for occupancy and /or operation prior to the completion of the work under contract, the beginning of the guarantee period for the portion occupied will begin from the date of occupancy. In order to receive an adjustment in the guarantee period, the Contractors involved shall each submit a written certificate describing the portion of the work involved. The certificate shall be submitted for signature and shall become effective when signed by the authorized Representative of the Owner. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' NERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING ORMATION *SECTION . 1A-9 23.1.4 Defective work and all damages resulting from same occurring within one year from the date of completion of work under contract shall be corrected by the responsible Contractor at his own expense. 23.1.5 Contractor shall be required to submit his written guarantee to Owner's Representative prior to receiving final payment. 23.2 Specific Warranty 23.2.1 Manufacturer's equipment warranties shall be for at least a period of one (1) year as defined in the General Guarantee paragraph. When manufacturer's standard warranty is for a longer period, or if a longer period is called for in the specific equipment specifications, then the longer warranty period as defined by the manufacturer shall govern. In any case, the overall effective guarantee period shall not be shorter than the one (1) year period dating from the final completion of the contract. 23.2.2 Contractor shall be required to turn over manufacturer's written guarantees, along with operating and service manuals, to Owner's Representative prior to receiving final payment. Refer to Section 1B, Paragraph 10 for specific requirements. REMODEL PROTOTYPE - END OF SECTION • 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under Divisions 15 and 16 of these specifications will be subject to and governed by the following: 1.1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION - Section 1A 1.2 The term "Mechanical" Contractors shall mean the Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, and Fire Protection Contractor. The term "Electrical" Contractor shall mean the building Electrical Contractor. For ease of reference, the following abbreviations may be used in the specifications and drawings: 1.2.1 CONTR: Contractor who shall be the prime Contractor for this project and who shall be responsible to the Owner. 1.2.2 HAC: Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 1.2.3 PBC: Plumbing Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 1.2.4 ELC: Electrical Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 1.2.5 FPC: Fire Protection Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 2. MATERIALS. EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP GENE? °'_ PROVISIONS- MECHANICAL 8 ELEC' '.:AL WORK 'SECTION 1B -1 2.1 Unless otherwise specified, all matenals and equipment incorporated in the work under the contract shall be new. All work shall be performed by persons qualified in their respective trades. 2.2 All material shall conform to the governing Codes or regulations. 2.3 All material and equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), if U.L. has an established certification for the particular type of matenal, device, or equipment. 2.4 Contractors shall not scale the drawings. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for the building construction and dimensions, and refer to "Room Finish Schedule" on architectural drawings for material, finish, and construction method of walls. floors and ceilings so that proper roughing -in of Contractor's work can be provided. 2.5 Where the word "provide" is used, this shall be taken to mean "furnish and install ", unless other -wise noted or specified. 2.6 It is the intent of the drawings and specifications that all labor, materials, and equipment be provided as required to complete the installation of all mechanical and electrical systems and work described, shown, or indicated in the Contract Documents for proper functioning and finished appearance. The respective Contractors shall provide all necessary components, hardware, accessories, and devices as required to comply with the intent of the Contract Documents, whether or not such items are shown on the drawings or referenced in the specifications. 2.7 Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified, the Contractor shall provide structural members, brackets, bracing, hardware, and related accessories as required to securely install all equipment, devices, and materials under REMODEL PROTOTYPE his portion of the work. This shall include flashing, gaskets, sealants, and caulking as required to prevent entrance of or damage from rain or wind. 2.8 In all cases, route utilities to cause the least interference with the fixture plan (e.g. mount sprinkler mains as high as possible). 3. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 3.1 Excavation 3.1.1 All excavation shall be in accordance with Division 2 of these specifications. 3.1.2 All excavation required for mechanical and electrical work shall be done by the respective Contractor, and shall be done in as short a time as practical before the work is placed. 3.1.3 When services are shown in the same general location, a common excavation may be used. However, separation between services as specified or as required by governing Code shall be maintained. Contractors involved shall make their own agreement as to the sharing of cost for the common excavation work. 3.1.4 No excavation or soil stock piling shall be done within drip line of trees not shown to be removed on Architectural drawings. No trees shall be removed without prior approval of the Owner. 3.1.5 Excavation for utility lines in the parking area will be undertaken as soon as possible after contract award to allow for accelerated parking lot installation. Utility lines under curbing and for parking lot lights shall be the first utility lines installed where practical. 3.2 Backfill: 3.2.1 All backfill shall be in accordance with Division 2 of these specifications. 3.2.2 All backfill for mechanical and electrical work shall be done by respective Contractor and shall comply with the following specifications. 3.2.3 Within building lines and under areas to be paved: Backfill for trenches shall be performed in two operations. The backfill around and to 12 inches above the pipe or conduit shall be placed in thin lifts, not exceeding 6 inches, and thoroughly tamped and compacted. The balance of the backfill shall be placed in lifts not exceeding 8 inches. All backfill material shall be clean soil, free from rock, debris, cinders, frozen earth, or materials which could cause pipe or conduit damage or corrosion. Each lift shall be compacted to a maximum density to comply with the requirements specified in the Section of the specifications governing backfill around foundations. 3.2.4 Backfill for mechanical and electrical work shall not be placed until all required inspections, tests. and approvals have been performed and given, including inspection and approval by the Owner's Representative. 3.2.5 Exterior of building lines and exterior of areas to be paved: Backfill for trenches shall be placed in 12 inch lifts above the top of pipe or conduit. Backfill around and to the top of the pipe or conduit shall be placed in thin lifts as specified above. Backfill materials shall be as specified above. Each lift shall be compacted as required to prevent settlement of trench backfill. 3.2.6 All backfill shall be placed with care such that piping, conduit or other work is not disturbed or damaged. Compaction by flooding or pooling shall not be used. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' GENERAL PP "''ISIONS- MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ' ')RK 'SECTION 1B -2 Immersion -type vibrators are acceptable for compaction of granular backfill. 3.3 Shoring and Protection • The Contractor is responsible for excavation work and shall provide all necessary barricades, fencing, bracing, warning signs, pumping, etc., for the protection of workers, general public, and properties. 3.4 Sheet Piling and Pumping - if required, shall be provided by the Contractor for all work. 3.5 Dewatering: 3.5.1 All excavations shall be dewatered before the work is placed and shall be kept dewatered until backfill is completed. 3.5.2 Local site conditions and time of year must be taken into account when bidding dewatering costs: and included in base contract price. All over excavation required of trench bottoms to meet required densities will be to contractor's account. 3.6 Excess Earth from Excavation: 3.6.1 Excess earth from excavation shall be trucked away by the Contractor making the excavation, or may be piled on the site at location designated by the Contractor, if the excess earth is needed by Contractor, and if approved by the Owner's Representative as fill material. 3.6.2 Debris, trash, or rock not usable for fill shall be removed from the Owner's property by the respective Contractor. 3.7 Restoration of Existing Conditions: 3.7.1 When the excavation is within the area of finished site work by the Contractor, backfill to the height of rough grade. Final surfacing by Contractor. 3.7.2 When the excavation is beyond the area of general construction work, final surface of the excavation and adjacent disturbed areas shall be restored to match the original condition by sodding, seeding, asphalt paving, concrete. etc., as required. Work shall conform to applicable Sections of the specifications and shall be provided by the respective Contractor. 3.7.3 When the excavation is on public property, restoration of surface conditions shall meet the requirements of public authorities having jurisdiction, and be maintained for a minimum of one (1) year. 4. CONCRETE WORK 4.1 Concrete Encasement and Cradles: 4.1.1 Concrete encasement, cradles, or trenches for underground pipes, conduits and ducts shall be provided by the respective Contractor, unless otherwise noted or specified. 4.1.2 Composition and quality of concrete work shall comply with Division 3 of the specifications. 5. SLEEVES THROUGH WALLS AND FLOORS 5.1 Exterior and Foundation Walls: 5.1.1 All piping or conduit through exterior walls and foundation walls shall pass through schedule 40 steel sleeves which shall be large enough to allow for caulking material. No sleeves are permitted through concrete structural members unless indicated on the structural drawings. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 5.1.2 Space between pipe or conduit and sleeve shall first be packed with jute, hemp, or oakum and then be finally caulked flush with finished surfaces. 5.2 Interior Walls and Partitions: 5.2.1 All piping or conduit through interior walls and partitions shall pass through either schedule 40 black steel, plastic or galvanized steel sheet metal sleeves. Schedule 40 sleeves must be used with concrete or masonry construction. Sleeves will not be required for temperature control tubing. 5.2.2 Space between pipe or conduit and sleeve, or between insulation and sleeve shall be caulked when passing through mechanical room walls or fire -rated walls. 5.2.3 Ducts: Space between duct and opening shall be grouted with non- shrinking cement or plaster for fire rating and noise isolation. Openings in stud walls shall be sleeved with galvanized sheet metal collar and grouted as above. Fire dampers shall be provided in all ducts penetrating fire -rated walls. 5.3 Floors: 5.3.1 All piping or conduit through floors shall be provided with schedule 40 pipe sleeves, extending 1" above floor, except in finished areas. Sleeves in finished areas shall terminate flush with floor, and shall be schedule 40 pipe, plastic, or sheet metal. 5.3.1.1 When opening is on the lowest floor - grout space between pipe or conduit and sleeve with non - shrinking cement. 5.3.1.2 When opening is above lowest floor • space between pipe or conduit or insulation and sleeve shall be grouted with nonshrinking cement or shall be caulked from above and below to provide watertight construction and to maintain fire -rating of floor structure. 5.3.2 All ducts through floors shall be provided with galvanized or painted steel angle frame for support of duct and closure of opening. Provide grouting in the same manner as for ducts through walls. Fire dampers are required in all ducts penetrating fire -rated floors. 6. LINTELS 6.1 All lintels required for supporting building construction above pipes, boxes, panels, ducts, etc., shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor 6.2 Contractor requiring the opening or recess shall be responsible for the size, location. and configuration of the opening. 7. ROOF OPENINGS AND CURBS 7.1 Roof Openings: 7.1.1 All roof openings for piping, vents, flues, stacks, ducts, conduits, etc., shall be sleeved by the respective Contractor. 7.1.2 All framed openings on roof shall be provided by Contractor in accordance with details, dimensions, and locations as shown on the structural and architectural drawings. 7.2 Roof Curbs:(RTU Curbs are Owner - Supplied) 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 8. CUTTING AND PATCHING 8.1 For New Construction: REMODEL PROTOTYPE GENE PROVISIONS- MECHANICAL & ELECT' ':AL WORK *SECTION 1B -3 7.2.1 Unless prefabricated type curbs are specified, curbs shall be constructed by the Contractor in accordance with details and dimensions shown on the structural and architectural plans. Respective Contractor shall provide correct dimensions to the Contractor prior to fabrication of curbs. 7.2.2 Flashing for piping, vents, flues, stacks, ducts, conduits, etc., shall be made watertight by means of sleeves, flashing, and draw collars. Materials and methods shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these specifications. Sleeves, flashing, and flashing draw collars shall be furnished and installed by the Con- tractor requiring the opening. It piping is insulated, the insulation shall be sealed off by insulation cement or weatherproof mastic in a manner and with materials as required to prevent rain leakage. Contractors requiring openings shall coordinate all flashing, counter flashing, and related details with the roofing subcontractor. 7.2.3 Plumbing vent terminals shall be installed as shown on the drawings. 7.2.4 Special flashing and counter flashing if required, shall be as shown on the drawings and /or as specified elsewhere in Division 15. 7.2.5 Prefabricated roof curbs, if required, shall be of the type as specified in the appropriate Section of Division 15 of these specifications and /or noted on the drawings. 7.3 Flashing and Counter Flashing: 7.3.1 Flashing around roof curbs shall be provided by the roofing subcontractor under Contractor. Counter flashing shall be by the Contractor requiring such curbed openings, except where counter flashing is a component part of the equipment, all counter flashing materials and methods shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these specifications. 7.4 Roofing and /or weatherproofing of any installation and /or penetration of the roof, by respective contractor, must be coordinated with and installed by the Contractor roofing subcontractor to assure the roofing guarantee will not be invalidated. 8.1.1 Roof Openings - Field -cut openings in roof deck shall be cut by various subcontractors under Contractor. The size and location of such openings are the responsibility of the Contractor requiring the opening. 8.1.2 Floors, Walls, and Partitions - Openings in stud walls shall be cut and /or framed by various subcontractors under Contractor. Openings in concrete and masonry work shall be sleeved prior to or at the placing of the concrete and masonry work. The sizes and locations of openings are the responsibility of the Contractor requiring the opening. 8.1.3 Openings, lintels, frames, etc., as required for flush mounted panels and recessed equipment shall be provided by various subcontractors under Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein. 8.1.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to follow the progress of the project to assure that all sleeves, openings, rough -in boxes, frames, etc., are placed at the proper time. Any and all subsequent cutting and patching and /or unnecessary modifications to the work of other subcontractors shall be done at the expense of the Contractor requiring the opening. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, load bearing walls, footings, or foundations be cut without first obtaining written permission from the Project Manager. 8.2 For Existing Structure: 8.2.1 All cutting required shall be performed by the Contractor. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, load bearing walls, footings, or foundations be cut without first obtaining permission from the Project Manager unless the location and size of openings are predetermined as noted on the drawings. 8.2.2 Contractor shalt make thorough investigation and/or field measurement by use of magnetic detection instruments or other approved means to detect any concealed ferrous metal piping or conduits prior to cutting. Should any existing and active piping or conduits be damaged by the Contractor's work, same shall be restored to service immediately without additional cost to the Owner. 8.3 Cutting shall be limited to the size necessary for working conditions. When cutting surfaces are difficult or costly to replace, such as marble, ceramic tile, wood paneling, etc., all trades shall consult with the Contractor in advance and they shall jointly develop a method of cutting. 8.4 All patching shall be done with materials and by methods consistent with the construction and materials being patched. In general, cement grout shall be used with masonry, and filler compound shall be used with dry-wall or plastered surfaces. Quality and final appearance of all patching work shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative and /or Project Manager. 9. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF WARRANTY 9.1 Manufacturer's certificate of warranty shall be obtained for all major equipment furnished by the Contractor. Warranty shall be obtained for at least one (1) year as defined in the GUARANTEE paragraph. Where longer period is called for in the specific equipment specifications, the longer period shall govern. Warranty information shall include warranty number, contact and phone number. 9.2 The Contractor shall include in the manuals parts catalogs for each item of equipment furnished by him on the project with the components identified by number for replacement ordering. 9.3 Submission 9.3.1 Manuals shall be in duplicate, and all materials shall be bound into volumes of standard black, 1" wide, 8-1/2" x 11" hard binders, with 2 -1/4" clear plastic label sleeve. Large drawings too bulky to be folded into 8 -1/2" x 11" size shalt be separately bound or folded into brown envelopes. cross referenced and indexed with the manuals. 9.3.2 The manuals shall include the name of Project Manager, Contractors, and major subcontractors. 9.3.3 In order not to duplicate Contractor's effort, it is suggested that all trades shall submit one (1) preliminary copy of the manual to the Owner's Representative for a pre- check, and when approved, Contractor shall then submit the final copies through normal channels. 10. ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT 10.1 Accessibility 10.1.1 All control devices, specialties, valves. and removable 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' GENERAL PP 'ISIONS- MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL )RK 'SECTION 1B-4 panels on equipment shall be so located as to provide easy access for inspection and maintenance including ease of removal of any interior components. 10.1.2 Should any Contractors work, such as piping, ducts, conduits, etc. be installed without due regard to the accessibility of devices installed by other Contractors, the installation shall be relocated, offset, or re- routed without cost to the Owner. 10.2 Access Panels 10.2.1 Where devices are to be concealed in walls or above non - removable ceilings,Contractor shall be required to furnish the required access panels for installation. 10.2.2 Size of panels shall be larger than the devices for accessibility, and shall be not less than 6 inches square for wall panels and not less than 12 inches square for ceiling panels. Where the opening must allow adequate room for a person to pass through, a 24" x 24" panel shall be provided. 10.2.3 Construction of panel shall comply with the following: 10.2.3.1 For masonry, tile, wood or wallboard surfaces • extruded aluminum frames, 3/4" border, aluminum piano hinges, screwdriver- operated cam lock, brushed satin aluminum finish. Final painting to match decor by Contractor. 10.2.3.2 For acoustical tile ceiling - flangeless construction of even-tile module, recessed door panel for receiving acoustical tile by Contractor, piano hinges, flush screwdriver - operated cam latch, white prime coat finish. Access panels will not be required in accessible type ceilings. 10.2.3.3 For plastered ceiling or wall • concealed flange, recessed door panel to receive plaster by Contractor, continuous hinges, flush latch, white prime coat finish. Final painting to match interior decor by Contractor. 11. OPERATION OF DEFECTIVE, UIPMENT 11.1 If after installation, operation of the equipment proves to be unsatisfactory to Owner by reasons of defects, errors or omissions, Owner reserves the right to operate the equipment until it can be removed from service for correction by Contractor. Contractor shall be liable for any damage to equipment resulting from such continued operation. 12. ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 12.1 Contractor - Shall wire all mechanical equipment furnished by various Contractors and the Owner, in accordance with the following general provisions: 12.1.1 Power wiring from panel to motor controllers, relays, etc., and controllers to motor terminals per equipment manufacturer's wiring diagram. 12.1.2 Furnish, install and wire local disconnect switches, manual push buttons and other control wiring specifically called for or noted in electrical specifications. 12.1.3 Initial field oiling of all motors prior to the test running of same. 12.1 4 Receive, unload, set and align all separately shipped REMODEL PROTOTYPE motors. Adjust and align drive and adjust belt tension. 12.1.5 Furnish and install motor starters specifically called for on plans. 12.1.6 Install and wire all field- mounted devices, such as selector switches, push button stations, etc. specifically called for to be furnished by other Contractors when not a factory pre -wired component. 12.1.7 Owner supplied items. Refer to Project Drawings for a detailed list of Owner- supplied electrical items. 12.2 Contractors - Shall include the following: 12.2.1 All motor starters or control devices specifically called for to be factory pre - wired. 12.2.2 Furnish individual motor starters or control devices specifically called for in accordance with the specifications, or as noted on the drawings. 12.2.3 Automatic control and interlock wiring as called for under Division 15. 12.2.4 Furnish complete and accurate wiring diagrams to ELC for all equipment requiring electrical power wiring and /or control wiring. 12.2.5 All separately shipped motors shall be delivered to ELC for installation. Adjustable motor base and all bolts and nuts required for installation of base and motor shall be furnished by respective Contractor. 12.2.6 Furnish motor terminal connection diagram as prepared by motor manufacturers. 12.3 Motor Starters - Motor starters for mechanical equipment shall be furnished by the respective Contractors as called for on the drawings. In general, the following principles shall be followed: 12.3.1 All magnetic motor starters to be built -in in motor control panelboards will be furnished and installed by ELC. 12.3.2 All magnetic motor starters to be factory prewired shall be furnished and installed at the factory and shall be included in the respective Mechanical Contract. 12.3.3 All individual motor starters shall be furnished and installed by the ELC, unless noted to be furnished by others on plans. The ELC will install and wire all individual motor starters, including those furnished by others. 12.3.4 Magnetic motor starters furnished by ELC will be provided with auxiliary contacts required for operation of starting device only. Additional auxiliary contacts required for electrical interlock and automatic controls shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor responsible for the interlock wiring. 12.3.5 In order to be properly sized, all heater elements for overload relays on magnetic motor starters (except the starters factory prewired with equipment) shall be furnished and installed by the ELC in the field. The Contractor furnishing the motorized equipment shall be required to furnish a list of motor characteristics to the ELC so that properly sized heater elements may be provided. The list shall include equipment identification by name and by number. full load current, locked rotor current, voltage rating, and suggested service factor to compensate for operating duty cycle and ambient temperature. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 13. PAINTING 13.1 General 13.1.1 In general, all required field painting of piping. ductwork and other mechanical and electrical systems and components shall be done by subcontractor under the Contractor. However, all painting or finishing, which is required for special results and /or wherever painting or finishing is specifically referenced within the context of Divisions 15 and 16, all such painting or finishing shall be provided by the respective Contractor, except as otherwise noted. Other painting to be provided under the mechanical and electrical work is described below. 13.1.2 Contractors are referred to Section 9H for further clarification and scope of painting work for this project. 13.2 Work Included - By the Contractor GENE'' ". PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECT :AL WORK 'SECTION 1 B -5 13.2.1 Equipment with factory standard finishes: t shall touch -up paint all scratches or damages to finishes to match the factory finish. This shall include all Owner- fumished equipment. 13.2.2 All miscellaneous structural members, brackets, braces, hardware, and accessories provided by the Contractor shall be painted with light gray rust inhibiting metal primer, except as otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. Items in this category which are galvanized, cadmium or copper plated. stainless steel, or finished with a factory finish shall not be painted. 13.2.3 Nameplates and equipment identifications shall be masked -off or suitably protected from paint during touch -up or adjacent painting required by the respective Contractors. Protection of nameplates and similar identifications as may be required during paint operations performed by the painting subcontractor under the Contractor shall be provided by that painting subcontractor. 13.3 Painting Specifications 13.3.1 All painting work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All painting materials shall be of the best quality and suitable for the service intended. All finish paints shall present a glossy finish and /or shall match the color and texture of the adjacent areas and surfaces. 13.3.2 Surfaces to be painted by the respective mechanical or electrical Contractor shall be free of rust, scale, peeling, blistering, grease, oil, or deteriorating film prior to application of primer. 13.3.3 Applicable parts of Section 9H of those specifications shall govem work under this Section. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 1. GENERAL 1.1 Drawings and all general provisions of Contract, including other Division 1 Specification Sections. apply to this Section. 1.2 This section specifies administration and procedural requirements for Owner's continued operations, construction facilities and temporary controls, selective demolition and cutting and patching. 1.3 Refer to other Sections and Drawings for specific requirements and limitations applicable to demolition, and cutting and patching individual parts of work. 1.4 Requirements of this Section apply to all trade installation, removals, repairs, replacements, etc. 2. WORK SEQUENCE 2.1 The Work will be conducted in several phases to provide the least possible interference to the activities of the Owner's personnel and operation. 2.2 The Owner will provide a phasing plan and schedule and will instruct the Contractor as to the sequence of construction to permit the Owner's uninterrupted operation. The Contractor shall maintain a safe and clean environment during the construction period. 3. OWNER'S CONTINUING OPERATIONS 3.1 Work for this Project is within existing facilities which will remain in full operation throughout construction penod. 3.2 All remodeling work, new construction, etc. must be conducted so as to cause absolute minimum of interference with and inconvenience to Owner's continuing operations. 3.3 All construction and remodeling operations must be conducted as required to insure complete safety to persons (Owner's personnel, Contractor's personnel, general public and others) who may be on site or adjacent to work. 3.4 Entrances to and exits from existing buildings must be protected, kept free of restrictions or obstructions and maintained in full use at all times. Safety and well -being of occupants of this building and other persons must be pnme concern of Contractor at all times. 3.5 Use by Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, delivery persons, etc. of Owners property (buildings and site) must be restricted to those areas designated by Owner for such use. Contractor must obtain permission from Owner before beginning any use of property. 3.6 Provide adequate safeguards for control of dust and moisture during construction. Close coordination with Owner for these environmental controls is mandatory. 3.7 General Contractor will hold a pre - construction meeting with the Toys "R" Us Project Manager and store manager to describe and coordinate in -store activities. Weekly progress meetings should also be held. 3.8 Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury. 3.8.1 Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to occupied portions of building. REMODEL PROTOTYPE =RAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELINC ORK 'SECTION 1C -1 3.8.2 Erect temporary covered passageways whenever overhead work is performed. 3.8.3 Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 3.8.4 Protect existing floors to remain and new floors with suitable coverings. 3.8.5 Construct temporary insulated dustproof partitions where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 3.8.6 Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 3.8.7 Remove protections at completion of work. 3.8.8 Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. 3.8..9 Erect and maintain dust -proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. 3.8.9.1 Construct temporary barrier partition as required per state and local building codes and rules and OSHA standards to ensure public and employee safety. 3.8.9.2 Where necessary, construct temporary partition to maintain fire rating required by governing authority. 3.8.9.3 Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 4. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISF5 4.1 General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. 4.1.2 Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and the general public at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. 4.2 Maintain existing building in weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. 5. OWNER OCCUPANCY 5.1 The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations. 5.2 The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial Completion. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' 5.2.1 Obtain Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. 5.2.2 Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy the Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems in completed portions of the building. 6. TEMPORARY UTILITIES 6.1 Water and electrical energy will be made available only as they presently exist. General Contractor will provide and pay for such connections to, extensions from, and means of using these utilities as may be required. 6.2 Except as noted in following paragraph, Owner will pay utility company bills for water and electrical energy which is required for project and which passes through Owner's meters. 6.3 Owner will not pay for following: 6.3.1 Water which is wasted needlessly or expended without proper regard for conservational or ecological considerations. 6.3.2 Electrical energy expended in electric heating devices. 7. PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITY INSTALLATIONS 7.1 Before work is started, consult with public and private utility companies and agencies and with Owner relative to location, conditions, protection, maintenance, relocation, etc., of utility installations within boundaries of site or adjacent thereto. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to, companies and agencies providing gas, water, electrical, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, telephone, and site utilities and/or services: 7.2 Before item of work is started, carefully review information relative to existing utility installations, and plan and schedule work so as to avoid damage to equipment or work, or other adverse results. 7.3 Should utility installation be damaged or destroyed, or should injury or damage be caused to persons or property, party or parties (Contractors and /or subcontractors) responsible for such injury and/or damage shall be fully and exclusively liable and claims resulting therefrom. 8. WEATHER PROTECTION 8.1 All temporary enclosures, heating devices, fuel, etc. and labor and services required therefore to protect materials in storage, work in progress and completed construction from damage to defacement due to usual or unusual condition(s) of weather prior to time that building is completely and permanently enclosed (all exterior building construction -- walls, doors, windows, louvers, roofs, etc.- - 100 percent complete weathertight and insulated - R -11 Minimum) shall be considered "Weather Protection ". 8.2 Contractor shall provide and maintain weather protection as may be required by trades to properly protect work from damage during construction. 9. TEMPORARY HEAT 9.1 Except as provided in Paragraphs 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 (following) Contractor shall provide temporary heat required for proper and timely completion of total project REMODEL PROTOTYPE GENERA ROVISIONS FOR REMODELING WOR' 'SECTION 1C -2 including temporary space heaters with vent pipes, adequate controls, fuel, attendants, supervision, etc. 9.2 Mechanical Trades shall provide early use of or part of permanent heating system for supplementary heating subject to approval by Owner. 9.3 When permanent heating equipment is used for temporary heating, units shall be fitted with disposable type filters which shall be changed at regular intervals as directed by Owner. At end of temporary heating period and prior to being turned over to Owner, heating units shall be thoroughly cleaned and permanent filters installed. Mechanical Tradesman shall be responsible for operation, maintenance, cleaning, and warranty of these units during temporary heating period. 9.4 Owner will pay fuel bills for temporary heat provided by permanent heating system (only). Owner will not pay for fuel used in temporary heating devices. 10. EXISTING TOILET FACILITIES 10.1 Owner will not permit use of toilet facilities in existing building. Contractor shall provide portable toilets for subcontractors and enforce their use. 11. TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES 11.1 Provide and maintain temporary first aid facilities as required by OSHA and other federal, state and local authorities, laws, ordinances, regulations, etc. 12. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 12.1 Contractor and subcontractor shall at times exercise every precaution for prevention of fire(s). Further, make timely and adequate provisions for protection and safety of persons and property in event of fire. 12.2 Contractor shall provide fire protection for work and shall furnish fire extinguishers and /or other firefighting devices, equipment, etc. of types and in such quantities as required by appropriate officials. Further, Contractor shall maintain same in fully operable condition and keep them readily available on site at times. 12,3 Whenever work of particularly hazardous nature is being done, party doing such work shall provide additional and /or special fire protection as may be required. 12.4 Electrical arc welding and flame cutting equipment must be approved by Owner before they may be used within building. Gas welding equipment may not be used. Gasoline torches or burners will not be permitted. When welding or flame cutting is permitted, Contractor shall provide full -time stand -by watchperson, with fire- extinguisher mounted on cart or other means of transportation located immediately adjacent to work and ready for immediate use. 12.5 All trash, refuse, etc. must be removed from the building and legally disposed of after each day's work. 12.6 Smoking shall be prohibited in all portions of building. 13. SECURITY 13.1 Owner maintains full -time security watch at store. All traffic is subject to control and search by Owner's security personnel. At times, and with prior agreement between Owner and Contractor, overnight lock -in will be utilized. 13.2 Contractors, subcontractors, material persons, suppliers, delivery people, etc. will be required to cooperate fully with Owner's personnel in maintaining integrity of Owner's 01/03/00 t DIVISION 1' security program. 13.3 Provide security for tools, equipment, devices, etc. required or otherwise used for construction of project. and for materials which have been paid for by Owner but not yet incorporated into new construction. 14. RESTORATION OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, PAVING. ETC.: 14.1 In addition to other work required by Contract Documents, leave facilities and site in same condition as before project began. 14.2 Should existing construction, paving, landscaping. etc. be defaced, damaged or destroyed, same shall be repaired or replaced to complete satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and local building official having jurisdiction. 14.3 Where specific damage can be attributed to specific party (Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, delivery people, etc.), that party shall pay for repair or replacement of such damage. 14,4 Where damage cannot be attributed to specific party, Project Manager shall apportion cost of necessary repairs or replacement among various parties in such manner as seems proper. 14.5 In event of delay or dispute involving repair and /or replacement of damaged construction, Project Manager reserves right to order execution of work and to deduct full cost thereof from monies due Contractor. 14.6 Photographs of existing exterior conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to storage, removal operations, etc. must be filed with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 15. PRQTECTION OF FINISHED RQQFj 15.1 Provide temporary protective covering consisting of one layer of 3/4 inch thick Dow Chemical STYROFOAM or similar polystyrene or urethane foam type roof insulation, with full coverage overlay of minimum 5/8 -inch thick exterior grade plywood in as large sheets as available. 15.2 Protection shall be provided at existing roof area where heavy construction traffic will occur. 15.3 Place protection in accordance with following: 15.3.1 Set first layer of foam board firmly onto roof, with butt tight joints throughout. 15.3.2 Tape boards of layer together as necessary to retain firmly in place until succeeding work is placed. 15.3.3 Lay plywood over entire area with joints staggered from joints in layer of foam board, and provide suitable method of fastening boards at corners so as to retain same in place under traffic. 15.3.4 Provide sand bag ballast to hold plywood in place. 15.4 Areas protected may be modified during course of work to suit changing requirements, but must be maintained in good condition at times. 16. PROTECTION OF AREAS WHERE EXISTING ROOFING IS REMOVED REMODEL PROTOTYPE G =RAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELINI 'ORK 'SECTION 1C -3 16.1 Provide temporary plywood, waterproof covers, fleshings, etc. as required to keep roof deck dry and to maintain weathertightness of occupied space below roof while existing roofing is removed for required work. 16.2 Protect existing remaining roof insulation to keep water from penetrating insulation and causing damage to insulation, causing reduction of thermal insulating value, and possible leakage below. 16.3 Coordinate timing of protection work with cutting of openings in roof deck to avoid duplication of effort and to assure that completed protection work is not undone by others. 17. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 17.1 The following paragraphs below address the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal: 17.1.1 Portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. 17.1.2 Removal of interior partitions as indicated on drawings. 17.1.3 Removal of doors and frames indicated "remove." 17.1.4 Removal of built-in casework indicated "remove." 17.1.5 Removal of existing windows indicated to be filled in. 17.1.6 Removal and protection of existing fixtures, materials, and equipment items indicated 'salvage." 17.1.7 Roofing and roof insulation removal. 17.1.8 Cutting nonstructural concrete floors and masonry walls for piping, ducts, and conduits is included with the work of the respective mechanical and electrical specification sec- tions in Divisions 15 and 16. 17.1.9 Cutting holes in roof deck for installation of new rooftop mechanical equipment. 17.2 Submit schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Coordinate with Owner's Phasing Plan. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. 17.2.1 Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations. 17.2.2 Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of existing building and with Owner's partial occupancy of completed new addition. 17.3 Photographs of existing interior conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to storage, removal operations, etc. must be filed with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 17.4 Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will not disrupt Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations. 17.5 Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' Owner insofar as practicable. 17.6 Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. 17.7 Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure no interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 17.7.1 Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around dosed or obstructed traffic ways. Use signalman to ensure safe passage and egress. 17.8 Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame - cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame - cutting operations. Provide fire watch in areas not visible to flame cutter operator. 17.9 Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 17.9.1 Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities and Owner. 17.9.2 Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. 17.9.3 Locate. identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. 17.9.4 Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. 17.10 Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 17.10.1 Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 17.10.2 Cover and protect furniture. equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. 17.11 Perform selective demolition work in systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 17.11.1 Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Unless otherwise noted on Drawings cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power- driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power- driven impact tools. Tooth -in masonry where an exposed masonry opening is required. 17.11.2 Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and GENERP ROVISIONS FOR REMODELING WOR *SECTION 1C-4 promptly remove debris to avoid imposing dangerous and /or improper loads on existing structures. 17.11.3 Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 17.11.4 Demolish foundation walls to depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface. Demolish and remove below -grade wood or metal construction. Break up below -grade concrete slabs. 17.11.5 For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw at all times. 17.11.6 Completely fill and compact below -grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots, or other organic matter. 17.12 If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit written report to Owner's Representative in accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 17.13 Salvaged Items: Where indicated on Drawings as *Salvage - Deliver to Owner," carefully remove indicated items, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. 17.14 Remove from site all debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. Provide dumpster and locate on site per Owner's Field Representative. 17.14.1 If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 17.14.2 Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 17.15 Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. 18. CUTTING AND PATCHING 18.1 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 18.2 Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. 18.3 Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' C ERAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELIN 'ORK 'SECTION 1 C -5 demonstrate integrity of the installation. 18.7.2 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 18.4 Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 18.4.1 Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 18.4.2 Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. 18.4.3 Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 18.4.4 Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 18.4.5 Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 18.5 Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 18.5.1 Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 18.6 Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations. 18.6.1 In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 18.6.2 18.6.3 18.6.4 18.6.5 To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Cut through concrete and masonry using cutting machine such as carborundum saw or diamond core drill. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division -2 where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. Bypass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services are shown or required to be removed. relocated or abandoned. Cut -off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by- passing and cutting. 18.7 Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 18.7.1 Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to REMODEL PROTOTYPE 18.7.3 Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Where patching occurs in smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken containing the patch. after the patched area has received primer and second coat. 18.7.4 Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. 18.8 Cleaning: Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching Is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features 'before painting or other finishing is applied. Refer to painting and flooring specification sections for other requirements. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. • END OF SECTION • 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' CONTRACTOR'S NAME: CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: TOYS - 11* US, INC. 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 Attn: Bid Committee Re: TOYS 'R' US REMODEL Tukwila, WA Gentlemen: The undersigned being familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work with the drawings and specifications for the proposed above referenced project as prepared by CASCO, 10877 Watson Road, St. Louis, MO 63127 hereby proposes and agrees if this proposal is accepted to enter into a contract to supply any labor, materials, services and equipment necessary for the complete execution of all general construction work In strict accordance with the plans and specifications for a lump sum of: DOLLARS (S Write Out in Words Write in Figures and not more than Consecutive Calendar Days (not to exceed 120 days construction condition date listed in specification). This bid is based upon proprietary brands as shown on plans and /or specified. The undersigned further proposes and agrees hereby to commence work with an adequate force and equipment immediately after being notified in writing to do so, and to complete all work as required by the plans and specifications within the number of consecutive calendar days as itemized above. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner or his representative to reject any or all bids, and it is agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days from bid date. It is further acknowledged that, after thorough examination of the site, drawings and specifications, the above quoted prices do not include any changes or substitutions to specified materials or methods. Any proposed changes or substitutions are itemized by attachment herewith for consideration noting the appropriate Acid or Deduct amount. (Reference documents for specifically requested alternates.) We propose to subcontract the following Items of work to other firms as follows: Item of Work At the time of submission of this proposal, the undersigned has received the following addenda (if any): Addendum No. Date REMODEL PROTOTYPE _____avtonirigQr_h_lame and AddrQig Name of Firm By (Typed) PROPOSAL FORM 'SECTION 1D-1 By (Signature) Title Official Address Telephone Attest: Date: Secretary Enclosures: Exhibit A (Pages 1 thru 4) SEAL Exhibit B (Pages 1 thru 2) Exhibit C (Pages 1 of 1) Exhibit D (Pages 1 of 1) 01/03/00 DIVISION 1 • PROPOSAL FORM 'SECTION 1D-2 REMODEL PROTOTYPE THE FOLLOWING EXHIBIT A (PAGES 1 THRU 4) IS TO BE USED BY BIDDERS IN SUBMITTING THEIR PROPOSALS TO OWNER. THIS SAME EXHIBIT WILL BE MADE AN ATTACHMENT TO THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND THE SUCCESSFUL CONTRACTOR. 01/03/00 DIVISION 1* PROPOSAL FORM *SECTION 10 EXHIBIT A Project Cost Breakdown of Major Categories of Work PROJECT NAME DESCRIPTION AMOUNT DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS CONTRACTOR z 1 -010 Temporary Facilities $ 1 -020 Temporary Utilities $ cZ 2 1 -030 Supervision $ a 1 -040 Administrative (Inc. Insurance) $ v g 1 -050 Surveyors $ co w 1 -060 Clean Up $ 1 -070 Security $ w O 1 -080 Miscellaneous $ 1 -090 Liability $ Q u. TOTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS $ N D w DIVISION 2 - SITE IMPROVEMENTS ? 2 -010 Demolition V 2 -020 Site Clearing / Grading $ D a 2 -030 Utilities 0 to Storm Drains $ 0 H w w Sanitary Sewers $ Water Service $ u. v Total Utilities $ t .. z 2 -040 Building Excavation & Backfill $ V —1-:-. 2 -050 Bituminous Paving, Striping, Stops, Signs $ r- 2 -0 Landscaping $ z 2 -070 Miscellaneous $ 2 -080 Pile Installation $ 2 -090 Site Concrete $ TOTAL SITE IMPROVEMENTS $ DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 3 -010 Building Foundations, Slab & Sidewalks at Building Installation $ 3 -020 Concrete Steel Reinforcing $ REMODEL PROTOTYPE TOTAL CONCRETE $ 01/03/00 DIVISION 1' PROPOSAL FORM 'SECTION 1 D-4 PROJECT NAME DESCRIPTION DIVISION 4 - MASONRY DIVISION/ - ROOFING & MOISTURE CONTROL DIVISION 8 - DOORS. WINDOWS. GLASS EXHIBIT A CONTRACTOR z 4 -010 Masonry $ re B TOTAL MASONRY $ � U U DIVISION 5 - STEEL u.� 5 -010 Structural Steel $ w 0 5-030 Steel Erection $ 1 5 -020 Miscellaneous Steel $ 5 -030 Steel Erection $ u. Nd TOTAL STEEL $ w z P DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK j m N 6 -010 Carpentry $ p I ,,, ww TOTAL CARPENTRY $ H ui� F O 7 -010 Roofing $ z 7 -020 Flashing $ 7 -030 Metal Roofing and Siding $ 7 -040 Insulation $ 7 -050 Caulking $ TOTAL ROOFING & MOISTURE CONTROL $ 8 -010 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames $ 8 -020 Glass, Glazing & Aluminum $ 8 -030 Finish Hardware $ TOTAL DOORS, GLASS & HARDWARE $ REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 AMOUNT PAGE 2 OF 4 DIVISION 1' PROPOSAL FORM *SECTION 1D-5 PAGE 3 OF 4 PROJECT NAME DESCRIPTION DIVISION 9 - FINISHES DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL EXHIBIT A REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 CONTRACTOR AMOUNT 9 -010 Painting Z Interior Painting $ 1 w Exterior Painting $ f l Total Painting $ a U 9 -020 Ceramic Tile $ v g 9-030 VCT /Resilient Flooring $ co w 9 -040 Acoustical Ceiling $ 9 -050 Drywall & Associated Framing $ co O 9.060 EIFS & Stucco $ w TOTAL FINISHES $ co d al Z V 10-010 Toilet Partitions $ uJ 10 -020 Toilet Accessories $ m a o 10.030 Miscellaneous Items $ 0 co w W TOTAL SPECIALTIES $ � u- LU 2 v 15 -010 HVAC $ Z 15-020 Sprinkler $ 15.030 Plumbing $ Within 5' of Building $ Outside 5' of Building $ Sub -Total Plumbing $ ______� TOTAL MECHANICAL $ DIVISION 1• PROPOSAL FORM 'SECTION 1D-6 EXHIBIT A PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR DESCRIPTION AMOUNT DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16 -010 Electrical (Within 5' of Building) $ 16 -020 Electrical (Outside 5' of Building) $ w UU LL TOTAL ELECTRICAL $ 34 -010 Sign Installation $ TOTAL SIGN INSTALLATION $ CONTRACTOR SUB -TOTAL $ 20 -999 Overhead and Profit $ TOTAL OVERHEAD AND PROFIT $ 19 -010 Taxes $ 2n P W W I o P TOTAL OVERHEAD AND PROFIT $ 50 -010 Deductions $ TOTAL DEDUCTIONS $ 60 -010 Alternates $ TOTAL ALTERNATES $ GRAND TOTAL $ REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 PAGE 4 OF 4 DIVISION 1" ARCHITECTjJRAL Al COVER SHEET D1 DEMOLITION SHEET A1.0 FLOOR PLAN RF1 FIXTURE PLAN A2.0 ARCHITECTURAL MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS A3.0 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS (EXCLUDE ©'90S STORES) A4.0 WALL SECTIONS (EXCLUDE AT '90S STORES) A4.1 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS (EXCLUDE @ '90S STORES) A5.0 MISCELLANEOUS PLANS AND DETAILS (EXCLUDE Q '90S STORES) FP1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PLAN AND NOTES ELECTRICAL E1.0 MAIN FLOOR POWER PLAN E1.1 RACKING POWER PLAN E2.0 LIGHTING PLAN E2.1 MEZZANINE LIGHTING PLAN ((@ MEZZ STORES ONLY) E2.1 IN RACK LIGHTING PLAN E3.0 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E4.0 PANEL SCHEDULES E5.0 COMPUTER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM RF1.1 IN -RACK POWER PLAN REMODEL PROTOTYPE LIST OF DRAWINGS "SECTION 1E-1 01/03/00 DIVISION r EXHIBITS "SECTION 1F-1 EXHIBIT `C-1 GUARANTEE DATE: TO: TOYS - R" US, INC. 461 From Road Paramus, New Jersey 07652 The undersigned having heretofore entered into a contract with TOYS "R'" US, INC. dated for located at according to certain plans and specifications as identified in the contract and in accordance with the terms of said contract, do hereby guarantee that all the labor and material furnished and work performed by us under said contract is in conformity with such plans and specifications and authorized alterations thereto and that such materials and equipment installed pursuant to said contract is free from imperfect workmanship, and we agree to repair at our own cost and expense all of the work covered under said contract and change orders witch may prove to be defective for a period of year(s) from the date hereof. Furthermore, we agree to repair at our sole cost any work which we may affect of disturb in making the repairs herein contemplated. By: Title: Guarantee Period Begins (Date) REMODEL PROTOTYPE EXHIBIT - C-2" SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS TO: TOYS "R" US, INC. 461 From Road Paramus, New Jersey 07652 PROJECT: (name & address) State of: County of: The undersigned herby certifies that to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, except as listed below, the Releases or Waivers of Lien attached hereto include this contractor, all of his subcontractors, all suppliers of materials and equipment, and all performers of work, labor or services who have or may have liens against any property of the Owner arising In any manner out of the performance of the Contract referenced above. EXCEPTIONS: (if none, write "NONE ". If required by the Owner, the subcontractor shall furnish bond satisfactory to the Owner for each exception.) SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: Notary Public: 1. Contractor's Final Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional upon receipt of final payment. 2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, accompanied by a list thereof. CONTRACTOR: Address: By: Subscribed and sworn before me this day of , 200 My Commission Expires: 09/22/00 DIVISION 1' EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F-2 TO: TOYS 'R US, INC. 461 From Road Paramus, New Jersey 07652 WHEREAS, pursuant to contract made by and between, the Owner, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, for final payment is about to be made. NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and of the sum of DOLLARS $ ) LAWFUL MONEY OF THE united States being the full and entire sum due upon the completion of the contract aforesaid to the said Contractor does herby remise, release and forever discharge of and from any and all manner of actions, suites, debts, dues, sums of money, accounts, reckonings, bonds, bills, covenants, controversies, agreements, promises, claims, demands and liens whatsoever in law or in equity which the said Contractor has or may have for or on account of or in connection with the contract aforesaid. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Contractor has caused its mane to be hereunto subscribed and its seal to be hereunto affixed this day of two thousand and ATTEST OR WITNESS: (SEAL) CONTRACTOR By: Title: Address: WITNESS By: Title: REMODEL PROTOTYPE EXHIBIT Ter FINAL RELEASE 09/22/00 Description Reference Tax Life (Years) Direct Cost Electrical contractor's cost for isolated ground (IG) and normal power wiring of cash registers, computers, cash wraps, telephones and intercom 5 Cost to install special purpose lighting fixtures (Type B and B1 or below). Also, includes cost, as required, of branch circuit conduit and wiring, conduit and wiring to designated panels and all other materials necessary to complete and install the subject light fixtures ? Fixtures mounted on racks (Type No.'s V, V1, V3) ? Track lighting (Type No. H) 5 Electrical power wiring for rack power and lights, signs, bike assembly counter, soda and ice bream coolers, vending machines, refund /exchange desk, showcase counter, TVNCR cabinet, manager's workstation, automatic sliding door, service desk, customer pick-up unit (C.P.U.) sign and call system and receptacle and low voltage raceway for EAS system, and door bell. 5 Contractor's cost to relocate or install, as required, wood counters, security sensors, casework, shelving, countertops, register check -out counter, millwork. C.P.U. sign. 5 Contractor's cost to install owner supplied impact doors and C.P.U. si • n. 5 Steel support for impact doors including steel channel jamb, steel plate and diagonal bracing. 5 Contractor's cost to construct boxed corners on store fixtures. 5 Contractor's cost to furnish and install steel support for gondolas including gondolas channel, steel plate, and angles. Also, include cost to paint channels and angels. 5 DIVISION 1' REMODEL PROTOTYPE EXHIBITS Toys - 1 , 1" Us Remodel Section 1245 — Tax Form 'SECTION 1F Exhibit 'C-4" Page 1 of 3 09/22/00 Description Reference Tax Life (Years) Direct Cost Contractor's cost to relocate and reinstall exterior Toys "R" Us sign. 5 Contractor's cost to furnish and install plastic laminate end •anels to end of store fixtures. 5 Cost to install new canopy manufactured by Vacuform Industries. 5 Bumpers and corner guards. 5 New thermoformed entry portal manufactured by Vacuform Industries "color sky blue" ABS panel system. 5 Vacuform wall panels (material and installation). 5 Automatic sliding door The auto door contract with Horton through the GC is to provide and install. The only additional GC cost is to install the steel lintel at the door o ' enin • . 5 — 0.125 I _ inch thick ABS plastic panels attached to Z- Bar track with grip -teeth for ease of removal. Include cost of ABS plastic panels, Z -Bar track with grip teeth, plywood and felt, and aluminum retainer. 5 DIVISION 1' REMODEL PROTOTYPE EXHIBITS Toys "R" Us Remodel Section 1245 — Tax Form 'SECTION 1F Exhibit T-4 Page 2 of ^ 09/22/00 Description Reference Tax Life (Years) Direct Cost Demolition Expense Vin I com•osition tiles CT 7 Carpet 7 General conditions Allocable General contractors fee Allocable SUB TOTAL PROJECT COST Architect's fee Allocable TOTAL PROJECT COST DIVISION 1' • Cost amount to be furnished by Architectural Project Manager. Signature of General Contractor Print authorized Signatory's Name Title of Signatory Print General Contractors Name Date: REMODEL PROTOTYPE EXHIBITS Toys "R" Us Remodel Section 1245 — Tax Form 'SECTION 1 F -5 Exhibit "C-4 Page 3 of 3 09/22/00 DIVISION 3' CONCRETE PATCHING 'SECTION 3B -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools equipment required for completing concrete work indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 2.2.1 Patching of existing concrete surfaces. 2.2.2 New concrete slabs, etc. 2.2.3 All other concrete work indicated on the drawings as required. 3. N RAL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 "Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301.84, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. except as modified by the Supplemental Requirements below." REMODEL PROTOTYPE 4. SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Concrete shall have a 28-day compressive strength and density, in accordance with the following: PCF EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS 4000 ALL OTHER CONCRETE (U.N.O.) 3000 STRENGTH DENSITY PSI 145 145 4.2 Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4" unless a high range water - reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of all high range water - reducing admixture shall not exceed 4 ". The slump of concrete containing a high range water - reducing admixture shall not exceed 10 ". 4.3 Concrete exposed to weather shall be air entrained. Air content shall be between 4 and 8 percent. 4.4 The minimum portland cement content (ASTM C150) shall be 470 pounds per cubic yard for 3000 psi concrete and 611 pounds per cubic yard for 4000 psi concrete. Flyash is not permitted. 4.5 Reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A615, GR60, unless noted otherwise. 4.6 Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. 4.7 Concrete Finishes: As indicated on the drawings. - END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 DIVISION 4• UNIT MASONRY WORK 'SECTION 4A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1,2 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following Standards: 1.2.1 American Concrete Institute, ACI 530 /ASCE 5-88, "Building Code Requirements for Concrete Masonry Structures". 1.2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.2.2.1 ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 1.2.2.2ASTM A82. Standard Specifications for Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.2.2.3ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 1.2.2.4 ASTM A167. Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat- Resisting Plates, Sheet and Strip. 1.2.2.5 ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Low - Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 1.2.2.6ASTM A366. Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold - Rolled Sheet. Commercial Quality. 1.2.2.7ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.2.2.8ASTM A641, Standard Specification for Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 1.2.2.9ASTM C90. Standard Specification for Hollow Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 1.2.2.10 ASTM C140, Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 1.2.2.11 ASTM C270, Standard Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 1.2.2.12 ASTM C476. Standard Specifications for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. 1.2.2.13 ASTM 02240, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties - Durometer Hardness. 1.2.2.14 1.2.2.15 ASTM E447, Methods of Test for Compressive strength of Masonry Prisms. 1.2.2.16 ASTM C -109, test method for compressive strength of hydraulic mortars. 1.2.2.17 ASTM C -1107, standard specification for packaged hydraulic- cement grout. 1.2.3 Cast Stone Institute (C.S.I.) 1.2.3.1 All applicable standards and specifications. 1.2.4 National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) ASTM E329, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete Steel and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction. 1.2.4.1 Technical Note No. 6, Estimating the Fire Resistance of Concrete Masonry. 1.2.4.2 Technical Note No. 35, Fire Safety with Concrete Masonry. 1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing masonry work, and related items indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). 2.2 Masonry walls have been designed to span vertically as simple spans from floor to roof and are dependent upon the completed roof structure, metal roof deck, and completion of all masonry walls for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces, the contractor is solely responsible for providing all necessary bracing as required for constructions loads, for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces until the entire structure is complete. The shoring shall not rely on any moment resistance capacity of the footings. 2.3 This section specifies a non- shrink, high - precision, extended flow, cement -based grouting material. 3. $.VBMITTALS 3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 3.3 Concrete Block Strength Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification, signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, that all concrete block to be used for this project complies with the requirements of ASTM C90 -90, Type 1 and has a minimum net area compressive strength of 1900 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140. 3.4 Submit samples approximately 4' x 4" x 4" of concrete block for integrally colored and architectural or customized units. Provide samples of matching custom color mortar. After Owner /Project Manager review and acceptance of block and mortar samples, the contractor shall erect a sample panel (3' x 3') showing block, joints and workmanship. Do not proceed with the manufacture of the custom concrete block units until Owner approval of sample panel is received. 3.4.1 Note: Unless specifically requested, no samples are required for standard gray, smooth face concrete block. 3.5 Where stone sills are required, provide sample sized approximately 6" long. 3.6 Review of submittals will cover general design only. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed dimension, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions. performance or guarantees required. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 4' UNIT MASONRY WORK 'SECTION 4A -2 to: QUALITY ASSURANCE General The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of masonry work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of 'Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 4.1.2 Masonry materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or matenal shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. 4.1.3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. 4.1.4 At the completion of all masonry work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification, in a form acceptable to local authority and Owner's Representative, signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all masonry work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. 4.1.5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. 4.1.6 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all masonry work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 4.1.7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shalt be preserved by the independent testing agency. 4.2 The testing agency shall verify compliance with design drawings and specifications and keep a record that shall cover such tests and inspections as may be required by local authorities having jurisdiction. Such tests and inspections may included, but are not necessarily limited 4.2.1 Quality and testing of masonry units and materials for mortar and grout. 4.2.2 Make prism tests in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B for each size and type of unit, one test in advance of construction and one test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of wall area during construction. Prisms shall be ungrouted. Prism strength shall be 1500 psi minimum at 28 days. unless noted otherwise. 4.2.3 Proportioning, mixing, and consistency of mortar and grout. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 4.2.4 Laying, mortaring, and grouting of masonry units and masonry structural elements. 4.2.5 Condition, grade, size, spacing, and placing of reinforcement. 4.2.6 Any significant or unusual construction loads on completed masonry structural elements. 4.2.7 General progress of work. 4.3 When the ambient temperature falls below 40 F. or rises above 100 F., a complete record shall be kept of weather conditions and of preconditioning and protection given to masonry materials, and protection and curing of completed work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 5.1 Size: Manufacturer's standard sized units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long by 8" high (15 -5/8" by 7 -5/8" actual), unless otherwise shown. Thickness to be as detailed. 5.2 Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture, size and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. Units shall be delivered to the job site with insulation inserts installed, 5.3 Provide special shapes where shown and where re- quired for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. 5.4 Custom Units: 5.4.1 Refer to drawings for color and location of integrally colored units (i.e., white, brown, gray, beige, etc.). 5.4.2 Refer to drawings for type and location of architectural or customized units (i.e., smooth, split face, fluted, scored, ribbed, slump, etc.) 5.4.3 Where indicated, provide units called out by manufacturer and catalog number or approved equal. 5.5 Grade and Strength 5.5.1 All masonry units shall be normal weight block conforming to ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1. 5.5.2 Net area compressive strength of concrete masonry units shall be not less than 1900 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140, unless masonry prisms are made. Prism strength shall be 1500 psi minimum at 28 days, unless noted otherwise. 5.6 Wherever a fire- resistance classification is shown or scheduled for unit masonry construction (4 hour, 3 hour and similar designations) comply with the requirements for materials and installation established by the National Concrete Masonry Association Tech #6 and #35 and other governing authorities for the construction shown. 6. MATCH EXISTING 6.1 Where indicated that masonry is to "match existing ", visit the site and verify type, color, texture, etc. of existing units to be matched. Provide matching units as approved by the Owner's Representative. 7. MORTAR MATERIALS 01/03/00 DIVISION 4' UNIT MASONRY WORK *SECTION 4A -3 7.1 Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type S. 7.2 For job site pigmented mortar use mineral pigments, and with exception of carbon black limit to 10 percent of cement content, and carbon black to 1 -1/2 percent of cement content. Where masonry cement is used, limit color pigments to 1/2 of preceding percentages. Color pigments shall be comparable in quality to material manufactured by Frank D. Davis Co., Beltsville, Maryland. 7.3 Premixed colored masonry mortar shall match inte- grally colored block. 8. GROUT 8.1 Grout shall conform to ASTM C476. 8.2 Non - shrink grout: Grout shall be pre - packaged, non- metallic, non - gaseous expansive grout containing a balanced blend of washed and graded aggregates, Portland cement, plasticizing agents and a proprietary shrinkage compensating system. 8.2.1 Non -shrink grout shall be used as a setting bed for lintels and miscellaneous beams. 9. REINFORCING BARS 9.1 Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615. Grade 60, unless noted otherwise. 10. JOINT REINFORCING 10.1 Continuous wire reinforcing (joint reinforcing) shall be ladder type fabricated units with a single pair of 9 gage side rods and 9 gage continuous cross rods fabricated from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82. and galvanized to conform to ASTM A641, Class 1. 10.2 Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements for joint reinforcing include the following: Dur -O -Wall Company AA Wire Products Company Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 11. ANCHORS. TIES, AND METAL ACCESSORIES 11.1 Anchors, ties, and metal accessories shall conform to the following requirements where applicable: 11.1.1 Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, 16 gage minimum, galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. 11.1.2 Structural Steel: ASTM A36 galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. 11.1.3 Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. 11.1.4 Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, type 304. 11.2 Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements for anchors include the following: AA Wire Products Company Heckmann Building Products, Inc. National Wire Products Industries 12. MASONRY ACCESSORIES. FINISHES. AND RELATED ITEMS 12.1 Masonry Cleaner: "Sure Klean Vanatrol" as manufac- tured by The Process Solvent Company. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 12.2 Moistureproofing: Prime -a -Pell, 200 dear as manufactured by Chemprobe Corp., Garland, Texas (800) 760.6776. 12.3 Masonry Cell Foamed Insulation: 12.3.1 General: Product to be multi- component system which when combined with compressed air forms a hardened plastic foam fully filling the cells of the masonry units. Injection into wall to be through mortar joints under quality supervision. Installer to be licensed and certified by the manufacturer and shall comply with manufacturer's guarantee requirements and all applicable codes and standards. 12.3.2 Properties: Product to have R -value at 25° F of approximately 5.0 per inch (K- value), be non - combustible with a flame Class 1 rating, no thermal drift, acoustical properties in the 45 db or less range, biodegradable, non ozone depleting and suitable for retrofit as well as new construction. 12.3.3 Materials: The following manufacturers are to be used as specified product. 12.3.3.1 Core -Fill 509 Foam Insulation Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. P.O. Drawer 4186 Hickory, NC 28603 Phone: (704) 322- 6512 Fax: (704) 322 -7688 Email: www.core- fill500.com 12.3.3.2 Polymaster Foamed -in -Place Insulation Polymaster, Inc. 10431 Lexington Drive Knoxville, TN 37932 Phone: (423) 966 -3005 or 1-800-580-FOAM (3626) Fax: (423) 675 -3300 Email: www.polymaster.QQM 12.4 Premolded Joint Filler: Expanded or molded poly- styrene foam thickness and width to suit joint in which used minus depth necessary for caulking work. 12.5 Premolded Control Joint Gaskets: 12.5.1 Gasket shall be of natural or synthetic rubber, solid section ASTM D2240, not less than 70 durometer, regular or wide flange as shown or required. 12.5.2 Gaskets shall be cross - shaped in section similar to regular flange type designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral masonry stability, as manufactured by Dur-O-Wall Company. 12.6 Concealed Masonry Flashing and Adhesive (thru -wall or spandrel beam flashing): Flexible vinyl sheet formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof, black color, 20 mils thick unless otherwise indicated. Use specific types and adhe- sives recommended by manufacturer for parapets, spandrel beams, door and window flashing and foundation flashing. 13. STONE SILLS 13.1 Cast stone sills consisting of white Portland Cement, aggregates, reinforcing, etc. with a smooth texture finish. Stone sills to be consistent in texture and color and free of chips and cracks. Joints in sills to be determined by best industry standards for maximum allowable lengths. 13.2 Provide all anchors, fasteners, dowels, etc., for a 01/03/00 DIVISION 4' UNIT MASONRY WORK 'SECTION 4A-4 complete and finished installation as shown on drawings. 13.3 Sills to be as shown on drawings with 3/8" mortar setting bed. Mortar to be white in color. All mortar mixes and applications to be per latest ASTM standards for cast stone application and installation. 13.4 Fabricator: Member of the Cast Stone Institute (C.S.I.). PART 3: EXECUTION 14. PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING 14.1 Masonry units shall be sound and free of chips and major cracks which would impair the strength of permanence of the construction. 14.2 Masonry units shall be kept dry during delivery and while stored at the site. Protect units with waterproof coverings to minimize moisture absorption. 14.3 Store masonry units on level platforms permitting air to circulate under stack. 15. PREPARATION 15.1 Make layout in accordance with project drawings. 15.2 Remove laitance, loose aggregate, and anything that may prevent mortar from bonding to foundation. 15.3 Do not proceed with masonry construction, until permitted, when the following foundation tolerances are not met: Horizontal alignment +1/4 in. in 10 ft. (Variation from plan 1/2 in, max. variation Vertical alignment +1/4 in. in 10 ft. (Variation from level) 1/2 in. max. variation dimension) 15.4 Mortar (cold weather) - When temperature is less than 40 "F. comply with requirements of the International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council, 'IMIAWC" - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 15.5 Mortar (hot weather) - Use acceptable hot weather precautions in placing and curing of the mortar when air temperature exceeds 100°F and when there is a drying wind at temperatures above 90 °F. 16. PLACING MASONRY UNITS 16.1 Construct masonry with experienced personnel, using manufactured masonry units and materials necessary to hold units in desired position. There shall be an experienced foreman on the job at all times. 16.2 Thickness: Build walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single -wythe walls to actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. Use concrete units that are sound, dry, clean and free from ice and frost when placed. 16.3 Cut masonry units with motor- driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. 16.4 Dampening of concrete units before or during con- REMODEL PROTOTYPE struction shall not be permitted unless made necessary by unusual conditions and approved by the Project Manager. 16.5 Adjust each unit to final position in wall while mortar is still soft and plastic. Remove any unit disturbed after mortar has stiffened, and re -lay with fresh mortar. 16.6 Align vertical cells to be filled with grout to provide a continuous unobstructed opening not less than 3" x 4 ". 16.7 Pattern Bond: Lay all block in the bond pattern shown or if not shown or specified in a running bond pattern with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners, unless otherwise shown. Do not use units with less than 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 18.8 Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement- type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less- than -half- size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. 16.9 Lay -up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. 16.10 Where indicated, inner wythe of front wall to receive graphics and exterior wall to receive paint, ceramic tile or exterior insulation and finish system shall be carefully and accurately laid to a flush, true and plumb plane with tooled joints. 16.11 Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course: do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 16.12 Built -in Work 16.12.1 As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of these Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. 16.12.2 Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. 16.12.3 Where built -in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 16.12.4 Non - bearing Interior Partition Walls: Build full height of story to underside of structure above, unless otherwise shown. 16.13 Temporarily brace walls to provide stability during construction, until structure is complete. 16.14 Temporarily shore masonry to provide support during construction, until structure is complete. 17. REINFORCEMENT 17.1 Preparation: 17.1.1 Place all reinforcement for masonry in accordance with project documents. 17.1.2 Use metal reinforcement at time of placement which is free of mud, oil, or other coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. 17.1.3 Metal reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a 01/03/00 DIVISION 4• UNIT MASONRY WORK 'SECTION 4A -5 combination of both may be used provided the minimum dimensions, including height of deformations, and weight of wire brushed specimens are not less than required by applicable ASTM specification. 17.1.4 Do not use metal reinforcement with kinks or unrequired bends. Do not straighten nor repair bars in a manner that will damage the bar or adjacent construction. 17.2 Fabrication: 17.2.1 Fabricate bars without damaging the materials. 17.2.2 Bending of bars 17.2.2.1 Perform bending on unheated bars, unless otherwise acceptable. 17.2.2.2 Bars larger than #5 shall not be field bent unless acceptable to Project Manager. 17.2.2.3 The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, other than for stirrups, shall not be less than the values listed below except that for Grade 40 bars in sizes #3 to #11 inclusive, with turns not exceeding 180°, the minimum diameter shall be five bar diameters. MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND Bar Size Minimum Diameter #3 through #8 6 bar diameters #9, #10, and #11 8 bar diameters 17.2.2.4 Inside diameter of bend for stirrups shall not be less than four bar diameters. 17.2.3 Standard hooks - Use one of following: 17.2.3.1 A 180° turn plus extension of at least four bar diameters but not less than 2 -1/2 in. at free end of bar. 17.2.3.2 A 90° turn plus extension of at least 12 bar diameters at free end of bar. 17.2.3.3 For stirrup anchorage only, either a 90° or a 135° turn plus an extension of at least six bar diameters but not less than 2 -1/2 in. at free end of bar. 17.2.4 Welding - Welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted. 17.2.5 Joint reinforcement: 17.2.5.1 Reinforcement of two or more deformed longitudinal wires weld connected with cross wires, forming a ladder design. 17.2.5.2 Make out -to -out spacing of longitudinal wires 2 in. less than the nominal width of the wall or wythe. 17.2.5.3 Space welded contacts or cross wires with each longitudinal wire not more than 16 in. 17.2.5.4 Provide joint reinforcement in flat sections 10 to 20 ft. long, except that factory- formed corner reinforcements and other special shapes may be shorter. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 17.2.6 Anchors and ties - Fabricate anchors and ties in one of the following ways: 17.2.6.1 Wire mesh ties shall be No. 16 gage minimum 1/2 in. mesh steel wire, 12 in. minimum length and 1 -1/2 in. less than the nominal width of wall. 17.2.7 Rigid steel anchors at intersecting walls shall be 1 -1/2 x 1/4 x 24 in. minimum with ends turned up 2 in. minimum and shall conform to ASTM A36. 17.2.8 Dovetail anchors shall be sheet steel 0.06 in. minimum thickness, 1 in. wide, and turned up 1/4 in. at outer end. 17.2.9 Corrugated or crimped metal ties, shall be sheet 0.03 in. minimum thickness, 7/8 in. wide, 6 in. long. 17.2.10 Wire ties shall be joint reinforcement. 17.3 Placing reinforcing bars: 17.3.1 Embed bars in grout and provide a minimum masonry cover not less than the following: 17.3.1.1 Minimum 2" where exposed to earth or weather. 17.3.1.2 Minimum 1 -1/2" where not exposed to earth or weather. 17.3.2 Make splices in bars as shown on project drawings unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 17.3.3 Provide clear distance between horizontal bars in layer not less than the diameter of the bars, nor 1 ", except that they may be bundled in pairs. 17.3.4 Provide clear distance between vertical bars not less than one and one-half times the bar diameter, nor 1 -1/2", except that they may be bundled in pairs. 17.3.5 Lay horizontal bars as work progresses, as noted on plans. 17.3.6 Hold vertical bars in hollow unit masonry in place at 200 bar diameters or 10 ft. maximum on center whichever is lesser. 17.4 Placing Joint Reinforcement: 17.4.1 Place masonry joint reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face -shell mortar beds and are embedded in mortar or grout for their entire length with minimum cover of 5/8" when exposed to weather or earth and 1/2" at other locations. 17.4.2 Place factory- fabricated sections at corners and wall intersections, unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 17.4.3 Unless noted otherwise. joint reinforcement shall not be continuous through a control joint or an expansion joint. 17.4.4 Lap the ends of joint reinforcement 6" for deformed wire and 12" for plain wire when spliced. 17.4.5 Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: 17.4.5.1 For multi -wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by Code but not more than 16" o.c. vertically. 01/03/00 DIVISION 4' UNIT MASONRY WORK 17.4.5.2 For single -wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise shown. 17.4.6 Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1' -Q" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing place in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'- 0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. 17.5 Placing anchors, ties, and metal accessories 17.5.1 Install required anchors, ties. and metal accessories as the masonry construction progresses. 17.5.2 Set bolts and inserts vertically in the top of the walls, pilasters, beams or columns 3" minimum from any face in masonry 7" or more in thickness. and at the center line in thinner masonry sections. 17.5.3 Adjust shelf angles as required to keep the masonry level and at required elevation. Provide anchorage as detailed in the project documents. 17.5.4 Hold all metal accessories to masonry by firmly embedding anchorage into grout or mortar 3" minimum. 18. MORTAR 18.1 Mixing mortar • Mix all cementitious materials and aggregate in mechanical mixers for a minimum period of 3 to 5 minutes, after all materials are placed in the mixer, with the amount of water required to produce the desired workability. Allow hand mixing only when acceptable. 18.2 Make workability or consistency of mortar on the board such that it can be worked with the trowel. Water for tempering shall be available on scaffold at all times. 18.3 Do not permit mortar to stand more than 1 hr. without remixing. 18.4 Discard mortar which has begun to set or is not used within 2 -1/2 hr. after initial mixing. Retemper mortar which has stiffened due to evaporation to restore its workability. 18.5 Mix colored mortar to produce uniform color throughout. Mix trial batches, dry, and establish the color by sample panels. 19. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS 19.1 Place hollow units with full mortar bedment in all courses of piers, columns, pilaster. in starting courses on footings and solid foundation walls, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with grout or concrete. In other cases provide cross web bedding when required. 19.2 19.3 194 Place hollow units with head joints tightly mortar bedded for a minimum depth from each face equal to the masonry unit face shell thickness. Make horizontal and vertical face joints 3/8" thick unless otherwise required. Shove vertical mortar joints tight. Tool mortar joints in exposed exterior surfaces when thumbprint- hard with a round jointer unless otherwise required. Point joints tight in unparged masonry below grade. 19.5 Remove mortar protrusions extending more than 1/2" into cells or cavities to be grouted. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 'SECTION 4A -6 19.6 Fill horizontal joints between top of masonry partitions and underside of slabs or beams with mortar unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 19.7 Provide joints for sealing on the exterior face at control joints and at other locations where sealed joints are indicated. Rake joints and tool smooth and uniform to depth of 3/4", unless otherwise required or accepted. 19.8 In temperatures exceeding 100°F., do not lay out mortar beds ahead of placing of units. Use a very light fog spray, not sufficient to penetrate the masonry, on vertical surface of masonry to aid in mortar curing during first 24 hr. after placing units. 19.9 Do not insert through wall flashing or other elements which stop bond in masonry joints between mortar and masonry units, unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 19.10 Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 19.11 Clean mortar spatters and drips from adjacent block work immediately. 20. ADJOINING CQNSTRILC_TION 20.1 Anchor or bond masonry and walls and partitions at points where they meet or intersect by one of the following methods: 20.1.1 Lay 50 percent of units at the intersection in masonry bond with alternate units having a Obearing of not less than 3" on the unit below. 20.1.2 Anchor the intersection by metal ties, joint reinforcement, or anchors as acceptable to Project Manager. 20.1.3 Anchor interior non - load - bearing wails at intersection, at vertical intervals of not more than 2' on centers, with metal ties embedded at least 4" into the masonry, or as acceptable to Project Manager. 20.1.4 Where courses of meeting or intersecting walls are carried up separately, use acceptable method of bonding or keeping separate at the intersection. 20.2 Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following or as shown on the drawings. 20.2.1 Provide an open space not less than 1/2" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep own space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 20.2.2 Anchor masonry to structural steel members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless otherwise shown. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 16" o.c. vertically and 32" o.c. horizontally. 20.3 Anchor masonry furring to backing with anchors or ties by embedment at least 1 -1/2" into facing and backing. Space ties not farther apart than 24" vertically, nor 36" horizontally. 21. CONTROL JOINTS AND EXPANSION JOINTS 01/03/00 DIVISION 4' UNIT MASONRY WORK 'SECTION 4A -7 21.1 Provide control joints and expansion joints as required, and construct by using special control joint units, open end stretcher units, metal sash jamb units and control joint filler, or abutted standard units, and preformed gaskets, compressible material, building paper and caulking or sealants as indicated on drawings or as required. 21.2 Make control joints and expansion joints weather tight at exterior walls. 21.3 See Section 7G 'Sealants" for various joint sealant requirements. 21.4 Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 40'-0" o.c. for concrete masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30'-0" o.c. if not rein- forced. Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in the masonry work as directed by Owner's Representative. 22. BOND BEAMS 22.1 Construct bond beams of one or more courses of load- bearing units filled with concrete or grout and reinforced. Use continuous reinforcement unless otherwise indicated. 22.2 Provide custom unit bond beams to match adjacent block color and texture, if required, where shown on the drawings. 23. GROUT FOR MASONRY 23.1 General: 23.1.1 Set reinforcing steel and anchors in required position and secure against displacement before grouting is started. 23.1.2 Mix all cementitious materials and aggregates for a minimum period of 5 minutes. atter all materials are placed in the mixer with the amount of water required to produce the desired consistency. Place in cores and /or collar joints while fluid and before initial set has taken place. Puddle or vibrate grout into place. Place grout in such a way as to prevent segregation of materials. Pour grout fluid enough to flow into all crevices of grout spaces leaving no voids. 23.1.3 Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation. 23.1.4 Grout vertical cores in maximum of 5' lifts. Stop grout pours 1- 1/2" below a mortar joint, except at top of wall. Where bond beams are used stop grout pour 1/2" below top. 23.1.5 Use metal lath, mortar, or special units to confine grout to area required. Do not use materials which may inhibit bond or are combustible. 23.1.6 Use acceptable cold weather precautions in placing and curing of grout when temperature is less than 32°F. 23.2 Low -lift grouting: In hollow unit masonry construction, limit low -lift grouting to maximum wall height of 5' per lift. Vertical cores to be grouted shall have minimum clear dimensions of 3" x 4 ". 23.3 High -lift grouting: 23.3.1 Grout hollow unit masonry of accordance with this section when erected to height in excess of 5 before grouting. Vertical cores to be grouted shall have minimum clear dimension of 3" and clear area of 10 sq. 23.3.2 23.3.3 23.3.4 in. Provide Geanout openings at 12 sq. in. minimum area opposite each vertical bar at bottom course or in foundation wall. Clean cores and collar joints of mortar droppings and foreign material, position reinforcement, and close Geanout openings before grouting. Place vertical barriers consisting of masonry units and mortar in bond beam type hollow units and in collar joints to be grouted at 30' maximum to limit horizontal flow of grout. 23.3.5 Pour grout in 5' lifts maximum allowing minimum of 30 minutes and maximum of 1 hr. before pouring next lift. Grout shall be consolidated by puddling or vibrating at time of pouring and then reconsolidated before plasticity is lost. Reconsolidation may occur as next lift is poured. 23.3.6 Do not erect masonry to a height more than 80 times the minimum dear grout space before grouting with a maximum of 30' unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 23.4 Construction protection: 23.4.1 Do not use high -lift grouting method until masonry units have been in place 3 days minimum. 23.4.2 Do not permit water or foreign material to fall in grout space while grout is being placed and curing. 23.5 Cleanup: Remove misplaced grout immediately and clean affected areas. 24. LINTELS 24.1 Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. 24.2 Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1' -0" are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide formed -in -place masonry lintels. Temporarily support formed- in -place lintels. 24.3 Unless otherwise shown, provide one reinforcing bar for each 4" of wall thickness and of a size number not less than the number of feet of opening width. 24.4 For hollow masonry unit walls, use specially formed "U"- shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with concrete grout. 24.5 Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 4" for openings less than 6'- 0" wide, and 8" for wider openings. 24.5.1 Clean surfaces of dirt, dust and debris. 24.5.2 Maintain substrate in a saturated condition for 24 hours prior to grouting. Surface shall be "satured surface dry" at time of grout installation. 24.5.3 Construct forms to be liquid tight. 24.5.4 Place grout mixture rapidly and continuously to prevent air entrapment. 25. FLASHING OF CONCRETE MASONRY WORK REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 4• UNIT MASONRY WORK 'SECTION 4A -8 25.1 Wall Flashing: 25.1.1 Surfaces to receive flashing shall be smooth, dry and free from projections. 25.1.2 Install flashings in walls where and as shown on drawings. Apply the material in one layer and spot bond to masonry with a heavy cold applied asphaltic mastic. Laps shall be not less than 6* and sealed with a full coating of bonding material. Where material turns up it shall be fully coated and bonded. Where anchors, ties, or other materials penetrate flashings, the holes shall be carefully water- proofed with the bonding material. 25.2 Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work shown to be built into masonry work. 26. REPAIR. POINTING AND CLEANING 26.1 Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 26.2 Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes. except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up joints at corner, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance property prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. cut at defective joints and repoint. 26.3 Clean exposed masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Clean wall surfaces with prepared masonry cleaner in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check to confirm manufacturer's recommendations for use on integrally colored concrete block. 26.4 Remove mortar splatters and drips from adjacent block work immediately. 26.5 After completion of all work, this contractor shall remove all scaffolding and surplus masonry supplies from construction site. 27. LIQUID WATER REPELLENT 27.1 Installer: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in application of water repellents of types required on substrates similar to those of this project. 27.2 Job Conditions: 27.2.1 Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with the written recommendation of manufacturer), when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.; or when substrate surfaces have cured for less than a period of 2 months; or when rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F. are predicted for a period of 24 hours; or earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet from rainfall or other moisture sources or when substrate is frozen, or at surface temperature of less than 40 degrees F. 27.2.2 Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which water repellent is to be applied, and advise Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 27.3 Preparations for Installation: 27.3.1 Clean substrates of substances which might interfere with penetration /adhesion of water repellents. Test for moisture content, in accordance with repellent manufacturer's instructions, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. 27.3.2 Coordination with sealants: Where feasible, delay application for water repellents until installation of sealants has been completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent. 27.3.3 Mask off areas which receive paint, special coating, ceramic tile or exterior insulation and finish system to ensure that no liquid water repellent is applied on these areas. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -ever of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials with drop cloths. Clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. 27.4 Installation: 27.4.1 Apply "Prime -a -Pell 200* clear coating by Chemprobe Corporation, Garland, TX (800) 760 -6776, in a uniform, one -coat saturation -type spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment. Comply with all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure. 27.4.2 For locations where regulations limit the VOC content of coatings apply "Prime -a -Pell Plus" clear coating by Chemprobe Corporation, Garland, TX (800) 760.6776. in lieu of "Prime -a Pella 200 ". Comply with all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure. 28. CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION 28.1 Step back unfinished work for joining new work. Before laying new work, remove loose mortar and clean exposed joint. 28.2 Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings and other damage during construction. 28.3 Remove misplaced mortar and grout immediately and clean affected areas. 28.4 Protect face materials from staining. 28.5 Keep masonry units dry. Keep the top of masonry construction covered with a water -proof covering when work is not in progress. 28.6 Temporarily brace masonry against horizontal loads until cured and permanently braced. 29. ACCEPTANCE OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 29.1 Completed masonry work which meets all applicable requirements shall be accepted without qualifications. 29.2 Completed masonry work which fails to meet one or more requirements must be brought into compliance in an approved manner or may be rejected or accepted by the Proj3ct Manager. 01/03/00 DIVISION 4' UNIT MASONRY WORK 'SECTION 4A -9 29.3 The masonry work shall be dean and show a quality of workmanship and finish that conforms to the approved sample when viewed at a distance of 15' in average daylight, or as otherwise acceptable to the Project Manager. 29.4 Joints shall be tooled and tight, showing no separation between mortar and units. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 5' STRUCTURAL STEEL 'SECTION 5A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards: 1.2.1 AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (1986) except as modified herein. 1.2.1.1 Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: 'This approval constitutes the Owners acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings'. 1.2.2 AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (1989). 1.2.3 AISC Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts (1985). 1.2.4 AWS (D1.1) Structural Welding Code - Steel (1985). 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Include all labor, materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation of all Structural Steel and all related work, complete, in strict accordance with the drawings, and as specified herein. Structural steel work includes: 2.1.1 Design of structural steel connections. 2.1.2 All structural steel including columns, beams, girders, column base and cap plates, joist and beam bearing plates, angles and channels. 2.1.3 Framing for all openings in metal deck. 2.1.4 Connection angles, bolts and electrodes for welding work. 2.1.5 Framing and supports for roof top units. 2.1.6 Shop painting. 2.1.7 Shop drawings. 2.1.8 Furnishing of anchor bolts (installation of anchor bolts shall be by the contractor). 2.1.9 Connections of masonry straps and anchors to columns and beams. 2.1.10 Connections for steel joist girders and steel joists to structural steel. 2.1.11 All other items required to make the work of this section complete. 2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 2.3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products. Alternates, and Substitutions. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (As REMODEL PROTOTYPE Required by Job Conditions) 3.1 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B. 3.2 Steel Joists - Section 5C. 3.3 Metai Roof Deck - Section 5D. 3.4 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E. 3.5 Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 4.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 4.3 Shop Drawings: 4.3.1 Submit shop drawings to the Architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys "R' Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 4.3.2 Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. 4.3.3 Prepare in accordance with applicable standards and specifications listed in this Section. 4.3.4 All structural steel shall be detailed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice, except as modified herein. 4.3.5 Submit shop drawings prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length and type of each weld. Furnish erection drawings referencing erection marks to shop detail drawing numbers. Provide setting drawinpr templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. Type of fasteners shall be clearly shown for all members. 4.3.6 Fabricator's erection drawings and shop details shall clearly show the design loads of the connections designed by the Fabricator. 4.3.7 The fabricator's engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all connections. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. 4.4 Connection Design Certification: Submit connection design certification stating that all structural steel connections have been designed in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and AISC specifications. Connection design certification shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. 4.5 Mill Orders: Furnish one copy of any mill orders made for this project to the Project Manager, independent testing agency and the Owner at the time order is sent to manufacturer. 01/03/00 DIVISION 5' STRUCTURAL STEEL 'SECTION 5A -2 4.6 Mill Test Reports: Submit mill test. reports to the Project Manager, independent testing agency, and Owner for all steel used in this project. 4.7 Welder Certifications: Submit welder certifications to the Project Manager, independent testing agency, and the Owner showing compliance with AWS D1.1 for all welders to be used on this project. Welders must have been certified within the last six (6) months. 4.8 Connection Design Calculations: Design calculations for all connections designed by the fabricator's engineer shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. Connection design calculations will not be reviewed by the Project Manager. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. 4.9 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept, including verification of the design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, adequacy and safety of all connections, correctness of fit, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 5. QUALITY ASSURANC 5.1 General 5.1.1 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of structural steel. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shalt meet the requirements of `Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 5.1.2 Structural steel materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. 5.1.3 The testing agency shall report all test. and inspection results to the Architect/Engineer, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test. and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location of the work represented by the test. 5.1.4 At the completion of all structural steel work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all structural steel work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. 5.1.5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. 5.1.6 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all structural steel operations and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 5.1.7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. 5.2 The testing agency shall conduct inspections as necessary to determine that: 5.2.1 All structural steel has been erected in accordance with the contract documents. 5.2.2 All welding procedures are prequalified. 5.2.3 Welding is performed only by welders who have been certified within the last six months in accordance with AWS D1.1. 5.2.4 Weld quality is acceptable based on visual inspection of all welds. 5.2.5 Bolts have been installed in accordance with AISC Specifications. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. MATERIALS 6.1 Structural Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36 Typical, unless noted. 6.2 Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46KSI. 6.3 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Fy = 35 KSI. 6.4 Bolts: ASTM A325. 6.5 Welding Electrodes for Arc Welding: Series E70. 6.6 Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 Typical, unless noted. 6.7 Paint (Shop Coat): Fabricator's standard gray metal primer paint. PART 3: EXECUTION 7. Q SIGN OF CONNECTIONS 7.1. Unless otherwise shown or called for on the drawings, all shop connections may be either bolted or welded and all field connections shall be bolted. The fabricator is responsible for the design of all connections. Connections shown on the structural drawings are schematic and are only intended to show the relationship of members connected. Connection details indicated on the drawings shall be incorporated into the fabricator's connection design. 7.2 Unless noted otherwise, connections shall be designed to support half of the allowable uniform load on the beam, defined in the AISC Beam Tables, or the reaction shown on the drawings, whichever is greater. For connections not covered above, notify Engineer of need for additional information. 7.3 Unless noted otherwise, connections shall be designed as "simple framing" connections (unrestrained, free - ended) with the ends of beams and girders connected for shear only, and free to rotate with some inelastic, but self - limiting, deformation of connection parts, under gravity load. 7.4 Unless otherwise noted, bolted connection shall be REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 5' STRUCTURAL STEEL 'SECTION 5A -3 designed as bearing type connections using the values for bearing type connection with threads included in the shear plane. A minimum of two bolts per connection must be used. 7.5 Single plate connections may be used only if the connections are designed in accordance with the design procedure given in 'Engineering for Steel Construction - published by the RISC. 7.6 The fabricator is responsible for verifying the tension capacity of axially loaded members after a section is reduced for bolt holes. Member size may be increased or connection plates added as required. 8. FABRICATION 8.1 Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. 8.2 Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 8.3 Structural steel fabricator must coordinate details. provide connections and punc holes for other trades as shown on structural, architectural, electrical and mechanical drawings. 8.4 Shop splicing of material will not be permitted unless each individual splice is shown on the shop drawings and is subsequently approved by the Project Manager. 8.5 Painting 8.5.1 All surfaces of steel to be painted shall be cleaned and primed according to Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC -SP -3.63 and as hereinafter modified. 8.5.2 Paint all structural steel items with one shop coat applied at a rate to produce a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. 8.6 Inspection: All fabrication work shall be subject to inspection by Owner's Representative and /or an independent testing laboratory. All reasonable facilities shall be made available for the inspectors at all times. Contractor shall bear costs of testing work performed by his field and shop forces necessary to insure performance of contract. 8.7 Substitutions 8.7.1 In cases where material shown or specified is not readily available, proposed substitutions must be submitted for review by the Project Manager. 8.7.2 All substituted material must be of equivalent section to that specified and any additional cost due to increased weight is to be borne by this Contractor. 8.7.3 Substitutions must not interfere with Architectural, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, etc. requirements. 8.8 Steel shall be delivered as required in accordance with a schedule approved by the Owner's Representative. 9. ERECTION 9.1 The steel structure is a non - self - supporting steel frame and is dependent upon diaphragm action of the metal roof deck and attachment to the masonry walls for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces. Provide all temporary supports required for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces until these elements are complete and are capable of providing this support. 9.2 Furnish to contractor all required anchor bolts and other incidental items of structural steel required to be built into concrete or masonry. Furnish templates and location plans for installing these items. 9.3 Thoroughly examine and check the placement of anchor bolts and any supports on which the structural steel work is in any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects which would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of structural steel erection shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. 9.4 Set and shim all base plates to the elevations shown on the contract drawings. 9.5 All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled to carry out the design as shown. Erect the steel in order of sequence and schedule as previously arranged with the Owner's Representative. 9.6 Use care in handling and erection to insure that steel shall not be twisted, bent or otherwise damaged, and should any difficulty be encountered, it shall immediately be reported to the Owner's Representative. No cutting of structural shapes will be done in the field without the consent of the Owner's Representative. 9.7 Furnish all erection equipment, power, planking, bracing, guys, bolts, shims, etc., necessary in executing this part of the work. 9.8 Welders shall be certified by an independent testing and inspection service. Tests for uncertified welders shall be at the expense of this contractor. 9.9 Misfits, due to shop or drafting errors, will be corrected or replaced in field at the fabricator's expense. 9.10 All steel shall be erected square, plumb and true to lines and levels Any measures required to correct out of plumb steel columns, etc., will be at this contractor's expense. 9.11 Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include erection damage, cleaning and painting of field connections or welds, bolts, nuts, and areas adjacent to welds not primed. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 5' METAL ROOF DECK PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards. 1.2.1 SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck (1995). 1.2.2 SDI Diaphragm Design Manual 2nd Edition (1987). 1,2.3 AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (1981). 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Include all labor, material and equipment to furnish and install metal roof decking in accordance with the drawings and as specified. 2.2 Furnish and install all perimeter filler strips, closures and accessones as required, to complete the metal deck work and make it ready to receive roofing. 2.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 2.4 Refer to Section IA for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 3.4 3.5 4. 4.1 3. RELATE.P WORK SPECIFIED Et.3 W�FiERE (As required by Job Conditions) 3.1 Structural Steel - Section 5A. 3.2 Steel Joist Girders • Section 5B. 3.3 Steel Joists - Section 5C. Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E. Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F. SUBMITTALS Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 4.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 4.3 Shop Drawings 4.3.1 Submit shop drawings to the Architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 4.3.2 Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. 4.3.3 Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, type, and location of all metal roof deck. Show method of attachment to the supporting structure. Show all openings for hatches, stacks, etc. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as may be REMODEL PROTOTYPE required for proper installation of metal roof deck. 4.3.4 Show design loads for all metal roof deck. 4.3.5 All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. 4.4 Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that all metal roof deck used on this project and its attachment to the supporting structure has been designed and manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and SDI specifications. Manufacturer's certification shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. 4.5 Design Calculations: Design calculations for all metal roof deck used on this project shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. Design calculations will not be reviewed by the Project Manager. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. 4.6 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept including verification of the design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 5. QUALITY ASSURANCE 5.1 General 'SECTION 5D -1 5,1.1 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspections of metal roof deck work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 5.1.2 Metal roof deck materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. 5.1.3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. 5.1.4 At the completion of all metal roof deck work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all metal roof deck work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. 5.1.5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any 01/03/00 DIVISION 5' requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. 5.1.6 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owners Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all metal roof deck operations and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 5.1.7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. 5.2 The testing agency shall conduct inspections as necessary to determine that: 5.2.1 Metal roof deck work has been erected in accordance with the contract documents. 5.2.2 All welding procedures are prequalified. 5.2.3 Welding is performed by welders who have been certified within the last six months. 5.2.4 Weld quality is acceptable based on visual inspection of all welds. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. MATERIAL 6.1 Steel: Comply with SDI Specifications. 6.2 Accessories: Manufacturer's Standard 6.3 Shop Paint: Manufacturer's standard shop paint (grey). PART 3: EXECUTION 7. IZ $!0_N 7.1 Metal roof deck and its attachment to the structure shall be designed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all metal roof deck. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the engineer with the engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. Design shall be in accordance with the standards referenced in paragraph 1.2. 7.2 Metal roof deck shall be of configuration, depth and minimum gage as shown on the drawings and shall be designed in accordance with the SDI Specifications. 7.3 Metal roof deck shall be capable of supporting the uniformly distributed superimposed loads as called for on the drawings without the deflection exceeding 1/240 of the span length and without exceeding the allowable stresses specified in the SDI Specifications. 7.4 Metal roof deck and its attachment to the supporting structure shall be designed in accordance with the SDI Diaphragm Design Manual for the diaphragm shear shown on the drawings. 7.5 Metal roof deck and its attachment to the supporting structure shall be designed for a gross uplift of 30 pounds per square foot, or the gross uplift shown on the drawings, whichever is larger. REMODEL PROTOTYPE METAL ROOF DECK "SECTION 5D -2 8. INSTALLATION 8.1 Metal roof deck shall be erected and fastened in accordance with the SDI Specifications and the manufacturer's specifications and erection layouts. Metal roof deck shall be continuous over at least three spans. Cutting openings through the deck which are less than 16 square feet in area and all skew cutting shall be performed in the field. 8.2 Metal roof deck shall receive one primer coat of manufacturer's standard grey paint applied at the minimum rate of 1.0 mil dry film thickness. 8.3 Top and bottom faces and edges of deck materials where cuts have been made shall have prime coating touched-up with a heavy coat of same material as used in shop. 8.4 Do not hang or support any loads from metal roof deck. 8.5 All deck damaged, dented or chipped during shipping or erection to render it unsightly shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. The Project Manager shall be the sole judge as to whether metal roof deck must be replaced. • ENO OF SECTION • 01/03/00 DIVISION 5* MISCELLANEOUS METALS *SECTION 5E -1 PART 1: GENERAL 3.1 Structural Steel - Section 5A 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified 3.3 Steel Joists - Section 5C in this Section. 3.4 Metal Roof Deck - Section 50 1.2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards: 3.5 Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F 1.2.1 AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 4. SUBMITTAL (1989). 4.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by 1.2.2 AISI Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section Structural Members (1986). 1A of these specifications. 1.2.3 AWS(D1.1) Structural Welding Code - Steel (1985). 4.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall 1.2.4 AWS(D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel be taken to mean if required under the provisions of (1981). Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 4.3 Shop Drawings 2.1 Include labor, materials, and equipment to furnish and 4.3.1 Submit shop drawings to the Architectural consultant install all miscellaneous metal work shown or required by for review routing and a second set to the Toys 'R" Us the drawings and herein specified. Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 2.2 Miscellaneous metal work Includes all items of miscellaneous metal not covered in other sections. All items shall be complete with minor sundry and accessory parts. anchors, fittings, etc., customarily furnished for the general type and kind of items shown or required. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 4.3.2 Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the contract drawings and shall show sizes of metal items, method of assembly, hardware anchorage and connection to other work for each item of miscellaneous metal. 2.3 Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the 4.3.3. The location of all items must be given either by note or following items of work. (Note: Refer to drawings for items by an erection drawing. applicable to the project.) 4.3.4 Shop drawings shall also indicate by manufacturer and 2.3.1 Inserts, bolts, screws, nuts, etc. part number all fastening to be used. 2.3.2 Ladders/cages. 4.3.5 When necessary, measurements given on the contract drawings must be verified at the building on surrounding 2.3.3 Railings. work to avoid any discrepancies. 2.3.4 Bollards. 4.3.6 Detail metal work for ample size, strength and stiffness and as directed. Detail items subject to live loads to 2.3.5 Frames for wall, roof, pits, skylights, roof hatch. etc. support such loads as required by applicable Codes and governing agencies, unless otherwise noted. 2.3.6 Lintels. 4.3.7 Detail metal work to receive hardware and show proper 2.3.7 Water heater mounting shelf. clearances or bevels. 2.3.8 Steel angle corner guards (if required). 4.4 Metal Stair Certification: Submit to the Project Manager for review a written certification signed and 2.3.9 Gondola fixture framing including channels, hanger sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the rods, wall plates, angles, floor angles, etc. structure is located stating that all metal pan stairs for this project have been designed in accordance with the 2.3.10 Metal nosings for concrete stairs. contract documents and all applicable local, state and federal code requirements. 2.3.11 Metal stairs. 4.5 Review of submittals is only for review of general 2.3.12 Gratings. conformance with the design concepts. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for 2.3.13 Wall pack covers. general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance 2.3.14 Channel frames at overhead doors, compactor door, or guarantees required. impact doors, etc. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.315 Angles at loading dock edge. 5. MATERIALS 2.3.16 Other miscellaneous metal items indicated, specified or required. 5.1 Structural Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (As 5.2 Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 KSI. Required by Job conditions) 01/03/00 Z I W tY 2 00 N u- WO 22 0 Z � 11J tu zO t.) Cl ON 0t W W U. O W Z O DIVISION 5' MISCELLANEOUS METALS 'SECTION 5E -2 5.3 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade B, Fy = 35 KSI. 5.4 Cast Iron: Gray iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30, unless otherwise noted. 5.5 High strength bolts: ASTM A325. 5.6 Bolts: ASTM A307. 5.7 Welding Electrodes for Arc Welding: Series E70. 5.8 Stair Nosings for Concrete Stairs: Curb Bar 150 as manufactured by Wooster Products, Inc. - Phone (800) 321 -4936, or approved equal. 5.9 Paint 5.9.1 Shop Primer: Lead and chromate free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with FSTT -P -664. 5.9.2 Galvanizing repair paint: High -zinc -dust content paint, with dry-film containing not less than 94% zinc dust by weight and complying with SSPC -Paint 20. Verify usability with jurisdictional authority. 5.9.3 Bituminous paint: Cold- applied asphaltic mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 12 containing no hazardous materials. 6. FABRICATION 61 Schedule fabrication and delivery of miscellaneous metals and furnish to trades concerned all items to be built into other work. 6.2 Verify job dimensions before beginning fabrication. 6.3 Drill or punch and countersink holes for bolts and screws. Shearing, drilling or punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces. 6.4 At the proper time furnish necessary templates, patterns and items of miscellaneous metal, such as sleeves, inserts and similar items to be built into adjoining work. 6.5 Unless otherwise shown, all corners shall be square and all members shall be true to length and straight. Fabricate metal work with sharp lines and angles with smooth true surfaces and clean edges. Form exposed joints to exclude water. 6.6 All parts exposed to view shall be thoroughly finished, presenting a neat and workmanlike appearance with surfaces ground and dressed. free from flake, rust, pitting, weld marks and other noticeable fabrication marks. There shall be no twists, bends or open joints in finished members, nor any projecting edges or corners at connec- tions. Sharp exposed edges shall be eased. 6.7 All parts shall be properly reinforced, braced and made thoroughly rigid and substantial. 6.8 Conceal fastenings where possible. Where screws or bolts are used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed up tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening. 6.9 Fabricate nonferrous members with fastenings of same material. 6.10 All built -up sections shall be shop fabricated and realigned after welding to true, straight section. 6.11 Welds shall be shop welded insofar as is practicable. Where problems of shipment, handling and installation REMODEL PROTOTYPE require fabrication in sections, provide for field fitting and welding. 6.12 Modification of details for ease of fabrication may be made only upon written approval of the Project Manager. 6.13 Any member requiring a weather seal shall have continuous welds. 6.14 Rough Hardware, Inserts, Bolts, Screws and Nuts, etc.: 6.14.1 Unless otherwise specified, provide all bolts, screws, nuts, etc., shown or required to secure this work in place. 6.14.2 Unless otherwise specified, provide steel inserts where required in concrete to receive bolts or other fastenings. 6.14.3 Use expansion bolts when necessary for attachment to masonry. 6.14.4 Unless otherwise specified, provide all angles, plates, bolts. sleeves and other items to be embedded in concrete as shown or required. Bolts shall not extend more than 1/8" beyond exposed nuts. 6.14.5 All fastenings shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. 6.15 Vertical Ladders /Cages 6.15.1 Ladders shall be all welded construction. Fabricate ladder with hot rolled steel rails and round steel rungs extending through the rails with connections welded. Anchor ladder at bottoms and tops and at Intermediate points not over 4 ft. apart, with brackets of same size as side rails, unless otherwise detailed. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise indicated 6.15.2 Cages: If indicated, provide steel cages around ladders. fabricated of steel bars and shapes, conforming to the details on the drawing. 6.16 Railings: 6.16.1 Horizontal and vertical rails shall be formed of 1 -1/2" I.D. standard weight steel pipe as indicated with joints and intersections coped, welded and ground smooth. Refer to the drawings for special details. 6.16.2 Posts shall not be over 5' -0" o.c. and shall have flanged brackets of malleable iron for securing ends to stair stringers and to concrete where required. 6.16.3 Wall railings shall be provided with ends returned to walls. Provide flanged brackets of malleable iron for support of ends of railings to walls, and intermediate supports not over 5' -0" o.c. 6.16.4 Interconnect railings and handrail members by butt - welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 6.16.4.1 At tee and cross intersections provide coped joints. 6.16.4.2 At bends interconnect pipe by means of prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius bends. as applicable, of radiuses indicated. 6.16.4.3 Form bends by use of prefabricated elbow 01/03/00 DIVISION 5' MISCELLANEOUS METALS SECTION 5E -3 fittings and radius bends or by bending pipe, at fabricator's option. 6.16.5 Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required: maintain cylindrical cross- section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. 6.16.6 Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16" thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. 6.17 Brackets Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 6.17.1 For railing posts set in concrete provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than 6' long and with an inside diameter not less than 'h" greater than the outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve and of width and length not less than 1' greater than outside diameter of sleeve. 6.17.2 Galvanized exterior steel railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous components. Provide black steel pipe for interior railings. 6.18 Pipe Bollards (Exterior): 6.18.1 Provide and install pipe guard bollards where shown on drawings. Bollards shall be standard weight pipe buried in concrete below grade. Fill pipe with concrete and mold cap round and smooth. Embed pipe in concrete 18" round (6" cover on pipe) and extend below grade as shown in details. Paint pipe OSHA yellow. 6.19 Pipe Bollards (Interior): 6.19.1 Provide and install concrete- filled pipe bollards where shown. Bollards shall be standard weight pipe of the size shown set in pipe sleeves sized to accommodate bollard by plus or minus one inch. Sleeve shall be 12" deep with capped end embedded in concrete floor slab. Set bollard full depth into sleeve and provide wedges to center and plumb. Insert foam backer rod to 1 -1/2" below finish floor between pipe and sleeve. Fill with Por Rok grout to finish floor. 6.20 Loose Lintels: 6.20.1 Shall be of sizes shown on the lintel schedule, or as required for the particular location. 6.20.2 This shall include openings for ducts, louvers, grilles, convectors, etc. All lintels shall have 8" of bearing at each end, unless otherwise noted. 6.20.3 Galvanize loose steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls. 6.21 Burglar Protection Guards 6.21.1 At roof openings larger than 12" x 12 ", provide and install 'h" diameter bars 6" o.c. maximum in 4 -sided welded steel angle frame as detailed. Secure angles to roof opening angle frame. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 6.21.2 For burglar protection guards at the mechanical roof top units, coordinate with the contractor for proper size and location. 6.22 Corner Guards: 6.22.1 Furnish steel angle corner guards to the masonry section for installation. Furnish guards with anchors for embedment into block coursing as shown. 6.23 Metal Stairs: 6.23.1 Fabricate and install metal stairs where indicated on the drawings, conforming to size and profile detailed. 6.23.2 Provide assemblies which, when installed, comply with the following minimum requirements for structural performance, unless otherwise indicated. 6.23.2.1 Stringers, Treads and Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a live load of 100 pounds per square foot or a concentrated load of 300 pounds at any point. 6.23.2.2 Handrails and Toprails: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point in any direction or a uniform load of 50 pounds per foot applied simultaneously in both vertical and horizontal directions when tested per ASTM E935. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 6.23.3 Submit written certification signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the state where the structure is located, indicating compliance with all requirements. 6.24 Steel Frames 6.24.1 Provide steel frames for openings, knock -out panels, frames, pits and other openings in floors, walls and roofs as indicated. 6.24.2 Construct frames to profile, sizes, and lengths as shown on the drawings. 6.24.3 Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not shown, or required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from steel shapes and plates and steel bars. of welded construction using butt joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 6.24.4 Weld securely to structural steel where indicated. 6.25 Gratings: 6.25.1 Provide banded steel bar type gratings and frames over sump pit and at other locations indicated. Construct gratings of steel bars of size shown. All joints shall be mechanically interlocked, welded, or riveted as governed by the design indicated. Provide steel supporting members as indicated or required. Form gratings into sections of sizes indicated, or necessary for proper access and handling. Fasten gratings in place with steel clips or other suitable fastenings of a type that will permit removal. Gratings and fastenings on the exterior of the building and as 01/03/00 DIVISION 5* MISCELLANEOUS METALS 'SECTION 5E-4 noted shall be hot - dipped zinc - coated after fabrication. 6.26 Miscellaneous Steel Trim: 6.26.1 Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. 6.27 Edge Angles: 6.27.1 Provide edge angles at overhead door openings, and elsewhere as shown, fabricated of structural steel shapes consisting of 3' x 3" x 1/4" and 5' x 3' x 3/8" back to back. Plug weld outer angle to inner with minimum 3/4" diameter welds 4" on centers of continuous weld across the top for entire width. Provide 1/8" thick by 2" wide steel strap anchors 4" long at maximum spacing of 2' -0" and 6" from each end. 6.28 Steel Door Frames (for overhead doors and special doors): 6.28.1 Fabricate steel door frames of steel shapes or bent plate as shown, fully welded, uniform square and true. Plug weld built -up members, continuously weld exposed joints; grind exposed welds smooth. 6.28.2 Provide adjustable steel strap anchors for securing door frames of overhead doors into adjoining masonry, using 1/8" x 2" straps of the length required for a minimum 8" embedment, unless otherwise shown. Weld anchors to frame jambs no more than 12" from both bottom and head of frame and space anchors not more than 30 apart. 6.29 Steel Plate Light Bracket: 6.29.1 At truck dock inside wall provide steel plate bracket as per details on the drawings. Expansion bolt to wall. Drill and tap to take bolts for bracket of dock light. 6.30 Wall Pack Covers: 6.30.1 At exterior wall where indicated. Fabricate of steel bent plate, gauge and size indicated with bolt holes and anchors as required. Units shall be shop primed for field finish. 7. FINISHES 7.1 Galvanizing: 7.1.1 All items to be galvanized shall be cleaned and heat prepared and given one good heavy coating of galvanizing by immersing same full into the vat, allowing same to coat well all joints and surfaces before removing. 7.1.2 Galvanizing applied on product fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips shall comply with ASTM Al23. 7.1.3 Galvanizing on assembled steel products shall comply with ASTM A386. 7.1.4 Galvanizing on iron and steel hardware shall comply with ASTM A153. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 7.1.5 Galvanized surfaces for which a shop coat of paint is specified shall be chemically treated to provide a bond for the paint. 7.1.6 Except for bolts, nuts, etc., all galvanizing shall be done after fabrication. 7.1.7 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with Military Specifications MIL -P -21035 (Ships). 7.2 Shop Painting: 7.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, all steel, cast or wrought iron, except galvanized parts and parts embedded in concrete shall be prepared and painted as follows before leaving the shop. 7.2.1.1 All items of miscellaneous iron and steel, except galvanized items, shall be given one shop coat of gray metal primer, or an approved equal, applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 7.2.1.2 Steel in contact with earth, concrete or masonry shall be given a heavy coat of black asphaltic paint over the prime coat. 7.2.2 All paint shall be uniformly applied to produce a smooth surface free from runs, laps, streaks, spatter, brush marks, discontinuances, etc., and surfaces shall be evenly covered to the minimum thickness specified. Paint shall be well worked into all joints and open places. Contact and inaccessible surfaces shall be given one coat before assembling. 7.2.3 No paint shall be applied when the materials are wet, or when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F., or temperature of materials is below the dew point of the atmosphere. 7.2.4 All paint shall be delivered to the shop in original, sealed containers, marked with the manufacturer's name, brand Identification and paint number. 7.2.5 After erection, spot paint. in a neat and workmanlike manner, all connections, field welds, bolts and abrasions with the same prime paint used originally. PART 3: EXECUTION 8. PREPARATION 8.1 Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams. templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 General 9.2 Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devised and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabricators to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through - bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. 9.3 Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal 01/03/00 DIVISION 5' MISCELLANEOUS METALS *SECTION 5E -5 fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level. true and free of rack. measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. 9.4 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch -up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot - dipped galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. 9.5 Field Welding: comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 9.6 Steel Pipe Railings and handrails: 9.6.1 Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows: 9.6.1.1 Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non - shrink, non - metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturers directions. OR: at Contractor's option. 9.6.1.2Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5" deep and 3/4" greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post and concrete with non - shrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturers directions. 9.6.1.3 Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off excess grout and leave 1/8" build -up sloped away from post. For installation exposed on extenor or to flow of water, seal grout to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 9.6.1.4 Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored tin wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. 9.6.1.5 Secure handrails to wall with wall bracket and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1.1/2" clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required for design loading. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: 9.6.1.6 Use type of racket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage. 9.6.1.7 For concrete and solid masonry anchorage. use drilled - in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 9.6.1.8 For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. 9.6.1.9 For stud partitions use lag bolts set into wood backing REMODEL PROTOTYPE between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for accurate location of backing members. 9.7 Abrasive Nosings: Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. Cast anchors into concrete. 9.8 Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch -up painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 of these specifications. 9.9 For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 2 coats of galvanized repair paint. • END OF SECTION - 01 /03 /00 DIVISION 5* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards: 1.2.1 AISI Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members (1986). 1.2.2 AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (1981). 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Include all labor, materials and equipment to furnish and install all cold rolled structural metal sections as shown on the drawings and herein specified. All framing shall be complete with fasteners, clips, plates and accessory parts, customarily furnished for this type work. 2.2 The work of this section includes, but is not limited to: (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). 2.2.1 Structural light gage framing where indicated. 2.2.2 Framing for intorior load bearing partitions, where indicated. 3. iLA Q SPECIFIE ELSEWHERE (As required by Job Conditions) 3.1 Structural Steel Section 5A 3.2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 59 3.3 Steel Joist - Section 5C 3.4 Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D 3.5 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 4.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 4.3 Shop Drawings: 4.3.1 Submit shop drawings to the Architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 4.3.2 Verify job conditions before beginning fabrication. 4.3.3 The drawings shall show sizes, method of assembly and anchorages. 4.4 Manufacturer's data and certification: 4.4.1 Submit manufacturer's data for all cold rolled structural metals used in this project. COLD ROLLED STRUCTURAL META 'SECTION 5F -1 4.4.2 Submit manufacturer's certification that the physical and structural properties of all cold rolled structural metal framing members, connections, and accessories meet or exceed the physical and structural properties listed by Unimast, Inc. 4.5 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS 5.1 All cold rolled structural metal framing members, connections and accessories shall be of the type, size and gage shown on the plans. The physical and structural properties listed by Unimast, Inc. shall be considered the minimum permitted for all framing members, connections and accessories. 5.2 All cold rolled structural metal framing members shall be formed from corrosion- resistant steel, corresponding to the requirements of ASTM A446, with a minimum yield strength of 40 ksi for SJ style studs, and 33 ksi for CR- runners. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. FABRICATION: 6.1 Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Prefabricated panels shall be square with components attached in a manner as to prevent racking. 6.2 All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held positively in place until properly fastened. 7. 7.1 ERECTION: Prior to commencement of work under this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to a point where this installation may properly commence. 7.2 Use means necessary to protect the work under this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 7.3 Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner which will not cause distortion of the members. 7.4 Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is completed. 7.5 Splices in studs shall not be permitted. 7.6 Any material damaged during fabrication, shipment or erection shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 6' CARPENTRY 'SECTION 6A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services necessary to complete the carpentry and related work in addition to layout of this work and installation of listed items of other sections of the specifications. Examine the drawings to determine the extent of the work and review the following criteria. 2.2 General Requirements 2.2.1 Furnish and install all rough woodwork, centering for masonry, rough bucks, grounds. screeds, nailing strips. etc. 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 Furnish and install all required rough hardware, such as nails, bolts, washers, anchors, etc., except as otherwise specified. Take charge of and distribute hardware at the building and provide and arrange temporary shelving for the storage of all hardware. Lay out work described and assigned to this section of the specifications in accordance with the drawings. Carefully check dimensions. Erect temporary protection for all completed or partially completed work where required to protect materials, surfaces, finishes, and equipment; this includes temporary doors until hollow metal doors are delivered. 2.2.6 Examine the conditions including existing dimensions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.2.7 Coordinate work and cooperate with all other trades furnishing built in items to avoid delays in any work. 2.3 Items furnished by others or included under different sections and installed by this contractor are as follows: 2.3.1 Hollow metal doors and frames (Section 8A) 2.3.2 Finish hardware (Section 81. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 2.3.3 Toilet partitions (Section 10A). 2.3.4 Toilet room accessories (Section 10B) (as noted by Owner). 2.3.5 Wall protection (Section 10D). 2.3.6 Dock bumpers and dock seals. 2.3.7 Baler supplied and installed (by Owner). 2.3.8 Special Doors (Section 8G). 2.3.9 Safe (by Owner). 2.3.10 Laminate Wainscots Panels (Section 6B). 2.3.11 Exterior Babies "R" Us wall icons. 2.3.12 Skylights (Section 7H). (BRU Only) 2.3.13 Wood Register Tandem. Refund and RGD (by Owner). 2.3.14 Fixture inside and outside corners. 2.3.15 3 -D Icons and Platforms (by Owner). 2.3.16 CPU, and Bike Assembly (TRU Only). 2.3.17 Baby Registry. Furniture and Order Desk (BRU Only). 2.3.18 Enlarged Photo Display (by Owner) (BRU Only). 2.3.19 For KRU slatwall, valance, fitting rooms, etc., see Section 6B, Architectural Woodwork. 2.4 Items of work included but are not limited to the following list. Examine the drawings and this specification section for the extent of work. 2.4.1 Wood grounds, blocking, and other carpentry items as shown, for supporting and fastening millwork, carpentry, toilet partitions, urinal screens, grab bars and the work of the various other Sections. 2.4.2 All rough hardware including bolts, nails, screws, spikes, hangers, etc., required in connection with the installation of all materials under this Section. 2.4.3 Framing including wall studs, plates, joists. etc. 2.4.4 All plywood, rough wood blocking, blocking for roof curbs, copings and other roof wood members. 2.4.5 Front Office construction. 2.4.6 Finish wood trim and cabinet work including; coat rack in Break Room and cabinets and countertop at Front Offices and Break Room. 2.4.7 Laminated plastic covered plywood countertops, walls and counter fronts as indicated. 2.4.8 Plywood for equipment backboards as shown on drawings. 2.4.9 Sheet metal chute for mezzanine (if used). 2.4.10 All miscellaneous work shown on drawings but not furnished or installed by other trades. 2.4.11 Solid surfacing material lavatory. 2.4.12 Bike wall construction. 01/03/00 DIVISION 6' CARPENTRY 'SECTION 6A -2 2.4.13 Shelves and stanchions in Janitors closet. 2.4.14 Temporary construction sign (see drawings). 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing loca- tion of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Show location of blocking and supports that are to be built into wall substrates. 3,1.1 Submit the following shop drawings: 3.1.1.1 Front Office details. 3.1.1.2 Lavatory counter tops. 3.1.1.3 Break Room counter and cabinets. 3.1.2 Submit the following samples: 3.1.2.1 Plastic laminate, 3" x 5" for each type, color, pattern and surface finish. 3.1.2.2 Solid surfacing material, 3" x 5" of type, color, pattern and surface finish. 4. TEMPORARY PROTECTION 4.1 Construct temporary doors, stairs, ladders, runways, barricades and railings required in and about the building. 4.2 The building shall be closed with temporary doors and windows as the work progresses, and during periods of inclement weather, All unglazed windows shall be closed with 4 mil polyethylene film in rough frames or old sash, plywood, or other suitable means. Temporary doors shall be storm tight with locks: do not fasten to finished frame of permanent door. 4.3 Protect well and in the proper manner with nonstaining sheathing paper, all materials in construction likely to be damaged by other trades or affected by the weather. The use of nails, wire, or metal likely to rust or cause discoloration, will not be permitted. All protection must be placed immediately after materials or work is set in place, and when directed by the various trades or Architect's Representative. 4.4 Guard rails shall be constructed around all shafts, wells, large duct openings. etc., occurring in the floor and roof constructions. Rails shall be of height specified by Code and of substantial construction, and shall remain in place until the enclosing walls or partitions are erected and roof openings closed, at which time the guard shall be removed. 4.5 Comply with current OSHA regulations and standards. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. LUMBER. GENERAL 5.1 Standard: For each use, comply with the "American Softwood Lumber Standard" PS 20 by the U.S. Depart- ment of Commerce. Nominal sizes are shown or specified; provide actual sizes complying with the minimum size requirements of PS 20 for the moisture content specified for each use. 5.2 Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise shown or specified. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 5.3 Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing and complying with dry size requirements of PS 20, unless otherwise specified. 6. FRAMING LUMBER 6.1 General: Where wood framing from 2" to 5" (but not including 5 ") in nominal thickness, and 2" or more in nominal width is shown or scheduled; provide lumber complying with grading rules which conform to the requirements of the "National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber" of the American Lumber Standards Committee established under PS 20. 6.2 For light framing (2" to 4" thick and 2" to 4" wide), provide construction grade. 7. STRUCTURAL FRAMING 7.1 Structural Framing (6" and wider and from 2" to 4" thick). provide No. 2 grade lumber of any species of specified grade meeting or exceeding the following values: 7.1.1 "Fb" (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending) 1250 pounds per square inch. 7.1.2 "E" (minimum modulus of elasticity) 1,700,000 pounds per square inch. 7.2 General: Where lumber less than 2" in nominal thickness and 2" or more in nominal width is shown or specified, provide boards complying with dry size requirements of PS 20. 8. BOARDS 8.1 Exposed boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following: 8.1.1 Moisture content: 15% maximum. 8.1.2 For transparent finish (or natural finish), where shown or scheduled, provide the following: Any species hardwood. 8.1.3 For paint finish, where shown or scheduled, provide the following: No. 2 boards, birch or poplar. 8.2 Concealed boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following: 8.2.1 Moisture content: 15% maximum. 8.2.2 Species and grade: Southern Pine (SPIB) No. 2 boards or WWPA (any species) 'Construction" boards. 9. PLYWOQD 9.1 Standard: For each use, comply with the requirements for "Softwood Plywood /Construction and Industrial" PS1 by the U.S. Department of Commerce. 9.2 Plywood: Provide plywood as specified for the type of exposure and finish shown or scheduled, as follows: 9.2.1 For smooth plywood exposed on the interior and to receive a paint finish, provide Interior Type, Grade A on exposed face; Grade D on concealed face. 9.2.2 For floor underlayment, provide Underlayment Grade C -D plugged. Provide sanded finish where resilient finish flooring is indicated. 9.2.3 For equipment backboards for electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant treated Standard Grade plywood with exterior glue. 01/03/00 DIVISION 6' CARPENTRY 9.3 Exterior plywood: Where plywood is concealed by built-up roofing provide exterior type. (Make fire - treated as required by local codes.) 9.4 Veneer plywood: Hardwood veneer plywood paint grade finish. See Enlarged Office Plan Sheet. 10. PARTICLE BOARD 10.1 Provide particleboard complying with the requirements of the National Particleboard Association's Physical Property Specification for Mat Formed Wood Particleboard for Floor Underlayment" and with FHA UM28. Refer to Control Tower details for extent of particle board application. 11, ANCHORAGE AND FASTENING MATERIALS 11.1 For each use, select proper type, size, material and finish complying with the applicable Federal Specification. 12. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 12.1 Plastic laminate: Plastic laminate shall be of the thickness indicated on the drawings, and shall be of the "high - pressure" type. Laminate shall be general purpose grade with a "M" finish, in color as indicated on the drawings or as selected by the Architect. 12.2 Wood shelves and hanging rods (if used): Shelves for coat racks shall be 1" thick clear pine, 12" deep unless otherwise shown, and shall be supported on 1" x 3" wood cleats on both ends and across back. Hanging rods shall be provided where required. They shall be nickel- plated steel tubing similar and equal to Stanley No. 7050 with flanges at ends securely fastened in place. Where poles are over 4' long, provide center supporting brackets similar to Stanley No. 7037. Provide white finish #727 Stanley Steel bracket supports at shelves in Front Office area. • 12.3 Wood shelves for Janitor's Closet shall be 314" thick interior grade plywood with 3/4" solid wood edge strip, 12" or 18" deep as indicated on drawings supported by factory finish white stanchions 6' -0" long, 24" o.c. 12.4 Sheet metal galvanized steel 22 gauge (for mezza- nines, if required). 13. FIRE - RETARDANT TREATMENT 13.1 Where used in contact with or in composition of rated walls or as shown or scheduled, or otherwise required by code or local authority for framing, blocking, decking and concealed construction, comply with AWPI Specification C -208 for pressure impregnation with fire- retardant chemicals to achieve a flame - spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723, ASTM E84 or NFPA Test 355. 13.2 Where treated items are indicated to receive a transparent or paint finish use a fire- retardant treatment which will not bleed through or adversely affect bond or finish. 13.3 Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, wherever possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same fire- retardant chemical used for treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 14. WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT 'SECTION 6A -3 14.1 The following items of rough framing or finish woodwork shall be treated with "Woodlife" or equal wood preservative process: 14.1.1 Framing lumber in contact with concrete slab or grade. 14.1.2 Framing lumber in conjunction with roofing. PART 3: EXECUTION 15. WOOD FRAMING. GENERAL 15.1 Set wood framing accurately to required lines and levels. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with the recommendations of the "Manual for House Framing" of the National Forest Products Association. Cut, join and tightly fit framing around other work. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise detailed. 15.2 Anchor and nail as shown, or if not shown, to comply with the "Recommended Nailing Schedule - Table 1" of the "Manual for House Framing" and other recommendations of the NFPA. 15.3 Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 15.4 Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. 15.5 Partition framing: Space studs as indicated and double at openings. Unless otherwise indicated, make headers over openings of two piece stud material set on edge or solid lumber of equivalent size. Bolt end studs to abutting concrete and masonry walls. Provide bearing partitions with double top plates with joints lapped 2 feet. 15.6 Joists and rafters unless otherwise indicated shall bear 4 inches onto masonry and 2 inches on wood or steel. Frame openings with headers and trimmer. Carry joists, trimmers, and headers on joist hangers when framing into carrying member at the relative same level. Fire cut joist bearing into masonry. Accurately bevel -cut ends of wood bridging to afford firm contact with members and nail each end with two nails. Keep lower end free until subfloor is in place. Metal bridging may be installed as recommended by the manufacturer. 15.7 Stair framing shall be spiked together. Cut rough carriages accurately to receive finish treads and risers. Provide trimmers, blocking, and other framing necessary for support of treads, risers, and railings. 15.8 Anchor sill plates to concrete floors with expansion bolts, one near each end and at 4' intermediate spacing. Anchor other wood members into concrete, masonry and steel with appropriate fasteners and unless otherwise indicated, space fasteners at 4 -ft. centers with a minimum of two fasteners per piece. Anchor bolts shall be a minimum 3 /8 -in. round. Stagger end joints of wood members overlaying one and other 2- ft. and lap members at corners. 15.9 Trim shall be installed with lengths as long as practicable and closely fitted joints. Blind nail to the extent practicable; set and stop face nailing with non - staining putty to match finish. Use screws for fastening to metal; set and stop as done for nails. Stagger and conceal joints. Cap molded work at returns and interior angles and miter at exterior corners. Shoulder flat work to reduce warping. 01/03/00 DIVISION 6* CARPENTRY 'SECTION 6A-4 15.10 For exterior canopy, fascia/soffit and other construction attached to and projecting from the building, provide fire - retardant treated blocking, framing lumber and plywood as indicated or as required by all applicable codes, regulations, ordinances and by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire - treated lumber and plywood shall conform to paragraph 13 as specified in this section (if applicable). 16. ATTACHMENT AND ANCHORAGE 16.1 Use common wire nails, except as otherwise shown or specified. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. See Paragraph 15(B). 17. WOOD GROUNDS. NAILERS. BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS 17.1 Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Set true to line and level, plumb, with intersections true as required angle. Coordinate location with other work involved. 17.2 Attach to substrates securely with anchor bolts and other attachment devices as shown and as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry; anchor to form -work before concrete placement. 18. WOOD FURRING 18.1 Install plumb and level with closure strips at all edges and openings. Shim with wood blocking or incombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 18.2 Furring to receive gypsum drywall: Unless otherwise shown, provide 1* x 2" furring at 16" o.c. vertically. 19. PLYWOOD 19.1 Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA). 19.2 Provide plywood underlayment where shown. Install underlayment just prior to laying of finish flooring. Stagger end joints between panels in relation to each other and all joints in relation to substrate jointing. Allow 1/32" space between panels ends and edges for expansion and contraction unless otherwise detailed. Nail or staple in accordance with APA recommendations unless otherwise detailed. Prior to installation of finish flooring, fill damaged areas wider than 1/16 ", set nails 1/16" or staples and screws 1/32" but do not fill; lightly sand rough areas. 20. DOCK BUMPERS AND DOCK SEALS 20.1 Install dock bumpers as per the details on the drawings. Set anchor bolts into concrete as per pattern shown or drill -in 5/8" diameter "Kwik - bolts" x minimum 5" long. Weld angle at top of dock bumper to the edge angle at dock. 20.2 Install dock seals in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions. Weld angle clips to steel jambs and head and fit clips into pockets within dock seals. 21. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SIGN REMODEL PROTOTYPE 21.1 Furnish and install a freestanding temporary sign back board constructed of exterior grade plywood supported on 2 x 4 wood framings and 4 x 4 wood posts set in concrete in the ground in a location shown on the site drawings and/or as directed by Owner's Representative. Contractor to mount "decal" as per drawings. See drawings for sign detail. 22. GYPSUM SHEATHING 22.1 Install gypsum sheathing to metal framing with specified fasteners in strict accordance with sheathing manufacturer's published recommendations and as indicated on the drawings. 22.2 Install in as large sizes as are practical for application indicated to minimize joints and provide a smooth, flat surface to receive the finish indicated. 23. CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARD 23.1 Install in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Note the use of FRP panels (4' wainscot) for (3) J.C. watts (not door wall) (at slop sink) instead of ceramic tile. - END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 DIVISION 6' ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 'SECTION 68 -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1,4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for completing architectural woodwork and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 Types of architectural woodwork include the following: 2.2.1 Sales Floor Valence. 2.2.2 Lavatory counter tops. 2.2.3 Office counter tops. 2.2.4 Office and cash office shelving. 2.2.5 Shelving in janitor closet, control room and Lounge. 2.2.6 Statwall and trim if indicated on drawings, will be furnished by Owner and installed under the work of this section. 2.2,7 Fitting room partitions as manufactured by Capitol Interiors will be furnished by Owner and installed under the work of this Section. 2.3 Standards and shelf brackets specified in Section 10C. 2.4 Wainscots. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated. 3.2 Installer Qualifications; Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm which can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing loca- tion of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 4.1.1 Lavatory counter tops. Show location of blocking and supports that are to be built into wall substrates. Submit the following shop drawings: 4.1.2 Coat rack shelf in Lounge, shelves in janitor closet and control room. 4.1.3 Office and cash office counter tops and shelving. 4.2 Submit the following samples: 4.2.1 Plastic laminate, 3" x 5" for each type, color, pattern and surface finish. 4.2.2 Solid surfacing material "Fountainhead" 3" x 5' of type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 5. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING: 5.1 Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. 5.2 Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. 6. PROJECT CONQITION$ 6.1 Conditioning: Woodwork Manufacturer and Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation and storage areas. Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. 6.2 Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed wood work within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period. Require Woodwork Manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 7. A, EPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 7.1 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with require- ments, provide high pressure decorative laminates of one of the following: 7.1.1 Formica Corp. 7.1.2 Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 7.2 Manufacturer of "Fountainhead" solid surfacing material for lavatory countertops in Toilet Rooms shall be Nevamar Corporation, Odenton, Maryland. Color: FM -7 -5 Mystic White Matrix. 8. FABRICATION, GENERAL: 8.1 Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. 8.2 Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive other items and work. 01/03/00 DIVISION 6' :CHITECTURAL WOODWORK 'SECTION 6B -2 8.3 Ease edges to a 1/16" radius, for corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1" in nominal thickness. 1/8" radius for edges of rails and similar members over 1" in nominal thickness. 8.4 Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 8.5 Pre -Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre -cut openings, where possible, to receive plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and similar exposures seal edges of cutouts with a water - resistant coating. 8.6 Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. 8.6.1 Where sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication (without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming of woodwork for accurate fit. 9. STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM, 9.1. Work Includes: 9.2 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300 and 700. 9.3 Rout or groove backs of flat trim members, kart backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 10. 6RCHITf =CJURAL CABINET TQPSi 10.1 Work Includes: 10.1.1 Lavatory office and cash office counter tops. 10.1.2 Office and cash office shelving counter tops. 10.2 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C. 10.3 Type of Top: High Pressure Decorative Laminate: 10.3.1 Grade: Custom 10.3.2 Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and as follows: 10.3.2.1 Colors, Patterns and Finishes: As indicated on finish schedule. Solid Colors Suede Finish 10.3.3 Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 10.4 Type of Top: Solid Surfacing Material: 10.4.1 One piece monolithic panel "Nevarmar Fountainhead" 1/2" thick with 1/2" backsplashes and end splashes and REMODEL PROTOTYPE support bracket as shown on drawings. 11. UTILITY SHELVING 11.1 Work Includes: 11.1.1 Shelving in Janitor Closet, Control Room and coat rack shelf in Lounge. 11.2 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600. 11.3 Shelving with Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements. 11.3.1 Grade: Custom 11.3.2 Shelving Material: Lumber and closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. 11.4 Plastic Laminate Shelving: Comply with AWI Section 400. 12. WAINSCOTS 12.1 The Owner has entered into a national account agreement with Nevamar for the project. Material has been pre - ordered. General Contractor to purchase wainscot finish material through national accounts program. Wainscot finish material to be Nevamar plastic laminate material S -3-43T Mallard Teal, Textured Finish, H -5 grade. For coordinating information, please contact Nevamar, 8339 Telegraph Road, Odenton, MD 21113, Telephone (800) 638 -4380. 12.2 Plywood: Finish grade, without warp, with dimensional stability. Lengths as designated on drawings. 12.3 Laminate cladding for vertical surface: High pressure derivative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 13. FASTENERS AND ANCHORS; 13.1 Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -S -111 for applicable requirements. 13.1.1 For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. 13.2 Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -N -105 for applicable requirements. 13.3 Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide non - ferrous metal or hotdip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion- resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 14. FACTORY FINISHING ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OF INTERIOR 14.1 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. 14.1.1 Factory Finishing: The extent to which the final finish is applied to architectural woodwork at factory is Contractor's option, except factory-apply at least prime /base coat to greatest extent possible prior to delivery. 01/03/00 DIVISION 6' ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK *SECTION 6B -3 14.2 General: The primary and prefinishing of architectural woodwork required to be performed at factory is work of this section. Refer to Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork, and for material and application requirements of prime coats for woodwork not specified to receive final finish as work of this section. 14.3 Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing of concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 14.4 Transparent Finish for Woods: Comply with require- ments indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, effect and sheen. 14.4.1 Grade: Custom 14.4.2 Finish: AWI Finish System #1 standard lacquer. 14.4.3 Staining: None required. 14.4.4 Sheen: Satin - medium rubbed effect 14.5 Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below: 14.5.1 Grade: Custom 14.5.2 Finish: AWI Finish System #8 synthetic enamel 14.5.3 Sheen: Full gloss PART 3: EXECUTION 15. E EPAR AT I ON 15.1 Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 15.2 Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates, well in advance of time substrates are to be built. 15.3 Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 16. INSTALLATION 16.1 Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops); and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. 16.2 Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. 16.3 Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built -in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. 16.4 Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full - length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners and comply with referenced Quality Standards for joinery. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 16.5 Tops: Anchor securely to support systems as indi- cated. 16.6 Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and install in the areas indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated. 16.7 Slatwall Supplied by Owner: Install slatwall and trim anchoring to metal studs through drywall as indicated. Cover slats with laminate strips furnished with slatwall as indicated. 16.8 Fitting Room Partitions Supplied by Owner: Complete the assembly of components and erect in the areas indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated. Scribe components to vertical surfaces as indicated or required. Adjust hardware and leave in smooth operating condition. 16.9 Wainscots: Install as designated on drawings. Provide flush joint at intersection of drywall and wainscot panel, except at rated partitions, if required. At rated partitions, offset wainscot and attach wood top trim member. 17. ADJUSTMENT. CLEANING. FINISHING. AND PROTECTION: 17.1 Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 17.2 Clean woodwork on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces. Touch -up shop - applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 17.3 Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork. 17,4 Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 17.5 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural woodwork being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. - END OF SECTION - 01 /03 /00 DIVISION 7' PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products. and Substitutions. 1.5 Refer to Section 11.2 for Alternate Roof System. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing designated roofing system, flashing and associated sheet metal work and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 The extent of roofing, flashing and sheet metal work is shown on the drawings and includes brake metal roof edges, copings, gravel stops, gutters and downspouts. 2.3 Coordinate this work with other trades involved to avoid delays and to insure a satisfactory and watertight installation. 2.4 Roofer: Examine surfaces on or against which roofing is to be applied, check levels of roof for dips or hollows. Notify Owner's Representative in writing of any defects which, in the opinion of Roofer, would be detrimental to installation of his work. Do not proceed with any work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the contractor. Laying of materials will be considered as acceptance of deck by Roofer. 2.5 Proceed with roofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. 2.6 Weather Conditions: Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 Masonry thru -wall fleshings not associated with roofing specified in Section 4A Unit Masonry Work. 3.2 Preservative treated nailers and blocking specified in Section 6A, Carpentry. 3.3 Skylights specified in Section 7H, Skylights (BRU Only). REMODEL PROTOTYPE JFING, FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET . rAL 'SECTION 7D -1 4. QUALITY ASSURANCE 4.1 The roofing and associated work shall be accomplished by a single firm, which has installed the approved system for at least three years on projects comparable to the work of this contract; and, upon written request of the Owner, shall furnish the name and location of such roof installations. 4.2 Pre - Roofing Conference: Before the roofing work is scheduled to commence, after submittals have been reviewed by the Owner, and before any materials are ordered, a conference shall be called at the jobsite for the purpose of reviewing the drawings and specifications. The intent is to resolve questions before the work is started. The conference shall be attended by the roofing contractor, and his foreman, as well as the Owner's Representative. 4.3 UL Listing: Roofing system shall meet requirements for U -L Class "A" fire rating. 4.4 FM Listing: Roofing system shall be applied in accordance with F -M I- 90 requirements. 5. SUBMITTALS 5.1 Manufacturer's Data, Roofing: For information only, submit 2 copies of specifications and installation instructions from the manufacturer for each major roofing product or system required. The material shall not be ordered until the submittals have been approved. One (1) copy shall be kept at the jobsite at all times for use during construction. 5.2 Samples: Submit 12" square samples of finished roofing sheets, including side /end -lap seam (for single ply). 5.3 Submit 12" square samples of required insulation. 5.4 Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings showing roof configuration and sheet layout, details at perimeter, and special conditions as it applies to the specific roof system. 5.4.1 Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials (if any). 6. ROOFING SYSTEM GUARANTEE 6.1 Submit, in duplicate, ten year unlimited guarantee on roofing and associated work specified in this Section, agreeing to repair or replace work which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or otherwise fails to perform as roofing due to failures of materials or workmanship. Coverage of the guaranty shall include roof membrane, roof insulation, fastener (as applicable). base flashing (minimum height 8 ", maximum height as recommended by manufacturer) and workmanship tor the full time specified. Guarantee shall be issued and backed solely by the Roofing Materials manufacturer, and shall be signed by Roofing Materials manufacturer. 6.2 As part of the bid documents, the contractor shall submit written evidence from the roofing manufacturer, to the Owner, Project Manager, and contractor, that he is eligible to provide the guaranty called for. A copy of the guaranty proposed by the contractor shall also be submitted with the bid. Failure to provide either of the documents shall result in disqualification of that bid. 6.3 Contractor to submit to the Owners Representative 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' copies of all Manufacturer's field inspection reports, including interim and final inspection reports, as well as the 10 year guarantee as provided by Manufacturer. 7. SHEET METAL GUARANTY 7.1 Provide guarantee for all sheet metal work for a period of two (2) years from date of acceptance of same, as evidenced by final payment, and binding contractor to repair, or replace, at his own expense, all work which may show defective material or workmanship within said period. This guarantee shalt include leaking, failure of materials to stay in place, undue expansion, lifting, deformation, loosening and splitting of seams. 8. HANDLING. PROTECTION AND STORAGE 8.1 Stand all roll goods on end and store on clean floor to keep ends of rolls free from foreign matter. 8.2 Store all roofing materials in a dry place, on raised platforms. and cover with waterproof tarpaulins, inside, or in closed vans, protected from sun and weather. 8.3 Store all cartons, insulation, and drums of asphalt on raised, level platforms and protect them from the weather with waterproof tarpaulins. 8.4 Store solvents and coatings in a cool dry area. 8.5 Keep lids tightly sealed on all cut back adhesives, and flashing cements to keep volatiles from escaping. 8.6 Unload and handle all roofing materials with care. Dropping rolls. roof insulation, and roofing accessories can damage these components sufficiently to cause unsatisfactory application and performance. 8.7 Heat asphalt in accordance with manufacturer's recommended limits. Overheating of asphalts may change the physical properties of the asphalt and can contribute to premature aging or failure of the roof membrane. 8.8 Plastic covers and shrink -wrap shall not be used for job storage, nor shall any other cover be used in which moisture can condense within or on the material stored therein. 8.9 Keep temperature of roll materials above 40 degrees F for 24 hours prior to application, especially coated rolls. 8.10 Cover all roofing materials remaining on the roof deck at the end of each work day. PART 2: PRODUCTS 9. ACCEPTABLE BUILT -UP ROOFING MANUFACTURERS (BASE BID) 9.1 Built -up roof system manufacturers which are ac- ceptable for use on the project are: 9.1.1 Schuller (Johns Manville) Roofing Systems Division. 9.1.2 Celotex, Roofing Products Division. 9.1.3 Tamko Asphalt Products. 9.2 For Regional Representatives, call: 9.2.1 Schuller (Johns Manville): (800) 654 -3103 ROOF! , FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL 'SECTION 7D -2 9.2.2 Celotex: (813) 873 -1600. 9.2.3 Tamko: (800) 641 -4691. 10. ACCEPTABLE BUILT -UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEMS (IF ALTERNATE IS REQUESTED), 10.1 Insulated Metal Deck: Three plies glass - fiber felts over manufacturer approved insulation, gravel- surfaced. 10.1.1 Schuller (Johns Manville) 3G -IG. 10.1.2 Celotex AGS- 3 -C-G. 10.1.3 Tamko 501. 10.2 Insulated Metal Deck: Three plies glass - fiber felts over manufacturer approved insulation, with mineral- surfaced cap sheet: 10.2.1 Schuller (Johns Manville) 4G -IC. 10.2.2 Celotex AGS- 4 -C -M. 10.2.3 Tamko 502. 11. ACCEPTABLE INGL -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING MANUFACTURERS 11.1 Single ply roof system manufacturers which are acceptable ALTERNATE BIDS, For main building & BASE BID for entry canopy roof system (TRU only). 11.1.1 Firestone Building Products. 11.1.2 Carlisle SyntecSysterris. 12. &QGEPTABLE SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROQFING SYSTEMS, :2.1 Single -ply, mechanically fastened EPDM 45 mil. 12.1.1 Firestone Rubberguard EPDM (black), Ultra Ply 78+ (white). 12.1.2 Carlisle Sure -Seal (black), Brite -Ply (white). 12.2 Prices to be submitted for both membrane colors. 13. MATERIALS 13.1 Fiberglass Ply Sheets: Glass fiber reinforced, complying with ASTM D2178, type VI. 13.2 Asphalt: Complying with ASTM D312. 13.2.1 Type II (Flat) Asphalt shall be used with gravel surfaced specifications on slopes up to 'h" per foot. 13.2.2 Type III (Steep) Asphalt shall be used on all cap sheet specifications and on gravel surfaced specifications with slopes between v2" per foot and 3" per foot. 13.3 Membrane Flashing: Manufacturer's Standard Modi- fied Bitumen Flashing. 13.3.1 Torch Application: Where specified manufacturer's published specifications include both torch - applied and hot asphalt - applied membrane flashing, provide torch application only. 13.3.2 Hot Asphalt Application: Where specified manufacturer's published specifications included only REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' DFING, FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET fAL 'SECTION 7D -3 hot asphalt - applied membrane flashing, provide hot asphalt application only. 13.4 Aggregate: Clean, dry, roofing grade gravel con- forming to ASTM D1863. All gravel shall pass through a 13.6 Asphalt Primer: Conforming to ASTM D41 or Federal Specification SS -A -701. Any dilution not recommended by the manufacturer is prohibited. 13.7 Asphalt Flashing Cement: Complying with Federal Specification SS- C-153, Type I. 13.8 Preformed Expansion Joint Covers: Furnish and install metal flanged "Expand -O- Flash" as manufactured by Manville Products Corp., of type 'CF -EJ" shown on drawings at adjacent building walls. 13.9 Miscellaneous Materials: Surface Applied Reglet and Cap Flashing: Two piece reglet and flashing system for surface application to masonry reglet of formed 0.50 aluminum; cap flashing .032 aluminum. Hickman "Hinge - Lock" type. 13.10 EPDM Materials: EPDM Rubber Membrane (45 mil.) color to be determined, high tenacity polyester reinforcing scrim, mechanical fasteners (seam fasteners & plates or metal batten strips), seam splice tape and all other materials as required & specified by specific roofing system. 14, ROOFING INSULATION 14.1 Provide insulation acceptable to the roofing manu- facturer in thickness attaining a guaranteed "R" value of 12.50 after aging in accordance with RICITIMA procedures, or greater it required by prevailing energy Codes. 14.2 For a guaranteed "R" value of 12.50, provide the following: 14.2.1 Single Layer: 3" Fiberglas Roof Insulation complying with Federal Specification HH- I.526. 14.2.2 Double Layer: 14.2.2.1 Bottom Layer: 1.8" Isocyanurate roof insulation with Non - Asphaltic Glass Fiber Facers, complying with Factory Mutual Standard 4450/4470 and Federal Specification HH -I- 1972/2 and approved for use with guaranteed roofing assemblies. 14.2.2.2 Top Layer: 1" organic fiberboard complying with Fed. Spec. LLL -I -535, Class C, or 1" perlite board conforming to ASTM C728 (Guaranteed R= 2.78). 14.3 For a guaranteed "R" value greater than 12.50. the roof insulation assembly shall include: 14.3.1 Double Layer: 14.3.1.1 Bottom Layer: Appropriate thickness of manufacturer approved Isocyanurate roof insulation, with the guaranteed "R" value to be calculated at R =5.6 per inch. 14.3.1.2 Top Layer: 1" organic fiberboard complying with Fed. Spec. LLL -I -535, Class C, or 1" perlite board conforming to ASTM C728 (Guaranteed R= 2.78). 14.4 Cant strips shall be standard asphalt - impregnated 3/4" sieve, and none shall pass through a 1/4" sieve. 13.5 Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet: conforming to ASTM, D3909. Color: White. fiberboard, complying with ASTM 0208, in degree sections with 4 -1/4 inch face dimension unless noted on drawings to be wood or steel. All to be reinforced with periodic blocking strips. 14.5 Edge strips, where indicated, shall be standard asphalt impregnated fiberboard, complying with ASTM D208, 12 inches by 48 inches tapering from 1 -5/8 inches to 1/8 inches to 1/8 inch on the 12 inch dimension. 14.6 Tapered Insulation: For cricket construction and where otherwise indicated, organic fiberboard tapered insulation complying with F.S.LLL -I -535 or perlite board conforming to ASTM C728. Slope as indicated on the drawings. 15. INSULATION FASTENERS 15.1 Shall be type recommended by insulation manufacturer for substrates intended, sized for thickness and type of insulation used. 15.2 Meet or exceed Factory Mutual Class I requirements. 16. ALUMINUM SHEET METAL, 16.1 Aluminum sheet metal for fleshings, copings, gutters, and downspouts shall be 3003 alloy, standard mill finish, .032 inch thickness unless otherwise noted. Aluminum to be factory finished as indicated on drawings and in specification Section 9H. 17. ROOF HATCH & SMOKE HATCHES 17.1 Roof hatch shalt be Type S -20 paint bond galvanized metal as manufactured by The Bilco Company. Cover shall be 14 gauge metal with 1" fiberglass insulation and covered with a 22 gauge metal liner. Curb shall be 14 gauge metal 12" in height with 1" thick fiberboard rigid insulation. Scuttle shall be 2' -6" x 3' -0" furnished completely assembled with required operating hardware and inside padlock hasp. Provide automatic hold open arm and neoprene draft seal with unit. 17.2 Safety Post: Provide Bilco 'Ladder -Up" telescoping safety post attached to the fixed ladder below roof hatch. 17.3 Smoke Hatches: (If required) 17.3.1 Smoke Hatches shall be No. 4896 CM -SH2D as manufactured by Bristol Fiberlite Industries, Santa Ana, California. 17.3.2 The doors shall be 5052 -H32 aluminum welded for complete weatherproofing and lined with fiberglass insulation protected by an aluminum lid liner. Doors compression loaded with torsion bars attached to a pivot hinge secured with stainless steel ball lock pins, actuated by the melting of a UL -FM listed fusible link. No loading from the torsion bars shall be transferred to the fusible link. 17.3.3 The self- flashing curb shall be fabricated from 6063 -T5 extruded aluminum. The curb shall be 5 -1/8 inches with a built -in water barrier and weepage gutter for drainage and a 2 -3/4 inch flange on the roof. Guarantee units against defective workmanship and material. 18 VENTS & LOUVERS REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' 18.1 Provide ventilation in Vestibule wall as required. Soffit vents for parapet louvers, etc by Contractor as shown on drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 19 REFERENCE 19.1 The most current application guide published by the 19.3 Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performances, or provide other similar materials certified in writing by manufacturer to be equal or better than specified in every significant respect and acceptable to the Owner. 10.2 Compatibility: Provide products which are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials. 20. HEATING BITUMEN (ASPHALT) 20.1 Asphalt shall not be heated above 500 Maximum storage temperature for bulk asphalt is 325 ° F. 20.1.1 Bitumen temperature at the point of application shall be +1- 25 degrees F of the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT). 20.1.2 If the EVT is not known, bitumen temperature at the point of application shall be 375 degrees F to 425 degrees F for Types II and III Asphalt. 20.2 Use separate kettles or tankers for each type of bitumen. 20.3 The heating process shall be strictly regulated by means of an automatic thermostatic control of any approved type for positive temperature control. Kettles or tankers shall be the immersion tube type, fired by liquid LP gas, and shall have 100% safety shutoff. 20.4 Provide each kettle or tanker with a recording thermometer that will graphically indicate and record on a chart the maximum and minimum temperatures to which materials have been heated. Recording thermometers shall be capable of accurately recording temperatures as high as 600 degrees F and as low as 0 degrees F. The thermometers shall be properly maintained at all times. Kettles or tankers without recording thermometers in good working condition shall not be used. At the end of each working day, turn the chart from the thermometer on each kettle or tanker cover to the Owner's Representative. If any underheated or overheated bitumen has been applied on the roof, remove that portion of the roof. 20.5 Maintain the temperature of the bitumen at the point of application by using insulated pipes, buckets, tuggers and other insulated roofers equipment as required by field conditions and as approved by the owner's representative. 21. INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION 21.1 Installation of roof insulation shall comply with Factory Mutual requirements for Class I construction and 1 -90 wind uplift rating. Follow details as set forth in current Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -28. 21.2 If insulation is installed in a single layer, all roof insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the deck. 21.2.1 Fastener quantities: REMODEL PROTOTYPE ROOF. , FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL 'SECTION 7D-4 manufacturer of the selected roofing system shall be considered part of this specification and shall be referred to for more specific application procedures regarding roofing insulation, membrane and base flashing. 19.2 Where this written specification differs from the manufacturer's application guide, the more stringent specification shall be used. 21.2.1.1 For 4' x 4' fiberglas insulation, provide a minimum of six (6) fasteners per board. 21.2.1.2 For 4' x 8' fiberglas insulation, provide a minimum of sixteen (16) fasteners per board. 21.3 If insulation is installed in two layers: 21.3.1 Bottom layer is to be mechanically fastened to the deck. Fastener quantities shall be: 21.3.1.1 For 4' x 4' isocyanurate insulation, provide a minimum of six (6) fasteners per board. 21.3.1.2 For 4' x 8' isocyanurate insulation, provide a minimum of eleven (11) fasteners per board. 21.3.2 Top layer is to be installed in a uniform, solid 25 -30 lb./100 ft. square mopping of hot asphalt. Joints are to be offset a minimum of 6 inches from the preceding layer of insulation. 21.4 Insulation boards shall be laid in parallel courses with transverse joints staggered. Parallel courses shall be laid at right angles to metal deck ribs. Adjoining edges of board shall be brought into tight contact, but shall not be forced into place in such manner as to damage boards. Where the roof meets vertical surfaces, boards shall be cut in a neat workmanlike manner, leaving approximately a '/r" joint. Score or cut boards as necessary to lay flat on deck where same is irregular. Any joint parallel to ribs shall be placed over solid deck bearing. 21.5 Roof insulations shall be cut to fit neatly around projections, pipes, and vents coming through roofing. Provide clearance per manufacturer around heat conducting pipes. 21.6 Fiberboard cants. tapered edge strips arid crickets are to be mopped in placed with hot asphalt. 21.7 Install only as much roof insulation as can be completely covered with roofing the same day. 22. INSTALLATION OF BUILT -UP ROOFING AND FLASHING (INSULATED METAL DECK. GRAVEL SURFACED) 22.1 Apply roofing plies by first starting at the low edge of the roof. Apply one 12" wide, then over that one 24" wide, then over both a full 36" wide sheet fiberglas ply sheets. Succeeding layers of ply sheets are to be applied in full widths, overlapping the preceding plies in accordance with manufacturer's roofing system guaranty requirements. Install each felt so that it shall be firmly and uniformly set without voids into hot asphalt which has been applied just before the felt at a minimum rate of 25 lbs. per square over the entire surface. Roll ply sheets into asphalt. On inclines over 1" per foot, backnailing is required. 22.2 Install modified bitumen (lashings as specified by manufacturer. For curbs and walls up to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, flashing is to be installed in one piece. 01/03/00 DIVISION 7" 22.2.1 When shown on drawings, flashing is to be installed in two pieces. The first piece should extend from 4" past the toe of the cant to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, up the parapet wall. The first piece of flashing overlaps the top of the first piece by at least four inches, and extends to the outside edge of the top of the parapet wall. 22.3 Embed not less than 400 lbs. per square of gravel into the appropriate grade of hot asphalt, using a uniform mopping of not less than 60 lbs. per square of roof area. The application of the aggregate to the roofing system should be delayed until the entire roof system including the flashings is completed. 22.4All conduit/lightweight pipe present on roof surface must be supported by treated wood blocking. Attachment of pipe to wood blocking should allow for minor movement of pipe. Each treated wood blocking support should be set in a heated, upside down piece of modified bitumen, which extends a minimum of 4" beyond all edges of the wood. Modified bitumen pad and adhered wood block are then loose laid on top of the completed roof system (including surfacing). Modified bitumen pad should not be adhered to the membrane or the surfacing. 23. INSTALLATION OF BUILT-UP ROOFING AND FLASHING (INSULATED METAL DECK, MINERAL SURFACED CAP SHEET) 23.1 Apply base ply with 2" side laps and end laps. Mechanically secure maximum 9" o.c. at side laps and maximum 18" o.c. on two lines 11.13' from each edge (staggered). Mechanical securement using mechanical fasteners as recommended by the deck manufacturer. To minimize wrinkles and buckles allow enough time for base ply to relax unrolled prior to attachment. 23.2 Embed two plies of Fiberglas ply sheets in shingle fashion (starter sheets required), lapping 19" into uniform solid moppings of hot bitumen, using 23- 45Ib/100 ft per ply. Starter plies should be cut to dimensions so as to preclude coincident side laps to the base ply. 23.3 Install modified bitumen fleshings as specified by manufacturer. For curbs and walls up to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, flashing is to be installed in one piece. 23.3.1 When shown on drawings, flashing is to be installed in two pieces. The first piece should extend from 4" past the toe of the cant to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, up the parapet wall. The first piece of flashing is then nailed off. The second piece of flashing overlaps the top of the first piece by at least four inches, and extends to the outside edge of the top of the parapet wall. 23.4 Embedded nominal 18' lengths of mineral - surfaced cap sheet with 2" side and end laps into a uniform, solid 20 to 30 pound /square mopping of Type III asphalt. End laps shall be staggered, minimum 3'. NOTE: Cap sheet must be installed prior to modified bitumen flashing at all cant strip flashing details. 23.5 All conduit/lightweight pipe present on roof surface must be supported by treated wood blocking. Attachment of pipe to wood blocking should allow for minor movement of pipe. Each treated wood blocking support should be set in a heated, upside down piece of modified bitumen, which extends a minimum of 4" beyond all edges of the wood. Modified Bitumen pad and adhered wood block are then loose laid on top of the completed roof system (including surfacing). Modified bitumen pad should not be DFING. FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET TAL 'SECTION 7D -5 adhered to the membrane or the surfacing. 24. INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED MECHANICALLY- ATTACHED EPDM MEMBRANE 24.1 The mechanically attached system shall be installed with a perimeter layout per manufacturer requirements. 24.2 install field membrane sheets over substrate without stretching, allow to relax 30 minutes before attachment. 24.3 Lap ends a minimum of 3" and side edges of adjoining sheets a minimum of 7 ". 24.4 Install seam plates or metal batten fasteners 12" O.C. Provide seam tape continuous at all joints and splices. Do not use glue seams. 24.5 Installer responsible for all materials. applications, cleanup, etc. to maintain complete roof integrity and warrantee requirements. 25. INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR SHEATHING AND CORRUGATED SIDING 25.1 All sheathing to be Exterior Grade Plywood sheathing in thicknesses and applications as shown on drawings. Install per all manufacturers requirements in conjunction with steel studs, corrugated decking and E.I.F.S. finish material fasteners, nails, etc. per current industry standard. 25.2 At rear of parapets, at front Vestibule, in applications and locations as shown on drawings, provide 7/8 ", 22 gauge galvanized corrugated metal siding with paint grip finish. All connections, joints, fasteners to be installed, caulked and sealed per current industry standards. 26 �HEET METAL FLASHING. COPINGS. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 26.1 Surfaces to which sheet metal is to be applied shall be even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry and free from all defects that might affect the application. 26.2 All accessories or other Items essential to the completeness of the sheet metal installation, though not specifically shown or specified, shall be provided. All such items, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or specified, shall be of the same kind of material as the item to which applied. Nails, screws, and bolts shall be of the types best suited for the purpose intended, and shall be of a composition that is compatible with the metal to which it will contact. 26.3 Do not weld aluminum, instead provide mechanical waterproof connections. 26.4 Flash and counterflash with specified aluminum at juncture of all roofs with vertical surfaces and other places as required by drawings. Exposed edges of all fleshings shall be doubled back 'h" to provide stiffness. Cap flashing shall turn down over base fleshings not less than 4 ". Ventilators and other items of equipment which have integral members to cover flashing need not have cap flashing. 26.5 Comply with details and profiles as shown, and comply with the most current SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for installation of the work. 26.6 Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15' -0" running length. All thermal expansion joints are to be mechanical joints. Provide 6" wide cover plate over 1/4" wide joint. Cover plate shall be REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' ROOF, • FLASHING, & ASSOC. SHEET METAL 'SECTION 7D -6 embedded in mastic, attached to nailer with waterproof connection and loose locked to the drip edge. 26.7 Flashing and Trim: Expansion joints, 10' -0" maximum spacing, and 2"- 0" from corners and intersections. 26.8 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edges, to form a hem. Provide continuous clips under coping edges. 26.9 Pitch Pans: Where supports, pipes or other objects extend through roof, provide bottomless pitch pans as indicated on the drawings. Form pans from 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal allowing 4 inch nailing flange and 3 inch standing leg with top edge folded back 'h inch, all joints soldered. Provide collars where required. Install pitch pans only where flanged sleeve and weather cap flashing cannot be installed. Set pitch pan flange in a solid bed of black plastic roofing cement. Fill bottom of pan to a depth of 1 inch with cement mortar mix. Fill pan to top with dead -level bitumen. 26.10 Install flanged tube - weather cap flashing at all penetrations of electrical conduit and other service lines. 26.11 Fabricate and install .02 Inch aluminum rectangular downspouts and putters in sizes indicated with rewired special connectors Anchor to wall with straps spaced and attached as indicated on the drawings. Telescope downspouts ends a minimum of 1 -1/2". Provide watertight connections and slip type expansion ioints where gutters ioin cownspouts, 26.12 Fabricate and install .032 inch aluminum gravel stop in size and configuration indicated. 26.12.1 The fabrication of the gravel stop shall conform to Plate 38, Figure A and joint system shall conform to Plate 42, Figure A of the 1987 Edition of the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by SMACNA. 26.12.2 Where indicated, provide drain -thru aluminum gravel stop equal to Hickman Co. .05T gauge perforated. Factory finished, white color unless otherwise indicated or specified. 26.12.3 Fasten roof flange to wood nailer 3" o.c. staggered. Coordinate with installation of gutter. 27. RQQFING CONSTRUCTION AT OGES AND PENETRATIQN$ 27.1 Provide preformed edge strips (cant strips) where shown and wherever feasible to install hot mop to insulation. 27.2 Provide 1" rigid insulation at all preformed curbs for roof penetrations (mech. units, exhaust fans, roof hatch, etc.) 27.3 At all areas where Modified Bitumen flashings will be adhered to metal, the metal flange must be primed on both sides and adhered to the field plies with asphalt flashing cement. 27.4 All sheet metal flanges to which Modified Bitumen flashing will be adhered, must be nailed 3" o.c. staggered, prior to the application of the flashings. Wood nailers equal in thickness to the roof insulation must be installed below all sheet metal flanges prior to the application of the roofing plies. 28. FABRICATED PRODUCTS REMODEL PROTOTYPE 28.1 Fabricated Metal Flashing: Fabricate metal flashing, trim, copings, gutters and downspouts and similar items to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply with standard industry details as shown by SMACNA in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual'. 29. ROOF DRAINS AND OVERFLOW DRAINS (IF APPLICABLE) 29.1 Provide all roof drains and overflow drains as shown on drawings. See drawings for location of horizontal leaders, downspouts, sub - surface connections, etc. Verify with plumbing and mechanical drawings. 30. ROOFING APPLICATION QUALITY CONTROL 30.1 The Contractor shall request the roofing manufacturer to provide a competent representative to inspect and direct the handling, methods, and application of the roofing materials. While it shall not be required that the manufacturer's representative remain constantly at the building during installation, he shall be requested to inspect all phases of the work in the application of the roofing as it progresses. This representative should at all times be easily accessible during the execution of the work in order that he may properly attend to questioned items. The manufacturer's representative is requested to certify, in writing, that the workmanship and installation were properly and correctly performed and that the manufacturer's warranty is valid. 30.2 If this inspection and certification process is not provided by the Contractor then the roof test cuts as specified below under paragraph 322.1 and 322.2 below shall be performed by the Contractor. 30.2.1 Contractor Is to be responsible for obtaining roof test cuts and analysis as provided by a certified independent testing laboratory for all roof systems as specified by ASTM Document ANSI /ASTM 03617 -77 Standard Recommended Practice for Sampling and Analysis of New Built -Up Roof Membranes. All sampling procedures and documentation shall be in accordance with this ASTM Document. Copies of the results are to be submitted to Owner and the Owner's Representative for review and approval. 30.2.2 The cost of the required test and all subsequent roof repairs are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall, therefore, be included as part of the base bid proposal and identified as such. - END OF SECTION - 01 /03/00 DIVISION 7' WATERPROOFING 'SECTION 7E -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.4 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provision of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.5 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 The contractor shall provide all materials, operations, methods listed or mentioned on the drawings and specified herein, including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary and required for the completion of membrane waterproofing. 2.1.1 Waterproofing work shall include exterior surfaces at all concrete or concrete block walls where the finish floor line is below grade, unless noted otherwise, 2.2 Before commencing work, examine surfaces upon which waterproofing work is depend4mt for perfect workmanship: make necessary adjustments to such surface as is required. 2.3 Exercise care in application of materials in order to protect work which will remain exposed. Where exposed surfaces become coated or smeared, clean them thoroughly. 2.4 The installation shall provide complete protection from the penetration of water. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Manufacturer: Shall be an established manufacturer of waterproofing materials for the application required and as approved by Project Manager. 3.2 For each type of work obtain primary materials from single manufacturer, to greatest extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 3.3 Applicator: Shall be an established contractor approved by waterproofing materials manufacturer. Verification of waterproofing capability, facilities, personnel, financial responsibility, and list of completed projects comparable to the scope of this project shall be required. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Manufacturer's Data: Submit product data sheets. application. instructions and details, clearly marked, to identify project requirements and manufacturer's standard guarantee in accordance with the requirements of the Division 1. 5. REFERENCE STANDARDS 5.1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards: 5.1.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5.1.1.1 ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement, 5.1.1.2ASTM C836, Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Liquid - Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course. 5.1.1.3ASTM D412, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension. 5.1.1.4 ASTM 02240, Stand Test Methods for Rubber Properties - Durometer Hardness. 5.1.1.5 ASTM 02589, McNet Wet Classification of Asbestos Fiber. 5.1.1.6 D2643, Standard Specification for Prefabricated Asphalt Canal, Ditch or Pond Liner (Exposed Type). 5.1.1.7 ASTM E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 5.2 Federal Specifications (FS). 5.2.1 FS TT-5-0027E, Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi- component (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 6. PRODUCT HANDLING 6.1 Deliver products in manufacturer's sealed containers, with seals and labels intact. 6.2 Store materials in an enclosed space protected from weather and out of the direct rays of the sun. Maintain a temperature range of 40 degrees F. minimum, 90 degrees F. maximum. 7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 7.1 Apply liquid membrane when the temperature is 40 degrees F. or above and only after adequate precautions have been taken to assure dry and frost free concrete surfaces. 7.2 Do not apply during inclement weather. 8. PROTECTION 8.1 Protect adjacent work from damage from work included in this Section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 9. MATERIALS 9.1 Elastomeric Waterproofing Compound: Shall be one part cold applied modified polyurethane conforming to ASTM C836, spray applied and non- sag. 9.2 System shall include the following as applicable: 9.2.1 Expansion Joint Sealant: Two part elastomeric polysulfide, or three part epoxidized terpolymer conforming to FS TT- S- 00227E, Type II, Class A. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' WATERPROOFING 'SECTION 7E -2 9.2.3 Reducer: For cleaning tools and equipment, standard of the waterproofing material manufacturer. 9.2.4 Leveling Patcher: An acrylic latex base bonding compound used directly or as an admixture. 9.2.5 Joint Filler Strip: Non - impregnated joint filler strip. 9.2.6 Protection Board: Premolded asphalt- impregnated waterproofing protection course conforming to ASTM D2643, ASTM 0781 and ASTM 02589, thickness recommended by manufacturer for required application. 9.2.7 Wax: Liquid household buffing wax containing camuba, if required. 9.2.8 Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 9.3 System shall have the following minimum performance characteristics: PROPERTY MEMBRANE (CURED) Shore A Hardness ( +5) 40 Tensile Strength, psi 150 ( ;25) Elongation. Percent, 600 ASTM -D-412 Avg. 100% Moldulus, psi 80 ASTM -D -412 ( ±10) Recovery, Percent, Min. Swelling in Water, 3 Days, Room Temp. Service Temperature Range, °F Moisture Vapor Transmission, Perm. inches Crack Test, 1/16 inch, Cycled 10 times /24 hours @ 15 °F REMODEL PROTOTYPE ASTM -D -2240 ASTM -D-412 90 Nil -40 to +180 0.15 ASTM -E -96 No loss ASTM -C -836 of bond or cracking exhibited. PART 3: EXECUTION 10. CONDITION OF SURFACE 10.1 Concrete shall be cured a minimum of 14 days and shall be dry. 10.2 Concrete Surfaces: 10.2.1 Horizontal surfaces shall be steel trowel finished to a smooth, level surface. 10.2.2 Vertical surfaces shall be smooth, sound and free of honeycombs. 10.2.3 Concrete shall be free of curing and parting compounds, wax or other foreign chemicals or materials. 9.2.2 Joint Filler. Closed cell polyethylene foam backer -rod. 10.3 Surfaces of all substrates to receive waterproofing shall be clean, dry and free of frost, dew, loose dirt and foreign matter. 11. PREPARATION 11.1 Static Joints or Cracks less than 1/8" wide: Seal with waterproofing membrane. Material shall fill and overlay the edges of the joint to a minimum width of 3" on both sides and shall have minimum surface thickness of 55 (±5) mils. 11.2 Expansion and Working Joints: Cracks and joints larger than 1/8" with maximum joint movement of +20 %. 11.2.1 Install backer rod joint filler, 1/8' larger than joint width at the depth recommended for sealant. 11.2.2 Apply specified sealant according to manufacturer's directions. 11.2.3 After sealant has cured, wax area over sealant to prevent membrane from adhering to sealant, if recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 11.2.4 Stripe the joint seal and backer rod with 55 ( ±5) mils of membrane extending minimum of 3' on base slab on either side of the joint. 11.3 Penetrations, covers, drains, Intersections of horizontal and vertical surfaces shall be prepared as detailed in the project drawings. 11.4 Immediately prior to, and during application of membrane, remove all dust and dirt by use of high pressure air, by brushing with a soft broom, or vacuum cleaning. 12. APPI ICATIQ1 12.1 Apply membrane waterproofing as follows: 12,1.1 For Horizontal Surfaces: 12.1.1.1 Apply membrane at a rate of 5 gallons of material to 125 square feet of surface to produce membrane 55 ( +5) mils thick, minimum. 12.1.1.2 Control application rate by means of premeasured surface areas. 12.1.2 For Vertical Surfaces (Non -Sag): 12.1.2.1 Apply prime coat over concrete block consisting of a 50/50 combination of liquid membrane and reducer as recommended by membrane manufacturer. No primer required on cast -in -place concrete surfaces unless otherwise indicated or specified. 12.1.2.2 Apply membrane at a rate of 5 gallons of material to 125 square fee to surface to produce membrane 55 ( ±5) mils thick, minimum. 12.1.2.3 Carefully control application to avoid runs and sags of fresh material. 12.2 Apply membrane to prestripped areas on both horizontal and vertical surfaces at cracks, joints, intersections, penetrations, drains, flashing flanges, etc., to provide a minimum total thickness of 110 mils over these areas. 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' WATERPROOFING `SECTION 7E -3 12.3 Mask any membrane edge to be exposed to view to provide a straight dean edge. 13. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 13.1 Before the material attains final set, verify the applied thickness by use of mil- thickness gauge as the work progresses. Take a reading every 500 square feet of surface area. Where readings indicate a thickness less than specified, immediately apply additional membrane to produce required thickness. 13.2 Visually inspect all other areas which cannot be water tested for voids, damage, or rupture. Repair as required. 14. BACKFILLING 14.1 Do no backfilling before waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative. 14.2 Do not place protection boards until after inspection. 15. MEMBRANE PROTECTION 15.1 Within 24 hours after completion of a successful water test or visual inspection and/or repairs, cover membrane with protection board. All horizontal and vertical membrane shall be protected. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' ROOF PATCHING 'SECTION 7F -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. Reference Division 1 for allowance amount to be included in bid proposal. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. acOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing roof patching, and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 The extent of roofing work is shown on the drawings and includes patching of existing roofing. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 2.3 Coordinate this work with other trades involved to avoid delays and to insure a satisfactory and watertight installation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS 3.1 All materials, including felts, composition flashing, bitumen, roof insulation, vapor retarder (if any) aggregate surfacing or other coating, etc. Is to be compatible with the existing roofing system to complete the patching of the existing roof. 3.2 Aluminum sheet metal for flashing, copings, etc. shall be 3003 alloy, standard mill finish, .032 inch thickness unless otherwise noted. Aluminum to be factory finished as indicated on drawings and in specification Section 9H. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. PREPARATION 4.1 Examine condition of existing roof system and the conditions under which the roof patching work is to be performed. Notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 5. PATCHING 5.1 Install all required materials in proper manner to insure a watertight and weatherproof installation. • END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' JOINT SEALANTS PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings. and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing caulking and joint sealant work indicated on the drawings and herein specified. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 The required applications of sealants and caulking include. but are not necessarily limited to those locations herein listed. 2.3 Flashing and counterflashing adjoining wall areas. 2.4 Exterior wall joints, masonry control joints, exterior and interior. 2.5 Joints between wall and adjacent windows, doors, grilles and miscellaneous frames on exterior and interior. 2.6 Joints at penetrations of walls, decks and floors by piping and other services and equipment. 2.7 Drywall control joints and other joints where drywall abuts other materials. 2.8 Sanitary sealant shall be used for joints between toilet fixtures, accessories. water coolers, janitor's sink. etc and adjacent surfaces, and other areas as indicated on the drawings. 3. SUBMITTALS 3.1 Manufacturer's Data, Sealants and Caulking: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the applications shown. Show by transmittal that one copy of each recommendation and instruction has been distributed to the installer. 4. REFERENCE STANDARDS 4.1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following Standards: 4.1.1 American Society for Testino and Materials (ASTM). 4.1.1.1 ASTM C834, Latex Sealing Compounds. 4.1.1.2ASTM C920, Elastomeric Joint Sealants, including Sanitary Sealants. 4.1.2 Federal Specifications (FS) 4.1.2.1 FS TT- S- 001543A, Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 4.1.2.2 FS TT -S- 001657, Sealing Compound - Single Component, Butyl Rubber Base, Solvent Release Type. 4.1.2.3 FS TT -S- 00230, Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 5. GUARANTEE, SEALANTS 5.1 Submit 2 copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as air -tight and water -tight joints: or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability: or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data, as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. Provide guarantee signed by the installer and contractor. 5.2 Guarantee period is 2 years. 6. JOB CONpITIONS PART 2: PRODUCTS 7. MATERIALS. GENERAL 'SECTION7G -1 6.1 The installer must examine the joint surfaces, backing, and anchorage of units forming sealant rabbet, and the conditions under which the sealant work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealants. Do not proceed with the sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 7.1 Provide custom colors, wherever indicated, to match Project Manager's samples or to match the adjoining surfaces in a manner to be determined by the Project Manager. Provide manufacturer's standard colors, as selected by Project Manager, wherever custom colors are not indicated. 7.2 Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate its compatibility to adhere with the joint surfaces, joint materials (manufacturer's recommended variation of the specified materials) which are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation condition, as shown by manufacturer's published data or certification. 7.3 Provide size and shape of preformed sealant tapes as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the manufacturer, either in his published data or upon consultation with his technical representative. 7.4 Exterior One - Component Silicone Sealants for exterior joints: Provide one of the following: 7.4.1 Dow Coming - 795 7.4.2 Pecora - 864 REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' JOINT SEALANTS •SECTION7G -2 7.4.3 General Electric - Silpruf 7.5 At E.I.F.S. surface adjacent masonry, sealant to match 7.6 Interior Caulking: Provide one of the following ( paintable): 7.6.1 Acrylic latex water emulsion compound conforming to ASTM C834. 7.6.2 Butyl sealant conforming to FS TT -S- 001657. 7.6.3 Sanitary sealant: One -part Gear, mildew resistant silicone caulk (non - paintable) conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, NS, Class 25, F.S. TT -S- 001543, Class A, and F.S. TT -S- 00230, Class A. 7.7 Miscellaneous Materials: 7.7.1 Joint Cleaner: Provide the type of joint cleaning compound recommend by the sealant or caulking compound manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be cleaned. 7.7.2 Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide the type of joint primer /sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. 7.7.3 Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant- contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self - adhesive tape wherever applicable. 7.7.4 Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam. butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non- absorptive material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod which will control the joint depth for sealant placement, break bond or sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. PART 3: EXECUTION 8. JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION 8.1 Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. masonry. 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. 9.2 Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer /sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. 9.3 Install sealant backer rod where shown allowing proper depth for sealant bead. 9.4 Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly. 9.5 Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. Finish joint surface shall be smooth. 9.6 Install sealants to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the manufacturer's general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead. 9.7 Clean excess material off adjacent surfaces. Remove cartons and other debns related to this work from the project site at the direction of the project superintendent. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION #7 ENTRANCE CANOPY *SECTION 71 -1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 2.2.1 framing. SUMMARY Section includes: Standing Seam Metal Panels. (BRU Only) Fascia Panels (BRU Only) Linear metal soffit panels (BRU Only). Related Sections: Division 5 Sections for structural and light gage 2.2.2 Division 7 Section for Roofing: Sheet Metal Flashing. 2.2.3 Section 7G, Joint Sealants. 2.2.4 Section 9J, Linear Metal Ceilings. 3. SUBMITTALS 3.1 Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Section. 3.2 Product data: Manufacturer's printed product data and specifications, ;showing standard installation details, and material information. 3.3 Any additional installation details required for project not included in manufacturer's standard installation details. 3.4 Samples: Provide two (2) sample panels, a minimum of two (2) panels each of twelve(12) inches square\ in the profile and color indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, other panel accessories and showing typical joint with sealant. 4. QUALITY ASSURAKE 4.1 All materials, trims, accessories, etc. to be per manufacturers requirements and owner - approved colors, finishes and configurations. 5. DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING 5.1 Deliver in original packaging, store in weather - protected area and handle to avoid damaging materials in a manner recommended by manufacturer. 6. WARRANTY 6.1 Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's written warranty covering finish for a period of twenty (20) years from the date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 7. MANUFACTURER 7.1 Standing seam Metal Canopy Panels: Merchant & Evans, Peterson Aluminum (Pac -Clad) MBCI or owner - approved equal (BRU Only). 7.2 Flush Panel Fascia: Merchant & Evans, Peterson Aluminum (Pac- Clad), MBCI or owner- approved equal (BRU Only). 7.3 Linear Soffits: Refer to Section 9J for specified material. Interfinish, linear soffit, 'Planar, by Chicago Metallic Corp. (BRU Only). 8. MATERIALS 8.1 All materials, trims, accessories, panels, fascias, soffits, etc. to be in compliance with standard ASTM requirements. 8.2 Provide built -up roofing on 1/2" fiberboard at entry canopy for BRU. See section 7D and drawings for reference. 9. METAL FINISHES 9.1 Fascia Finish: Fabricate to match profiles and sizes as shown on drawings and to comply with standard industry and manufacturer details. 9.1.1 Fascia for Babies "R" Us Entrance Canopy to be smooth finish, flush panel with vertical joints with owner approved colors as indicated on drawings. Manufacturer and fascia system to be owner - approved. 9.2 Soffits at Babies "R" Us canopies to be linear metal ceilings, refer to Section 9J. Soffits at Babies "R" Us canopies to be Interfinish "Planar", linear metal ceilings, colors to match adjacent colors or as called out on drawings. Configuration and spacing to be owner approved prior to orders. 9.3 Canopy surface at Babies "R" Us to be standing seam metal panels, color finish, spacing, configuration and manufacturer to be approved by owner prior to order. PART 3 - EXECUTION 10. PANEL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAQE 10.1 Install girts, angles and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction 'Code of Standard Practice." 11. PANEL INSTALLATION 11.1 Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 11.1.1 Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 11.1.2lnstall panels with concealed fasteners. 11.2 Accessories: Install components required for a complete panel system, including trim, copings, fascias, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, seam covers, flashings, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure stirps, and similar items. Finish all such exposed accessories to match wall panels. 11.3 Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets, sealants and fillers indicated, or if not REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION #7 ENTRANCE CANOPY 'SECTION 71 -2 otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer. 11.4 Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units 12. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 12.1 Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch -up or similar minor repair procedures. 12.2 Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings as soon as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE within installed tolerance of a maximum of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on level /plumb /slope and location/line as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 01/03/00 DIVISION '7 Toys R Us has designated Dryvit systems, Inc. as a proprietary product to be used for all E.I.F.S. applications. Dryvit Systems, One Energy Way, P. O. Box 1014. West Warwick, RI 02893, (800) 556 -7752, (401) 822 -4100. Attn: Steve Millmather ext.374. PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. SUMMARY 2.1 Section includes: 2.1.1 Field- applied exterior insulation and finish system. 2.1.1.1 Adhesively attached for direct application to concrete block, masonry or concrete only. 2.1.1.2 Mechanically attached for all other applications. 2.1.2 Contractor's option - factory pre- fabricated panel exterior insulation and finish system. 2.2 Related Sections: 2.2.1 Section 7G: Joint Sealants. 2.2.2 Section 6A: Exterior Grade Plywood Sheathing. 2.2.3 7 Section for Roofing: Sheet Metal Division Flashing. 2.2.4 Section 9H: Painting. 3. SUBMITTALS 3.1 Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 3.2 Product date: Manufacturer's printed product data showing standard installation details and material information. 3.3 Any additional installation details required for project not included in manufacturer's standard installation details. 3.4 Shop drawings showing fabrication and Installation of prefabricated panels including plans, elevations, sections. details of components, joint locations and configurations, and attachments to other units of work. 3.5 Finish and color sample: 2' -O? square panel for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified. Prepare using same tools and techniques intended for actual work. Include in sample typical joint with proposed sealant and any other special finish detailing required. 3.6 Certificates and Test Reports complying with requirements as specified in Article 1A "Quality Assurance ". 4. QUALITY ASSURANCE 4.1 Installer Qualifications: Certification of list showing minimum of three (3) of completed systems similar in REMODEL PROTOTYPE 09/22/00 TERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SY: MS 'SECTION 7J -1 material, and extent in the last five (5) years. Include certification of manufacturer of system for installer. 4.2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Certification that firm is experienced in specialized manufacturing of systems similar to those indicated for this Project and is a current member of EIMA (EIFS Industry Members Association). 4.3 Fire -Test Reports: Show compliance to ASTM E 84 for flame spread and smoke developed for rigid polystyrene insulation. 4.4 Pre - installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with installer, Contractor, Owner and Manufacturer's representative to discuss installation, including scheduling 4.5 E.I.F.S. systems have proven susceptible to water infiltration anywhere where water can penetrate the construction and failure can occur. 4.6 Contractor to v6rify and implement all manufacturer ?s requirements for a warrantied installation as well as any codes governing products and process implementation. 4.7 Contractor shall include: exclusive use of certified installers, on -site inspections of product application, protection of unfinished construction, use of mechanical fasteners in lieu of adhesives, redundant moisture barriers at edges of substrate and of application surface, drainage systems, a tightly caulked envelope that has defined schedule of annual maintenance and of monitoring of all flashing and joints. Practices or techniques which, if not properly followed, could result in failure of the E.I.F.S. system, will be considered entirely the responsibility of the supplier and the Contractor. 5. DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING 5.1 Deliver in original, packaging, store in weather - protected area and handle to avoid damaging materials in a manner recommended by manufacturer. 6. PROJECT CONDITIONS 6.1 Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures are 40 deg F and failing unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F during installation of wet materials and until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but for not less than 24 hours after installation. Verify with system manufacturer prior to commencement of installation for specific product. 7. WARRANTY 7.1 Furnish installer's written warranty covering the materials and installation, including watertightness for a period of five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 8. MANUFACTURERS DIVISION '7 8.1 Dryvit Systems, Inc., One Energy Way. P. 0. Box 1014, Warwick, RI 02893 8.2 Established Standard Products: 8.2.1 PB adhesive attached field- applied system: Dryvit Outsulation - Plus 8.2.2 PB mechanically attached, field- applied system: Dryvit Outsulation -. Plus 9. MATERIALS 9.1 General: Provide adhesive, framing, plywood or inert sheathing, board insulation, reinforcing fabrics, base and finish coat materials, fasteners, sealants and accessories that are approved for use in systems by manufacturer and compatible. 9.2 Finishes: See drawings for locations of finish types. Finish types are the following: 9.2.1 Standard: Dryvit "Sandpebble. 9.2.2 Fine: Dryvit "Sandblast". 9.3 Colors: Manufacturer's standard colors. See drawings for color types and locations. 9.3.1 For vestibule projection use integrally - colored Dryvit finish designated NA1.30.05 -03.07 (Blue) over a prime coat of Color Prime NA1- 30.05. 03.03. 9 4 Provide system compliant metal or aluminum framing compatible with system materials and substrates. Minimum G60 galvanized metal or equivalent aluminum. 9.5 Sheathing: Provide system compliant sheath panels as specified. 9.6 Primer - Sealer: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation (at masonry and concrete only). 9.7 Refer to Section 9H `Painting' for paint if indicated on drawings. 9.8 Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for system use, compatible with substrate, and complying with the following requirements: (at masonry and concrete only). 9.8.1 Job -mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type 1 and polymer -based adhesive specified for base coat. 9.9 Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board, complying with ASTM C 578 for Type I minimum, approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness and other dimensional tolerances. 9.9.1 Aged insulation approved by system manufacturer. 9.9.2 Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches, 2 inches thick. 9.10 Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali- resistant open- REMODEL PROTOTYPE EXTEF 2 INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 'SECTION 7J -2 weave, glass -fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, complying with ASTM D 578 and ASTM D 5035. 9.10.1 Standard Reinforcing Fabric: 4.0 oz/sq. yd. minimum. 9.10.2 Heavy Duty Reinforcing Fabric: 20 oz. /sq. yd. minimum. 9.11 Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. 9.11.1 Job -mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type 1, white or natural color; and system manufacturer's standard polymer emulsion adhesive designed for use indicated. 9.12 Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. 9.13 Water: Clean and potable. 9.14 Mechanical Fastener Assemblies, System manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant fastener assemblies. 9.15 Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with system manufacturer's requirements. 9.16 Provide E.I.F.S. reveals, reveal control joints and control joints as shown on drawings and as listed as standard manufacturer accessories. 9.17 Provide all weeps, vents, venting accessories, drainage strips, etc. as required and recommended by EIFS manufacturer for a complete and proper installation. 9.18 Sheathing to be Dens -Glas gold, or some other inert sheathing material acceptable to E.I.F.S. system. Gypsum sheathing will not be allowed. 10. SEALANT$ 10.1 Provide sealants compatible with systems' manufacturer and compliant with requirements of Section 7G "Joint Sealants ". 10.2 Provide Owner with maintenance and inspection schedule for sealants and (lashings, etc. 11. 11.1 MIXING Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 12. EXAMINATION 12.1 Examine substrates, with installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 09/22/00 DIVISION / 13. PREPARATION 13.1 Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work. 13.2 Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. 14. INSTALLATION - FIELD - APPLIED ADHESIVE & MECHANICALLY ATTACHED SYSTEMS 14.1 Install all system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including substrate preparation and cleaning. 14.2 Vertically troweled adhesive attached polystyrene insulation board to sheeting, masonry or concrete only, maintaining system manufacturer ?s standards for smoothness of board to board plane. 14.3 Mechanically attach polystyrene Insulation board, maintaining system manufacturer's standards for smoothness of board to board plane. 14.3 Trowel on base coat evenly embedding system reinforcing mesh consistently, allowing time to cure properly. 14.4 Embed Heavy Duty Mesh to a height of +8'-O7 above finish grade for all systems. 14.5 Embed Standard Duty Mesh above heavy duty mesh to the top of wall for all systems. 14.6 Install all accessory items, including joints and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 14.7 Apply finish coat to proper thickness for system, tooling appropriately for specified finish after base coat has cured. 15. INSTALLATION - FAC PRE - FABRICATED PANEL SYSTEM 15.1 Install all system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 15.2 Insure that substrate meets panel system manufacturer's installation requirements. 15.3 Mechanically attach sheathing to framing members and insulation to sheathing. 15.4 Apply base coat, reinforcing and finish coat as specified in Field- applied Systems. 16. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 16.1 Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, in compliance with requirements of Section 7G "Joint Sealants' and with EIMA "Joint Sealant Specifications for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Class PB and PM". 17. CLEANING 17.1 Remove temporary covering and protection of other REMODEL PROTOTYPE TER1OR INSULATION AND FINISH SY; MS 'SECTION 7J -3 work. Promptly remove coating materials from surfaces not indicated to receive system coatings. - END OF SECTION - 09/22/00 DIVISION 7' PLASTIC WALL PANEL SYSTEM 'SECTION 7K -1 Owner will provide pre - ordered ABS plastic panels, plastic foam filled entrance portals and illuminated bullnose canopy. For coordination information, call Vacuform Industries (800) 366 -7446 or (614) 564.1300. PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. SUMMARY 2.1 Section includes: 2.1.1 Field applied decorative wall panels illuminated decorative bullnose, preformed portal panels. 2.1.1.1 Fastened to solid substrate of plywood, concrete masonry or as shown on drawings. 2.2 Related Sections: 2.2.1 Section 4A: Unit Masonry Work 2.2.2 Section 7G: Joint Sealants 2.2.3 Section 6A: Exterior Grade Plywood Sheathing 2.2.4 Section 16A: Electrical Work 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE, 3.1 Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of panels with substrate and adjacent construction per manufacturerOs specifications and requirements. 3.2 Pre - installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site with Contractor, Owner and ManufacturerUs Representative to discuss installation, including scheduling. 4. QUIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING 4.1 Do not deliver panels until substrate construction is substantially complete and installation of panels is ready to begin. 4.2 Store panels as recommended in manufacturerOs written instructions and in manufacturerOs protective packages until time of installation. 4.3 Protect surfaces of panels from damage due to abrasion, dust and other conditions. 5. SUBMITTALS REMODEL PROTOTYPE 5.1 Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 5.2 Product date: Manufacturer's printed product data showing standard installation details and material information. 5.3 Any additional installation details required for project not included in manufacturer's standard installation details. 5.4 Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of prefabricated panels including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations, and attachments to other units of work to be provided by Vacuform. 5.5 Finish and color sample: 2'-00 square panel for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified. Prepare using same tools and techniques intended for actual work. Include in sample typical joint with proposed sealant and any other special finish detailing required. 5.6 Certificates and Test Reports complying with requirements as specified in Article 1A "Quality Assurance ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 6. MANUFACTURER /PRODUCTS 6.1 Products are manufactured by Vacuform Industries, Inc., 1877 E. 17th Ave., Columbus. OH 43219, (800) 366 -7446 or (614) 564.1300. Contact Brad Edler, Vacuform Oswat0 team, for sales and installation questions. 6.2 ABS Plastic Wall Panels: 6.2.1 Color: Blue. 6.2.2 Panel profile: OwnerOs standard. 6.2.3 ABS Portal Panel: Vacuum formed from a minimum of .125 thick PMS 2738 blue or white ABS material having haircell finish and a Korad film cap. 6.3.1 Sizes: 6.3.2 Color: Purple ABS Material 6.3.3 ABS Portal panel vacuum formed from a minimum of .150 thick ABS material having a haircell finish and a Tutfcoat acrylic cap. Panel is foamed filled. 6.4 Acrylic Bulinose Panel: 6.4.1 Red Type OAO straight bullnose; 8 foot lengths. 6.4.2 Red Type 0130 radius bullnose attached to truss; 8 foot lengths. 6.4.3 Vacuum formed from a minimum of .177 thick red modified acrylic with smooth finish. 6.5 Illuminated and non - illuminated star: 6.5.1 Color: Yellow 6.5.2 Star is vacuum formed from a minimum .177 thick yellow modified DR acrylic with a smooth finish. 6.5.3 Illuminated star is lit with U.L. approved white neon tubing and includes U.L. approved remote transformer. 6.6 Metal Accessories: Bent plate, fasteners, and aluminum extrusions; manufacturerOs standard, painted to match adjacent panels. 6.7 Framing 6.7.1 Aluminum bullnose frames fabricated from 6061T6 aluminum tubing, 100% welded in 16' -0" lengths with bolting connections at both ends. 01/03/00 DIVISION 7' .ASTIC WALL PANEL SYSTEM 'SECTION 7K -2 6.7.2 Steel portal framing fabricated from 6061T6 aluminum tubing, 100% welded. Connections and sections as provided by Vacuform.6.7.3 All framing to be field assembled and installed per Vacuform installation instructions and shop drawings. 6.8 Electrical Components 6.8.1 Field verify all Vacuform provided electrical components including fluorescent fixtures, flood light Z fixtures, fluorescent lamps, etc. PART 3 - EXECUTION H W 7. INSTALLATION .0 7.1 General: Install panels as indicated on Vacuform CD 0 Installation Drawings to comply with panel � W manufacturerOs written instructions, including substrate preparation. Examine substrates, with installer present. to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for CO u., installation of system. Do not proceed with installation W O of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. g J 8. GUARANTEE N 2 8.1 Guarantee work, in writing, for a period agreed upon W by Owner or per manufacturerOs specification Z (whichever is longest), against popping, peeling, 0 ripping and /or any or all other defects in workmanship, material quality, etc. Defects W W appearing during guarantee period to be removed ? and /or replaced by this Contractor and Manufacturer without additional cost to Owner. V N S � W O tu O - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 8` PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 This Section includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of Hollow Metal Work, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 3. REFERENCE STANDARDS 3.1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards: 3.1.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3.1.1.1 ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3.1.1.2 ASTM A366, Standard Specifications for Steel, Carbon, Cold - Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 3.1.1.3ASTM A525 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Delivery of Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Sheets, Coils, and Cut Lengths by the Hot -Dip Method. 3.1.1.4 ASTM A526, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet. Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 3.1.1.5ASTM A568, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon and High - Strength Low Ally Hot - Rolled Sheet, Hot - Rolled Strip and Cold - Rolled Sheet, General Requirements. 3.1.1.6ASTM A569, Test for Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 maximum percent) Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. 3.1.1.7ASTM E152, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3.1.2 American National Standards Institute, ANSI A115, Specification for Door and Frame Preparation. 3.1.3 National Builder's Hardware Association (NBHA), Recommended Locations for Builder's hardware. REMODEL PROTOTYPE HOLLOW METAL WORK 'SECTION 8A -1 3.1.4 National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows. 3.1.5 Steel Door Institute, Recommended Specification Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3.1.6 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Building Materials Directory. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Manufacturer's Data: For information only, submit two (2) copies of manufacturer's data for fabrication and installation instructions. Transmit one copy of instructions to the Installer. 4.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of hollow metal work. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, gauges of metal, finishes, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. 4.3 Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for detail and openings as those on the contract drawings. 5. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES 5.1 Fire Rated Assemblies: Wherever a fire- resistance classification (3 -hour. 1 -1/2 -hour, etc., or "A', 'B', etc.) is shown or scheduled for hollow metal work, provide fire -rated hollow metal doors and frames investigated and tested as a fire door assembly, complete with type of fire door hardware to be used. Identify each fire door and frame with UL labels, and indicate applicable fire rating of both door and frame. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80. and as herein specified. 5.2 Oversize Assemblies: Wherever hollow metal assemblies are larger than size limitations established by NFPA and UL, provide manufacturer's certification that assembly has been constructed with materials and methods equivalent to labeled construction. 5.3 Label Construction: Each required fire door and frame. including hardware, shall be an exact duplicate, except for size, of a type investigated and successfully fire tested in accordance with ASTM E152 Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies, for the period of time and with the performance under test as required for the various ratings indicated. The assembly shall be identified by labels of the approving agency. The label on the door or frame shall indicate the applicable fire test rating for the construction furnished. Approved agencies shall include the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., the Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada, the Factory Mutual Laboratories, and other authorities having local or regional jurisdiction. 6. PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING 6.1 Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. 6.2 Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Project Manager; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. 6.3 Store hollow metal units on raised platforms in vertical positions with blocking between units to allow air circulation. Keep stored material covered and protected 01/03/00 DIVISION 8' HOLLOW METAL WORK from damage. 7. JOB CONDITIONS 7.1 Job Conditions: Installer must examine the substrate and conditions under which hollow metal work is to be installed and notify the contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 8. QUALITY ASSURANCE 8.1 Provide hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work and shall be a current member of S.D.I., unless otherwise acceptable to the Project Manager. PART 2: PRODUCTS 9. MATERIALS 9.1 Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel pickled and oiled, comply with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568. 9.2 Cold - Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. 9.3 Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc - coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A526, with ASTM A525. G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. Provide for extenor doors and frames. 9.4 Minimum Gauges of Steel: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings doors shall be 18 gauge and frames shall be 16 gauge. 9.5 Core material: for interior doors, honey comb: exterior doors, polystyrene. U- Factor = 0.21. 9.6 Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 16 gauge sheet steel. Galvanize after fabrication units to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class B. 9.7 Shop Painting 9.7.1 Clean, treat and paint surfaces of fabricated hollow metal units, whether concealed or exposed in the finished work. 9.7.2 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before the application of the shop coat of paint. 9.7.3 Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive field- applied paint. 9.7.4 For steel surfaces use rust - inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 9.8 Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. 9.9 Anchors: Provide minimum of 3 anchors each jamb per manufacturer's standards. 10. GENERAL FABRICATION 10.1 Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 'SECTION 8A -2 Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in the manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work, that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. 10.2 Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. 10.3 Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation ". (Note: All locksets, latches and cylinders are to be Best.) 10.4 Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface - applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface - applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 10.5 Locate finish hardware in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware ", published by the National Builder's Hardware Association. 10.6 Door Louvers 10.6.1 Provide weatherproof stationary louvers for exterior doors, where indicated, constructed of Z- shaped blades formed of 20 gauge galvanized steel sheets. Space blades not more than 1 -1/2° o.c. Provide removable insect screens on interior face of doors, of 14 x 18 wire mesh in ngid, formed metal frame. 10.6.2 Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V- shaped of Y- shaped blades formed of 18 gauge cold- rolled steel. Space blades to provide a minimum of 30% free air opening. 10.6.3 For fire -rated openings, provide tightly fitted, spring loaded, automatic closing louvers with operable blades, equipped with fusible links, arranged so that metal overlaps metal at every joint. 10.7 Provide stock hollow metal frames of the types and styles indicated on the drawings or schedules and complying with S.D.I. 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements. 10.8 Provide stock hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, as shown on the drawings. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown. 10.9 Fabricate frames of fully welded construction. 10.10 Form exterior frames of steel sheets with a stretcher level degree of flatness. 10.11 Rubber Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 4 silencers on heads of double -swing frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. 10.12 Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bars for across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. 10.13 Sound Deadening: Coat inside (concealed) faces of 01/03/00 DIVISION 8' HOLLOW METAL WORK door frames in hollow wall construction with fibered asphalt emulsion. PART 3: EXECUTION 11. INSTALLATION 11.1 Except for frames located at inplace concrete or masonry, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 11.2 In masonry construction, locate three wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Building -in of anchors and grouting of frames is specified in the Masonry Section. 11.3 At inplace concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 11.4 Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80 11.5 In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per Jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach studs to wall anchors with tapping screws. 11.6 Door Installation 11.6.1 Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified in S.D.I. 100. 11.6.2 Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 11.7 Adjust and Clean 11.7.1 Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. 11.7.2 Prime Coat Touch -Up - Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch -up of compatible air -drying primer. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 'SECTION 8A -3 01/03/00 DIVISION #8 PART 1 - GENERAL VIRACON GLAZING IS A LONG LEAD TIME ITEM. CONTRACTOR MUST ORDER WITHIN SUFFICIENT TIME FRAME TO OBTAIN SPECIFIED GLAZING MATERIAL. 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPe OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing glass and glazing work and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 Items to be completed include but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2.1 Glazing of entrance and exit aluminum doors. 2.2.2 Glazing of curtain wall /storefront. 2.2.2 Glazing of interior /exterior door vision panels. 2.2.3 Glazing of interior borrowed lites. 2.2.4 Other glazing items indicated or specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3. GLASS PRODUCTS. GENERAL 3.1 Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C1036 requirements. 3.2 Heat - Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat - treated glass which complies with ASTM C1048 requirements. 3.3 Laminated glass standard: Provide laminated glass with two lites interleaved with polyvinyl butyral PVB) which complies with ANSI Z97 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 safety glazing. Laminate glass occurs in insulated assembly. 4. GLASS 4.1 Float glass of thickness indicated on the drawings shall be clear glazing quality, as manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., or equal. Provide 1/4 inch thickness if not indicated on the drawings. 4.1.1 Float glass shall conform to ASTM C1036, Type I, REMODEL PROTOTYPE GLASS AND GLAZING *SECTION 8C -1 Class 1 (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 4.2 Tempered glass, 1/4 inch thick clear Herculite as manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. or equal. 4.2.1 Tempered glass shall conform to ASTM C1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered). Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Quality), Class 1 (clear). 4.3 One -way Mirror Glass: 1/4" thick "Mirropane E.P." transparent mirror by Libbey - Owens -Ford Go. or approved equal. 4.4 Glass for Mirror Production (Silvering): 4.4.1 Mirror Glass: Provide float glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 for silvering. 4.5 Mirror Frame: 18.8, Type 304 stainless steel channel or angle frame with maximum face dimension of " 1/2". 4.6 Glass Types: (Typical) 4.6.1 1/4"; clear; float at interior storefront above doors and as noted on drawings. 4.6.2 1/4 "; clear; tempered at interior storefront below band of doors and as noted on drawings. 4.6.3 On stores using insulated glass, Contractor is to match type and color for all new work. 5. GLAZING SEALANTS & MISCELLANEOUS 5.1 Molded neoprene gaskets (at exterior glazing in aluminum frames) shall be of proper profile and hardness required for watertight construction comply with ASTM D2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black. 5.2 Oil -based channel glazing compound (at interior glazing) FS TT -G-410 type and consistency recommended by manufacturer for application shown. Products meeting this specification include "Tremglaze" as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Cleveland, Ohio, "Glazing Compounds M242 and M251" as manufactured by the Pecora Chemical Corp., Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. 5.3 Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: 5.3.1 Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 -90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. 5.3.2 Spacers: Neoprene, 40 -50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. 5.3.3 Compressible Filler Rod: Closed -cell or waterproof - jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 510 psi compression strength for 25% deflection. 5.3.4 Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 6. STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE 6.1 Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, 01/03/00 DIVISION #8 wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. 6.2 Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. 6.3 Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives directs otherwise. 6.4 Comply with "Glazing Manual' by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials. 7. GLAZING 7.1 Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course to the heel -bead compound, it any. 7.2 Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united Inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 7.3 Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in the channel at the heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in the sill channels) except as otherwise indicated, depending on light sizo, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer's recommendations. 7.4 Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered, laminated, heat strengthened, or coated. 7.5 Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete 'wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 7.6 Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial 'wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 7.7 Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. 7.8 Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system. 7.9 At completion of work and just prior to final acceptance by Owner, clean both sides of all glass. - END OF SECTION - �'m. ° .i�1.:;2tj ... }:fir ;��•c9�t�� °r:��r,4�„•t at ° :r-^ ... .. GLASS AND GLAZING 'SECTION 8C -2 REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION #8 OWNER WILL PROVIDE THE REQUIRED AUTOMATIC DOOR UNITS THROUGH A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH HORTON AUTOMATICS. THIS INCLUDES DOOR, DOOR GLAZING AND INSTALLATION BY A LOCAL HORTON INSTALLER. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION CONTACT NATIONAL ACCOUNTS DEPARTMENT, 4242 BALDWIN BLVD., CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78405, PHONE (800- 531- 3111), Contact Cathy Landin (Ext. 169). PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1,3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean `if required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. lcOPE OF WORK (By Contractor) 2. 2.1 Work included: 2.1.1 \.IDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE EXIT r ORS 'SECTION 8F -1 Electrically operated automatic entrance /exit doors and frames, automatic sliding door operators, motion detector, hold -open safety beam, header box enclosures and accessories for the sliding doors indicated to receive such equipment, all automatic entrance/exit glazing and joint sealants between door frames and adjacent surfaces. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (By Contractor) 3.1 Aluminum frames and windows: Section 8B (including preparation of opening for door units plumb and square, and all required transoms, if indicated, above door header boxes). 3.2 Glazing: Section 8C. 3.3 Masterkeyed Cylinders: Section 81. 3.4 Electrical Connections: Division 16. 3.5 The Contractor shall prepare all openings required for the installation of work of this Section. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and standard details for automatic entrance /exit doors, including fabrication, finishing, hardware, operators, accessories and other components of the work. Include roughing -in diagrams, wiring diagrams, parts lists, and maintenance instructions, as well as certified test data. 4.2 Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams and other data to fabricators and installers of related work, REMODEL PROTOTYPE promptly as needed for coordination of automatic entrance installation. Expedite immediately to avoid any delay. 4.3 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of automatic entrance /exit doors and associated components of the work. Indicate anchors, joint system, expansion provision, hardware, and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. PART 2. PRODUCTS 5. MANUFACTURER/AUTOMATIC UNITS 5.1 Manufacturer: Horton Automatic Div.; Overhead Door Corp. Series 2000 Electromechanical operation, Sliding Doors. Size, quantity and location as indicated on the drawings (Bi -Slide at TRU & BRU, Single -Slide at KRU). 5.1.1 Automatic doors shall be factory glazed. 6. ALUMINUM FINISHES 6.1 Finish: 6.1.1 Fluorocarbon Three -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three -coat thermocured system complying with AAMA 605 2, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluorocarbon color coat and clear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene resin by weight. 6.1.2 Color to match Valspar as indicated on drawings (TRU & BRU). 6.1.3 Match Architect's custom color sample. Color similar to Pantone matching system range. (KRU Only). PART 3 - EXECUTION 7. INSTALLATION 7.1 Contractor is responsible for ordering, shipping, receiving and storage of door units. 7.2 Contractor is responsible for coordinating with Horton Automatics for subcontracting installation through local Horton distributor. PART 8. UARANTEE 8.1 For all work in this section. provide written guarantee that all completed installations are in total compliance to manufacturer=s requirements and that contractor will make good, at his expense, any and all defects regarding all unit installations. - END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 DIVISION 8' SPECIAL DOORS *SECTION 8G -1 OWNER WILL PROVIDE REQUIRED SALES TO PRESALES IMPACT DOORS THROUGH A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION WITH RITEHITE CORPORATION FOR SPECIAL DOORS. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION, CALL CAROLYN JOSS, 8900 N. ARBON DRIVE, MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN 53223, PHONE (414) 362-3714, FAX (414) 355 -9248. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work spedfied in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A', unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SQQPE OF WORK (By contractor) 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for complete installation of the special doors indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 Special doors include: 2.2.1 Impact doors. 2.3 Steel frames by Contractor as specified in Section 5E. 2.4 Contractor is responsible for ordering and purchase, coordination of delivery, shipping, storage, installation and protection of special doors. REMODEL PROTOTYPE PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. IMPACT DOORS 3.1 Impact Doors: Model M -6802, (TRU and BRU) and Model M3680, (KRU) double -acting traffic doors as manufactured by RiteHite Corporation and supplied by contractor. Doors shall be provided complete with all hardware and accessories EXCEPT frame. General Contractor to order appropriate door size(s). PART 3: EXECUTION 4. INSTALLATION 4.1 Install where indicated in accordance with details, approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 4.2 Adjust and clean all doors and have in first class operating condition. 5. GUARANTEE 5.1 For all work in this section provide guarantee that all workmanship, materials, and the completed installations are first Gass in every respect, and that the contractor will make good at his expense any and all defects of any nature whatsoever that may develop within one year from date of acceptance of the project. - END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 DIVISION 8' ROLLING FIRE SHUTTERS THE OWNER HAS ESTABLISHED A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION WITH OVERHEAD DOOR CORPORATION FOR ROLLING FIRE SHUTTERS. CONTRACTOR TO PURCHASE FIRE SHUTTERS THROUGH THIS PROGRAM. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION CONTACT MR. CHARLES VAUGHAti, P.O. BOX 809046, DALLAS, TX 75380- 9046, PHONE 800-972 -1730, Ext. 664. ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS OF EQUAL QUALITY WILL BE ACCEPTABLE FOR REVIEW. SUBMIT ALTERNATE FOR REVIEW. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2. MATIRIALS 2.1 Rolling Fire Shutters: Face mounted shutters shall be manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation. Dallas, TX 75380.9046 Shutters are to be firo rated as called out on drawings. 2.1.1 Shutters: Manually, push up operated with lift handle on bottom bar. Heat actuated hold -open devices shall be installed on both sides of the wall near the door, interconnected so that the operation of any single device will permit the door to close. 2.1.2 An oscillating governor shall be supplied to control the rate of descent when the automatic closing device is activated. 2.1.3 Slats: Galvanized steel no lighter than #22 U.S. gauge. Fit each end of every slat with end locks to act as a wearing surface and to maintain slat alignment. Reinforce curtain with bottom bar. Locking to be by slide bolts. 2.1.4 Guides: Fabricated of steel constructed in accordance with U.L. approved details. 2.1.5 Spring counterbalance: House in steel pipe. Springs: Helical torsion type designed to include an overload factor of 25% grease packed and mounted on a steel inner shaft rod with ball bearings to minimize wear of pipe shaft rotation around inner shaft. 2.1.6 Bracket plates: (Carrying counterbalancing shaft) steel plate not less than 1/8" thickness. 2.1.7 Hood: Rectangular and of galvanized steel not less REMODEL PROTOTYPE than #24 U.S. gauge. 2.1.8 Finish: Baked grey prime coat for galvanized steel. PART 3: EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION 3.1 All rolling fire shutters are to be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions by the manufacturer or his authorized representative. 3.2 Contractor to coordinate with Overhead Door for subcontracting all installation through local Overhead Door distributor. PART 4. GUARANTEE -END OF SECTION- 'SECTION 8H -1 4.1 For all work in this section, provide written guarantee that all completed installations are in total compliance to manufacturer=s requirements and that contractor shall make good, at his expense, any and all defects regarding all units installations. 01/03/00 DIVISION 8` ALL DOOR HARDWARE, CLOSERS, AND DETEX PANIC HARDWARE SHALL BE PURCHASED THROUGH PAUL J. PELKE COMPANY, 158 RIVER ROAD, CLIFTON, NJ 07014, CONTACT ALEX IRINYL, TELEPHONE (973) 777-7500. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean 'if required under the provisions of Section 1A ". unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. $.COPE OF WORK 2.1 All hardware items shall be furnished by the Contractor including Detex Alarm Exit Devices and Norton Door Closers as noted on the Schedule. All hardware items shall be installed by the Contractor. 2.2 Lock Installation 2.2.1 All locks shall have Best cylinders and a Best construction core keyed alike. 2.2.2 Automatic entrance doors and detex alarms will be furnished with Best cylinders pre - installed. Contractor must key with a Best construction core. 2.3 All hardware shall be neatly packed and labeled with identification as to where it is to be applied. 2.4 All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts, and fastenings, wrapped in paper and packed in the same package as the hardware. 2.5 All hardware that fastens to metal doors and frames shall be made to template and attached with machine screws. 2.6 The Hardware Contractor shall furnish and ship templates to other contractors as directed, all F.O.B. Factory Site. All hardware shall be shipped to the job site. 2.7 Provide a competent representative who shall inspect and direct the method of setting, applying and adjusting all hardware. It is not required that the Representative shall remain constantly at the building, but shall properly inspect all the work in the application of hardware, as it progresses. This representative shall be at all times easily accessible during the execution of the work in order that he may promptly attend to items in connection with the hardware. 3. SUBMITTALS 3.1 Submit hardware schedule organized by "Hardware REMODEL PROTOTYPE FINISH HARDWARE 'SECTION 81 -1 Sets' to indicate specifically the products to be furnished for each item required on each door. 3.1.1 Include catalog cut•sheets of each item. 3.2 Hardware schedule to use same door and frame reference numbers for detail and openings as those on the contract drawings. 4. GUARANTEE 4.1 All hardware items shall be guaranteed by their manufacturer as stated in their catalogs. Vendor shall assume all responsibility. 4.2 Guarantees shall be in writing by the manufacturer and shall be delivered to the Owner. The guarantee shall begin from the date of acceptance of the building. 4.3 Hardware vendor shall make a final check of all installed hardware items together with the Owner's Representative and Contractor, prior to final acceptance of the building. 4.4 Defective hardware within the guaranteed period must be replaced at Contractor's expense, including labor for removal and reinstallation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. HARDWARE SCHEDULE 5.1 Items supplied by Contractor. Refer to drawings for schedule. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. INSTALLATION 6.1 Refer to Section 6A for installation responsibility. 6.2 For exterior outswinging doors, closers shall be mounted inside (push side) of door. Interior doors shall have closers mounted on the pull side of the doors unless otherwise indicated. Verify mounting location of closer with the Owner's Representative before closer installation. •END OF SECTION- 01/03/00 DIVISION #8 WOOD DOORS 'SECTION 8K -1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENT$ 1.1 Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specifications, apply to this Section. 2. SUMMARY 2.1 Section includes: 2.1.1 Hollow core, hardwood veneer paint grade doors. 2.2 Related Sections: 2.2.1 Section 81, Finish Hardware. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S. 1 -A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors ", of the National Wood and Door Association. 4. PROJECT CONDITIONS 4.1 Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with AWI quality standard Section 100 -S -11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4 MANUFACTURERS 5.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work, include, but are not limited to: 5.1.1 Hollow Core Doors 5.1.1.1 Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 5.1.1.2 Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division 5.1.1.3 Weyerhaeuser Co. 5.2 Door: 5.2.1 Face: Any closed -grain hardwood of mill option. 5.2.2 Grade: Custom. 5.2.3 Core: Standard hollow core. 5.2.4 Finish: Paint. PART 3 • EXECUTION 6. EXAMINATION 6.1 Examine door opening to receive door. Correct deficiencies as required for installation. 7. INSTALLATION 7.1 Install finish hardware, apply finish and check operation of door to fully function. Correct deficiencies as required to maintain door functioning. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) 'SECTION 9A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.3.3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. 2.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SCOPE OF WORT( Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, scaffolding, tools and services necessary to complete the plastering work in accordance with drawings and specifications. including but not necessarily limited to the following: 2.1.1 Cement plaster walls, soffits, parapets, fascias, etc. as indicated on the drawings. 2.1.2 All lath, trims, jointing, recess details, beads, etc. to provide complete installation indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.1.3 Refer to drawings for type(s) of substrate to receive Cement Plaster. 2.2 Painting of Stucco (as indicated on drawings) specified in Section 9H. 3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3,1 Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor (hereinafter referred to as Contractor) shall visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Project Manager of any discrepancy before performing any work. Work shall not be started until any defects and discrepancies have been corrected. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of the conditions by the Contractor. 3.2 Coordination: The Contractor shall be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of other trades. 3.3 Scaffolding: Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain scaffolding, including ladders, planks and other equipment required for the proper execution of the work under this Section and so erected to limit, as far as possible, interference with other trades. Such scaffolding and equipment shall be removed as soon as the work under this Section is completed and accepted. 3.4 Environmental Conditions: Plaster shall not be applied when the ambient temperature is 40 degrees F or lower, or when a drop in temperature below 40 degrees F is anticipated within 48 hours after application. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Materials List and Samples: Before starting application of lathing and plastering, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval the following materials list and samples: 4.1.1 Materials List: A list of materials and accessories to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted in five (5) copies, and shall include descriptive data, catalog cuts, and other such information required to identify the materials as to the locations of their use in the work. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. 4.1.2 Samples: One 12" X 12" section of each type of lath and one 12" length of each accessory and trim item proposed for use shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval in accordance with Division 1. Prior to the application of finish coat, two (2) 12" X 12" X 7/8" thick plaster, showing the finish coat texture and color shall also be submitted for approval. 4.1.3 Product Data: Submit complete, acceptable product data and description of method of installation where the direct application of cement plaster over liquid bonding agent on concrete or concrete block surfaces is used as specified herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS 5.1 Note: Material designations given are based on general requirements of industry. Contractor is responsible for updating any and all materials to conform with current local and nationwide industry application requirements. 5.2 Aggregates shall be sand conforming to ASTM C897, 5.3 Building Paper shall be waterproofed kraft paper Grade D minimum, conforming to current Fed. Specs. Building paper indicated on the drawings will not be required if paper - backed metal lath wilt be used. The paper shall be securely held in place by or attached to the metal lath. The paper shall permit 1/2 of the total weight of metal to be embedded fully with a covering of at least 1/8 inch of plaster at all points. Paper - backed lath shall be lapped paper to paper, metal to metal. 5.3.1 At Contractor's option, "Tyvek" by Du Pont Company may be used in lieu of building paper not attached to metal lath. 5.3.2 If gypsum sheathing is used over metal studs, building paper may be omitted. 5.3.3 If plywood sheathing is used, provide two layers of approved building paper. 5.4 Lime: 5.4.1 Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206. 5.4.2 Lime Putty shall be made from hydrated lime. Suitable precautions shall be taken to protect the putty from exposure to the sun and to prevent excessive evaporation when stored. Hydrated lime shall be mixed with water to form a putty and shall be allowed to stand for at least 15 minutes before using. 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' EMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) 'SECTION 9A -2 5.5 Metal Lath: Per current Federal Specs., ASTM C1032 woven wire lath with continuous absorptive paper backing and ASTM C1063 expanded metal lath with continuous absorptive paper backing. The paper shall permit 1/2 of total weight of metal to be embedded fully with a covering of at least 1/8 inch of plaster at all points. 5.5.1 Woven Wire Lath shall be used on specified vertical surfaces (as approved by the Owner's Representative) and shall be fabricated from copper - bearing, cold- drawn, galvanized steel wires, 18 gage for 1 -inch openings, 17 gage for 1 -1/2 inch openings, and 16 gage for 2 inch openings. Woven wire lath shall be fabricated in a manner to provide not less than 1/4 -inch keying between wire and paper backing or keying shall be obtained by a uniform series of slots in a paper separator woven between two layers of wire. Woven wire lath shall weigh not less than 3.6 pounds per square yard. 5.5.2 Expanded Metal Lath ASTM C1063 shall be used to horizontal and vertical surfaces and shall be fabricated from copper- bearing steel sheets and given a protective coating of paint or shall be fabricated from galvanized steel. Expanded sheet metal lath shall weigh not less than 3.4. pounds per square yard, self- furring. 5.6 Wire shall be zinc - coated steel. Tie wire for attaching metal lath to metal supports and lacing wire shall be annealed and shall conform to ASTM standards. Tie wire for securing metal lath to metal supports and for lacing shall be not less than 0.0625" diameter (16 gage). 5.7 Plastering Accessones shall be protected by galvanizing, except that manufacturer's standard protective coating may be permitted for comerite and strip lath, and shall conform to the following: 5.7.1 Corner Beads shall be of steel not less than 0.0217 inch nominal thickness (26 gage). Flange dimensions may include nose of bead. 5.7.1.1 Expanded Flange Corner Bead shall have flanges of at least 2.1/2" wide and a bead not exceeding 3/16" diameter. 5.7.1.2 Bullnose Corner Bead shall have flanges at least 2.1/2" wide and a 3/4" radius bead. 5.7.1.3 Woven -wire corner reinforcement, fully embedded with plaster. 5.7.2 Cornerite shall be cut lengthwise from expanded metal lath weighing 3.4 pounds per square yard or shall be formed of at least 19 -gage galvanized wire woven into fabric weighing not less than 1.7 pounds per square yard. Comerite shall form an angle of at least 100 degrees between not less than 2" legs. 5.7.3 Casing Beads shall be of steel not less than 0.0276" nominal thickness (24 gage), and shall have a depth equal to the plaster thickness, with expanded wing at least 2 inches wide. Face flange shall be as specified and back shall be slightly arched to provide a spring effect. 5.7.3.1 #66 Square Casing Beads shall have a face flange that subtend a 90 degree angle and shall have a short reveal on the front edge. 5.7.3.2 Modified- Square Casing Beads shall have a face flange that subtends a 90 degree angle, and the front edge shall be beveled. 5.7.3.3 Quarter -Round Casing Beads shalt have a curved face REMODEL PROTOTYPE flange that subtends 90 degree angle. Quarter -round casing beads shall be used where indicated. 5.7.4 Control Joint shall be of galvanized steel not less than 0.0217" nominal thickness (26 gage). or of zinc al±oy not less than 0.013" nominal thickness (29 gage), designed to allow transverse movement of adjoining plaster, and shall have a depth of not less than 3/4" with perforated or expanded -metal wings. USG #75 or equal. 5.7.5 Expansion Joint: #40 double studded; 2 #66 casings, back to back, allow for backer rod and sealant. 5.8 Portland Cement: ASTM C150 type I or II. Portland cement for finish coat shall be light gray or white in color. Only one type and brand of cement shall be used in the work. 5.8.1 Alternate Finish Coat: At Contractors option, finish coat shall be factory - prepared (mill- mixed), integrally - colored; "Thoro Stucco" by Thoro System Products, Miami, Florida 33166. (305) 592 -2081 or "Expo Stucco" by Expo Stucco Products, San Diego, California, 92121, (619) 566 -4343, or approved equal. 5.8.2 Additive: The use of acrylic admix such as Acryl 60 by Thoro System Products is acceptable when approved by the Project Manager. 5.9 Water shall be clean and potable. 5.10 Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Glass fibers, 1/2" nominal length. alkali resistant. 5.11 Liquid Bonding Agent: "Weld- Crete" by Larsen Products Corp. or other approved liquid bonding agent, formulated for exterior use to bond cement plaster to concrete or concrete block surfaces and conforming to ASTM C932 and MIL- B- 19235C (docks). 5.12 Sealer: Clear acrylic emulsion, breathable, non - yellowing "Thoroglaze" by Thoro System Products or approved equal, for moistureproofing of unpainted stucco finished surfaces. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION 6.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL surfaces receiving subsequent finish are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. 6.2 Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately in writing of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 7. INSTALLATION 7.1 Installation of metal lath: Metal lath shall be applied straight. with true and even surfaces, without sags or buckles, and staggered. Metal lath shall be applied with the long dimension in horizontal position. Metal lath without integral paper backing shall be applied only after a backing of waterproofed building paper has been applied to the area to receive the plaster. Metal lath on vertical surfaces shall be oriented to provide maximum overlap on the lower sheet. End laps of metal lath shall not be less than 1 inch and side taps not less than 1/2 inch. Paper- backed woven wire lath applied 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) 'SECTION 9A -3 vertically shall be lapped one mesh and securely tied at intervals not exceeding 6 inches. Ends of wire lath sheets shall be 7.1.1 On Metal Supports: Self- furring metal lath shall be secured to metal supports at intervals not exceeding 6 inches. Side laps or junction of sides shall, in addition of being secured to support, be tied or otherwise secured at intervals not exceeding 6 inches. Ends of wire ties to secure metal lath to support and to tie side laps shall be given 3 twists and bent into the plane of the metal lath. 7.1.2 On Masonry: Self- furring metal lath on masonry shall be fastened every 8" vertically and every 6" horizontally with case- hardened nails or powder - actuated studs. Nails and studs shall be of proper length and design required for securing the metal lath in approved manner. 7.2 Installation of accessories: Accessories shall be set level and plumb to straight lines and shall be securely located on the plaster base in a manner common to the trade so as to develop uniform plaster thickness. Fastenings shall be spaced not over 12" on centers for single - flanged accessories and not over 24" on centers on each flange of double - flanged accessories. Accessories shall be mitered or coped at corners, or prefabricated corners shall be used. Joints in straight runs shall be formed with splice or tie plates. 7.2.1 Corner Bead or wire corner reinforcement shall be installed at external plastered comers. Corner beads shall be in single lengths except where the continuous run of the corner exceeds the standard stock length of corner beads. Corner beads shall be secured to supports. 7.2.2 Cornerites shall be installed at internal angles formed by abutting surfaces of metal lath not turned down at horizontal corners or returned around vertical corners. The cornerite shall be secured to abutting lathed surfaces. 7.2.3 Casing Beads shall be installed at the joints of dissimilar base materials in the same plane and at exposed edges of plaster including junctions of walls and ceilings. The casing bead shall be secured to the ceiling to provide a 3/8" opening between the abutting surfaces. The opening shall be sealed prior to plastering. 7.2.4 Expansion Control -Joint Beads shall be installed as control joints in plasterwork at the locations indicated. If not indicated, control joints shall be so installed to create panels no larger than 144 sq. ft., with no dimension exceeding 18 feet or a length to width ratio of 2 -1/2 to 1. Metal lath shall not be run continuous through control joints. Additional supports shall be installed as required to support the bead. 7.2.4.1 Control Joints shall be installed with attachment only to the edges of abutting sheet of lath, so that lath is not continuous or tied across the joint. 7.2.4.2 Where control joints are placed parallel to framing members, control joints shall be installed so that none is more than 4" away from a framing member. 7.2.4.3 Control joints shall be installed at all locations where panel sizes of dimensions change. Joints shall extend the full width or height of the plaster membrane. 7.2.5 Expansion Joints: #40 or #66 casing beads butted back to back shall coincide with all "through - wall" expansion joints. lapped not less than 2 inches. 7.3 Installation of Plaster: Plaster thickness and surface evenness shall be controlled by grounds or screeds of metal, wood or plaster. Plaster shall be finished to a true and even surface well within limits established by best trade practice. Plaster thickness from the back plane of the metal lath to the finished plaster face shall be not less than 7/8 inch as defined in ASTM C926. 7.3.1 Metal Grounds and Screeds: Metal grounds shall be furnished as required for securing trim items and providing finished corners and terminations. Metal screeds shall be installed when wood or metal grounds cannot be used. On completion of approved base coats, temporary screeds shall be removed and resultant voids immediately filled with plaster. 7.3.2 Plaster Screeds shall be used within the plastered areas to supplement wood and metal grounds and screeds. 7.3,3 Surfaces to receive plaster shall be dean, free from frost, loose particles, dust, dirt, soot, grease, oil, acid, and other foreign matter that might interfere with a satisfactory bond. Base for plaster shall be inspected by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager. Lath, grounds, and accessories shall be true to lines and elevations and securely fastened. 7.3.4 Materials shall be proportioned by volume as follows: 7.3.4.1 Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 2-1/2 - 4 parts sand, and 3/4 to 1 -1/2 lime (or 1 masonry cement). 7.3.4.2 Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement. 3-5 parts sand, and 3/4 to 1 -1/2 lime (or 1 masonry cement). 7.3.4.3 Finish Coat: 1 part Portland cement (white where indicated or required), 3 parts sand, and 2 parts lime. 7.3.4.4 Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Scratch and brown coats shall have glass fiber reinforcement In the mix, quantity within the limits established in ASTM C926. 7.3.5 Mixing: Plaster mix ingredients shall be mixed in mechanical mixers, except where hand - mixing is approved for small quantities. 7.3.5.1 Frozen, caked and lumped materials shall not be used. Each batch shall be proportioned by volume, accurately measured by manual or mechanical devices, and thoroughly mixed with a minimum amount of water until uniform in color or consistency. Batches shall be of a size that can be entirely used within the limits established in ASTM C926. Plaster that has begun to set shall not be used. Retempering of scratch and brown coats shall be done only within the limits established in ASTM C926. Retempering of finish coat plaster will not be permitted. Mixer, mixing boxes, and tools shall be cleaned and kept free of plaster from previous mixes. 7.3.6 Workmanship: Items or features of the work in connection with or adjoining the plaster shall be in place, plumb, straight, and true prior to beginning plaster work. Metal lath shall be in place and positioned to provide a good key. Plaster coats shall be applied continuously in one general direction, without allowing plaster to dry at edges. Where it is impossible to work the full dimension of a wall surface in a continuous operation, jointing shall be made at a break, opening, or natural division of the surface. Edges to be jointed shall be dampened slightly to produce a smooth confluence. Plaster shall be 3 -coat work not less than 7/8 inch thick. All exterior corners of plaster shall be slightly rounded. Plaster on soffit or canopy surfaces shall be pitched REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' .EMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) 'SECTION 9A-4 forward to form a drip. 7.3.7 Scratch Coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through metal lath and to embed the metal lath and with sufficient depth. As soon as 7.3.7.1 On Metal Lath the scratch coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through metal lath and to embed the metal lath and with sufficient depth. As soon as the scratch coat has become firm but before it has set, its entire surface shall be scratched (scored) in one direction only, to provide mechanical bond with the brown coat. On vertical surfaces, the scratching or scoring shall be horizontal. 7.3.8 Brown Coat: The scratch coat shall be dampened evenly with a fog spray to obtain uniform suction before the brown coat is applied. The brown coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contact with the scratch coat and to bring the combined thickness of the scratch and brown coats to approximately 3/4 inch. The surface shall be brought to a true even plan by rodding and surface defects and scratches or scorings shall be filled with plaster. The surface shall be floated with a dry float and left evenly rough to provide a bond to the finish coat. The brown coat shall be moist cured within the limits established in ASTM C926, Article 12 and Annex A2.9 before the finish coat is applied. 7.3.8.1 Note: Do not wet cure base coats containing acrylic admixtures. 7.3.9 Finish Coat shall be approximately 1/4 inch thick and shall be applied after the brown coat has set and hardened and within the limits established in ASTM C926, Article 12 and Annex A2.9 after the application of the brown coat. Dampening by brush will not be permitted. The finish coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contact with brown coat and to bnng the combined thickness of scratch, brown and finish coats to at least 7/8 inch. The finished surface shall match the approved sample in texture. 7.3.9.1 An approved 12" x 12" x 718' thick sample with the desired texture shall be kept at the project site for the duration of the contract. 7.3 10 Curing: As soon as finish coat has taken its initial set, the plaster shall be protected against direct rays of the sun or rapid drying for at least 6 days. During this time, plaster shall be kept moist by frequent fog- spraying. Care shall be taken to prevent staining of the plaster. 7.3.10.1 Note: Exercise caution when curing integrally - colored finish coat to avoid pigment migration and streaking. 8. COORDINATION: 8.1 Delivery and Storage: 8.1.1 Manufactured materials: deliver in original packages, containers or bundles, bearing manufacturer's name and brand. 8.1.2 Store plaster, cement and lime off ground, under watertight cover, away from seating walls or other damp surface until ready for use. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from site. 8.1.3 Contact Contractor with regard to storage area at job site and job progress schedule requirements. REMODEL PROTOTYPE the scratch coat has become firm but before it has set, its entire surface shall be scratched (scored) in one direction only, to provide mechanical bond with the brown coat. On vertical surfaces, the scratching or scoring shall be horizontal. 8.2 Inspection, Verification: 8.2.1 Before starting work inspect and verify work installed by others which might affect lathing or plastering. Report to Contractor any work out of plumb, line or level or other condition detrimental to good plaster job. Failure to so report will be construed as acceptance of conditions and surfaces as satisfactory. 8.2.2 Consult with and cooperate with mechanical, electrical and other subcontractors whose work affects or is affected by furring, lathing or plastering. Make necessary provision for work of other trades. 8.2.3 Do not cover up with plaster work until all approvals, inspections, and installation of concealed work have been completed. 8.3 Scaffolds: Provide necessary scaffolding, staging and similar items as required for proper execution of work. Comply with Local and State Laws governing same. Erect scaffolding to interfere as little as possible with work of other contractors; remove promptly as soon as plastering is completed. 8.4 Acceptance and Repairing: Plaster showing oversanding, cracks, blisters, pits, checks, color streaks, or discoloration will not be acceptable. Such plaster shall be removed and replaced with new plaster by the Contractor at his expense. Plaster shall be clean and sound after all related work has been completed. Patching and repairing damaged or defective portions will be permitted only when approved by the Project Manager and shall be performed in an acceptable manner. Patching and repairs shall match existing plaster and color. 8.5 Samples of Completed Work: Samples of completed work may be taken by the Project Manager at any time for laboratory inspection and tests to determine conformance with the specifications. Plaster which does not conform to specification requirements shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 8.6 Protection, Clean -Up: 8.6.1 Protection adjoining finish materials from damage from plastering operations, by use of suitable drop cloths, plastic sheets, masking paper and tape, etc. Particular care must be exercised to prevent plaster being deposited on finish masonry walls. Repair, replace, make good any damage to work in manner satisfactory to Project Manager, Owner. 8.6.2 Provide watertight boxes under all water barrels. 8.6.3 Furnish and install waterproof protection under machine mixers and wherever mortar is piled on floors. Protection: 3 plies tarred felt extending six feet beyond outer edges of boxes, mixers or piles of mortar. Plasterer responsible for damage caused by his failure to provide necessary precaution. 8.6.4 Clean each area of plaster debris as soon as each coat is applied. Do not allow debris to accumulate. At the conclusion of work, remove any plaster which may have been deposited on adjacent work, patch all cracks and defects and leave job in perfect condition. All trash, debris, excess materials, etc. to be removed from job site by this contractor. Leave in broom clean condition. 8.6.5 Touch up, paint, patch plasterwork around work of other trades installed subsequent to plastering. This refers 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) *SECTION 9A -5 only to unavoidable minor damage caused by other trades in applying other items of finish work. 8.6.6 Install work in manner satisfactory to Project Manager. Cracks, pits, waves, crooked edges or angles not acceptable. Leave corner beads, trim, and other adjacent finish work free from dippings, splashings and stains. 9. DIRECT APPLICATION TO CONCRETE OR CONCRETE MASONRY 9.1 Where local practice and conditions permit, the direct application of cement plaster to liquid bonding agent over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces, will be considered for use on the project when approved by the Owner's Representative. Written approval, for this direct application, must be obtained with copy to the Project Manager. 9.2 Surface Preparation: Surfaces to receive liquid bonding agent must be clean, free from loose material, dust, dirt, oil, grease, wax, loose paint, mildew, rust, laitance or efflorescence. Surfaces with form releasing agents, curing compounds and sealers must be compatible with liquid bonding agent. Prepare previously painted surfaces in strict accordance with liquid bonding agent manufacturer's recommendations. 9.3 Liquid Bonding Agent: Apply uniformly, using brush, roller or spray, to form a continuous film over entire surface. Allow to dry one hour or as recommended by manufacturer. Prior to cement plaster application, inspect liquid bonding agent application for continuity of film over the entire bonding surface. Re -apply liquid bonding agent over areas not satisfactorily covered. Protect the applied film from dirt and debris until the cement plaster is in place. 9.4 Cement Plaster: 9.4.1 After the surface has been prepared to assure bond, apply portland cement base coat, bring out to grounds, approximately 3/8", straighten to a true surface, float and compact and leave sufficiently rough to assure adequate bond for finish coat. Surface shall be left free from imperfections which may reflect in the finish coat. Moisture cure at least 48 hours. 9.4.2 Apply the finish coat to an approximate thickness of 1/8 inch. Float or texture to achieve finish desired. Moist curing of finish coats is not usually required except on hot, dry and windy days. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 10. SEALING OF UNPAINTED STUCCO 10.1 Surfaces to be sealed shall be thoroughly clean of dirt, waxes, foreign materials, defective paint or coatings. 10.2 Do not apply sealer on frozen or frost - filled surfaces. Do not apply when temperature is below 500F. 10.3 Apply as material comes from container in two thin coats as recommended by sealer manufacturer. Allow first coat to thoroughly dry before applying second coat. 10.4 Coverage: Verify texture and porosity of stucco to be sealed. At a minimum apply at the rate of 250 square feet per gallon. The rate may be adjusted if porosity and texture requires more or less sealer as approved by the Owner's Representative. 11. GUARANTEE 11.1 Guarantee work, in writing, for a period of one year, against popping. peeling. or other defects in workmanship or materials, after date of final acceptance of building. Defects appearing during guarantee period to be removed and /or replaced by this Contractor without additional cost to Owner. 11.2 For direct application of cement plaster to concrete block surfaces, the guarantee shall further include. as a defect, the telegraphing of block joints to the finished cement plaster surface. - END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 517 DIVISION 9' GYPSUM DRYWALL 'SECTION 9B -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED/DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be Taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 This Section includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of Gypsum Drywall work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 Structural studs and joists: Section 5F. 2.3 Wood studs, blocking, sheathing: Section 6A, 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Fire - Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire- resistance ratings as indicated and as required by governing authorities and codes. Provide materials, accessories and application procedures which have been listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E119 for the type of construction shown. 3.2 Tolerances for Drywall Work: Do not exceed a variation of 3/16" in 8' -0" from plumb, level and flat (all directions); and do not exceed 1/16" offset of planes at joints between panels, shim panels as necessary to comply with tolerances. 4. JOB CONDITIONS 4.1 In cold weather. the building shall be heated during the application of the gypsum wallboard and joint treatment to maintain a uniform temperature in the range of not less than 55 degrees F. for a minimum period of 48 hours prior to during and following application of gypsum board and joint treatment, materials or bonding adhesives and ventilation shall be provided to eliminate excessive moisture. 4.2 Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. in building prior to drywall application for a period of 48 hours. The temperature shall be maintained for the entire wallboard and joint treatment application. Ventilation should be provided to eliminate excessive moisture, and control drying time of joint compound. Avoid drafts to prevent too rapid drying of joint compounds. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS REMODEL PROTOTYPE 5.1 Steel Drywall Framing: Studs and Runners - Screw-type complying with ASTM C645. Provide studs of the size indicated with runners of compatible size. Fabricate from electro- galvanized steel with zinc coating. 5.2 Gauge of metal for studs: 5.2.1 25 gauge: Use for all conditions unless otherwise indicated or specified herein. 5.2.2 20 gauge: Use for all partitions over 10' -0" high and for other locations indicated or specified herein. 5.2.3 18 gauge: Use for conditions indicated and for other locations indicated or specified herein. 5.2.4 NOTE: All metal framing members designated "SJ" on the drawings are specified in Section 5F. 5.3 Rigid Furring Channels: Screw type hat - shaped furring channels complying with ASTM C645, fabricate from 25 gauge electro - galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard zinc protective coating. Sizes as indicated on drawings. 5.4 Ceiling Furring Channels shall be 3/4" standard galvanized cold rolled lathing channels. 5.5 Ceiling Runner Channels shall be 1 -1/2" (0.475 lbs. per ft.) standard galvanized channel runners for suspended ceiling work. 5.6 5.7 5.8 Ceiling Hangers for runners shall be No. 8 gauge steel galvanized annealed wire. Ceiling Tie Wire shall be 18 gauge galvanized annealed wire. Manufacturer: Same as gypsum wallboard manufacturer, or approved equal. 5.9 Gypsum Drywall Board: 5.9.1 Exposed Drywall Surfaces: Provide gypsum wallboard (48" wide) complying with ASTM C36 with paperface surface suitable to receive decorated finish and with long edges tapered to receive manufacturer's standard joint treatment, unless otherwise shown. 5.9.2 Moisture - Resistant Applications: Where shown on drawings, provide moisture - resistant gypsum backing board and/or face board with core and paper facings treated to resist moisture to comply with ASTM C630. 5.9.3 Fire -Rated Applications: Provide either regular to Type "X" gypsum wallboard, as required to meet the rating for the construction shown. 5.9.4 Exterior Sheathing Applications: Provided exterior gypsum sheathing with water - resistant core compliant to ASTM C79. 5.9.5 Manufacturers: Provide gypsum wallboard produced by one of the following or approved equal. Georgia Pacific Corporation National Gypsum Company U.S. Gypsum Company 5.10 Drywall Accessory Materials: 5.10.1 Fasteners: Provide 1" and 1 -1/2 ". Type S drywall 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' GYPSUM DRYWALL 'SECTION 9B -2 screws. Comply with ASTM C646. 5.10.2 Drywall Control Joints: For long continuous runs of drywall systems, provide one -piece joint assembly of non - corrosive metal with continuous unperforated expansion strip for insertion into joint and perforated flanges for attachment to face of wallboard. Material shall be U.S.G. Control Joint #093 or similar if by another manufacturer. Space joints at 30' -0" maximum. 5.10.3 Metal Trim Accessories: Provide trim accessories of the sizes required for the drywall applications shown and specified, fabricated from galvanized steel. At external corners, provide metal corner bead with smooth rigid nose and perforated and knurled metal flanges. U.S.G. Dur -A -Bead or similar if by another manufacturer. 5.10.4 For protection of exposed wallboard edge openings and where drywall abuts or intersects dissimilar construction, provide metal casing bead trim. Beaded nose with exposed flange knurled for joint treatment. Where kerfed jambs are shown, provide trim with special leg designed for insertion into jamb slot. U.S.G. 200A Metal Trim or similar if by another manufacturer. 5.10.5 Joint Tapes: Perforated fiber type complying with ASTM C475, U.G.S. Pert -A -Tape or equal if by another manufacturer. 5.10.6 Joint Compound: Adhesive with or without fillers complying with ASTM C475. Provide in dry powder form or pre -mixed ready for application. 5.10.7 Two- Compound Treatment: Provide compatible joint compounds; one compound for bedding and the other compound for finishing joints. Perf -A -Tape compound system or equal if by another manufacturer. 5.10.8 Water resistant joint compound where required at joints, cut edges, etc. of water resistant backing board, subject to compliance with requirements. 5.11 Miscellaneous Materials: 5.11.1 Wall standard reinforcing strips: 18 gauge x 6" wide horizontal sheet metal reinforcing - 3 rows horizontal and continuous across metal studs. behind all gypsum drywall shown to have wall standards. 5.11.2 Drywall Blanket Insulation: Where shown and where needed to achieve Sound Transmission Class (STC) and where needed for fire- rating indicated, provide semi -rigid, spun mineral fiber blankets without membrane covering, complying with FS HH -I -521, Type 1. of 3.1/2" thickness, 2.5 p.c.f. density tested by the drywall manufacturer for the required ratings. Where shown and where needed for Thermal Insulation to achieve minimum R value of 19. 5.11.3 Access Panels shall be Mitcor Type M standard access doors and located where shown on Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings. 5.11.4 Drywall Sealant: At sound rated applications, provide non - drying. non- shrinking, non - migrating sealant recommended by the drywall manufacturer. Provide sealant which is paintable wherever exposed to view. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. INSTALLATION OF STEEL DRYWALL FRAMING REMODEL PROTOTYPE Manufacturer's Instructions: Unless otherwise shown or specified, install metal framing and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed Instructions. 6.1 Floor and Ceiling Runner Tracks: Provide Continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners. Provide fasteners at all corners and ends of runner. Use continuous gasket sealers at floor, ceilings, columns and walls of dissimilar materials. 6.2 Height of Partitions: Terminate top of partitions as shown on drawings. 6.3 For gypsum drywall applications, space studs not to exceed 16" o.c. for partitions to 20' -0" high, space studs not to exceed 12" o.c. for partitions over 20'-0" high. 6.4 Provide additional studs to support inside corners at partition intersections and comers, and to support outside corners, terminations of partitions, both side of control joints and adjacent to all openings. 6.5 Use full length studs between runner tracks. 6.6 Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition corners and intersections, and adjacent to openings using 3/8" self - tapping screws on both flanges of studs. 6.7 Provide rough framing at openings using full- length studs adjacent to jambs and horizontal header and sill tracks. Cut honzontal tracks to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange overlap and screw attachment to jamb studs. Install cut to length intermediate studs between jamb studs at head and sill sections at same spacing as full- length studs. 6.8 Where vertical control joints are shown at jamb lines, provide additional vertical studs located on opening side of jambs and not less than 1/2" from jamb studs. Do not fasten studs to tracks or jamb studs. 6.9 Where solid core wood doors, or double doors, or doors weighing less than 50 lbs., provide 2, 20 -gauge studs at each jamb and one additional stud not more than 6" from jamb studs. At doors weighing more than 50 lbs. substitute 18 -gauge studs. 6.10 Provide 20 -gauge stud horizontal reinforcement for attachment of plumbing fixtures or handrails or grab bars for toilet rooms. 6.11 Drywall Ceiling Framing: 6.11.1 Ceiling Furring Channels shall be not over 12" o.c. Install with metal furring clips. 6.11.2 Ceiling Runner Channels shall be spaced at right angles to the 3/4" channels, shall not be over 4' -0" o.c. 6.11.3 Ceiling Hangers for runners shall be spaced not over 4' -0" o.c. in both directions. Hangers shall be securely anchored to floor construction above. Provide additional hanger support for ceiling mounted fixtures. 6.11.4 Ceiling Tie Wire shall be not less than four strands at 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' GYPSUM DRYWALL each bearing. 6.12 Metal Furring Framing: 6.12.1 General: Provide metal furring where shown, as specified, and as required to provide support for drywall. Where size and spacing of furring members is not shown for support, do not exceed the minimum requirements of GA201. 6.12.2 Where control or expansion joints are shown, provide separate supports on each side of joint. Do not bridge joints. 6.13 Wall /Standard Support System: 6.13.1 Install 3 rows of horizontal sheet metal reinforcing strips, behind all gypsum wall board where metal wall standard locations are shown on the drawings. 6.13.2 Locate sheet metal strip reinforcing at centerlines as indicated on drawings. 7. INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL BOARD 7.1 General: 7.1.1 Standards: Comply with the requirements of ANSI A97.1 "Standard Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Wallboard ", except comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations where more stringent. 7.1.2 Provide drywall of the thickness shown. 7.1.3 Form control joints in drywall construction as specified. Allow 1/2" continuous opening between edges of adjacent drywall boards to allow for insertion of control joint trim accessory. 7.2 Single Layer Applications: 7.2.1 Partition/Walls: Apply gypsum board vertically using floor -to- ceiling length boards with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud space on opposite faces of partition/walls. Use type S drywall screws at 12" O.C. 7.2.2 Ceilings: Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to supports with end joints located over supports. Use maximum practical length boards to minimize end joints. Stagger end joints in alternate courses of boards and locate as far away from center of ceiling as possible. Use Type S drywall screws at 12" O.C. 7.2.3 Wood Supports: Fasten gypsum wallboard with annular ring nails or screws at the Contractor's option. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed nail spacings of 8" o.c. for walls and 7" o.c. for ceilings, or screw spacings of 12" o.c. (wall and ceilings). 7.2.4 Metal Supports: Fasten gypsum wallboard with screws. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed 12" o.c. spacing. Screws shall be power - driven and screw heads shall provide slight depression below the surface of the board. 7.2.5 Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install moisture resistant gypsum backing board. Apply with uncut long edge at bottom of work, and space 1/4" REMODEL PROTOTYPE 'SECTION 9B -3 above fixture lips. Seal ends, cut -edges and penetrations of each piece with water- resistant adhesive or, where recommended by backing board manufacturer, with water - resistant joint compound. 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' GYPSUM DRYWALL 'SECTION 98-4 7.3 Double Layer Application: Mechanically Fastened Layers: Fasten both layers to supports with screws in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; but for base layer, do not exceed 8" o.c. spacing at edges and 12" o.c. spacing at intermediate supports, and for face layer do not exceed 16" o.c. spacing along supports. On walls, apply both layers vertically with vertical joints staggered on opposite side of partitions and offset not less than 12" between layers. 7.4 Sound Rated Applications: Comply with requirements indicated by manufacturer to achieve required ratings, as proven by his certified laboratory test results. For sound -rated construction, comply with the following: 7.4.1 Partitions: Provide continuous beads of sealant at juncture of both faces of runners or plates with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever drywall abuts dissimilar materials. Install sealant prior to installation of drywall boards. 7.4.2 Control Joints: Provide continuous bead of sealant between edges of drywall panels at control joints. Seal prior to installation of surface - applied control joint accessories and locate at proper depth in joint to allow for insertion of expansion strip. 7.4.3 Openings and Cutouts: Seal open spaces between drywall and electric boxes, fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or openings in electric boxes and similar devices built into the drywall work. 7.4.4 Partition Insulation: Install drywall blanket insulation for sound attenuation. Completely fill space between studs to full height of partition /wall. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other work which penetrates partition/wall. Attach to back face of drywall with adhesive application. 7.6.7 Insert control joints strips into open joint and staple flanges to drywall in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7.6.8 Application of Joint Compounds: After mixing, do not use joint compounds if recommended pot -life time has expired. Allow drying time between applications of joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the relative humidity and temperature levels at the time of application. In no case. allow less than 24 hours drying time between applications of joint compound. Apply not less than 2 separate coats of joint compound over joints. fastener heads and metal flanges. (2 coats are in addition to set and skim coat mentioned above.) Sand between coats as necessary. Final coat and subsequent sanding shall leave gypsum wallboard ready for decorator finish. 7.6.9 Joint compound treatment is not required above suspended ceilings where partition /walls are shown or specified to extend to structural deck or ceiling above suspended ceiling, unless partition is visible through ceiling grille. 7.7 Completion and Protection of Finished Work: Installer shall advise Contractor of proper procedures for the protection of completed drywall work from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work. At the completion of this contractor's work, all unused materials, tools, scaffolds, and equipment shall be removed from the structure. All work installed by others, which is dirty due to the drywall installation shall be cleaned and restored to its original condition. All drywall construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year as called for in the General Provisions. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 7.5 Thermal Insulation: Friction Fit Thermal Insulation between studs unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 7.6 Drywall Finishing: 7.6.1 Finish exposed drywall surfaces with joints, corners and exposed edges reinforced or trimmed as specified, and with all joints, fastener heads, trim accessory flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound as specified in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface. Form true, level or plumb lines, without joints, fastener heads, flanges of trim accessories or defects visible after application of field- applied decoration. 7.6.2 Use joint tape to reinforce joints formed by tapered edges or butt ends of drywall units and at interior corners and angles. Set tape in joint compound then apply skim coat over tape in one application. 7.6.3 Where open spaces of more than 1/16" width occur between abutting drywall units, (except at control joints), prefill joints with joint compound and allow prefill to dry before application of joint tape. 7.6.4 Reinforce external corners of drywall work with corner beads. 7.6.5 Securely fasten metal corner beads as recommended by the manufacturer. Use fasteners which will be fully concealed by joint compound fill applied over flanges. 7.6.6 Edge Trim: Provide specified type of metal casing bead trim. Install in single unjointed lengths. -END OF SECTION- __7 ._ ...W._w.�.. ._... _- 01/03/00 li DIVISION 9' SPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SY; MS 'SECTION 9D -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing acoustical tile ceilings, suspension systems and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 The extent of the work is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Types of ceilings specified in this section include acoustical panel ceilings and plastic eggcrate ceiling panels. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 The acoustical tile, suspension systems and related items shall meet or exceed the following standards: 31.1 American Society for Testing Materials E84. 3.1.2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Index - Where acoustical ceilings are components of fire rated assemblies, provide complete ceiling systems complying with UL design numbers corresponding with construction assemblies indicated and identified ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 3.1.3 ASTM C 635 - Performance requirements for suspension systems, including dimensional tolerances. 3.1.4 AIMA Bulletin - Acoustic unit performance data as published by Acoustical and Insulation Materials Association. 3.1.5 CISCA Code of Practices - Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association Code of Practice for Acoustical Ceiling System Installations. 3.2 Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than five years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. 3.3 Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system components and REMODEL PROTOTYPE partition system. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and each suspension system. 4.2 Samples: Set of 6" x 4" square samples for each lay -in unit required, showing full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. 4.3 Set of 12" long samples of each exposed runner and molding. 5. PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING 5.1 Deliver materials to the project site in original unopened packages bearing manufacturer's name and specific product identification. 5.2 Store materials in a dry place with continuous support to avoid warping units and protect against damage, direct sunlight, or surface contamination or other areas. 5.3 Handle materials carefully to avoid damaging or discoloring. Replace materials which have been damaged or discolored. 5.4 Permit ceiling units to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content prior to installing units. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES 6.1 Where acoustic ceiling systems are components of floor - ceiling or roof - ceiling or beam assemblies for which a fire resistance rating is shown or scheduled, provide complete ceiling systems complying with the requirements of UL "Fire Resistance Index' (including referenced requirements) for the UL design numbers corresponding with the construction assemblies shown. Provide suspension system access members complying with applicable UL requirements, as indicated. 7. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS (TRU & BRU) 7.1 Lay -In Acoustic Tile: 24" x 48' x 518' tile. line fissured" design No. 1749 with plastic coating as manufactured by Armstrong Cork Company. No substitutions will be allowed unless critical delivery schedules cannot be met. 7.1.1 Where UL time rated designs are indicated provide fissured design "Fire Guard" lay -in panels by the Armstrong Cork Company to match the time rating requirement. 8. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS (KRU) 8.1 Acoustical Ceiling Units, General: 8.1.1 Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturer's standard units of configuration indicated which are prepared for mounting method designated and which comply with FS SS -S -118 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, form, pattern, grade (NRC or NIC's as applicable), light reflectance coefficient (LR), edge detail, and joint detail (if any). 8.1.2 Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: No. 7 (mechanically mounted on special metal support), FS SS -S -118; or Type E-400 mounting as per ASTM E 795. 8.1.3 Manufacturer's: Subject to compliance with the 04/06/00 DIVISION 9' SUSPI )ED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS requirements, provide products only of the manufacturer's 8.2 Lay -In Panels: 8.2.1 Acoustic Ceiling Panel: (STC =35 to 39, min. NRC =.50 to .65) 8.2.1.1 "Minaboard" fissured - 2' x 4' x 5/8" lay -in panels, non - directional pattern, Armstrong World Industries, Cat. No. 755B. 8.2.1.2'Omni" fissured - 2' x 4' x 5 /B" lay -in panels, non - directional pattern, USG Interiors, Inc. Cat No. 345. 8.2.1.3 "Hytone" Random fissured - "Baroque" 2' x 4' x 5/8" lay -in panels, Celotex Cat No. BET -197. 8.2.2 Louvered Ceiling Panels: White acrylic louver panels with open cells approximately 1/2" x 1/2' x 1/2" deep (eggcrate panels) manufactured by ALP Lighting and Ceiling Products, Co., or approved equal. 8.3 Exposed Grid Suspension Systems (TRU, BRU 8 KRU), 8..3.1 Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification and finish specified which comply with applicable ASTM C635 requirements. 8.3.2 Manufacturer: Provide ceiling suspension systems by same as acoustical unit manufacturer; one of the following: Donn (USG Interiors, Inc.) Chicago Metallic Corp National Rolling Mills, Inc. /Bundy Eastern Products 8.3.3 Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System complying with ASTM C635. Classify cross tees as main tees. 8.3.4 Main tee shall have 15/16" exposed flange with a rolled cap and 1 -1/2" deep web with double web design. Wall mouldings shall be angle shape. 8.3.5 Finish of exposed surfaces: Matte white. 8,3.6 Attachment Devices: Tested for a carrying capacity of not less than 5 times the design load involved. 8.3.7 Hangers: As recommended by manufacturer to comply with the specified structural classification (ASTM C 635). Wire hangers, if recommended, to be not less than 12 gauge (0.016" diameter), galvanized, soft annealed, mild steel wire. 8.3.8 Primary and Secondary Supporting Members: As further specified and required suspension systems. 8.3.9 Assembly Devices and Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. 8.3.10 Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 8.3.11 Provide hold down clips for fire rated ceilings and elsewhere as required by codes or indicated on drawings. REMODEL PROTOTYPE indicated for ACP -1 ceiling. 8.3.12 Ceiling Insulation Batts: 3-1/2" fiberglass 2' x 4' panel batts (if required). PART 3: EXECUTION 9. INSPECTION 'SECTION 9D -2 9.1 Installer must examine the conditions under which the suspended ceiling work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with suspended ceiling work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 9.2 Installer shall consult other trades and contractors involved prior to start of ceiling work, to determine areas of potential interference. Do not start installation until interferences have been resolved to the satisfaction of the installer. 9.3 Coordinate layout with other work which penetrates or is supported by ceiling suspension system. 9.4 Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. 9.5 Refer to reflected ceiling plan of main sales area. Layout ceiling precisely as shown. Consult with Project Manager or Owner's representative prior to start of work to assure that ceiling grid layout will conform to ceiling plan and owner's intentions. 10, INSTALLATION OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES 10.1 Install ceiling suspension systems which are components of fire rated floor-ceiling or roof - ceiling assemblies, complete, in accordance with the requirements of applicable UL "Fire Resistance Index' design numbers. 11. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT$ FOR CEILING SU$PENSIQN SYSTEMS 11.1 Install suspension systems which are part of non -fire rated assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; the requirements of Article 2 installation of Components" of ASTM C 636 "Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels"; and further specified. 11.2 Secure to structural and intermediate framing members by attaching to metal clips designed for the type of member involved, or where possible, by looping and wire -tying directly to members. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. 11.3 Space hangers to fall not more than 6" from ends and not more than 4' o.c., between ends of primary suspension members, and as required to support other work resting in or on ceiling. Provide at least two hangers at diagonally opposite corners of light fixtures as required to prevent deflection of suspension system members in excess of ASTM C 635 requirements. Do not attach hangers to ducts, pipes or other similar work which occurs above ceilings; provide additional suspended ceiling members at such locations. 04 /06 /00 DIVISION 9' SPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SY: MS 'SECTION 9D -3 11.4 Install continuous metal moldings for support of runners and units where suspended ceilings meet walls, partitions and other vertical elements in order to conceal edges of acoustical units. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening through holes in web at intervals of not over 16' o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12' -0". Miter cut inside and outside corners. 12. INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED GRID SYSTEMS 12.1 Main Runners: Support directly from hangers; space as required to support ceiling units and other work resting in, or on, ceilings and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. Provide unjointed main runners of manufacturer's maximum standard length wherever possible; join abutting sections with manufacturer's standard splice connection; do not pop rivet flanges of abutting runners. 12.2 Cross Runners: Support by interlocking ends of cross runners with main runners (or cross runners classified as main runners) to form 90 degree angle between intersecting runners. Space as required to support each panel unit used in the work 12.3 Moldings: Install with exposed leg in same plane as bottom flange of exposed runners, unless otherwise shown or specified. 13. INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL PANELS 13.1 Install acoustical panels only after the building is enclosed and moisture is at a low level compatible with manufacturer's requirements. Workmen shall not fingerprint panels with dirty hands or gloves. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 13.2 Install batt insulation above ceiling panels where indicated on drawings. Do not install on light fixture. 14. REPLACEMENT$ 14.1 Contractor to provide one carton of each type of ceiling tile to be used for replacement of any tiles damaged or discolored in the future. Tile shall be packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 15. ADJUST AND CLEAN 15.1 Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 04/06/00 DIVISION 9' RESILIENT FLOORING CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED VINYL COMPOSITION TILE TO MATCH EXISTING. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing the resilient flooring work, including installation of owner - furnished vinyl composition floor tile, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 Manufacturers of resilient flooring and selection of resilient flooring materials including seamless flooring, resilient base, stair coverings, and metal and resilient edge strips, etc., are indicated on the drawings. 2.2.1 Related items including adhesives, are specified herein. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 Manufacturer: Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Samples: Provide full -size tile units, and 2 -1/2" long sections of resilient flooring accessories. 4.2 Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 5. JOB CONDITIONS: 5.1 Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (18 degrees C.) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subse- quently. maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed. PART 2: PRODUCTS REMODEL PROTOTYPE 'SECTION 9E -1 6. MATERIALS (Refer to drawings for specific finishes.) 6.1 Furnished by General Contractor. 6.1.1 Vinyl Composition Tile to match existing 12" x 12" x 1/8' gauge. 6.2 Furnished by General Contractor. 6.2.1 Wall Base: 4" high x .080" gauge. Provide top -set cove or straight base by manufacturer and of color as indicated on the drawings. 6.3 Furnished by Contractor: 6.3.1 Adhesives (Cements): Water resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. 6.3.1.1 Per Manufacturer's requirements and specifications. 6.3.2 Adhesives for seamless flooring, stair coverings, resilient base, etc. as recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be covered. 6.3.3 Concrete Slab Primer: Non - staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 6.3.4 Vinyl or Rubber Edge Strips: Domco 2" strip, or approved equal. PART 3: EXECUTION 7. INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION 7.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL surfaces receiving subsequent finish are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Testing and approval of the flooring substrate is the responsibility of the Contractor, including bonding and moisture tests. 7.2 Contractor shall advise Owner's Representative immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompa- tibility. 8. PREPARATION 8.1 Prior to laying flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered. 8.2 Apply concrete slab primer, If recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 8.3 Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturers. 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. 9.2 Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edging. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight. even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' RESILIENT FLOORING reveals, and into closets and similar openings. 9.3 In areas where resilient tile floor meets a higher material, install latex type undertayment approved by the tile manufacturer with a slope not more than 118' per foot. Feather undertayment neatly on a straight line where the slope meets the level floor. 9.4 Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 9.5 Tile Floors: 9.5.1 Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. Adjust center marks so the border tile widths are no less than 6" wide. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. 9.5.2 Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged is so numbered. Cut tile neatly to and around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. All tile to be by same manufacturer from same run for entire store. Lay all In alternating pattern. 9.5.3 Roll tile with 75-100 lb sectional floor roller to assure adhesion. 9.5.4 Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. 9.5.5 Where indicated, scribe tiles at aluminum railing insert locations in order to provide flush installation of escutcheon plates. 9.6 Accessories: 9.6.1 Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in as long lengths as practicable, with preformed interior and exterior corners or fabncate from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 9.6.2 Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at all edges of flooring, unless otherwise shown, which would otherwise be exposed. 9.6.3 Place metal edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure. Install edging strips at all unprotected edges of flooring, unless otherwise shown. 9.6.4 On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with adhesive filler material. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 10. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 11. REPLACEMENTS 'SECTION 9E -2 10.1 Remove any excess adhesive or other surface ble- mishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring from damage by covering. 10.2 Allow no foot traffic or other use for at least 24 hours after installation. 10.3 Provide adequate protection for tile in areas where traffic occurs and maintain this protection until all work in building is completed. 10.4 Floors shall be cleaned and waxed in compliance with manufacturer's requirements immediately prior to final inspection of work by the Owner. 10.4.1 Finishing: After completion of project and Just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. 10.4.2 Strip flooring and apply wax and buff with type of wax, number of coats and buffing procedures in compliance with floor manufacturers Instructions and requirements. 11.1 Contractor to provide two (2) full cartons of each type, size and color of floor tile to be used throughout the facility. This will serve as a replacement of any tiles damaged or discolored in the future. 12. GUARANTEE 12.1 All guarantees and warranties are to remain in effect and will not be voided if vapor barrier is used below slab. -END OF SECTION- 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' CARPETING 'SECTION 9F -1 OWNER WILL FURNISH CARPET FOR TOYS 'R' US. REFER TO DRAWINGS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE -ORDERED. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION, CALL JAN QUARLES AT J&J CARPET, PHONE (800) 859 -9558 or (800) 241 -4585. NOTE: SEE SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR EXCESS MATERIALS AS DESCRIBED UNDER PARAGRAPH 10, CLEANING AND PROTECTION. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1,1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean 'if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1,4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing the carpeting work in the areas designated, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 Sales Floor Carpeting will be furnished by Owner and installed under the work of this section. Refer to Schedules and Drawings. 2.3 The extent of the work is shown on the drawings and specified herein and is defined to include carpet and accessories. Carpet installer must follow seaming diagram provided by Owner. 2.4 Carpeting shall be installed by glue -down method. 2.5 Johnsonite Transitional Moulding will be furnished by Contractor and installed, where carpet abuts ceramic tile or resilient tile "pathway" aisles, under the work of this section. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 Installer shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of carpeting experience, similar to work of this section. 3.2 The carpet installer shall comply with installation requirements and recommendations of the manufacturer. 3.3 General Standard: "Carpet Specifiers Handbook" by The Carpet and Rug Institute; for definitions of terminology not otherwise defined herein, and for general recommendations and information. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Adhesive: Submit data sheet for manufacturers REMODEL PROTOTYPE approved adhesive. 5. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: 5.1 Owner will deliver carpet, and Mercer transitional moulding to the job site. Installer shall accept and unload carpet and moulding from tuck, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. MATERIAL: (furnished by Owner) 6.1 Carpet to be furnished by Owner for installation will be as follows (for standard only, actual product may vary): TOYS •R• US (COMBO /PROTOTYPE) - Ameritex J & J 2200 - Construction Tufted level loop -Pile Yam Type - Allied Anso IV HP continuous filament nylon - Primary Backing: Polybac (may vary) - Secondary Backing: Jute Or "Uni -lok" back -Total weight (maximum): 65.00 ounces /yd. -Ply: 3 ply -Flame Rating: Class B - Width: 12 feet TQYS 'R' US :As indicated on Finish Plan. 6.2 Reducer strip: Johnsonite or architect approve equal. Field verify type of accessory required for either tile overlay or non - overlay conditions. Color is to be dark blue. NOTE: SEE SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR EXCESS MATERIALS AS DESCRIBED UNDER PARAGRAPH 10, CLEANING AND PROTECTION. 7. CARPET ACCESSORIES (furnished by Contractor) 7.1 Installation Adhesive: Water- resistant type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. 7.2 Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. 7.3 Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, and selected by Installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. 7.4 Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 8. PRE - INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 8.1 Installer must examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 8.2 Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting: vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet: apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. 8.3 Level -out minor imperfections in concrete slab with 04/14/00 I DIVISION 9' CARPETING 'SECTION 9F -2 leveling compound as directed and necessary. 8.4 Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. 9. INSTALLATION 91 General: 9.1.1 Follow seaming diagram provided by Owner. Maintain uniformity of direction and lay of pile. 9.1.2 Extend carpet under open - bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. 9.1.3 Provide cut -outs where required, and bind cut edges property where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. 9.2 Glue -Down Carpet Installation 9.2.1 Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement. 9.2.2 Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet. 10. CLEANING AND PROT CTION 10.1 Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps • to be disposed of. 10.2 Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face - beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. 10.3 Advise contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. 10.4 Maintenance materials: Deliver usable scraps of carpet to Owner's designated storage space, property packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9' -0' length, and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than 8' wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction waste ". - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 04/14/00 DIVISION 9' PAINTING 'SECTION 9H -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH PRATT & LAMBERT FOR THE SUPPLY OF PRATT & LAMBERT PAINTS. FOR QUOTATIONS AND /OR INFORMATION CONTACT THE PRATT & LAMBERT OFFICE 1-800- 289.7728 (1- 800 - BUY - PRATT). PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE QF WORKS 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing surface preparation, painting, finishing and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 2.3 Paint exposed surfaces of unfinished primed surfaces throughout the interior whether or not colors are designated in 'schedules ", except where natural finish or material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Project Manager will select these from colors available for materials systems specified. 2.4 Mask off skylights, nameplates, equipment identifications and similar items. Cover sprinkler heads with plastic bags and protect moving parts during painting. Remove all protective coverings at the completion of painting activity. 2.5 The Contractor is responsible for the application of the paint or finishing material. If any surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding and puttying operations, the Contractor will immediately notify the Contractor and Owner's Representative in writing; or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory finish resulting. 2.6 The Contractor shall examine all documents that form this contract, and the alternates that affect the work under this Section. Examine the specifications under other divisions and thoroughly familiarize himself with all provisions regarding their painting. 2.7 Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85% unless otherwise permitted REMODEL PROTOTYPE by manufacturer. When surface temperature is below 50 degrees F. do not apply paints, varnishes, and special coatings, unless otherwise specified. Stop exterior work sufficiently early to permit film to set up before condensation, frost and moisture, caused by night temperature drops, occur. Do not begin exterior painting until frost or condensation evaporates and surface is moisture free. Do not varnish when temperature is below 70 degrees F. Comply with manufacturer's written requirements. Painting may continue in inclement weather only if surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits set by manufacturer. 2.8 Exterior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.8.1 Hollow metal doors /frames. 2.8.2 Miscellaneous metals /structural steel. 2.8.3 Mechanical equipment screen roof supports. 2.8.4 Aluminum, not prefinished. 2.8.5 Galvanized metal. 2.8.6 Masonry. 2.8.7 Stucco, concrete. 2.8.8 Exterior insulation and finish system. 2.8.9 Exposed gas lines above roof. 2.8.10 Other surfaces indicated to be painted /finished. 2.9 Interior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.9.1 Hollow metal doors/frames. 2.9.2 Miscellaneous Metals/Structural Steel. 2.9.3 Masonry 2.9.4 Wood, including millwork (painted). 2.9.5 Wood, including millwork (stained). 2.9.6 Graphics (various surfaces), 2.9.7 Sealing of concrete floors not receiving floor coverings (including prestriping where required). 2.9.8 Touching up of scuffs, abrasions, marred areas and other imperfections of prefinished metal, wood or other surfaces which are required to be painted /finished. 2.9.9 Spray paint the exposed underside of roof deck and/or Pre -Sales Mezzanine and all structural and miscellaneous steel, steel joists and metal deck(s), conduit, J- boxes, etc. and all of the items and related equipment shown or scheduled on the drawings, unless specifically noted or scheduled to be unfinished. Touch -up surfaces which are damaged by other trades to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. 2.9.10 Paint interior surfaces of ducts where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non specular black paint. 2.10 Work specified under other Sections: 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' PAINTING 2.10.1 Prime coat painting and undercoats of paint, factory finish painting specified in other Sections of the 2.10.2 Field touch -up of miscellaneous metals. 2.10.3 Field touch up of structural steel. 2.11 Items not to be painted: Unless otherwise noted, prefinished, prefabricated, or shop fabricated components or equipment, concealed surfaces, finish anodized aluminum, overhead doors, roof hatches, operating parts, labels, identification plates, performance ratings, etc. 3. DELIVERY AND STORAGE 3.1 The contractor shall store all apparatus and materials used on the job in a single place designated by the Contractor, or Owner's Representative. Such storage shall be kept clean and Contractor shall be liable for damage to surrounding areas. All soiled or used rags, waste and trash must be removed from the building every night and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire. 3.2 Deliver all materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages with containers bearing all manufacturer's data, instructions, spec. numbers, etc. Materials not displaying proper manufacturer's guarantee will not be accepted. 4. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 4.1 The contractor shall study the contract, drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this Section as to insure its completeness. 4.2 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 4.3 The contractor shall cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections so as not to delay job progress. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIAL$ 5.1 Painting and finishing products for use in the work shall be the standard best or top brands produced for each particular kind of material required herein, by the following manufacturers with no substitutions, unless otherwise noted: 5.1.1 Pratt & Lambert (P & L) - General interior and exterior paint. 5.1.1.1 Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Glidden, Sherwin - Williams, Benjamin Moore, equivalent products to those Pratt & Lambert Products specified in paragraph 7 PAINTING SCHEDULE below. 5.1.2 EPMAR - Interior clear epoxy floor sealer. Contact EPMAR Corp.. 13210 Barton Circle, Santa Fe Springs, California 90670 (310) 946 -8781. (No substitutions accepted). REMODEL PROTOTYPE specifications. 'SECTION 9H -2 5.1.3 Series 55 Tneme -crete by Tnemec Company, Inc. parapet wall coating. 5.1.4 Devoe Coatings - TRU -Glaze 4030 Waterbome Epoxy Primer and Devthane (Toys 'R" Us Blue) 379 Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel as manufactured by ICI Devoe Coatings, a division of ICI Paints World Group, 4000 Dupont Circle, Louisville, Kentucky 40207 Tel: (502) 897 -9861, Fax: (502) 893 -1444, Mr. James R. DeChant. 5.2 Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 5.3 Colors shall be pure non - fading pigments, finely ground in linseed oil or japan, as required. Colors used on plaster, masonry and concrete shall be limeproof. Color schedule shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to application of products. 5.4 Shellac shall be pure, white or orange gum, cut in pure denatured alcohol, using five pounds of gum to each gallon. Orange shellac: Used for painting over knots sap, resinous woods. 5.5 Spackling compound shall be finely ground, grit free: when dry, shall set without shrinkage to smooth, hard, white surface, and sand easily to take any finish. 5.6 Patching plaster shall be white non- shrinking, containing no lime and uniform in set and quality. 5.7 Wood filler shall be paste type, match any stain color required. Do not mix filler with stain. 5.8 Raw linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D234. 5.9 Boiled linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D260. 5.10 Turpentine shall be gum spirits of turpentine conforming to ASTM D13. 5.11 Putty shall conform to ASTM D317, Class B white lead whiting putty. 5.12 All finishes to be Class "C" flame spread or matter. 5.13 Painting subcontractor shall provide and leave at job one (1) gallon of each color. (All colors to be in fresh, unopened cans.) PART 3: EXECUTION 6. PREPARATION OF SURFACES 6.1 Prior to installation of work, the contractor shall examine surfaces which are to receive painting and finishing coats, and report conditions of surfaces which are not properly prepared to receive work of this section. Start of work shall imply that work can be performed as specified herein. 6.2 Spaces shall be broom clean and surfaces dust -free before painting is started. Before painting or finishing, plaster, greases and other extraneous matter which would affect the finished work shall be removed. 6.3 Areas and/or spaces where painting and /or finishing work is being performed shall be maintained above 50 degrees F. during application and drying. 6.4 To repairing or spackling of surface necessary for proper application of paint. 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' PAINTING "SECTION 9H -3 6.5 Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned of oil, grease, dirt, rust. sandpapered smooth and otherwise properly prepared. 6.6.1 Thoroughly clean concrete, stucco, E.I.F.S., masonry and other absorptive surfaces to be painted of grit. efflorescence, grease, dirt and release agents which will adversely affect the adhesion or appearance of the paint finish. 6.6.2 Masonry construction shall be cured for 30 days, and concrete construction cured for 60 days before painting. Check alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted. If surfaces require corrective measures, Contractor to correct condition of painted surface. 6.7 Interior Concrete Floors scheduled to receive epoxy sealer: 6.7.1 New Concrete Floors: Floors shall be cured minimum of 28 days and shall be etched or sandblasted to remove laitence as recommended by sealer manufacturer. If curing compounds have been used on floors, remove these compounds before applying epoxy sealer. 6.7.2 Old Concrete Floors (Remodeling): Remove old coatings such as grease, oil, dirt, paint, mastic, etc. By grinding and cutting, sandblasting ('Cut - Blast "), mechanical scarification or by chemical stripping. Clean concrete with Trisodium Phosphate solution and degrease if required as recommended by sealer manufacturer. Acid etch, rinse, neutralize and flush clean, removing all water and neutralizing solution. Allow to dry before applying epoxy sealer. 6.8 Gypsum Drywall: 6.8.1 Scratches, cracks, holes, indentations, gouges, and similar defects in surface shall be property cut out and filled with spackling compound, joint compound or other patching material as may be required and brought to a smooth flush surface. Patched portions shall be given a coat of primer - sealer in addition to all other specified coats. 6.8.2 Safe moisture level for painting shall be determined by the use of a moisture meter. Patched areas, "hot" or suction spots shall be spot primed as per manufacturer's label directions. 6.9 Wood 6.9.1 Woodwork to be painted or finished shall be sandpapered to remove all roughness. loose edges, slivers, or splinters, and then brushed to remove dust. grease or dirt and shall be washed off with naptha or other suitable cleaner. Knots and sappy streaks or spots shall be given two (2) thin coats of shellac, lightly sandpapered when dry. 6.9.2 All cracks, nail holes and surface defects in woodwork shall be filled with putty or plastic wood after the priming coat, filler, or shellac has been applied. Putty or plastic wood filler shall be brought up flush with the surface and lightly sandpapered smooth. 6.9.3 Open grained woodwork to be finished shall be first filled thoroughly with paste filler. Filler shall be of such consistency as to be applied with a short bristle brush. Filler shalt be well rubbed into the grain and when set, the rubbing shall continue across the grain until a hard, non - absorbent surface is obtained. 6.9.4 Top and bottom edges of wood doors to be primed the REMODEL PROTOTYPE 6.6 Concrete, Stucco, Masonry: same as face of doors, after fitting. 6.10 Metals: 6.10.1 Metal surfaces shall be washed with mineral spirits to remove dirt or grease before applying materials. Where rust or scale is present, it shall be wire brushed or sandpapered clean before painting. Shop coat of paint that becomes marred shall be cleaned and touched up with the primer specified. 6.10.2 Galvanized metal surfaces shall be thoroughly wiped down so that surfaces are free of dirt, grease or foreign matter, as recommended by approved paint manufacturer. 6.10.3 Shop or prime coated metal surfaces shall be cleaned of similar foreign matter as above, and shall have all bare spots or rust spots removed by wire brushing or sanding and be touched up or reprimed as required. 6.10.4 Dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities in metal work to be painted shall be filled with an approved metal filler suitable for the purpose which, after setting, shall be sanded to a smooth, hard surface. 6.11 Mechanical and Electrical Items: 6.11.1 Pipe and duct coverings, shall be given a heavy coat of glue size before other paint applications, except when sized under the work of other sections. There shall be added to the glue size, and to each coat of paint applied thereafter, a sufficient amount of a fungicidal agent to render the fabric mildew - proof. The fungicidal agent shall be a type which will not adversely affect the color, texture, or durability of the paint. 6.11.2 Exposed panel boxes, electric cabinets. piping, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work and equipment in finished spaces, shall be given one (1) prime coat and then shall be finished to match walls and ceilings on which or near which they are located. 6.11.3 Gas lines above roof shall be painted. Color as indicated or scheduled. 7. PAINTING SCHEDULE 7.1 Exterior Surfaces: 7.1.1 Ferrous Metal: All structural steel, miscellaneous iron, hollow metal doors and frames, roof structures, exposed roof piping: 1 coat P & L Effecto Rust Inhibiting Primer 2 coats P & L Effecto Enamel 7.1.2 Galvanized Metal: 1 coat P & L Galvanized Metal Latex Primer 2 coats P & L Effecto Enamel 7.1.3 Aluminum - All aluminum copings, gutters, downspouts & scuppers (if required) to be factory finish to match adjacent finish. All remaining aluminum surfaces: 1 coat P & L Effecto Rust Inhibiting Primer 2 coats P & L Vapex House Paint 7.1.4 Concrete - All cast -in -place or pre -cast concrete or stucco surfaces: 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' PAINTING `SECTION 9H-4 2 coats P & L Vapex House Paint 7.1.5 Masonry - Concrete block: 7.1.5.2 See Alternates, Division 1, for Lightweight Block Finishes. 7.1.5.3 See Alternates, Division 1. 7.1.6 Masonry - Exposed Parapet above roof flashing: Series 55 Tneme -crete by Tnemec Company, Inc. Apply a two -coat film of minimum 14.5 wet mils thickness each in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the substrate to be covered. 7.1.7 Exterior Insulation and Finish System: 1 coat ICI Devoe TRU - Glaze 4030 Epoxy Primer 2 coats ICI Devoe Devthane 378 "Semi - Gloss" Aliphatic Urethane (Toys "R" Us Blue - TRU Only) (Snowflake White - BRU Only) (Bright White • KRU Only) 7.2 Interior Surfaces: 7.2.1 All drywall surfaces, except where graphics are called for or where ceramic tile or vinyl wall covering is applied to: 1 coat P & L Supreme #4 2 coats P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.2 All concrete block surfaces scheduled to be painted except where epoxy paint or graphics are called for: 1 coat P & L Primafil 1 coat P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.3 Graphics - on exposed block: 1 coat P & L Primafil 2 coats P & L Latex Enamel - Accolade Interior Semi - Gloss. 7.2.4 Graphics - on drywall: 1 coat P & L Supreme #4 2 coats P & L Latex Enamel - Accolade Interior Semi. Gloss. 7.2.5 Graphics • on wood: 1 coat P & L Supreme #11 2 coats P & L Latex Enamel - Accolade Interior Semi - Gloss. 7.2.6 Wood or Hardboard (painted) - all exposed woodwork to be painted, except where noted to be stained: 1 coat P & L Supreme #11 2 coats P & L Cellu •Tone Enamel 7.2.7 Wood - all exposed, unpainted wood, noted to have clear finish; 1 coat P & L Tonetic Wood Stain 1 coat P & L Filler Sealer 2 coats P & L Varmor Clear Finish 7.2.8 Ferrous Metal - all doors, frames, handrails and other ferrous metal, except where noted: 1 coat P & L Supreme #9 2 coats P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel REMODEL PROTOTYPE 7.1.5.1 Normal weight concrete block: See Section 91 'Special Coatings' for Elastomeric coating 7.2.9 Other Ferrous Metal (sprayed) - all structural steel, including bar joists. beams, and decking, except as listed in 7.2.15: (Refer to schedule on drawings) 2 coats P & L Pro-Hide Dry Fall -Out Spray Coating Flat (2.5 mill thickness minimum per coating) 7.2.10 Miscellaneous Metal - all piping, machinery and other ferrous metal not covered in other sections: 1 coat P & L Supreme #9 1 coat P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.11 Concrete Floors - All floors without floor coverings: 2 coats EPMAR Sta - Crete Series 1600 Clear, 5 mils total dry film thickness. 7.2.12 Concrete Floors - All floors without floor coverings with striping: 2 coats P & L Effecto Enamel, OSHA Yellow (striping only). 2 coats EPMAR Sta - Crete Series 1600 Clear, 5 mils total dry film thickness. 7.2.13 All concrete block surfaces scheduled for epoxy paint: 1 coat P & L Primafil 2 coats P & L Tech -Gard Epoxy Coating Gloss 7.2.14 Pnme Coats - Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished but has not been prime coated by others. 7.2.15 Exposed columns at interior face of exterior curtainwall storefront: finish by Sherwin Williams, Industrial and Marine Coatings •Silver- Brite' aluminum paint. Primer (if required by manufacturer), 2 coats of 1.0 - 1.5 mil. dit/ct., brush or spray application, spread and drying rates all per Sherwin Williams manufacturers specification bulletins (1. 800.321. 8194). 8. WORKMANSHIP 8.1 Painting materials shall be applied by skilled mechanics well versed in the several branches of the work. Each painting operation shall be performed in the Owner's Representative opinion in accordance with the best practices which are consistent with the surfaces being finished and the types of materials being applied. Painting materials shall be free of skins, lumps or any foreign matter and the solids shall be kept well stirred in the vehicle of any such material while being applied. 8.2 Painting materials shall be evenly and smoothly spread or flowed on and shall be free of runs, drips, sags, crawling, brush marks and clogging of angles. No successive coats of painting materials shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry and hard. Wood and metal surfaces with varnish or enamel finish shall be sanded between coats to produce even, smooth surfaces. 8.3 Each painting material shall be stirred, blended, tinted, thinned and /or applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Each coat of paint shall be a different tint from that of the preceding coat. Each final coat of the painting shall be the exact shade and texture as represented by the sample 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' PAINTING 'SECTION 9H -5 previously selected and approved by the Project Manager. Where two coat work is specified, the first coat shall be tinted toward the final color. 8.4 Unless otherwise specified, materials for succeeding coats on any one surface shall be the products of the same manufacturer who furnished the first prime - sealer coat or undercoat for that particular surface, except when metal primers are used as specified under other Sections of the specifications. 8.5 An ambient temperature of not less than 50 degrees F. shall be obtained in all spaces or locations where work required under this specification is in progress, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager. 8.6 Exterior painting shall not be done during any period of high humidity which would prevent the attainment of satisfactory results from any painting operation. 8.7 Coat shall be thoroughly dry before succeeding coats are applied. Allow a minimum of 24 hours between coats on any surface, unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. 8.8 Stains shall be applied freely with a soft hair brush and the excess wiped off. The operation shall be repeated to prevent blotching and to produce uniformity throughout. 8.9 Each coat of varnish, except the last shall be rubbed with steel wool, after drying. The last coat shall be rubbed with pumice stone and oil to produce a smooth, satin finish. 8.10 The number of coats herein specified shall be in addition to any priming or other coats specified under the various Sections. Painted surfaces shall receive at least one (1) priming coat and two (2) finishing coats, unless otherwise specified. 8.11 Hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates and the like shall be removed before painting and afterward replaced. 8.12 In the painting of movable or operating parts, no paint shall be applied to sliding contacts and the like, where the bare material is necessary for proper operation. Paint applied to such surfaces shall be removed. 8.13 Access doors, plates, panel boxes, conduits and the like shall be painted in with the adjoining surfaces on which they occur, using the same kind of paint, number of coats, color and finish. In spaces where adjoining surfaces do not receive paint the work shall be painted the same as similar work in painted spaces and of color directed. 8.14 Mechanical work shall not be painted while materials contain heat. They shall remain unheated until after the final coat has thoroughly dried. 8.15 No interior painting shall be done until the building is thoroughly dried out and all conditions are suitable to produce satisfactory results, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 8.16 Provide and use a sufficient number of drop cloths and exercise care to protect finished surfaces of floors and other work, and immediately remove spatter, stains and droppings from such surfaces. Particular care shall be taken when painting above wainscots and other finished surfaces, furnishings, equipment and the like. 8.17 Wood trim shall be back primed before installation. 8.18 Remove doors to paint tops and bottoms. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 8.19 Materials shall be thoroughly mixed and strained before using. Addition of thinners such as linseed oil, turpentine and the like shall be added to ready -mixed materials only in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. If no printed instructions appear on the container, the contractor shall obtain this information in writing from the manufacturer. A copy of these printed instructions shall also be transmitted to the Project Manager. 8.20 Materials used to prepare surfaces and apply clear epoxy sealer on concrete floors where scheduled, shall be mixed, water- thinned and applied in strict accordance with sealer manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. 9. PROTECTION AND CLEANING 9.1 Work under this Section shall not check, crack, peel, discolor or have other defects due to improper materials or workmanship, due to improper preparation of the surfaces, or due to the painting, varnishing, or surfaces which were not in proper condition to receive paint, varnish or other painter's materials, and such unsatisfactory work shall be refinished at no additional cost to the Owner. 9.2 The contractor shall, when so directed, retouch where necessary, restore where damaged or defective, and clean off paint spots from floors, walls, finished hardware, glass and other surfaces not scheduled to receive paint, and shall leave painted surfaces clean and in a satisfactory condition. 9.3 Upon completion of work, surplus materials, empty packages and containers and debris shall be removed from the site by legal means. 9.4 Acceptance at final inspection will be governed by body finishes exhibited and the contractor shall apply additional costs as required to produce proper finish and coverage in accordance with the approved samples. At acceptance. the paint and varnish finished work shall be in a neat, sound and undamaged condition. 9,5 Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned at completion and before acceptance of work. 9.6 This contractor shall protect his work and the work of other trades against damage or injury by his employees or by the materials, tools and equipment used in connection with the painting. Work that is damaged as the result of the painting operations, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 9.7 When Owner's personnel take over store for fixturing, Contractor to move all paint materials and equipment to a location outside of store. No storage of paint or painting equipment will be allowed in the store. 9.8 Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. 9.9 At the completion of work of other trades, touch -up, and restore all damaged or deface painted surfaces. -END OF SECTION- 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' SPECIAL COATINGS 'SECTION 9I -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SUMMARY 2.1 Section Includes: 2.1.1 Cementitious waterproofing coat of exterior CMU (painted). 2.1.2 Decorative acrylic finish coat of exterior CMU (painted). 2.2 Related Sections: 2.2.1 Division 1 - Alternates 2.2.2 Section 4A - Unit Masonry Work. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Applicator Qualifications: Must be approved by manufacturer in writing and have manufacturer's authorization to offer specified warranty. 3.2 Field Sample: 3.2.1 Apply masonry weatherproofing system to field sample required by Section 4A. 3.2.2 Reflect proposed color, texture and workmanship. 3.2.3 Obtain acceptance of completed panel from Project Manager before beginning work. 3.2.4 Retain accepted panel during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Do not alter, destroy or move panel until work is completed. 3.3 Coatings, shall be impenetrable to Wind Driven Rain up to 120 mph for 8 hours. Products or systems shall meet Federal Specifications TOT- P0035, para 3.4 10 for cement based coatings or TOT -C -5558. para 4.45 for polymer based coatings. 3.4 All products will adhere to properly prepared, approved substrates and will resist the effect of weathering and shall have passed ASTM G 26-90 specification at 5,000 hours Accelerated Weathering in Atlas (Xenon Arc) Weathermeter, Type B, Coatings which will not chip, crack, peel flake or fade. 4. PROJECT CONDITIONS 4.1 Environmental Requirements: 4.1.1 Do not apply on frozen or frost -filled surfaces. 4.1.2 Do not apply if temperature is below 40 degrees F. or expected to fall below 40 degrees within 24 hours. 4.1.3 Protect material from freezing. 4.1.4 Protect from precipitation for 24 hours after application. 4.1.5 The following conditions may require dampening the surface prior to and during application: 4.1.5.1 Wind- caused rapid drying of surface. 4.1.5.2 Excessive surface temperature. 4.1.5.3 Excessive air temperature. 4.1.5.4 Direct Sun. 4.1.5.5 Low humidity. 5. WARRANTY 5.1 Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty form for coating system products, including affirmation of coating system inspection by manufacturer required by warranty provision. Approval by manufacturer for warranty is required prior to system application. Submit manufacturer's "Intent To Warranty Form" prior to start of coating system application. Submit "Application Job Records Form" required by manufacturer after completed installation. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. 5.1.1 Beneficiary: Issue warranty in legal name of project Owner. 5.1.2 Warranty Period: 5 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. 5.1.3 Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine acceptability of warranty documents. 5.1.4 Function: Manufacturer's warranty for labor and material warranting bond, weather and waterproof above grade function. 6. PRE - APPLICATION MEETING 6.1 Contractor shall arrange meeting no less than seven days prior to staring work. 6.2 Attendance shall be mandatory for: 6.2.1 Contractor. 6.2.2 Coating Subcontractor. 6.2.3 Owner's Representative. 6.2.4 Coating Manufacturer Representative /Distributor 6.3 Agenda: 6.3.1 Substrate condition. 6.3.2 Sequence and method of application of coating system. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' SPECIAL COATINGS 'SECTION 91 -2 7. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 7.1 All elastomeric wall coating materials shall comply with current Federal and State VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) requirements. 7.2 Do not proceed with application of materials when temperature, humidity, and other environmental conditions necessary for the successful application of individual products are not within allowable limits. PART 2: PRODUCTS 8. MANUFACTURER/PRODUCT 8.1 This specification written for products of Thoro System Products, Inc. 8.1.1 Cementitious Blockfiller: Cementitious, Acrylic - Modified Waterproofing Blockfiller Super Ouickseal -White with Thorosheen, by Thoro System Products. Inc. 8.1.2 Decorative Acrylic Coating: Thorocoat - Smooth by Thoro Systems Products, Inc. White to match Pratt & Lambert Snoflake, grey to match P&L Carolina Gull or as indicated or as selected on drawings. 8.2 TEC -Top elastomeric coating system by Rainguard Products Company will be acceptable when all other requirements of this specification, including warranty, are met. 9. MIXING 9.1 Mix in strict accord with printed instructions of manufacturer. Mechanical mixers of an approved type shall be used for mixing all products. Frozen, caked or lumped materials shall not be used. Mechanical mixers and containers shall be cleaned after mixing each batch; kept free of Super Ouickseal from previous mixes. 9.2 One 50 lb. container Super Ouickseal shall be mixed with 12 to 16 quarts of clean, potable water until a creamy batter consistency is achieved, with uniform color. Hot temperatures and low humidity will require maximum amount of clean, potable water to achieve the creamy consistency. 9.3 Let material set for five to fifteen minutes to soak, then temper back by adding one (1) gallon of Thorosheen -Tint Base. PART 3: EXECUTION 10. EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 10.1 Allow 28 days after completion of masonry work for curing. 10.2 Surfaces to receive Cementitious Blockfiller hall be free of defects such as concrete droppings, laitance, dirt, dust, grease, form release treatments, efflorescence, curing compounds, paint and any other foreign material. 10.2.1 Beginning of application means acceptance of substrate. 11. SCAFFOLDING Provide scaffolding and use as necessary to ensure all exposed surfaces of smooth -face and split -face block and all mortar joints are completely covered with primer and REMODEL PROTOTYPE finish coats to insure the waterproofing integrity of the wall and so as to provide the specified warranty. 12. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 12.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 13. APPLICATION 13.1 Cementitious Blockfiller 13.1.1 Dampen wall prior to and during application. Change of color of masonry unit should be noted. Do not soak wall excessively or allow water to accumulate on the surface. 13.1.2 Apply brush or plaster type sprayer coat to Sementitious Blockfiller to the surface of flat and split -faced masonry units at the approximate rate of 150 square feet per gallon. 13.1.2.1 Spray apply at 35-40 PSI air pressure at spray nozzle, using a 3116" or 1/4" spray orifice. 13.1.3 Using a wet clean soft nylon bristled brush or broom, work the fill coat in a horizontal direction to fill pores. Lay off fill coat in a vertical direction. Do not allow brush or broom to become loaded with material. 13.1.3.1 Backroll surface with 3/4" nap roller using downward finish strokes to remove any brush strokes. Do not let material set or harden before backrolling. 13.1.4 Finish from breakpoint to breakpoint. Do not stop in middle of wall. 13.1.5 If hot, dry and windy conditions exist, let fill coat set for 24 hours, cure by fog spraying on second day if conditions are hot dry or windy. 13.2 Decorative Acrylic Coating 13.2.1 Stir coating thoroughly with mechanical mixer to assure complete, uniform dispersion throughout. 13.2.2 In extremely hot dry weather, slight damping of the surface with clean, potable water is acceptable prior to applying coating. 13.2.3.1 Back roll brushed or spray material; cross roll roller applied material. 13.2.3.2 Finish material so that brush and roller strokes are in one direction. 14. INSPECTION & SCHEDULE. 14.1 Contractor shall maintain schedule of application of Cementitious Blockfiller and finish coat in field office for Owner inspection. See application job record (sample) at the end of this section. Copy of application job record to be submitted as part of as -built set. 01/03/00 T YPE AND SQU LOCATI TEMP & QUANTITY ARE FOOT ON D ERATURE HUMIDITY WEATHER' M COM ON ATE 8:00 3:00 ATERIAL PLETED BUILDI AM PM A NG" PPLIED DIVISION 9' SPECIAL COATINGS *SECTION 91 -3 14.2 Finish coat must be pinhole free. -END OF SECTION - APPLICATION JOB RECORD DAILY LOG PROJECT NAME PROJECT LOCATION APPLICATOR FIRM RECORDED REMODEL PROTOTYPE BY - S (SUNNY), PC (PARTLY CLOUDY), C (CLOUDY), F (FOG), R (RAIN), T (THUNDERSTORM), SL (SLEET OR ICE), SN (SNOW). " - FIRST FLOOR FRONT, EAST PENTHOUSE, ETC. 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' SPECIAL COATINGS *SECTION 91 -3 14.2 Finish coat must be pinhole free. -END OF SECTION - APPLICATION JOB RECORD DAILY LOG PROJECT NAME PROJECT LOCATION APPLICATOR FIRM RECORDED REMODEL PROTOTYPE BY - S (SUNNY), PC (PARTLY CLOUDY), C (CLOUDY), F (FOG), R (RAIN), T (THUNDERSTORM), SL (SLEET OR ICE), SN (SNOW). " - FIRST FLOOR FRONT, EAST PENTHOUSE, ETC. 01/03/00 DIVISION 9' PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including general supplementary an special conditions, applicable Division 0 sections and Division 1 sections apply to this section. 2. SCOPE 2.1 This specification covers preparation of surfaces, performance and completion of repainting of all surfaces as specified herein. Provide total cost per this section separately from the items as specified in Specification Section 9H. 2.2 Complete removal of all "Soft Joint material from all perimeter joints prior to painting — application of new backer rod and sealant at perimeter joints, after panels are painted. 2.3 The Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labor, tools, materials, equipment, scaffolding and/or other structure, and supervision required for the transportation, unloading, storage and application of the pint and associated products covered by this specification. 2.4 All work shall be done in strict accordance with this specification, the painting package, including manufacturers printed instructions. 2.5 The Contractor will obtain, at its own expense, all permits, licenses and inspections and shall comply with all laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations promulgated by authorities having jurisdiction which may bear on the work. This compliance will include Federal Public Law 91.596 more commonly known as the - Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970." 2.6 Wherever the word "Owner" occurs in this specification, it shall apply to the authorized 'Toys "R" Us" representative of this project. Wherever the word "Contractor" occurs in this specification, it shall apply to the contractor performing any part of, or all of this work. 2.7 The Store will remain open during the project. The contractor will schedule work so as not to interfere with store operations. When work is required around the entrance area the contractor will provide signage directing customers to the alternate entrance. The Contractor will also cordon off areas adjacent to work to protect customers and surrounding properties from equipment and materials being used. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Include on the label or containers: 3.1.1 Manufacturer's Name 3.1.2 Product name and number 3.1.3 Color 3.1.4 Batch Number 3.2 Field Quality Control: 3.2.1 Request review of first finished item or area. 3.2.2 Use the first acceptable item or area as the project standard for the rest of the work. REMODEL PROTOTYPE MAI, NTRANCE COMPREHENSIVE REPAIN YSTEM 'SECTION 9K -1 3.2.3 Each item or area used as a project standard shall be no smaller than (1) section of panel. Minimum acceptable finish standard will be that found on the 6 "x6" Sample panel. 3.2.4 Manufacturers representative shall be available to advise applicator on proper application techniques and procedures. 3.3 Resolution of Conflicts: 3.3.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Owner to arrange a Pre - Construction meeting between the painting contractor, the paint manufacturer and the Owner. All aspects of surface preparation, application and coating systems as covered by this specification will be reviewed at this meeting. 3.3.2 Clarification shall be requested promptly from the Owner when instructions are lacking, conflicts occur in the specification, or the procedure seems improper or inappropriate for any reason. 3.3.3 Copies of all manufacturers instructions and recommendations shall be furnished to the Owner by the Painting Contractor. 3.4 Surface Preparation: 3.4.1 SSPC -SP 1 Solvent Cleaning 3.4.2 SSPC -SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning 3.4.3 SSPC -SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning 4. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING 4.1 Deliver materials in sealed containers with manufacturer's label intact. 4.2 Storage of materials 4.2.1 Store materials in protected area at a temperature between 40 F. and 110 F. 4.2.2 Open and mix materials in storage area. 5. JOB CONDITIONS 5.1 Apply coating only under the following prevailing environmental conditions. 5.1.1 Air and surface temperature are not below 50 F and not above 110 F. 5.1.2 Relative humidity is not higher than 85% and the surface temperature is at least 5 F above the dew point. 5.1.3 The atmosphere is relatively free of airborne dust. 5.1.4 Wind velocity is under 5 mph for exterior spray painting. 5.2 Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not to be painted. 6. SAFETY 6.1 Current manufacturer's product data sheets as well as MSDS sheets will be available to your employees at the job site and from the Toys "R" Us Store Manager. These are considered working documents, be familiar with them. 6.2 Make sure your employees are aware of any hazard peculiar to the job site, as well as location of first aid stations, emergency phone numbers and evacuation 08/16/00 DIVISION 9' MAIN ENTF ;CE COMPREHENSIVE REPAINT SYS" 'SECTION 9K -2 routes. 6.3 Report to a responsible person such as Maintenance Coordinator, Store Manager, etc., any condition which may pose a threat to anyone's health welfare. 6.4 Keep your own working area clean and safe. 6.5 Obey all job site rules and regulations. PART 2: PRODUCTS 7. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 7.1 Products specified are manufactured by Induron Coatings, Inc., Birmingham, Alabama (804) 754 -2149 or (804) 512 - 4429 (NO SUBSTITUTION). 7.2 Approved materials: 7.2.1 Induron Aquanaut Primer (at metal roof /overhang, and wood /fiberglass battens). 7.2 .2 Induron AC402 masonry sealer (at CMU and cast concrete). 7.2.3 Induron E Bond 100 Epoxy Primer (at aluminum storefront and entrance doors). 7.2.4 Induron Aquanaut Finish Gloss or Semi - Gloss. 7.2.5 Induron AC403 Elastomeric Coating. 7.2.6 Induron Indurethane Gloss Enamel. 7.2.7 Caulking, Down Corning 795 or GE Seal Proof. PART 3: PRE -WORK INSPECTION 8. GENERAL 8.1 Examine surfaces to be coated and report any conditions that would adversely affect the appearance or performance of the coating system and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition by the preparatory work. 8.2 Do not proceed with surface preparation and application until the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is given by the Owner. PART 4: SURFACE PREPARATION 9. GENERAL 9.1 All surface preparation, coating and painting shall conform to applicable standards of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). and the manufacturers printed instructions. materials applied prior to approval of the surface by the Owner shall be removed and reapplied to the satisfaction of the Owner at the expense of the Contractor. 9.2 All work shall be performed by skilled craftsmen qualified to perform the required work in a manner comparable with the best standard of practice. Continuity of personnel shall be maintained and transfers of key personnel shall be coordinated with the owner. 9.3 The Contractor shall provide a supervisor at the work site during all phases of the project. The supervisor shall have the authority to sign change orders, coordinate work and make decisions pertaining to the fulfillment of the contract. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 9.4 Coating and painting systems include surface preparation, prime coating and finish coatings. Work which does not conform to these specification is subject to rejection by the Owner. 9.5 Dust, dirt, oil, grease or any foreign matter that will effect the adhesion or durability of the finish must be removed by power washing with approved cleaning solvent and wiped dry with clean rags as per SSPC -SP2. For the anodized aluminum doors and storefront, solvent clean surface to remove any surface contamination and abrade surface with fine grit sandpaper to impart a surface profile to facilitate mechanical adhesion. 9.6 Application of the first coat shall follow immediately after surface preparation and cleaning and within an eight -hour working day. Any cleaned areas not receiving first coat within an eight -hour period shall be re- cleaned prior to application of the first coat. 9.7 Remove all caulking/backer rod at time of surface preparation and reinstall after all coatings are applied. 10. SURFACE PREPARATION 10.1 General 10.1.1 Dislodge dirt, plaster nibs, mortar spatter and other dry materials by scraping or brushing. Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, or blowing with high - pressure air. Remove oil, wax and grease by scraping off heavy deposits and cleaning with mineral spirits or a hot trisodium phosphate solution followed by a water rinse. Verify that surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease or other contaminates. All Pre Finished Metal panels are to be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP -2 to remove all surface contamination and are to be mechanically abraded (sanded) over 100% of the surface to be coated. 10.2 Ferrous and Non - Ferrous Metals: 10.2.1 Solvent Cleaning (SSPC -SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil and other contaminants by use of solvents, emulsions. cleaning compounds, power washing, steam cleaning or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or cleaning action. 10.2.2 Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC -SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by hand chipping, scrapping, sanding and wire brushing. 10.2.3 Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC -SP 3): Removal of loose rust, loose mil scale and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by power wire brushing, , power impact tools or power sanders. 11. APPLICATION 11.1 Mix and thin materials in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. 11.2 Apply materials at specified film thickness by methods recommended by the manufacturer. For roller application, care is to be taken to lay off the material in the same direction so that the finish is uniform and has minimal evidence of an application pattern 08/16/00 DIVISION 9' MAI, NTRANCE COMPREHENSIVE REPAIN YSTEM •SECTION 9K -3 11.3 Allow each coat to dry as per manufacturer's guidelines prior to applying additional coatings. 11.4 Cut in edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials or colors. 11.5 Make all coats smooth, uniform in color, and free of runs, bursh marks, laps, runs, dry spray, over spray and skipped or missed areas. Finish shall have a uniform surface. 11.6 Environmental conditions must comply with the recommended instructions of the manufacturer and be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 11.7 Properly mixed and thinned materials shall be applied by consulting with the Manufacture for recommended thinning information. 12. INSPECTION 12.1 Touch up and repair work that is not acceptable to the owner and request final acceptance. 13. CJ.EANING 13.1 Remove paints spatters and overspray from glass and adjoining surfaces. 13.2 Repair any damage to coatings or surfaces caused by cleaning operations. 13.3 Removed debris from job site and leave storage area clean 14. OATING SCHEDUL 14.1 Existing metal roof /overhang 14.1.1 ;aurface Prep: Power wash per SSPC SP -1 and hand tool clean per SSPC SP -2. 14.1.2 First coat: Induron Aquanaut Primer 11.5 -3.0 mils OFT. 14.1.3 Second Coat: Induron Aquanaut Finish at 1.5 -3.0 mils DFT. 14.1.4 Third Coat: Induron Aquanaut Gloss Finish at 1.5-3.0 mils OFT. 14.1.5 Total dry film thickness: 4.5 -9.0 mils DFT. 14.2 Existing battan surfaces plastic/wood. 14.2.1 Surface Prep.: Power wash per SSPC SP -1. 14.2.2 First Coat: lnduron Aquanaut primer at 1.5 -3.0 mil OFT. 14.2.3 Second Coat: Induron Aquanaut Semi -gloss finish at1.5 -3.0 mil OFT. 14.2.4 Total dry film thickness: 3.0 -6.0 mils OFT. 14.3 Existing CMU and cast concrete. 14.3.1 Surface Prep.: Powerwash per SSPC SP -1. 14.3.2 First Coat: Induron AC402 masonry sealer at .5 mils DFT. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 14.3.3 Second Coat: Induron AC4 elastomeric coating 4.0- 12.0 mils DFT. 14.3.4 Third Coat: Induron AC403 elastomeric coating 4.0- 12.0 mils DFT. 14.3.5 Total dry film thickness: 8.5 -24.5 mils DFT. 14.4 Existing anodized aluminum doors and storefront. 14.4.1 fine facilitate 14.4.2 Surface Prep.: Solven clean anodized serface to remove any contamination and abate surface with grit sand paper to impart a surface profile to mechanical adhesion. First coat; lnduron E Bond 100% epoxy primer at 1.0- 2.0 mils DFT. 14.4.3 Second coat: Induron Indurethane 5500 Gloss Finish at 1.5 -2.5 mils DFT. 14.4.4 Total dry film thickness; 2.5 -4.5 mils OFT. - END OF SECTION -- 08/16/00 DIVISION 9' SPECIA. 'EPAINT FOR STOREFRONTS AND PC ALS 'SECTION 9L -1 THIS PRODUCT IS A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION WITH PPG, KEELER & LONG, MEGAFLON COATINGS, 856 ECHO LAKE ROAD, WATERTOWN, CT 06795, CONTACT MIKE BOYD, PHONE: (800) 876- 2035 EXT.161. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 Drawings and provisions of the Contact, including general supplementary and special conditions, applicable Division 0 sections and Division 1 sections apply to this section. 2. SCOPE 2.1 This specification covers preparation of surfaces, performance and completion of repainting of all surfaces as specified herein. Provide total cost per this section separately from the items as specified in Specification Section 9H. 2.2 Complete removal of all 'Soft Joint" material from all perimeter joints prior to painting — application of new backer rod and sealant at perimeter joints. 2.3 The Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labor, tools, materials, equipment, scaffolding and /or other structure, and supervision required for the transportation, unloading storage and application of the paint and associated products covered by this specification. 2.4 All work shall be done in strict accordance with this specification, the painting package, including manufacturers printed instructions. 2.5 The Contractor will obtain, at its own expense, all permits. licenses and inspections and shall comply with all laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations promulgated by authorities having jurisdiction which may bear on the work. This compliance will include Federal Public law 91 -896 more commonly known as the "Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970." 2.6 Whenever the word "Owner" occurs in the specification, it shall apply to the authorized Toys "R" Us representative of this project. Wherever the word "Contractor" occurs in this specification, it shall apply to the contractor performing any part of, or all of this work. 2.7 The Store will remain open during the project. The contractor will schedule work so as not to interfere with store operations. When work is required around the entrance area the contractor will provide signage directing customers to the alternate entrance. The Contractor will also cordon off areas adjacent to work to protect customers and surrounding properties from equipment and materials being used. If required, construction tunnels, tenting, etc. will be provided by Contractor. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 2.8 The Contractor shall provide tenting, masking, and protection of all existing construction adjacent to or in the vicinity of the repainted surface. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Include on the label or containers: 3.1.1 Manufacturer's Name 3.1.2 Product name and number 3.1.3 Color 3.1.4 Batch Number 3.2 Field Quality Control: 3.2.1 Request review of first finished item or area. 3.2.2 Use the first acceptable item or area as the project standard for the rest of the work. 3.2.3 Each item or area used as a project standard shall be no smaller than (1) section of panel. Minimum acceptable finish standard will be that found on the 6'4" sample panel. 3.2.4 Manufacturers representative shall be available to advise applicator on proper application techniques and procedures. 3.3 Resolution of Conflicts: 3.3.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Owner to arrange a Pre- Construction meeting between the painting contractor, the paint manufacturer and the Owner. All aspects of surface preparation, application and coating systems as covered by this specification will be reviewed at this meeting. 3.3.2 Clarification shall be requested promptly from the Owner when instructions are lacking, conflicts occur In the specification, or the procedure seems improper or inappropriate for any reason. 3.3.3 Copies of all manufacturers instructions and recommendations shall be furnished to the Owner by the Painting Contractor. 3.4 Surface Preparation: 3.4.1 SSPC -SP 1 Solvent Cleaning 3.4.2 SSPC -SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning 3.4.3 SSPC -SP 3 Power tool Cleaning 4. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING 4.1 Deliver materials in sealed containers with 02/02/01 DIVISION 9' SPECI. '1EPAINT FOR STOREFRONTS AND P rALS `SECTION 9L -2 Manufacturer's label intact. 4.2 Storage of materials 4.2.1 Store materials in protected area at a temperature between 40 F. and 110 F. 4.2.2 Open and mix materials in storage area. 5. JOB CONDITIONS 5.1 Apply coating only under the following prevailing environmental conditions. 5.1.1 Air and surface temperature are not below 50 F. and not above 90 F. 5.1.2 Relative humidity is not higher than 85% and the surface temperature is at least 5 F. above the dew point. 5.1.3 The atmosphere is relatively free of airborne dust. 5.1.4 Wind velocity is under 5 mph for exterior spray painting. 5.2 Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not to be painted. 6. $AF$TY 6.1 Current manufacturer's product data sheets as well as MSDS sheets will be available to your employees at the job site and from the Toys 'R" Us Store Manager. These are considered working documents, be familiar with them. 6.2 Make sure your employees are aware of any hazard peculiar to the job site, as well as location of first aid stations, emergency phone numbers and evacuation routes. 6.3 Report to a responsible person such as Maintenance Coordinator, Store Manager, etc., any condition which may pose a threat to anyone's health welfare. 6.4 Keep your own working area clean and sate. 6.5 Obey all job site rules and regulations. PART 2: PRODUCTS 7. ACCEPTAI3,4,E MANUFACTURERS & CONTRACTORS 7.1 Products specified are manufactured by PPG, Keeler & Long, 856 Echo Lake Drive, Watertown, PA 06795, Phone: (800) 274 -6701, Megaflon MS- Series Coatings. (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) 7.2 Approved materials: REMODEL PROTOTYPE 7.2.1 UMS- Series Megaflon (part A and part B) Spray Coatings. 7.2.2 Megaflon UMS -1000 -Clear fluorepolymer top coat. (Per Manufacturers requirements, only use in areas where high UV resistance is recommended) 7.2.3 Color: PPG Code UMS6038030 "Shell Yellow: ", 30% gloss. 7.2.4 Compatible Undercoats: 7.2.4.1 No. 7840 Vinyl Butgral Wash Primer 7.2.4.2 No. 3200 Koler -Poxy Primer 7.2.5 Powerwash Miracham 100 or Trisodium Phosphate. 7.2.6 Thinner: MS210 Solvent. 7.3 Only Megaflon approved application contractors will be acceptable. (See attached list of current approve list) PART 3: PRE -WORK INSPECTION 8. GENERAL 8.1 Examine surfaces to be coated and report any conditions that would adversely affect the appearance or performance of the coating system and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition by the preparatory work. 8.2 Do not proceed with surface preparation and application until the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is given by the Owner. PART 4: SURFACE PREPARATION 9. GENERAL 9.1 All surface preparation, coating and painting shall conform to applicable standards of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), and the manufacturers printed instructions. Materials applied prior to approval of the surface by the Owner shall be removed and reapplied to the satisfaction of the Owner at the expense of the contractor. 9.2 All work shall be performed by skilled craftsmen qualified to perform the required work in a manner comparable with the best standard of practice. Continuity of personnel shall be maintained and transfers of key personnel shall be coordinated with the owner. 9.3 The Contractor shall provide a supervisor at the work site during all phases of the project. The supervisor shall have the authority to sign change orders, coordinate work and make decisions 02/02/01 DIVISION 9' SPECIE :EPAINT FOR STOREFRONTS AND PC ALS *SECTION 9L -3 pertaining to the fulfillment of the contract. 9.4 Coating and painting systems include surface preparation, prime coating and finish coatings. Work which does not conform to these specifications is subject to rejection by the Owner. 9.5 Dust, dirt, oil, greases or any foreign matter that will effect the adhesion or durability of the finish must be removed by power washing with Mirachem 100 cleaner or Trisodium Phosphate and wiped dry with clean rags as per SSPC -SP2. For the anodized aluminum doors, storefront and portal, solvent clean surface to remove any surface contamination and abrade surface with 420 grit sandpaper or Scotch Brite pad or equal, to impart a surface profile to facilitate mechanical adhesion. Solvent wipe substrate to remove dust and residue contamination. 9.6 Application of the first coat shall follow immediately after surface preparation and cleaning and within an eight -hour working day. Any cleaned areas not receiving first coat within an eight -hour period shall be re- cleaned prior to application of the first coat. 9.7 Remove all caulking /backer rod at time of surface preparation and reinstall after all coatings are applied. 10. URFACE PREPARATION( 10.1 General 10.1.1 Dislodge dirt, plaster nibs, mortar spatter and other dry materials by scraping or brushing. Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, or blowing with high - pressure air. 10.1.2 Remove oil, wax and grease by scraping off heavy deposits and cleaning with mineral spirits or a hot trisodium phosphate solution followed by a water rinse. 10.1.3 Verify that surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease or other contaminates. 10.1.4 All Pre Finished Metal Portal panels are to be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP -2 to remove all surface contamination and are to be mechanically abraded (sanded) over 100% of the surface to be coated. Care should be taken to not aggressively abrade the surface. 10.2 Ferrous and Non - Ferrous Metals: 10.2.1 Solvent Cleaning (SSPC -SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soils and other contaminants by use of solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, power washing, steam cleaning or similar materials and methods which involve REMODEL PROTOTYPE 10.2.2 Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC -SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by hand chipping, scrapping, sanding and wire brushing. 10.2.3 Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC -SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mil scale and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by power wire brushing, power impact tools or power sanders. maintain a finely abraded surface per manufacturer's requirements. 11. APPLICATION 11.1 Mix UMS- Series Megaflon part B into part A in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. 11.2 Apply materials at specified film thickness by methods recommended by the manufacturer. For application, car is to be taken to lay off the material in the same direction so that the finish is uniform and has minimal evidence of an application pattern. 11.3 Allow each coat to dry as per manufacturer's guidelines prior to applying additional coatings. 11.4 Cut in edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials or colors. 11.5 Make all coats smooth, uniform in color, and free of runs, brush marks, laps, runs, dry spray, over spray and skipped or missed areas. Finish shall have a uniform surface. 11.6 Environmental conditions must comply with the recommended instructions of the manufacturer and be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 11.7 Properly mixed and thinned materials shall be applied by consulting with the Manufacturer for recommended thinning information. 12. INSPECTION 13. CLEANING a solvent or cleaning action. 12.1 Touch up and repair work that is not acceptable to the owner must be completed prior to request for final acceptance. 13.1 Remove paint spatters and over spray from glass and adjoining surfaces. Mask off all surfaces as required to minimize over spray. 13.2 Repair any damage to coatings or surfaces caused by cleaning operations. 13.3 Remove debris from job site and leave storage 02/02/01 DIVISION 9' SPECI 3EPAINT FOR STOREFRONTS AND P T'ALS 'SECTION 9L-4 area clean. 14. COATING SCHEDULE 14.1 Existing Aluminum Portal. 14.1.1 Surface Prep: Power wash with Mirachem 100 or Trisodium Phosphate. Lightly abrade substrate to remove gloss for adhesion with 420 grit sand paper. Solvent wipe substrate to remove residue. 14.1.2 Primary coat: Mix part B to part A per manufacturers requirements. Thin from 25- 45% per Keeler & Long requirements. See manufacturer's instructions for spray application requirements for: 14.1.2.1 Orifice size. 14.1.2.2 Atomizing Pressure (PSIG). 14.1.2.3 Fluid flow per minute. 14.1.2.4 Viscosity Zahn #2. 14.1.3 Finish coal; Apply one coat of Megaflon UMS- 1000 clear finish with desired gloss at 1.0.1.25 mils OFT. 14.2 Existing anodized aluminum doors and storefront. 14.2.1 Su pce Prep; solvent clean anodized surface to remove any contamination and abate surface with 420 girt sand paper to impart a surface profile to facilitate mechanical adhesion. 14.2.2 Prime coat: Similar to section 14.1.2. 14.2.3 Top coat; Similar to section 14.1.3 14.2.4 Total dry film thickness; 2.0.2.75 (verify with manufacturer). 15. WARRANTY 15.1 Provide copy of PPG Megaflon M3 warranty for 10 years for product replacement. -- END OF SECTION -- REMODEL PROTOTYPE 02/02/01 DIVISION 10' OWNER HAS ESTABLISHED A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION WITH KOROGUARD, INC. FOR CORNER GUARDS, COLUMN COVERS, WALL RAILS AND RUBBER BUMPERS. CONTRACTOR TO PURCHASE MATERIALS THROUGH THIS PROGRAM. KOROSEAL WALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS, MUNCY INDUSTRIAL PARK, SHAEDUCK ROAD, MUNCY, PA 17756, FOR NATIONAL SERVICE, CALL TONIA ROARK, TELEPHONE (800) 628.0449. FOR ACCOUNT MANAGEMENT ISSUES, CONTACT TOM KNIGHT TELEPHONE (570) 546.7522. ALL OTHER WALL PROTECTION MATERIALS ARE ALSO FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review 9nly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A". unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials and tools required for installation of wall protection work indicated on the drawings and herein specified. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS (Si"E INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST SHEET) 3.1 Following items are furnished and installed by Contractor: 3.1.1 Corner guard: Koroguard Thermoformed surface - mounted vinyl guard, .028" gauge P1 haircell texture, 43" and 72" high with continuous aluminum mounting plate and plastic end caps. Mount where indicated on drawings. See Material List on drawings. 3.1.2 Crash Rail: Koroguard Thermoformed, Series 800, Model C200 surface- mounted solid vinyl wall bumper. 8" high with continuous aluminum or vinyl mounting plates, vinyl end caps and preformed vinyl corners. Mount as indicated on the drawings. (TRU /KRU) 3.1.3 Column Cover: Acrylic covering to be Koroguard K -38 .040" thick .028 gauge P1 haircell texture. Refer to color on drawings. 3.1.4 Bumper Guard: Koroseal bumper system, with matching end caps. Mount as indicated on the drawings. REMODEL PROTOTYPE WALL & STOREFRONT PROTECTIC 'SECTION 10D -1 3.1.5 Wall guards: 1 -1/2" and 2" diameter half round bumpers manufactured by Koroseal. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. PREPARATION 4.1 Contractor to prepare all surfaces as required by manufacturers printed instructions. 5. INSTALLATION. ACRYLIC COVERING 5.1 Field installation of Koroguard to building surfaces will be accomplished either by overlay wrapping with solvent binder or thermo forming with heat joint (field or shop fabricated). 5.2 Contractor to verify with local Koroguard representative choice of methods based on maximized application for specific application condition. Note: Flush rivets or mechanical fasteners will not be allowed. 5.3 Only authorized materials and methods of installation will be allowed per manufacturers requirements. 6. INSTALLATION. VINYL CORNER GUARDSNVALl BUMPERS 6.1 Installation responsibility specified in Section 6A. PART 7. 1NITALLATION. CART RAILS 7.1 Install lengths as shown on drawings. 7.2 Field verify all existing conditions and report any conflicts to Owner prior to installation. 7.3 Pipe to be 915-3P (.062) polished stainless steel. 7.4 Secure flange plate to slab with 3- 516 -35, 5/16" Loxin shields. • END OF SECTION 04/06/00 DIVISION '10 PART 1 — GENERAL Babies R Us has entered into national account with Metro Fire. Contractor is to contact Tom Felipe at (201) 641- 1972 to order a prototype quantity of 18 #IPABC fire extinguisher units, if additional units are required, the contractor shall purchase equivalent units locally. Toys R Us extinguisher units are provided by general contractor per local authority requirements as per original contract. 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Division 1 apply to this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials and tools required for installation of portable fire extinguishers as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS 3.1 Portable fire extinguishers shall be of the dry chemical type for Class A, B. C fires, labeled and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Extinguishers shall be five (5) pound capacity, and shall be provided with wall mounting hardware and signs as may be required by local authority. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. INSTALLATION 4.1 Mount in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 4.2 Contractor shall be responsible for the provision and installation of all portable fire extinguishers as required by local Fire Marshall or other authority. As a minimum Contractor shall provide and install fifteen (15) portable fire extinguishers. Maximum travel distance to fire extinguisher is 75 feet. Owner's Representatives shall determine the location of portable fire extinguishers in the absence of specific requirements of local authority. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE ,.:�z n• v #4a >...a.. ,.n4 Itrt.:-7r_ r. •.. ; PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS *SECTION 10E -1 02/23/00 • DIVISION 15' BA . MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUII 1ENTS *SECTION 15A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. 1.1 GENERAL All mechanical work shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of this Section and all Sections of Division 1. 1.2 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products. Substitutions, and Alternates. 1.3 All piping work for mechanical and plumbing systems shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of Section 158. 1.4 All air distribution systems and accessories shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of Section 15E. 1.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.6 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.6.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.6.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ". unless stipulated otherwise. 1.7 2. 2.1 See Section 1J for list of Owner- supplied items. PROTECTION AND INSTALLATION All mechanical equipment and material;; stored on the site shall be suitably sheltered from the elements. All materials and items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces. All equipment shall be protected against dirt, water, and corrosive or mechanical damage, and theft. 2.2 All mechanical systems and equipment shall be stored, protected, installed, tested, adjusted, and started up in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and instructions. Each Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of any conflict between any requirement of the Contract Documents and the manufacturers' instructions and shall receive the Engineer's written instructions before proceeding with the work. Any work that does not comply with the manufacturers' instructions or such written instructions from the Engineer shall be corrected by the Contractor at no increase in the contract amount or additional cost to other trades. 2.3 All mechanical systems and equipment shall be installed to permit removal of coils, heat exchangers, fan shafts, fan wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves, drives, and all other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. The installations shall be arranged such that the removal can be accomplished without damage to the part removed and without damage to or disassembly of any other equipment, piping, device, or system. 2.4 AR anchor bolts, inserts, supports, and installation hardware shall be provided by the Contractor responsible for installing the respective equipment or system unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the location of all anchoring hardware, inserts, supports, and related accessories. 2.5 All open ends of pipes and equipment connections shall be capped or plugged (until final connections are made) to keep out dirt and other foreign materials. Caps and plugs shall be designed for the intended purpose. Plugs of rags, waste, insulation, or similar materials shall not be used for plugging. 2.6 Equipment and materials of the same general type shall, in as much as practical, be of the same manufacturer throughout the work for uniform appearance, operation, maintenance, and repair. 2.7 If the size of any piping, valves, devices, ductwork, or related accessories is not clearly evident on the Drawings, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with the work. 2.8 All V -belt, chain, coupling, gear, and similar rotating drives shall be equipped with a protective guard provided by the Contractor installing the equipment. Other than factory furnished guards, all guards shall be constructed of small pattern, flat expanded metal over a steel angle frame or rigid sheet metal guard securely bolted to the floor and /or equipment. Provide a tachometer hole at the motor shaft and driven equipment shaft for guards protecting field adjustable drives and all belt driven equipment. All motor couplings, such as with base mounted pumps, shall be provided with sheet metal coupling guards. All guards, other than factory finished guards, shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer and a final heavy coat of enamel to match the adjacent equipment. 2.9 All mechanical equipment shall be installed in a rigid and secure manner and shalt installed plumb, level, and square with the building, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. All piping connections to pumps and other equipment shall be Installed without strain, distortion, or excessive forces in the piping or on the equipment. 3. THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL WORK 3.1 General 3.1.1 The following specifications are the general requirements for thermal insulation for all mechanical systems. The specific Insulation requirements for systems and equipment shall be as specified in the respective Sections of Division 15. 3.1.2 Refer to Section 158 for the basic requirements governing the application of thermal insulation common to all piping systems. 3.1.3 Each contractor shall be responsible for the insulation on all work installed under his contract. If certain equipment is furnished by the Owner or others, but installed by the Contractor, the cost of the required insulation shall be included in the Contractor proposal unless otherwise noted on the drawing or specified herein. 3.1.4 Thermal insulation work shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by workmen regularly engaged in this type work. Insulation work may be done by an insulation subcontractor. The name of each insulation subcontractor shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to authorization of the work by the respective contractor. 3.2 Materials and Installation 3.2.1 All thermal and acoustical insulation materials shall be the products of Owens- Coming, Certain -teed Products CSG Group, or Johns - Manville, except as otherwise specified. 3.2.2 All insulation materials used shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E -84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding flame spread of 25, smoke developed of 50, and fuel contributed of 50. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 15" 3.2.3 Any treatment of facing or jackets applied to meet the above fire and smoke hazard ratings shall be permanent. The use of water soluble treatments is prohibited. 3.2.4 Insulation accessories, such as coatings, adhesives, mastics, tapes, and cloths shall have the same component fire and smoke hazard ratings as specified above. 3.2.5 All insulating materials or their containers shall be labeled to indicate that the fire and smoke hazard ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 3.2.6 All insulation shall be applied and installed in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's instructions using the materials, accessories, and methods required to meet the fire and smoke hazard ratings. 3.2.7 Insulation shall be applied on clean, dry surfaces after inspections, testing, and any other operations requiring exposed conditions are completed. 3.2.8 All cold surfaces shall be insulated using vapor barrier with permeability rating suitable for the intended service. Vapor barrier shall be continuous and unbroken with all joints properly sealed. 3.2.9 All existing insulation on existing piping, equipment, or systems that is damaged due to relocation of equipment, new piping or sheet metal connections. or other operations under the contract, shall be patched or replaced to match the existing insulation and finishes. New insulation work which is subsequently damaged due to negligence shall be repaired or replaced at the cost of the contractor causing the damage. 3.2.10 Pipe and externally applied duct insulation shall be continuous through wall and floor openings except at penetrations through fire rated construction and where penetrations are required to be firestopped. Duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers as required to avoid interference with the fire damper operation. Sleeves for insulated piping and externally insulated ductwork penetrating walls and floors shall be sized to accommodate the specified insulation thickness except where insulation must be interrupted as specified above. 4. LAYOUT AND PLANNING 4.1 Contractor shall be responsible to layout, plan, and locate all systems, equipment, ductwork, and piping based on accurate field measurements and shop drawings or certified prints as required to properly install, maintain, repair and operate all systems and equipment. Contractor shall not scale the drawings to locate equipment, ductwork or piping. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and routing. Contractor shall plan the work to minimize offsets, to avoid interferences, and to provide for the neat and proper erection of the systems. All piping and ductwork shall be installed as high above floor and /or mezzanine as possible to avoid interference with the Owner - installed fixturing and racking. 5. TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND START -UP 5.1 Contractor shall test, adjust, start-up and place into proper operation all equipment and systems installed under his contract. Prior to the start-up of any equipment or system, the responsible contractor shall make certain that all equipment is clean, free of foreign matter, all bearings properly lubricated and all precautions in accordance with REMODEL PROTOTYPE BASIC M/ RIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMEN 'SECTION 15A -2 equipment manufacturer's instructions. 5.2 Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, temporary piping, devices, gauges, Instrumentation, and equipment required to perform testing, adjusting, calibration, start-up, acceptance tests, and operation of the equipment and systems, including work related to start services provided by the equipment manufacturers. 5.3 Set points given in the specifications and /or on the drawings for operation, control, and safety devices are for initial trial. Final set points shall be established by Contractor as required to achieve optimum operation under installed conditions. 5.4 Provide taps in piping work as required to install temporary gauges and/or devices for calibrating and adjusting regulating devices, controls, pumps, etc., whether shown on the drawings or not. 5.5 Heating and Air Conditioning Systems - Tests for the heating systems shall be conducted during winter season and that for the cooling systems shall be conducted during the summer season. However, for air cooled refrigeration equipment, cooling systems shall be charged and put into service at the time of completion regardless of the season. If the cooling systems are put into operation during winter or spring season, contractor shall re -check the systems during the following summer season. If the heating systems are put into operation during warm or mild weather, contractor shall re -check the systems during the following winter season. 5.6 Other Systems - Test shall be performed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's standard testing procedures or as specifically called for under the individual equipment or system specifications. • END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' SIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPIN PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of the following: SECTION 15A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2 This Section is intended to establish the basic requirements for piping work common to all mechanical and plumbing systems. This Section shall govem all piping work except as otherwise modified in other Sections and/or as required to comply with governing Codes and /or regulations of Utilities. 1.3 Fire Protection Systems: Refer to Section 15G. The installation of all fire protection systems and piping shall comply with the requirements of goveming Codes. The provisions of the National Fire Codes (latest edition) published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) shall govem as minimum requirements in the absence of requirements from goveming Codes. 2. PIPING MATERIALS 2.1 The piping materials for each type of mechanical system are specified in the respective sections of these specifications. The specified materials shall be used to establish the base bid by each contractor, unless otherwise specified and /or allowed by addendum. 2.2 Substitute Piping Materials 2.2.1 At the time of bidding, Contractors are encouraged and invited to propose as substitutes any piping materials and /or systems potentially suitable for the services involved in lieu of the specified materials. 2.2.2 Contractor's proposal for substitute materials shall be accompanied by the respective add or deduct to the contract amount. Any substitute piping material accepted by the Owner's Representative shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit data on the substitute in sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to evaluate joining and installation methods, expansion and contraction, corrosion resistance. flow performance, and other pertinent features. Contractor shall be responsible to assure that the substitute matenais can be installed properly with the restraints imposed by the geometry and construction features of this project. 2.3 Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates to finish and conceal pipe penetrations through walls in all locations where exposed to view. 3. VALVES 3.1 General 3.1.1 All valve catalog numbers specified herein refer to Jenkins valves, except as otherwise noted. 3.1.2 Equivalent valves as manufactured by Stockham, Fairbanks, Kennedy, Hammond, or Nibco are acceptable for base bid. 3.1.3 At the time of bidding, Contractors are encouraged and invited to propose as substitutes any valves of other manufacturers and/or designs potentially suitable for the applications and services involved in lieu of the specified valves. Contractor's proposal for substitute valves shall be accompanied by the respective add or deduct to the contract amount. Any substitute valves shall be REMODEL PROTOTYPE G SY: .MS 'SECTION 15B -1 approved by the Engineer prior to award of the contract by the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall, when requested, submit complete and detailed data on the substitute valves to the Engineer. The data shall include an identification of the proposed service and application of each valve. 3.1.4 Hose -end valves (H.E.V.) shall be provided as gate valves with hose - thread adaptor having 3/4" hose thread, except as otherwise noted or specified. 3.1.5 Valves for special applications or systems which are not specified in this section shall be specified in the appropriate section of Division 15. 3.2 Gate Valves 3.2.1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water 3.2.1.12 -1/2" and larger - Fig. 651 -A, 125 Ib., IBBM (iron body, bronze mounted), solid wedge, OS &Y, flanged. 3.2.1.22' and smaller - Fig. 47 -U, 125 Ib., bronze, rising stem, solid wedge disc. union bonnet, screwed. 3.3 Globe Valves 3.3.1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water 3.3.1.12.1/2" and larger - Fig. 613, 125 Ib., IBBM, OS &Y, bolted bonnet, regrind -renew beveled bronze disc and seat ring, flanged. 3.3.1.22" and smaller - Fig. 106-A, 150 Ib.. bronze, composition disc, disc holder, screw -over bonnet, screwed. 3.4 Check Valves 3.4.1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water 3.4.1.12.1/2" and larger - Fig. 624, 125 lb.. IBBM, swing check, bolted cap, regrind -renew bronze seat and disc, flanged. 3.4.1.22" and smaller - Fig. 92 -A, 125 Ib., bronze, swing check, regrinding bronze disc, screwed. 3.5 Gas Systems 3.5.1 2 -1/2" and larger - ACF (WKM) Fig. R -1431, 200 psig WOG. semi - steel. lubricated plug, flanged; with operating wrench. 3.5.2 2' thru 1" - ACF (WKM) Fig. R -1430, 200 psig WOG, semi - steel, stainless steel spring lubricated plug, screwed; with operating wrench. 3.5.3 3/4" and 1/2" - ACF (WKM) Fig. D -125, 200 psig WOG, semi - steel, stainless steel spring lubricated plug, screwed; with operating wrench. 3.5.4 Lubricant used shall be suitable for intended service. At the completion of the work, each valve shall have an operating wrench secured to the valve or pipe by wire or heavy twine. At the option of the Owner's Representative, all operating wrenches shall be turned over in a steel or 3/4" plywood tool box with hinged lid and hasp. 3.5.5 Companion flanges for flanged valves shall be provided with flat face or with raised face removed. 3.6 Shut -off and Isolation Valves; Open -end Valves 3.6.1 Required shut -off and isolation valves are shown on the drawings and /or specified in the appropriate section of Division 15 of these specifications. 3.6.2 In general, a shut -off valve will be required at the mains 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' BASIC ,QUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS and at each piece of equipment so that the system and equipment may be isolated for service or repairs. Valves shall be line size, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 3.6.3 Each contractor is requested to notify the Contractor prior to any piping installation, if, in the opinion of the contractor, any additional shut -off valves might be desired. If approved by Owner's Representative, a change order will be issued. 3.7 Drain Valves 3.7.1 The installation of all liquid piping shall be such that the contents may be easily drained at the end or at the beginning of each run. Provide 1/2" drain valves with 3/4" hose -end connections for all drainage. unless larger size is shown on the drawings or required by Code or regulation. 3.7.2 When a sudden change of piping elevation is unavoidable due to construction obstructions, a drain valve must be installed at the low point for draining. Threaded Joints All steel or wrought iron pipes with threaded joints shall have full cut, taper threads and the interior of the pipe shall be reamed out clean and to full size of pipe. 4.1.2 Factory threaded pipe shall be fumished with thread protector during shipment and until pipe is installed. 4.1.3 Threaded pipe joints shall be made with an approved pipe thread compound, applied to male threads only. 4.2 Sweat Joints 4.2.1 All copper piping shall have sweat joints, except at screwed valves and devices where sweat -to- threaded adapters shall be provided. 4.2.2 Solders for Sweat Joints - For domestic hot and cold water and DWV services, joints shall be made with lead- free soldering; for refrigeration service, joints shall be made with silver solder, 35 or 45% alloy. 4.3 Welded Joints REMODEL PROTOTYPE JOINING OF PiPiNG SYSTEMS 4.3.1 Welded joints shall be made by the shielded metal -arc process. Welders shall be currently qualified by tests in accordance with the Standards for Qualification of the American Welding Society or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. For portions of the work falling within the jurisdiction of ASME Code, welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Standards. The level and type of welder qualification shall be consistent with the pressures, temperatures, hazards of the respective systems, and as required by governing Codes. 4.3.2 As minimum requirements, welding work shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS and/or ASME Specifications to assure proper procedures for joint preparation, joint alignment, electrode selection, and welding techniques. 4.4 Use -of Fittings and Unions 4.4.1 All changes in direction and size of pipe shall be made with fittings. No mitering, saddling, or welding or smaller pipe into larger will be permitted. Run -outs in steel or wrought iron piping (except galvanized), one -half the size of the main or smaller may be made by use of "Weld -O- Lets"; runouts larger than one -half the main size shall be made with tees. 'SECTION 15B -2 4.4.2 Unions shall be provided at the connections to all equipment unless the connections are made with flanged fittings or mechanical couplings. 4.5 Connection Between Dissimilar Metals 4.5.1 No direct connection between dissimilar metals is permitted. 4.5.2 For screwed connections, use insulating "dielectric" unions. 4.5.3 For flanged connections (including bronze or copper to cast iron or steel; cast iron to steel; or stainless steel to cast iron or steel) the raised face shall be removed or flat face flange provided. A full face, non - metallic, gasket suitable for the service shall separate flange faces. Flange bolts shall be isolated from the dissimilar material by means of insulating sleeves or bushings and washers. 4.6 Gaskets - Gaskets for flanged connections shall be of suitable materials and thicknesses for the service involved. For natural gas and water systems, "CC Rubber" by Crane, or equal shall be used. For fuel oil systems, cork -fiber or neoprene compressed asbestos shall be used. 4.7 Joints for Sewer Piping Systems - Refer to Section 15C, Plumbing Systems. 4.8 Mechanical Couplings 4.8.1 At the contractors option, mechanical couplings and fittings may be used for applications as specified herein. Mechanical couplings shall be considered for other systems provided the contractor submits a proposed substitution prior to contract award by the Owner's Representative. 4.8.2 Couplings and fittings shall be Victaulic, Gustin - Bacon, or approved equal. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77 and /or Style 75. Gaskets shall be grade "H" synthetic and bolts shall be oval neck track -type with hexagonal nuts. Galvanized couplings with cadmium- plated bolts and nuts shall be used with galvanized pipe. Where malleable fitting pattern is not available, standard seamless welding fittings may be used in conjunction with the grooved fittings. 4.8.3 Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with manufacturer's recommended lubricant to facilitate installation. Pipe shall be grooved in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Manufacturer's field instructions shall be provided. 4.9 Joints for other piping systems, if applicable, shall be as specified in the appropriate Section of Division 15. 5. ROUTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS 5.1 All piping shall be run parallel to and perpendicular to walls, floors, and ceilings with due allowance for pitch. 5.2 All piping above ground shall be run exposed in Pre -Sales and unfinished areas. 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' 5.3 All piping above ground shall be run concealed in finished areas, including offices and office areas, finished toilet rooms, and similar finished areas. An area shall be considered "finished" whenever a ceiling is required to conceal structural framing. Concealed piping shall be installed within ceiling plenums or spaces, within wall construction, enclosed in furred columns, etc. Piping to be concealed in unfinished areas shall be so noted on the drawings. No water piping shall be concealed in exterior walls. 5.4 In general, all horizontal piping shall be run as high above finished floors as possible, with proper allowance for pitch. Elevations and routings of piping shown on the drawings are reasonably accurate and are intended as a guide, not as a restriction, for proper piping installation. Contractors shall verify elevations and routings to minimize offsets and to assure proper coordination prior to installation of piping work. 6. SLOPE FOR PIPING SYSTE $ 6.1 All piping shall be sloped to permit draining of the respective piping system. The following minimum slopes shall apply except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. The direction (of slope) given below is the direction of piping fall with respect to the primary fluid conveyed. YST M COMPONENT SLOPE RATE gIREC.T_QN Domestic All interior 1" in 40ft. Against flow Water piping Sewers, 3" and 1" in 4ft. With flow Ind. & San. smaller Sewers 4" and 1" in 8ft. With flow Ind. & San. larger Sewers, Ind. Vents 1" in 4ft. From stacks & San. Sewers, Interior 1" in 8ft. With flow Storm Natural Gas Mains 1" in 50ft. With flow & branches 6.2 When governing Codes or utility regulations require slopes greater than those specified above or prohibit slopes as great as those specified above, the Code or regulation shall apply. 6.3 The direction and magnitude of the slope may be varied from the above specifications for special or unavoidable conditions when approved in writing by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. 7. PIPE HANGERS. SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS 7.1 All piping and related devices and equipment shall be securely supported to avoid sagging, vibration, and excessive strain or forces on the piping or related devices and equipment. Proper allowances shall be made for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. 7.2 Piping shall be supported from structural framing, concrete floor slabs or walls, or masonry walls as the strength of the supporting construction safely permits. 7.3 No piping shall be supported from roof decks, metal REMODEL PROTOTYPE 3IC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SY; MS 'SECTION 15B -3 side wall, precast concrete side walls, lateral bracing for structural members, or web members of bar joists without prior written approval from the Engineer. 7.4 Each contractor shall provide all beams, channels, angles, Unl- Strut, and similar members, including brackets, braces, stanchions, saddles, clips, etc., as required to support piping from building framing, platforms, or floor. Column -type supports and stanchions anchored to floor or concrete pad (exterior) shall be permitted only where shown on the drawings, specified herein, or approved by the Engineer. All steel supporting elements for piping shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer, white or light grey in color except as otherwise specified. 7.5 Piping supported from field -placed concrete floors or walls shall be attached by means of appropriate inserts installed at the time concrete is poured. Each contractor shall provide all inserts for his portion of the work and shall be responsible for the location of same. 7.6 No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be permitted without prior written approval from the Engineer. 7.7 Hangers and supports shall be trapeze, split or solid ring, clamp or clevis type on adjustable hanger rods. Hanger rods shall be attached to beam clamps or other suitable brackets or supports. Welding of hanger rods to steel framing will not be permitted. 7.8 Pipe hooks, strap iron, or chains will not be permitted for supporting piping. 7.9 Hangers and supports in direct contact with copper tubing shall be copper plated and suitably isolated from tube to prevent contact between dissimilar metals. All hangers, rods, and supporting devices shall be primed with light grey rust inhibiting primer, cadmium plated, galvanized, or equivalent non - corrosive finishes or materials. 7.10 Piping shall be supported and/or anchored at each change in pipe direction, at branch connections to mains and runouts to equipment, at valves 3" and larger, and at heavy devices. 7.11 Vertical piping shall be supported with riser clamps placed at each floor or ceiling and at each coupling and fitting. Clamps shall not be exposed where exposed piping passes through finished areas. Clamps shall be securely supported by brackets or similar structural members which are in turn supported from suitable building construction. 7.12 The maximum center -to- center spacing of pipe hangers and supports, in feet, shall comply with the following schedule for hard drawn copper tubing, for steel pipe, Schedule 40, and for Schedule 40 PVC. COPPER PIPE SIZE 1/2" 8 3/4" 8 1 " 1 -1/4" 8 1 -1/2" 7 -1/2 8 2" 8 2 -1/2" 8 COPPER PVC STEEL PIPE SIZE 4 PVC STEEL 5 3" 6 4 6 3 -1/2" 4 -1/2 7 4" 6 -1/2 8 5 8 5" 5 8 6" 5 6 8" 8 6 8 10" 8 12" 8 8 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' 7.13 Hanger and support spacing for other types of piping shall comply with the following, except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. 7.13.1 Cast Iron Soil Pipe: 8 -feet (maximum) with supports and hangers located at the joints, but not less than one (1) hanger or support for each length of pipe. When 5-foot sections of pipe are used or when piping is not supported at joints, hanger and support spacing shall not exceed 5 -feet. 7.13.2 Cast Iron or Asbestos- Cement Pressure Pipe: 8-feet (maximum) with supports and hangers located at the joints, but not less than one (1) hanger or support for each length of pipe. 7.13.3 Plastic or Fiberglass Piping: The maximum spacing of supports and hangers for specified plastic or fiberglass piping shall be as specified in the appropriate section of these specifications. 7.13.4 Substitute Piping Materials or Systems: Contractors offering substitute piping shall submit proposed hanger spacing, preferably the manufacturer's printed recommendations, to the Engineer for approval. 7.14 When any piping, 8' and larger, runs parallel to steel joists (or beams), such piping shall be supported with hangers attached to supports spanning two (2) joist (or beams). When piping runs perpendicular to steel joists (or beams), piping shall be supported by each joist (or beam). All hangers (or support strats) shall be located at joist panel points. 7.15 Refer to separate paragraph covering thermal insulation for additional requirements for hanging and supporting insulated piping. 8 UNpERGROUND REND tit 8.1 Underground piping shall not be laid in contact with rocks, boulders, cinder fill, frozen earth, or any other materials or objects which could cause physical damage to the piping or unusual corrosion action. 8.2 All underground cast iron, vitrified clay, and concrete piping shall be laid with the bottom quadrant (90 degrees) of the piping fully and uniformly supported on a shaped trench bottom, including bell or hub ends, except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. 8.3 Vitrified clay pipe shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C -12 as minimum requirements. 8.4 Vitrified clay pipe under exterior paved areas shall be installed with the following bedding conditions, unless more stringent conditions are noted on the drawings or required by site conditions. 8.4.1 Total cover over top of pipe 18" or less: Lay pipe with bottom half (180 degrees) in a concrete cradle not less than 4" thick below pipe barrel. 8.4.2 Total cover over top of pipe 30" to 19": Lay pipe with bottom quadrant (90 degrees) in a concrete cradle not less than 4" thick below pipe barrel. 8.5 Underground piping subject to thrusts or "pull -apart" forces due to pressure testing, shock loads, or other potential movements shall be anchored with clamps and rods and /or with concrete thrust blocks as required to resist such forces or potential movements. Clamps, rods, or REMODEL PROTOTYPE BASIC QUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS 'SECTION 15B-4 similar metal anchors shall be painted or coated to prevent corrosive action. 9. THERMAL INSULATION - Applications to Piping 9.1 Refer to Section 15A for basic requirements for thermal insulation work and materials. Refer to each Section of Division 15 for the types and thicknesses of insulation and other requirements for insulation of specific systems and equipment. 9.2 The following specifications are for the methods of applications of thermal insulation common to all piping systems. Special and /or additional requirements (if any) for particular systems shall be as specified in the respective Section of Division 15. 9.3 Fittings and Valves • Insulate with equal insulating value and vapor barrier as the respective pipe insulation with built -up covering, with pre - molded (such as Insul -Sure as manufactured by Insul - Coustic, Corp.) or with one piece pre - molded PVC insulated fittings such as manufactured by Zeston. Fittings insulated with built -up and mitered segments shall have cement, mastic, and wrap applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for proper ratings and for a smooth, even, finished appearance. 9.3.1 Exposed portions of valves shall be insulated as much as practical, except the hand wheel and exposed portions of the stem. 9.3.2 Apply cements, mastics, and straps in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for proper ratings and for a smooth, even, finished appearance. 9.4 Pipe Saddles 9.4.1 No insulation shall rest directly on pipe supports. Provide heavy gauge galvanized steel or aluminum protector saddles on the bottom half of the piping at each support of sufficient length and stiffness to prevent noticeable deformation of insulation. 9.4.2 "Hot" Piping (hot water, etc.) 9.4.2.1 Piping may be supported by pipe hangers directly, with insulation fitted around the hangers and finished in a similar manner as fittings, or insulation may pass through hangers. 9.4.3 'Cold" Piping (cold water, downspouts, etc.) 9.4.3.1 All insulation of 'cold' piping shall pass uninterrupted through pipe hangers. 9.4.3.2 Insulation saddles on which pipe is supported shall be of sufficient density to safely support the weight of piping and contents without noticeable deformation. Bottom portion of the pipe cover shall be provided with galvanized steel or aluminum protectors. 9.4.3.3 Prefabricated pipe saddles shall be " Insul- Shield ", as manufactured by Insul- Coustic Corp., or similar shop fabricated saddles. Sample of shop fabricated saddles shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. 9.5 Accessories 9.5.1 All accessories, specialties, and thermal conducting components on low temperature piping systems shall be insulated with 3/8" thick flexible foam plastic material or 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' insulation and vapor barrier equivalent to adjacent piping. 9.5.2 All accessories, specialties, and thermal conducting components on high temperature piping systems shall be insulated equivalent to adjacent piping. 9.5.3 Insulation for removable components shall be easily removable without disturbing the main piping insulation. 10. CLEANING AND PRESSURE TESTING 10.1 General 10.1.1 Refer to Section 15C for additional requirements relating to Plumbing Systems. 10.1.2 Definition: Cleaning as used herein shall be taken to mean the removal of all materials foreign to the respective piping system which is or could be contaminating, obstructing, or unsightly. 10.2 Cleaning 10.2.1 The interior of all piping work shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials as the work is installed. 10.2.2 After installation, the interior of all piping shall be cleaned and flushed in accordance with the specifications governing the respective systems. 10.2.3 The exterior of all above grade piping shall be cleaned of mud, dirt, grease. and other foreign materials by brushing and /or washing with suitable solvents or detergents as required to leave the piping clean in general appearance and suitable to receive thermal insulation. Further cleaning and preparation of piping to receive painting, when required, shall be performed by the other Contractor, 10.3 Pressure Testing 10.3.1 All piping shall be pressure tested in accordance with the following specifications and as required by other Sections of Division 15. 10.3.2 Testing work shall be successfully completed prior to application of any thermal insulation or pipe covering, prior to backfilling any buried piping, and prior to enclosure of any concealed piping. 10.3.3 Testing shall be in the presence of the Engineer and /or the Owner's Representative and all authorities having approval jurisdiction over the installed work. Each contractor shall perform and conduct the testing at times mutually agreed upon with the Owner's Representative. 10.3.4 Isolate or remove any and all devices and equipment from the piping prior to the pressure testing if the devices or equipment are not designed to withstand the test pressures. If the maximum pressure rating is not marked on the device or equipment or is otherwise not known to the Contractor, the Engineer shall be notified prior to testing for directions. 10.3.5 Testing shall be repeated or continued until all piping is proven leak -free. All defects shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Defective welds in welded piping shall be ground off and the piping shall be rewelded. Defective pipe or fittings shall be replaced, not patched or repaired. 10.3.6 Gaseous Fuel Piping - Shall be pneumatically tested with compressed air at a minimum of 25 psig and in no REMODEL PROTOTYPE .SIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SY !MS *SECTION 15B -5 case Tess than 50% above the operating pressure of the system. Pressure in the section of piping under test shall hold constant for a period of 24 hours after applying correction factors for temperature changes. Where required by code or utility company, a certificate of compliance shall be obtained from the utility company or code enforcing authority. - END OF SECTION • 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL CONTRACT WiTH LENNOX AND GREENHECK TO FURNISH SELECTED HVAC UNITS, VENTILATION FANS, ACCESSORIES AND CONTROLS, AS SPECIFIED HEREIN AND NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. THE HVAC SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DELIVERY COORDINATION, RECEIVING, SETTING AND INSTALLING THE OWNER - FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AS WELL AS THE ONE -YEAR PARTS AND LABOR WARRANTY FROM THE DATE OF STORE OPENING. EVEN THOUGH THE EQUIPMENT IS OWNER - FURNISHED, THIS DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF ANY RESPONSIBILITIES RELATING TO THIS EQUIPMENT, ITS INSTALLATION OR WARRANTY. PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of the following: Section 15A - BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS Section 158 - BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS 1.2 AU work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. 1.3 Upon receiving all Owner - fumished HVAC equipment requiring CFC or HCFC refrigerants for operation, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for compliance with all State and Federal regulations relating to clean air and /or venting of CFC and /or HCFC refrigerants until the equipment is turned over to Toys "R" Us for operation and maintenance. This responsibility shall include all work relating to charging and /or recharging any and all HVAC refrigerant systems furnished and/or installed, or any existing equipment reused, under the HAC's contract. 2. VENTILATION FANS ACCESSORiES(Owner- furnished equipment) HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 'SECTION 15D -1 AND 2.1 Fans shall be provided by the Owner. Coordinate delivery of, arrange for rigging of, receive, rig and install in place the ventilation fans with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. 2.2 Each fan shall be provided with the accessories as noted in the schedule on the drawings. 2.3 When fans are specified on the schedule to have a disconnect switch, the switch and wiring between the switch and fan motor shall be factory installed. 2.4 The curb cap of curb mounted fans shall be set in a bed of water proof sealant on the roof curb and securely attached with not less than #10 screws on 9 inch centers. Provide at least two screws on each side for small units. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify the size and location of each roof opening with the Contractor prior to the cutting and /or placement of openings. 2.5 The other contractors shall provide power wiring and motor starters for all fans and all control wiring and devices for all manually controlled fans. 2.6 Except as otherwise noted or specified, the Contractor shall provide control devices, wiring, and work for all fans which are automatically controlled. All work shall comply REMODEL PROTOTYPE with the NEC, latest edition. Control devices shall be Honeywell. 2.7 Refer to Section 15E for specifications governing prefabricated roof curbs. 3. GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS 3.1 Provide gas fired unit heaters as indicated and scheduled on the drawings and in accordance with the following. 3.2 Units shall be as manufactured by Reznor or Modine. Size, type, features, accessories, and ratings shall be equivalent to scheduled units. 3.3 Except as noted on the drawings, units shall be installed as close to the roof deck as practical for maximum clearance to floor. Provide supporting steel members and hardware as required to secure the units. 3.4 Each unit shall be provided with a space thermostat which shall control the fan and bumer. The Contractor shall fumish and install all control wiring. Units shall have aluminized steel heat exchanger, spark ignited pilot with electronic flame supervision and 100% safety shut ofi, automatic gas valve, pressure regulator, transformer, high limit and fan delay controls, gas cock, and pilot valve. Provide full size dirt leg (6" length), stop valve, and union connection for gas supply to each unit. 3.5 Except for ducted units, provide Horizontal Louvers on all units. Provide vertical louvers as scheduled on the drawings. 3.6 Units shall be AGA Certified, CGA approved, and approved for use in the state where the project is located. Manufacturer's standard warranty shall apply. Refer to separate Section 15F for gas vents. 4. AIR CURTAINS (When included on plans) Air curtains are provided by General Contractor through national accounts program established with Bernere International. P.O. Box 5205, Route 18 Wilmington Road, New Castle, PA 16105, Telephone (800) 245 -4455, Fax (412) 652 -0682, Contact: Steve Benes. 4.1 Fumish and install in place the air curtains with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on the drawings and according to the following specifications. 4.2 Air curtains shall be provided by Owner and installed by the Contractor in sizes and locations as scheduled and indicated on the drawings. Refer to Architectural drawings for additional installation provisions. 4.3 Units shall consist of a base frame of 16 gauge steel on which is mounted fans and two speed air over split capacitor, double- shafted motor(s) with built -in thermal protection. Double inlet forward curved steel fan wheels shall be supplied. A 2.5" deep nozzle shall extend the full length of the unit and shall be equipped with aluminum vanes adjustable ±20 °. A wall mounting plate of 16 gauge steel shall be supplied. The wall mounting plate and base frame shall be made of aluminized steel. The cover housing shall be made of .050" satin anodized aluminum with a matching satin anodized aluminum inlet grille. 4.4 Units shall be complete with operating and safety controls. Integral switching permits selection of "OFF ", "FAN ONLY and speed selection. Units shall operate on low speed (2000 fpm) or high speed (3000 fpm). The units shall be complete with unit- mounted, factory installed and 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' HVI ;YSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT wired, disconnect switches for power connections. 4.5 Units shall be AMCA Certified Tested in accordance with Air Curtain Test Procedure Standard #220. 4.6 Units shall be U.L. Listed. 5. ROOF TOP COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS (OWNER - FURNISHED EQUIPMENT) 5.1 Coordinate delivery of, arrange for rigging of, receive, rig and install in place roof top combination heating and cooling units with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. 5.2 The roof top units shall be Lennox (refer to plans). Units shall be furnished by the Owner. The national account representative for Lennox is Mr. Pete Hanley and Mr. Curt Picard. He can be contacted by phone: (516) 753 -2273. Each unit shall be a complete unitary package consisting of heating section (when specified), condensing section, cooling coil, blower, controls, wiring, piping, casing, and structural base. The entire unit shall be factory wired, piped, assembled, charged and tested in all modes of operation. Gas - fired units shall be AGA certified for outdoor use. Four -year extended Protection Plan for the motor /compressor is included in the Agreement between Owner and manufacturer, but shall be obtained by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner as part of the Project dose-out documentation. The Contractor shall also obtain and provide written certification for 5 year warranty when offered as "standard" for units 15 tons and smaller. 5.3 Each unit shall be designed to operate on a 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz power supply with a single field power connection (unless otherwise noted). All necessary starters, contactors, control transformers, controls, and control safety devices shall be factory installed and wired. 5,4 Each unit shall be provided with and installed on a full perimeter prefabricated roof curb, as provided by Owner. Installation shall be by the Contractor. Roof curbs or units shall be shimmed or blocked using sheet stock steel as required to set the units level within the tolerances recommended by the manufacturer (1/16 per linear foot or as otherwise indicated in Installation, Startup and Service Instructions). All flashing, counterflashing, and sealing shall be provided by the Contractor as required for a water tight installation and interface with the roofing construction. Roof insulation and membrane shall be installed on the exterior of each curb by the Roofing Subcontractor. Contractor shall coordinate as required. Curb design shall conform to the standards of the National Roofing Contractor's Association. When required by local Codes and /or authorities, each rooftop unit shall be anchored to the roof curb as recommended by manufacturer for a water -tight installation. Each roof curb shall be likewise anchored to the roof structure. 5.5 Each unit shall be provided with a factory equipped and installed economizer cycle (unless otherwise noted) actuated by a differential enthalpy controller arranged to cool with up to 100% outside air. Relief air damper sections shall be factory installed and arranged to operate barometrically in direct proportion to the outside air quantities. Compressor short cycle protection shall be provided on all units. 5.6 Outside air dampers on each unit shall be balanced and set for the specified minimum position and shall be closed when unit is shut down. 5.7 Evaporator condensate drain for each unit shall be trapped (unless the unit is internally trapped) and drain REMODEL PROTOTYPE pipe shall be extended to 3' beyond the unit on the low -roof side and/or as noted on the drawings. Piping shall be Type M copper or copper D-W -V. 5.8 Each unit shall be factory assembled, charged, and tested. All starters, relays, and control transformers shall be included. 5.9 The other Contractors shall provide all power wiring in accordance with wiring diagrams, data, and instructions furnished by the Contractor. The other Contractors shall install, and wire all field installed control devices. See Paragraph 6 for the furnishing of control devices. 5.10 Each system shall be installed, checked out, and started up in strict and complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Refer to separate paragraphs for testing and balancing requirements. Contractor shall complete the equipment operation check and send completed forms for each RTU to the General Contractor and theToys `R" Us Construction Project Manager. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS General 'SECTION 15D -2 Except as otherwise specified and /or noted on the drawings, all automatic control devices for all rooftop units shall be furnished, installed and wired by the other contractors. Contractor shall ensure that all units are running prior to NOVAR EMS start-up. 6.1.2 The Contractor shall provide all necessary coordination to insure the proper location and function of all controls. 6.1.3 Refer to the electrical drawings for further clarification of the work provided by the other contractors. All control- related conduit required shall be furnished and installed by the other contractors. 6.1.4 Smoke detectors shall be factory installed in the supply and return air ducts on all roof top units with 2,000 CFM or greater. Smoke detectors shall be wired to shut down the evaporator blower upon activation. HAC shall wire smoke detectors to the fire alarm system (trouble signal). 6.2 All toilet area Exhaust and Transfer Fans shall be interlocked and controlled through a contactor provided and wired by the other contractors. Fans shall be capable of operating only during the occupied period. 6.3 Unit Heater Control: Space thermostat shall cycle unit and burner. All control wiring shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 6.4 Air Curtains: Refer to manufacturer's equipment specifications for additional control requirements. 6.5 Refer to drawings for additional control requirements and specifications. 7. IDENTIFICATION 7.1 All temperature controls and each Rooftop Unit shall be provided with identification tags of black phenolic material with engraved white letters, supplied and installed by the Contractor. 7.2 Identify each control device with its number and service by means of a laminated black and white phenolic label with letters engraved in black to white. Identifications shall correspond to the Operating Instructions as specified 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' herein. 7.3 Provide an 8-1/2' x 11' diagram showing the relative position of each rooftop unit with respect to the store's floor plan. Mount diagram within the control panel cabinet. 7.4 Tags for Rooftop Units shall have letters not less than 1' high and shall be attached to unit's sheet metal housing panel. Tags to read: RTU -1, RTU -2, etc. corresponding to mark on drawings. 8. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 8.1 The Contractor shall prepare and mount in a glass frame in the Manager's Office, or as otherwise directed. step -by -step operating instructions for each piece of equipment. The instructions shall be simple and shall enable the Manager to property start and stop the equipment and to operate the equipment in all seasons. The format and instruction sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before being framed and mounted. 9. TEST REQUIREMENTS 9.1 After the installation is complete the Contractor shall perform the following tests to insure the performance of the equipment: 9.1.1 Refer to Section 158 for additional requirements. 9.1.2 Refrigerant Piping: All field- installed refrigerant piping shall be tested with a halide torch. Any leaks shall be repaired and the system recharged. 9.1.3 Performance Testing: The Contractor shall operate all pieces of mechanical equipment to insure satisfactory results. Measurements of air delivery shall be made at all fans and air devices and the systems balanced so that the deviation between actual and specified quantities is no greater than 5 %. Ampere measurements shall be made of all motors to insure that none of the motors are overloaded. All automatic controls shall be tested to insure proper sequencing of operations as specified hereinbefore. Any equipment which is defective in either performance or operation, or excessively noisy shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. This data shall be submitted 30 days prior to store opening. A punch list will be prepared by the Owner's Representative and /or the Engineer and submitted to this Contractor for remedial work to be completed two weeks prior to the date of store opening. Contractor shall remove all filters and shall install new filters throughout the system, one day prior to store opening. 9.1.4 Performance tests shall include, but not be limited to the following: 9.1.4.1 Ampere reading of each motor including corresponding name plate rating. 9.1.4.2 CFM output from each air device and each fan. 9.1.4.3 Suction and discharge pressure for each compressor. 9.1.4.4 Entering and leaving db/wb on each stage of cooling and (db) heating. 9.1.4.5CFM or fresh air for each unit. (Contractor to mark position of damper when proper fresh air requirement is achieved and lock damper in this position.) REMODEL PROTOTYPE .-IVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT *SECTION 15D -3 9.1.4.6 List of room temperature and outside temperature at time tests were taken. 9.2 Tests shall be conducted during both cooling and heating seasons, preferably during period of design conditions. These tests will be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. Contractor shall submit his proposed schedule to the Owner's Representative no less than three weeks in advance for coordination. 9.3 A properly identified testing and balancing report shall be submitted to the Engineer (in three copies) for each testing period as above. Report shall include all testing and balancing results and all related or influencing conditions. 9.4 Contractor shall complete the Lennox Equipment check (copy of checklist is included at the end of this section) and send completed forms for each RTU to the General Contractor and the Toys 'R' Us Construction Project Manager. 10. SERVICE REQUIREMENTS 10.1 The Contractor shall provide, as part of his Contract, one (1) year maintenance and repair service for all equipment and systems provided under the HAC's contract from date of Owner's acceptance of the equipment. 10.2 The one (1) year service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner for labor and materials and shall include all Owner- fumished equipment. See Section 18 for additional requirements relating to Owner - furnished equipment. 10.3 Each service call shall include. but not be limited to, the replacement of defective equipment and components, repair of leaks, oiling and lubricating motors and moving parts, cleaning and /or replacing filters, adjusting and /or replacing belts and drives, replacement of refrigerant which is lost for any reason, and all other routine maintenance work recommended by the respective equipment manufacturers. 10.4 This Contractor may provide for the above through use of his own service (except as herein indicated) department or such subsidiary as may be adequately staffed, equipped and competent to perform the required service functions when needed. If this Contractor does not maintain such a department or subsidiary, he shall be required to obtain the services of a reputable agency or firm regularly engaged in provision of start, test, check and service for equipment of types specified. 10.5 The company, agency or firm that is selected by the Mechanical Contractor. subsidiary or independent, shall be subject to the approval of the owner, and shall be able to meet any minimum criteria that the owner deems necessary in providing proper and adequate service of equipment involved. 10.6 The name of servicing agency shall be submitted along with the equipment submittals. 10.7 The provisions of the above paragraphs shall not be interpreted as diminishing in any way the equipment warranties and /or Contractor's one (1) year warranty on the project; however, the beginning date for the service requirements specified above shall begin on the same date as the warranty covering that same portion of this project. 01/03/00 DIVISION 15* Order No. RTU No. LENNOX IND Equipment Operation Check Report Date Catalog No. Store Name & No. Address City State Installer EOC Performed by Phone Unit Model No. Serial No. Control System Mfg: Name Model Serial No. NOTE: Page numbers reference the IMC manual 503,268M -3/96 included with each L series unit. The following pages show appropriate tests and functions. Where "' is shown, circle the appropriate choice. Doesn't Apply OK Attention Needed Operating records - cooling Amp readings Compressor #1 Compressor #2 Compressor #3 Compressor #4 REMODEL PROTOTYPE Discharge Suction I 4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 'SECTION 15D-4 Field LP Return 13) 486) & 8) (Pg 6) 4 section section Before Applying Power Unit clearly marked with RTU # Condensate drain installed 120 V convenience outlet Gas fuel type Gas manifold unions tight Belt tension and alignment Filters clean 8 in place Burglar bars in place Smoke detectors Jumper installed TB -1, 8 8 9 A55 switched SW1, SW2, set S'rv3 #2 ON (Pgs A59 \61 switches set (Page 6 Fig 7 With Power On Check LED heartbeat on: (page 4 table 2) A55 A59/61 A56 Electrical disconnect installed "' Factory .. • Natural Supply (Pages 7 8 A58 / A 60 "' Record software version Record crank case heater amps 1 2 3 Thermostat simulation (Page 25) c1.1 (full cool) Measure 8 record pressures - next h1.1 (full heat) Measure & record strip amps - next L1 L2 L3 Pressure, psig 01/03/00 Blower DIVISION 15' HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 'SECTION 15D -5 Voltages Voltages T1 T18 Power 24v transformers Proper rotation of motors confirmed "' Yes No Temperatures: Ambient Return Supply Cool Supply heat (Pg. 26) Operating records - heat Gas line pressure in. wc. Manifold pressure in. wc. Does the temp. limit function Yes No work? ••• Economizer check Doesn't Apply OK Attention Needed EMS LED indicator "' On Off Flashing Notes REMODEL PROTOTYPE Dampers motor from 0 to 100% Power exhaust operational A56 switches set Enthalpy sensor(s) installed "' Indoor Return Enthalpy setting "' A B C 0 Minimum damper position setting % Energy Management System monitor contacted to verify no fault' operation status Date Final repairs are "' Done Being Done by Date EOC personnel signature indicating the assigned work is complete Name Date 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' Al 'ISTRIBUTUION SYSTEMS AND ACCE. )RIES 'SECTION 15E -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. 1.1 All work under this Section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: 1.2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. GENERAL Section 15A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS SHEET METAL WORK General Sheet metal work shall be performed by the HAC's own sheet metal shop, or at the HAC's option, may be subcontracted to a qualified Sheet Metal Subcontractor, hereinafter referred to as the SMS. If SMS is to be used, the Contractor shall submit the name of the proposed SMS to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the awarding of the HAC's contract. 2.1.2 Reference Manuals - Quality of workmanship, metal gauges, fabrication, construction and installation of sheet metal work shall comply with the latest editions of DUCT MANUAL AND SHEET METAL CONSTRUCTION FOR VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (herein referred to as SMACNA). All work and materials shall comply with NFPA Pamphlet 90A, latest edition. 2.2 Materials, Fabrication, and Installation 2.2.1 Ducts for heating, cooling, and exhaust systems shall be galvanized steel of commercial lock forming quality having a minimum galvanized coating of 1-1/4 ounces per square foot of sheet metal (total coating for both sides), unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein. 2.2.2 Sheet metal work as shown on the drawings is, in general, schematic and based on the specified manufacturer's equipment and material dimensions. Contractor shall make accurate measurements in the field prior to ductwork fabrication and rhall provide all necessary offsets and transition pieces required to accommodate the actual structural and equipment variations and as required to clear piping and recessed lighting fixtures. All ductwork in finished areas (with hung ceilings and ceilings covering roof structure and framing) shall be concealed. 2.2.3 Duct Dimensions - Unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, duct sizes shown are OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS (sheet metal sizes) of the ducts. Round ducts shall not be substituted for rectangular ducts shown on the drawings, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. 2.2.4 All rectangular ductwork shall be cross broken or beaded, in accordance with SMACNA standards. 2.2.5 All ducts and ductwork shall be supported by hangers of the types and at the spacings as recommended by SMACNA. Contractor shall provide additional steel angles, channels, Unistrut, etc., as required to span between bar joists or structural members in order to hang ducts at proper intervals and at necessary points. Hangers shall be provided at all elbows and at branch takeoffs on the main ducts. 2.2.6 No ducts shall be supported from the roof deck. No cutting or drilling of structural members is permitted unless written permission is obtained from the Engineer. No ducts shall be supported from or rigidly attached to any interior partitions, except those of masonry or concrete construction. 2.2.7 Where ducts pass through walls, floors or partitions, the space around ducts shall be sealed with mineral wool, or other non - combustible material as required by NFPA. Ducts shall be provided with sheet metal angle frames close fitted to the openings. 2.2.8 No duct is to be placed directly under any electric light outlet, and in those cases where lighting outlet must occupy the same location as the duct, provide sufficient bracing, etc., to allow the other Contractor to hang his lighting fixtures below the duct. The Owner's representative shall determine if the light fixture is to be moved or hung from the duct; secure his written approval before installation. 2.2.9 Where it becomes necessary, because of job conditions to run pipes, conduits, ceiling hangers, etc., through the ductwork, the Contractor shall do all sheet metal cutting necessary and shall patch all openings using suitable collars or sleeves with flanges to make an air -tight patch. Furnish a streamline section around the element which is passing through the ductwork. 2.2.10 Access doors shall be hinged and constructed of 18 gauge metal rigidly reinforced, furnished with necessary hardware and framing, including felted edges. When closed, they must be air- tight. Access doors shall be located for easy removal or cleaning and for maintenance of filters, heating coils, dampers, and all other equipment requiring access. Access doors shall be not less than 256 sq. in. and square, (similar to SMACNA Figure 2 -14). For plenums and casing, access doors to be similar to SMACNA Figure 3 -17 and Table 3 -1. 2.3 Turning Vanes and Radius Elbows 2.3.1 All changes in direction of supply, return, and exhaust ductwork made with square elbows shall have turning vanes. Turning vanes shall be provided in all square elbows whether shown on the drawings or not. 2.3.2 Turning vanes shall be single wall type as manufactured by Aero /Dyne Company or Tuttle & Bailey, or may be shop fabricated in accordance with SMACNA. The number and spacing of vanes shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations or, if shop fabricated, in accordance with SMACNA. In ducts with internal liner, the vanes shall be installed over the liner; the liner shall not be interrupted for vane installation. 2.3.3 At the Contractor's option, elbows may be "Standard Radius" type in accordance with SMACNA with the throat radius equal to the width of the duct in the plane of the radius. When space does not permit the use of "Standard Radius" elbows, a short radius elbow with turning vane complying with SMACNA may be used. 2.4 Flexible Connections 2.4.1 Provide sound and vibration isolating flexible connections as specified below on all motorized equipment to which duct connections are made unless noted otherwise on the drawings. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' 2.4.2 Connections on interior work shall be made with Ventglas Neoprene - coated glass fabric as furnished by Ventfabrics, Inc. Connections made on work exposed to weather and /or sunlight shall be made with Vention Hypalon - coated glass fabric as furnished by Ventfabrics, Inc. 2.4.3 An allowance of at least one inch slack shall be made at each connection. The fabric shall be attached at equipment with metal collar frames and to ductwork by folding in with the sheet metal or with bands or frames as required to make leakproof joints. 3. VOLUME CONTROLS 3.1 Provide splitter dampers, volume control dampers, and air extractors at all branch take -offs and other locations as shown on the drawings and as otherwise required for the proper balancing of the air distribution systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper balancing and volume control of all air distribution systems. 3.2 Volume dampers, splitter dampers, and /or air extractor where splitters are not indicated shall be installed at all branch take -offs of supply ducts. All dampers shall be substantially constructed of 16 gauge metal, proportioning type, and so installed as to prevent rattling. All dampers to be quadrant type with lock nut. 4. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 4.1 Provide air distribution devices complete with accessories in accordance with the Schedule on the drawings and the following. 4.2 The Contractor shall verify ceiling construction to assure the suitability of each device, frame, and hardware for the respective application. Provide all mounting hardware required whether specified on the drawing schedule or not. 4.3 Air devices shall be as manufactured by Barber - Colman, Metal -aire, Tuttle and Bailey, Titus, Krueger, Carnes or Anemostat - Waterloo. 5. DUCT LINER 5.1 Low velocity rectangular duct systems (supply and return) shall be internally lined with 1' acoustical liner for systems where indicated and /or noted on the drawings. Exhaust ducts shall not be lined unless specifically noted on the drawings. 5.2 Duct liner shall be made of glass fiber material bonded with an inactive resin and having a density of not less than 2 pounds per cubic foot. The surface in contact with the air stream shall be coated with neoprene or other suitable coating to prevent erosion and to meet the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 90A. The material shall have the following ratings and characteristics. 5.2.1 Thermal conductivity (k- factor) of 0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean. 5.2.2 Flame spread - 25; Smoke developed - 50. AIR DIST :UTUION SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORI► 'SECTION 15E -2 5.2.3 Maximum air velocity of 4000 FPM in accordance with UL Standard 181. 5.2.4 Maximum temperature of 250 degrees F. 5.2.5 Noise reduction coefficient of 0.08. (Average of sound absorption coefficients at 250, 500, 1000 and 2000 cps.) 5.3 All duct lining shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA Standards. Mechanical fasteners and adhesives shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 5.4 Duct liner shall be as manufactured by Certainteed CGS Group or Owens- Coming. 6. DUCT WRAP 6.1 Round ducts shall receive 1 -112' of Owens- Coming vapor barrier faced duct wrap FRK -25, series ED -150, with a thermal conductivity of 0.24 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, or equivalent by J -M or Certainteed. Insulation shall be adhered to metal at 8" o.c. with Foster's 85-15 bonding adhesive. Longitudinal and circumferential joints shall be secured with 9/16' flare -door staples at 6" o.c. and taped with 3" wide (min.) foil reinforced kraft tape. All penetrations of facing shall also be taped. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation. 7. D.EXIBLE INSULATED DUCTS 7.1 Provide flexible ducts as manufactured by Certainteed CGS Group, Flexible Tubing Division of Automation Industries, Johns - Manville, or Wiremold as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. 7.2 Flexible ducts shall consist of an inner of helical wound spring steel coated with vinyl and covered with a vinyl coated fiberglass mesh permanently fused to form a continuous inner sleeve. The inner line shall be covered with fiberglass insulation jacketed with a reinforced, metalized plastic vapor barrier casing. 7.3 Flexible ducts shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 181, Class 1 and shall have the following ratings and characteristics. 7.3.1 Maximum thermal conductance (C) of 0.23 BTUH per square foot degree F. at 75 degrees F. 7.3.2 Temperature range of 0 to 250 degrees F. 7.3.3 Maximum vapor transmission rating of jacket of 0.03 Perm. 7.3.4 Maximum internal pressures of 2" w.c. positive and 1 -1/2" w.c. negative. 7.3.5 Maximum velocity of 2400 FPM. 7.4 Duct sizes noted on the drawings refer to the inside duct diameter. Flexible ducts shall be installed to provide sweeping configurations without undue restrictions, but not creating unnecessary sags or curves. Flat banding material not less than 1 -1/2" wide shall be used to suspend flexible ducting. Ducting furnished with factory installed grommets shall be suspended by wires attached to grommets. 7.5 Where ceiling plenum space is not sufficient to permit top connection to ceiling diffuser with proper bend radius for flexible duct, Contractor shall fabricate and /or provide an adapter box for diffuser to permit side connection of flexible duct. 8. PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 8.1 Roof curbs for Rooftop Units (RTU's) and Exhaust Fans shall be manufacturer's standard, uninsulated curbs REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' furnished by the Owner. All other roof curbs shall comply with the following paragraphs. 8.2 Provide factory prefabricated roof curbs and equipment supports as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. 8.3 When available, roof curbs and equipment supports shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the respective equipment or item to be supported to assure a close and proper fit. All other curbs and supports shall be as manufactured by Vent Products Co., Inc., Louvers and Dampers, Inc., Penn Ventilator, The Pate Company, or Thybar Corporation, in accordance with the following: 8.4 Materials and Construction 8.4.1 Curbs and supports shall be constructed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel or 14 gauge (.064') aluminum. Material of curb shall match the equipment or item to be supported when required to prevent direct contact of dissimilar metals. 8.4.2 Curbs and supports shall be reinforced and/or constructed of heavier gauge materials as required to properly support the applied loads, including wind, snow, and dynamic with safety factor of 2 or greater. 8.4.3 All joints and seams shall be continuously welded to assure leak proof and weather tight construction. 8.4.4 All curbs shall be insulated with rigid fiberglass board, 3 lbs. per cubic foot minimum density. The thickness of insulation board shall be equal to the required nominal curb thickness: 1.1/2 inches, minimum. 8.4.5 All curbs and supports installed on insulated roofs shall have an integral cant strip, 3' minimum. The cant shall be raised by an amount equal to the thickness of the roof insulation. The top of all curbs shall be not less than 11 inches above finished roof. The top of all equipment supports shall be not less than 9 inches above finished roof. The top of all curbs and supports shall be installed level with factory built -in pitch for roofs with a slope of 3/8 inch per foot or more. 8.4.6 Top of all curbs and supports shall have a wood nailer of nominal 2 inch lumber, except where self - flashing curbs are approved. Provide cap flashing for all applications where the wood nailer would be exposed. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE A )ISTRIBUTUION SYSTEMS AND ACCE DRIES 'SECTION 15E -3 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' FUEL SYSTEMS 'SECTION 15F -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: Section 15A - BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS Section 15B - BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS 1.2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. 2. GAS PIPING SYSTEM 2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all work and payment of all one -time fees or charges related to providing gas service to the building, excluding the work and /or fees paid by the developer. The Contractor shall contact the gas company and the develooer during bidding to determine fees. charges, and reauirg .The fees and charges shall be identified separately in the Contractors proposal, During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the gas service requirements with the gas company and the developer to establish the gas service to the building equipment on a timely and proper basis. 2.2 Provide a complete system of natural gas piping as indicated on the drawings and as required to properly connect all gas fired equipment. All work shall comply with governing State and local codes and regulations of the Gas Utility Company. The building gas piping system is designed and sized on the basis of natural gas at 1000 BTU per C.F. nominal heating value. 0.6 specific gravity, and delivery pressure at the outlet side of the meter as noted on the drawings. Should local conditions and /or Codes vary from the design basis, Contractor shall notify the Engineer and qualify his bid accordingly. 2.3 Pipe shall be ASTM A -120 black steel, Schedule 40, for interior and above grade. Underground piping shall be ASTM A -120 black steel, Schedule 40 with X -Tru -Coat plastic wrap with all joints and damaged areas coated with X -Tru -Coat primer and tape. Underground steel pipe shall receive cathodic protection (magnesium anodes) as recommended and supplied by a vendor specializing in this work. Polyethylene piping approved by local Codes and the Gas Utility Company may be used for underground gas main service. 2.4 Fittings shall be 150 lb. malleable iron, screwed, or schedule 40 black steel, welding. REMODEL PROTOTYPE (DEV) 2.5 Unions in sizes 2' and smaller shall be 150 lb. malleable iron, bronze or brass seat, ground joint, screwed. Unions 2 -1/2' and larger shall be 150 lb. flanged. 2.6 Each gas tired item of equipment shall be equipped with an isolation valve, dirt leg, and union connection to the units gas train. 2.7 A main shut off (house) valve shall be provided at the main gas riser. for interior risers, the house valve shall be located inside the building. 2.8 Refer to Section 15B for valve specifications. 2.9 Provide gas pressure regulators approved by Gas Utility Company and Local Codes when indicated on the drawings andlor when the delivered gas pressure exceeds the allowable inlet pressure of the installed equipment. Pressure regulators shall be installed on the exterior of the building and shall be equipped with internal relief. Regulators shall be installed to prevent relief port from being blocked by water, ice, or dirt. 3. FLUE VENTS 3.1 Unit heaters and similar gas -fired units shall be vented with property sized Type B, double wall gas vent complete with roof cone, sleeve cap, storm collar, UL listed storm proof cap, and accessories as required for proper function and compliance with NFPA Standards and governing Codes or regulations. Gas vents shall be Metalbestos, Hart & Cooley, or Metal Fab. Flue vent installation shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations. 4. EMERGENCY E NGIN , ENERATOR (WHEN D TH PR 4.1 Extend gas - piping to the emergency engine generator and provide all mechanical and piping work as required to place the fuel system for the unit into proper operation. 4.2 All work shall conform to the manufacturer's written recommendations and installation manual. 4.3 The pipe size indicated on the drawings shall be extended full size to the unit gas train. The Contractor shall provide a local full size shut -off valve and dirt leg and union or flanged connection to the unit gas train. The Contractor shall install all specialty valves and devices shipped loose with the generator. The primary PRV shall be omitted when consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4.4 Gas piping between the building and the engine generator shall be routed above ground as indicated on the drawings and shall be corrosion protected as specified herein above. - END OF SECTION - 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' REMODEL PROTOTYPE :` ^,:.::CT44i4"1 ' \.^F '• i1iG I��It iltiii PSm Vit�rsa4uWtMf%tl .. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 'SECTION 15G -1 DIVISION 15 ALL WORK UNDER THIS SECTION 15G IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF CODE CONSULTANTS, INC., ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI (CCI). ALL INQUIRIES REGARDING FIRE PROTECTION WORK, INCLUDING RELATED SITE FEATURES, SHALL BE DIRECTED TO: CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. 760 OFFICE PARKWAY ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI 63141 ATTENTION: MR. JOE KOLODZIEJ PHONE: (314) 991 -2633 ALL SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL DATA RELATED TO THE FIRE PROTECTION WORK SHALL BE SENT DIRECTLY TO MR. KIRN AT CCI AS ABOVE. 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS PART I: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Fire Protection Contractor (FPC) shall provide all required labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for a complete and operational fire protection system for the existing and remodeled areas of the Toys 'R' Us store as hereinafter described. B. C. A. B. The entire fire protection service installation shall comply with the regulations of the purveyor of water and local building codes. The FPC's work shall begin at the base of the existing sprinkler riser and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Fees and permits. 2. Demolition of existing overhead sprinkler piping for those remodeled areas as required. 3. Remodeled wet pipe sprinkler system for those remodeled areas as required. 4. Maintain existing wet pipe, dry pipe, or antifreeze spnnkler system for the vestibule area as required. Relocate sprinklers as required by the new ceiling. 5. Coordination of work and schedules with other trades. D. Interior Work - Provide the Following: 1. Overhead pipe, fittings, hangers and sprinklers. 2. Carry the Pre -Sales sprinkler spacing and branch line sizes 15' -0" beyond the new limits of Pre - Sales. 3. Demo and remove sprinklers which become closer than 6' -0" on center when walls are removed by the remodel. Plug unused outlets and /or re -space sprinklers. 4. Add sprinkler protection as required when new walls create obstruction and spacing exceeds the maximum allowed by NFPA 13. E. It is intended that the specification shall describe and provide for a working installation complete in every detail, and all items necessary for such complete installation shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned herein. 1.03 REFERENCES A. All work shall be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and referenced design standards. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA SHALL BE STRICTLY PER THIS SPECIFICATION. Remodeled automatic sprinkler system to provide fire protection for the existing and remodeled areas of the Toys "R" Us store. TOYS "R" US/1999 REMODEL C. HYDRAULICALLY DESIGNED SYSTEM; 'SECTION 15G -1 1. SALES AREA AND PRE $ALES (MEZZANINE STORES): Maintain existing protection in accordance with NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems, for storage to 12 ft. The minimum design criteria shall be as follows: • Density - 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. • Operating Area - 1,500 sq. ft. • Sprinkler Spacing - 130 sq. ft. maximum • Temperature Rating - 165EF. • Hose Stream Allowance - 250 gpm. 2. SALES AREA: Maintain existing protection in accordance with NFPA 231, Standard for General Storage, for storage on shelves of Class IV Commodity to 15 ft. The minimum design criteria shall be as follows: • Density - 0.21 gpm/sq. ft. • Operating Area - 2,000 sq. ft. • Sprinkler Spacing - 130 sq. ft. maximum • Temperature Rating - 286EF. • Hose Stream Allowance - 500 gpm. 3. ERE-SALES AREA AND 15' -0" BEYOND: Maintain existing protection in accordance with NFPA 231C, Standard for Rack Storage of Materials, for storage on racks of Class IV Commodity to 15 ft. The minimum design criteria shall be as follows: • Density - 0.35 gpm/sq. ft. • Operating Area - 2.000 sq. ft. • Sprinkler Spacing - 100 sq. ft. maximum. • Temperature Rating - 286EF. • Hose Stream Allowance - 500 gpm. 4. OFFICE. BREAK ROOM AND VESTIBULE AREAS: Maintain existing ordinary hazard protection in accordance with NFPA 13. Installation of Sprinkler Systems. The minimum design criteria shall be as follows: Density - 0.15 gpm/sq. ft. Operating Area - 1,500 sq. ft. Sprinkler Spacing - 130 sq. ft. maximum. Temperature Rating - 165EF Hose Stream Allowance - 250 gpm. 4. FPC shall provide waterflow test for hydraulically designed system. E. Maintain existing fire department connection. 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS 'SECTION 15G -2 F. The FPC is to provide all necessary offsets, raises or drops in main or branch line piping and auxiliary drains required by building conditions. G. The FPC shall examine the job conditions and verify all measurements, distances, elevations, clearances, pipe sizes, etc., before submitting proposal. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment and components not specifically specified shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for fire protection systems installation. B. FPC shall be licensed and /or registered FPC and/or P.E. by the City or State as required. 1,06 REGUI.ATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All work shall meet the requirements of the Owner, authority having jurisdiction, Architect and Code Consultants Incorporated (CCI). B. The FPC shall pursue any approvals or interpretations of the design documents except through the office of CCI. C. Sprinkler piping shall not be concealed where it is inaccessible unless inspected by a representative of the authority having jurisdiction. D. Any work performed prior to the satisfactory review by CCI and approval by the authority having jurisdiction will be solely at the FPC's risk. E. The system shall not be accepted until final testing and receipt of the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate has been obtained. 1.07 S MITTALS A. Submit to CCI the following: 1. Two (2) reproducibles of each shop drawing. Submittal must be comprehensive of entire project, complete in all detail. 2. Five (5) sets of the manufacturer's literature on all system equipment. 3. Five (5) sets of hydraulic calculations. Calculations shall include peaking information (if hydraulically calculated system). CCI will review this submittal for consistency with this specification. B. After the satisfactory review by CCI, the FPC shall provide submittals to the authority having jurisdiction for approval. C. The FPC shall be responsible for responding, in writing, to any comments from the authority having jurisdiction within ten (10) working days after the receipt of their comments. Copies of the response shall be sent to the Owner and CCI. 1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Upon completion of construction, the FPC shall submit two sets of reproducibles and four sets of prints of the as built" drawings to the Owner. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA TOYS "R" US/1999 REMODEL A. Upon completion of construction, the FPC shall submit two sets of equipment warranties and two sets of operating and maintenance instructions to the Owner. 1.10 WARRANTEE A. The FPC shall repair all defective workmanship or replace all defective materials for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. Workmanship or equipment found to be defective during that period shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Overhead Pipe: Per local requirements and NFPA 13. B. ALL RISERS, FEED AND CROSS MAINS (AND BRANCH LINES) SHALL HAVE HYDRAULIC CHARACTERISTICS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN SCHEDULE 10 PIPE. 2.02 JOINING OF PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All pipe shall be joined in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Fittings shall be 175 psi screwed or flanged black cast iron or approved equivalent, such as mechanical, grooved, plain end or welded connections. Where grooved FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS are used together they shall be of the same manufacturer. C. 2.03 A. B. C. D. 2.04 A. BUSHINGS SHALL NOT BE USED. HANGERS AND SLEEVES Sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through concrete floors, foundations and masonry walls. (Clearances around piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.) Provide primed escutcheon plates at all walls. All hangers to be of approved materials and spaced in accordance with NFPA 13 and the piping manufacturer's specifications. Provide earthquake bracing as required by NFPA 13. SPRINKLERS FINISHED CEILING AREAS: 1. Chrome pendent with 2 -piece escutcheon where light fixtures are surface mounted - These shall be equal to the Central Model "A" Center Strut Automatic Sprinkler with polished chrome 2 -piece escutcheon. 2. Chrome Recessed - These shall be equal to the Central Recessed Sprinkler with polished chrome escutcheon. B. EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE AREAS: 1. Brass Upright/Pendent - These shall be equal to the Central Model "A" Center Strut Automatic Sprinkler. C. Furnish within the existing spare sprinkler cabinet extra sprinklers. The types and temperatures of extra sprinklers shall be in proportion to those installed on the system Provide a spare sprinkler cabinet when one does not exist. 01/03/00 DIVISION 15' AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS 'SECTION 15G -3 _2.05 SIGNS A. Approved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at all main drains, auxiliary drains, inspector's test connections and control valves. B. The FPC shall provide a permanently attached placard indicating design criteria. This shall be permanently attached to the riser. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The FPC shall coordinate closely with all other trades to expedite construction and avoid interference. 3.02 PAINTING ANP PATCHING A. Painting of sprinkler piping is not included in this contract. B. Patching of any holes in existing walls or floors cut by the FPC shall be his responsibility if the holes cannot be covered by standard escutcheon plates so as to completely conceal the cuts where they would otherwise be exposed to view. C. Fire stop all penetrations of fire rated assemblies. 3.03 SYSTEM TESTS A. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Test shall be witnessed by the authority having jurisdiction and Owner's authorized agent. C. Preliminary testing procedures shall be conducted as mentioned above to assure proper operation when the final testing is performed. D. The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate as shown in NFPA 13 must be completed and submitted to CCI before final acceptance may be given. -END OF SECTION- TOYS "R" US/1999 REMODEL 01/03/00 DIVISION 16* PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 This Section covers materials, methods, and re- quirements common to all electrical work. 1.2 All electrical work shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of this Section and all Sections of Division 1. 1.3 When it becomes necessary to test the emergency lighting system in a store, under no circumstances is the electricity in the building to be turned off, then on again while the registers and related electronic hardware are plugged in. If this equipment is not unplugged the resulting surge will have very damaging effects on the Point -of -Sale system. This holds true whether the store is using Data Terminal System or National Cash Register equipment. 1.6 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 2. SCOPE OF WORK REMODEL PROTOTYPE BA • MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIF LENTS 'SECTION 16A -1 All the equipment must be brought down in an orderly fashion and put in an idle state prior to unplugging the electronic equipment related to the Point -of Sale system. Once this is accomplished the electricity may be turned off and on as often as necessary. If there are any questions pertaining to shutting the system down, contact Owner's Representative before turning the power off. Any shutdown shall be scheduled and coordinated with Owner's Representative. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to ¢ase Bid Products. Substitutions and Alternates. 1.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.6.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.6.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.7 The Contractor shall. during bidding. contact the Electric and Telephone Utilities to determine fees and charges and to verify all requirements. The fees and Charges shall be identified separately in the Contractor's proposal and shall be paid by the Contractor. During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the electric and telephone service for the project on a timely and proper basis. 1.8 Where applicable the Contractor shall provide seismic control on all devices per local codes, and diagrams shown on drawings. 2.1 The work covered by this Section of the Specifica- tions consists of providing all equipment, materials and labor in accordance with any code having jurisdiction. and performing all work as required for the complete execution of the Electrical Work as shown on the Drawings, herein specified, or both, and which without restricting the generality of the foregoing, shall include the following: 2.1.1 General Requirements. 2.1.2 Conduit and Fittings. Wire and Cable. 2.1.3 Any primary and secondary service work as required by the Utility Company, or as shown on the drawings, including service transformer grounding network. 2.1.4 Installation of Owner furnished service entrance equipment and switchgear. (CT enclosure furnished and installed by Contractor.) 2.1.5 Installation of all Owner furnished lighting fixtures and lamps, including provision of all hangers and supports. 2.1.6 Light and Power Systems including, EMS system, etc. 2.1.7 Mounting of starters and controls. 2.1.8 Grounding. 2.1.9 Telephone System: Work as required by the Telephone Company including service conduit requirements and grounding system. 2.1.10 Power wiring for HVAC and Plumbing work. 2.1.11 Installation of the Owner - furnished items listed in Section 1J. 2.1.12 Temporary light and power as required by the Contractor. 2.1.13 Excavation, trenching and backfill, Comply with applicable provisions of Division 2, Excavating, Grading and Backfilling. 2.1.14 The wiring of mechanical equipment shown on the mechanical drawings or outlined in the Mechanical Equipment Schedule and in the specifications shall include all power wiring, disconnect switches, etc. as required. Control wiring by Contractor unless otherwise noted. 2.1.15 Installation of Owner - furnished fire alarm and security system components. 2.1.16 Paddle fans provided by General Contractor at market cost through proprietary specification with Leading Edge, 2245 North West 72 Avenue, Miami, FL 33122, Telephone (305) 592 -9700, Contact: Jerry Bogage. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 The following items of work will be done in accor- dance with the appropriate Sections of the Specifications, or by the Utility Companies. 3.1.1 Finished painting. 3.1.2 Patching. 3.1.3 Concrete work and foundations. 3.1.4 Furnishing and installing of all telephone equipment and wiring. 3.1.5 Furnishing of automatic temperature controls (except as noted on the drawings), and electric heaters. 02/23/00 DIVISION 16• 3.1.6 Coordinate with utility company as to provision, setting and connection of transformer. 4.1 Materials - All conduits shall be hot dipped gal- vanized steel (cut and threaded before galvanizing). heavy wall aluminum. intermediate metal conduit (IMC), electrical metallic tubing (EMT), schedule 40 PVC (where permitted by Codes) complying with the standards of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). All conduit shall be approved by the Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). Conduit fittings and condulets shall be zinc - coated, threaded type for rigid conduit or intermediate metal conduit, set -screw type for EMT up to 2" size or match the conduit for plastic. Conduits shall be as manufactured by Southwire Co., Wheatland Tube Co., Allied Tube, Carton, Triangle, or Robroy; fittings by Southwire Co., Carlon, Steel City, Thomas & Betts. Robroy, or Appleton, except as otherwise noted. 4.2 Applications 4.3 Installation REMODEL PROTOTYPE BASIC MI RIALS, METHODS AND REQUIREMEN 'SECTION 16A -2 4.2.1 Galvanized steel, aluminum rigid conduit or intermediate metal conduit line shall be used for the following: 4.2.1.1 All exposed conduit housing 480 volt feed- ers from finished floor to a point 10' -0" above finished floor. 4.2.1.2 All underground conduit and conduit embedded in concrete (galvanized steel only). 4.2.1.3 All conduit exposed to weather. 4.2.1.4 All conduit 2 -1/2" and larger. 4.2.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) or Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be used for other applications not stipulated above. 4.2.3 Plastic pipe (schedule 40) conduit by Carlon may be used in lieu of rigid conduit where under concrete slabs or embedded in the slab where permitted by Codes. 4.2.4 Plastic pipe heavy wall (schedule 40) conduits by Carlon may be used in lieu of rigid steel conduits in concrete encased duct banks. 4.2.5 Where non - metallic conduit is used, install green insulated copper grounding conductor. 4.3.1 Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to cabinets, pull or junction boxes and shall be secured to all boxes with tocknuts and bushings in such manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout. 4.3.2 Where EMT and rigid conduit enters or leaves outlet boxes, cabinets, safety switches, tap boxes, motor controllers. etc., other than those having threaded hubs, a standard locknut shall be used on the outside of the box, and a locknut and bushing used on the inside. Bushings 1" and larger shall be of an approved insulated type. 4.3.3 Under no circumstances shall conduits or fittings be supported from or anchored to the roof deck, or piping. 4.3.4 All conduit shall be fastened securely in place with approved straps and hangers in sufficient number to prevent movement of any part of the conduit. This 4. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS includes conduit installed in forms before concrete is poured. Where exposed conduits are suspended, the hangers shall be Caddy (Erico), Gateway. or Grinnell, adjustable hangers with rod suspension, having a nut fitted in malleable iron or steel inserts. Inserts for hanger rods shall be installed in the slabs, and all hangers shall be installed at not more than 9' -0" centers. 4.3.5 All concealed conduits installed above suspended ceiling shall be run above bottom of joists, or otherwise coordinated with the other contractors so as to allow room for running ducts and piping. 4.3.6 Expansion fittings shall be provided at all conduits across a building expansion joint. Fittings shall be type "AX ", 'EX" or 'Tr as made by 0. Z. Electrical Company. Provide copper bonding jumper at each expansion fitting. 4.3.7 All conduit shall be run at right angles to and /or parallel to floors and walls. 4.3.8 Connection to Motorized Equipment - Connection to motorized equipment shall be made with flexible conduits having sufficient slack between rigid conduit and motor terminal in order to minimize vibration transmission. No rigid conduit shall be anchored to equipment which is subject to vibration transmission. Fittings shall be of the metallic ferrule, compression type. Minimum length of flexible conduit shall be 18 inches. Flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda "Sealtite ". 4.3.9 Open ends of conduits shall be capped with plastic cap or corked during roughing -in so as to prevent the accumulation of dust and moisture condensation in conduit. 4.3.10 When rigid metal conduit is joined, all conduit joints shall be made up tight and no running threads will be permitted. 4.3.11 All conduit shall have powdered soapstone blown through them before pulling of wires or wires shall be lubricated with soapstone paste. 4.3.12 When metal conduit is installed in direct contact with the earth, use "hot - dipped" galvanized type and coat the conduit and the joints with asphaltum. 4.3.13 Conduits in hazardous areas, as identified on the drawings, shall be installed with seal fittings between hazardous and non - hazardous areas in compliance with NEC Class 1 installation. All fittings, etc., shall be specifically approved by the Underwriter's Laboratories for use in such areas. 4.3.14 All conduit in finished areas shall be concealed. 4.3.15 Conduit runs shall be installed to avoid proximity to hot water pipes. Conduit shall be kept a minimum of 3" from such pipes, except where crossings are unavoidable. In such instances the conduit shall be kept at least 1" from the covering of the pipe. 4.3.16 Conduit connections to rod -hung fixtures shall be by means of flexible conduit from box firmly fastened to building structure. 4.3.17 Conduit in Pre -Sales Areas shall be mounted immediately below top chord of joists. 4.3.18 Pulling wire shall be installed in all empty telephone and computer system conduits ( #10 iron wire w /wood 02/23/00 t. DIVISION 16' block at ea. end) 5. WIRE AND CABLE 5.1 Types 5.1.1 Unless otherwise noted or specified, all power wiring shall be NEC approved type for 600 volt and shall be UL listed. 5.1.2 All wire #10 AWG and larger shall be stranded copper. All wire #12 and smaller shall be solid copper. 5.1.3 Conductors shall have insulating rating complying with the following: Type or Letter Max. Operating Application (NEC) Temo.Deg.F. Branch Circuits THHN OR THWN 140 (No. 14 thru No. 10 AWG) Feeder Circuits THHN THWN (No. 8 AWG and larger) Branch Circuits HHN OR XHHW (within 3" of ballasts in fixtures) 5.2 Wire Sizes 5.2.1 Minimum wire size for branch circuits shall be #12 AWG except that home runs longer than 100 feet for 120/208 system and 200 feet for 227/480 volt system in actual wire length from panel to Toad shall be minimum #10 AWG. 5.3 Color Coding Lines 240/120 (Phase) (Volt) REMODEL PROTOTYPE BA : MATERIALS, METHODS AND REQUII 1ENTS 'SECTION 16A -3 Unless a circuit breaker, switch, contactor, motor starter, etc., is marked otherwise, circuit conductors connected to the terminals must not operate more than a 60 degree C. ampacity for a breaker, switch, etc., rated 100 amps or less and must not operate at more that a 75 degree C. ampacity for a breaker, switch, etc., rated over 100 amps. 5.2.2 Size of wires larger than #12 AWG shall be as specified on plans or riser diagram, except as noted in Paragraph 5.2.1 above. 5.3.1 All branch circuit wires shall be color coded as follows (except as otherwise designated by local codes or as otherwise required to match existing color coding in existing facilities): 6.1 All outlet and switch boxes shall be NEC approved type and shall be sized to provide ample space for wiring 167 devices and conductors. Where the number of conductors and connections exceeds NEC limitations, box extensions shall be used. All boxes shall be standard galvanized or 194 sherardized sheet steel as manufactured by Steel City Electric Company or National Electrical Products Corporation. 208/120 480Y/277 (Volt) (Volt) A Black Black Orange B Red Red Yellow C Blue Brown Neutral White White Gray Grounding Green Green Green Wire 5.3.2 Feeder cables need not be color coded throughout the length, but may instead be identified by colored tapes at each junction box and at each end corresponding to the colors scheduled above. 5.3.3 Wiring for auxiliary systems and control wires shall be color coded by means of colored stripes or tracers. 5.4 Direct burial cable shall be unreeled into trench (not dragged) after all course stones have been removed from base of trench and sand fill laid down. Cables should be snaked slightly to allow for movement and settlement. 5.5 The use of BX cables (type A/C, armored cable) where permitted by code shall be acceptable in concealed spaces (excluding grouted cells of block walls) such as above suspended ceilings or within drywall partitions. 5.6 Manufacturers - All wires and cables shall be the products of American, Southwire Co, General Cable, Okonite or General Electric Co. 6. OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES 6.2 All ceiling outlet boxes for exposed work, acoustical tile ceilings, and furred plaster ceilings shall be 4 inch octagonal. 2 -1/8" deep. Provide plaster rings and /or fixture studs as required. 6.3 All boxes for concrete work shall be especially designed for this construction and shall be 3" deep for concrete thickness of 4" or more. Minimum concrete cover shall be 3/4 ". 6.4 Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4 inch square boxes or gang boxes, 1 -1/2" deep, and shall be provided with suitable extension rings and covers. Outlets shall be carefully aligned so that cover plates will be truly vertical and horizontal. 6.5 Exposed wall or column mounted outlet boxes for convenience receptacles and lighting switches shall be standard, single gang (minimum) utility conduit boxes. 6.6 All boxes shall be rigidly mounted and shall be equipped with suitable screw fastened covers. All raceways entering boxes shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Open knockouts or holes in boxes shall be plugged with suitable blanking devices. Boxes shall be cleared of all plaster, dirt, trash. etc., before the installation of any wiring devices and /or before the installation of cover plates. 6.7 All boxes for conduit system shall be installed flush with finished surface with allowable recess for adaptors so that coverplates may be pulled tight against the finished surface. 6.8 Outlet boxes or switch boxes mounted on opposite faces of a wall shall be offset to minimize sound transmission from one area to another. 6.9 Outlet boxes or switch boxes in finished areas shall be mounted flush with wall surfaces. 7. TAP. JUNCTION. OR PULL BOXES 7.1 Pull boxes shall be constructed of code gauge, welded and galvanized sheet steel. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements, and shall be furnished 02/23/00 DIVISION 16' BASIC MI RIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMEN without knockouts; holes for raceways shall be drilled on the job. Where necessary for boxes to be supported away from ceilings or beams. structural steel members shall be provid- ed for supports. 7.2 Where weatherproof sheet steel boxes are called for. the Contractor shall furnish and install code gauge, welded and galvanized sheet steel boxes with gasketed cover and all flanges designed to resist the entrance of rainwater. Use FS or FD cast boxes as made by Crouse Hinds, Appleton or Killark. 8. WIREWAYS AND TROUGHS 8.1 Underwriters approved metal raceways shall be furnished and installed complete with necessary complement of fittings, connectors and accessory parts. Wireway shall be of the 'lay -in' type without standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access as manufactured by Square D, Hoffman, Columbia or G.E. 8.2 Wireways shad be securely supported by approved methods at 5 ft. intervals. Number of conductors per wireway shall conform to the latest NEC requirements. 9. WIRING DEVICES 9.1 General - All wiring devices shall be of the type indicated below. Color of devices shall be white or as indicated by catalog numbers shown or as shown on drawings. 9.2 Switches - Finished Areas 9.2.1 Toggle, single pole. Hubbell 1221 -WHI. 9.2,2 Toggle, 3 -way, Hubbell 1223 -WHI. 9.2.3 Pilot Light - Neon lights and red Jewel, Hubbell 1221 PL. 9.2.4 SPST. SPDT, DPST, & DPDT switches as required for special applications shall be of the corresponding model switches as specified above. 9.3 Switches - Unfinished Areas 9.3.1 Toggle, single pole Hubbell 1221 •WHI, 20 amp. 9.3.2 Toggle, Hubbell 1223 -WHI. 20 amp. 9.4 Convenience Outlets - Finished areas 9.4.1 Duplex Hubbell 5352 -WHI, 125 volt, NEMA grounded. 9.5 Convenience Outlets - Unfinished areas 9.5.1 Duplex, Hubbell 5352-WHI. NEMA grounded, 20 amp. 9.6 Special Purpose Outlets as scheduled on drawings. 9.7 Cover Plates - Color of cover plates shall match devices. Where devices are indicated to be mounted side -by -side. multi -gang cover plates shall be used. 9.8 Manufacturer - Hubbell (except cover plates). 9.9 Plugmold as manufactured by wiremold #2000GB Series with receptacles on 6" centers color to be white. 9.10 I.G. wiring to be color orange. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 10. FUSES (When applicable) 12. STARTER AND CONTROLLER PROTECTION 13. PUSH BUTTON STATIONS 'SECTION 16A-4 10.1 When the feeders or equipment are to be protected with fusible devices, the fuses shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. 10.1.1 601 Ampere and Above - Bussman Type KRPC, Hicap (600V). 10.1.2 0 to 600A - Type LPNRK (250V) or LPSRK, (600V) Low Peak Class RK- 1. 11. MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS AND COMBINATION SWITCH - STARTERS 11.1 Except as otherwise noted, all magnetic motor starters and combination starters shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall install all power wiring from the panel or disconnect switch, through the starter and including final connections at the motor. 11.2 Magnetic starters shall be made by Square D, GE, ITE, or Allen Bradley. 11.2.1 Type • Full- voltage, non - reversing, across - the -line type, unless otherwise noted. 11.2.2 Overload Relays - Three (3) overload protection on all 3-phase motors. 11.2.3 Voltage of Holding Coils - Unless factory pre -wired for internal controls and interlock, all motor starters furnished by contractor shall have 120 volt or Tess holding coils with individual control transformer installed in each starter. 11.3 Enclosure - Of the proper type for indoor, outdoor, hazardous, dust tight, water tight applications. 11.4 For accessory motor control devices see control diagrams on the drawings. 11.5 All starters shall be furnished with control station and pilot light. If not indicated as being remote from the starter, control station and pilot light shall be furnished with starter, mounted in starter cover. 11.6 Fused and non -fused disconnect switches for combination switch - starters shall comply with specification, paragraph 14.3 herein. 11.7 Auxiliary contacts and devices required for interlock and temperature control work shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the control diagrams shown on the drawings. 12.1 Starters or controllers, whether furnished with the equipment or by Contractor, specifically requiring a certain type or size or overcurrent protection device shall be so furnished with such protection by the Contractor. 13.1 Push button stations for control of motors shall be heavy duty industrial oiltight type in conduit type surface enclosure. Pilot lights shall be complete with suitable jewels and, where control voltage requires, shall be equipped with transformer. Push button stations shall be Square D, GE, Allen Bradley, or ITE. 13.2 Push buttons shall be either momentary, maintained contact, or selector switch type, as required. Contractor shall verify with Other Contractors the proper type desired 02/23/00 DIVISION 16' prior to installation of these devices. 13.3 Unless otherwise noted or specified, all push button stations shall be provided by the Contractor. 14. FUSIBLE AND NON - FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCHES 14.1 Unless otherwise indicated, all manual operating and disconnect switches for motors and power equipment installed for this project shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. 14.2 For single phase, 1 HP or smaller motor, use Square D Class 2510, GE- CR101 or ITE, manual motor switch with pilot light where indicated. 14.3 For motor load larger than 1 HP, use Square D, GE or ITE horsepower rated switch. Switches shall be heavy duty, industrial type in NEMA type 1 general purpose enclosure, except as otherwise noted or required. Cover shall be interlocked with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in "off position. Switches exposed to weather shall be raintight NEMA 3R Type. 14.5 Refer to control diagrams on the drawings for accessory devices and additional data. 15. DEVISE; AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTING 15.1 Location of Outlets - Unless otherwise specifically dimensioned on the drawings, the location for lighting fixtures and outlets shown on drawings are only schematic. Contractor shall exercise great care in locating the outlets during roughing -in period. When the locations of outlets are shown in the detailed drawings on architectural elevations and details, these shall be followed. When in doubt, check with Owner's Representative for instructions prior to roughing -in. 15.2 Mounting BF : MATERIALS, METHODS AND REQUII i1ENTS *SECTION 16A -5 14.4 For single phase power load other than motor load, use 15A, AC switch up to 1000 watts, and safety switch thereafter, made by same manufacturer as In subparagraph 14.3. 15.2.1 Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top of panel or enclosure 94 inches above finished floor, shall be properly aligned, and shall be adequately supported independently of the connecting raceways. 15.2.2 Flush mounted switch outlets shall be mounted 4' -0" above floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Flush mounted receptacle, telephone and intercommunication outlets shall be mounted 18" above the finished floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Clock outlets shall be mounted as noted on the drawings. All outlets, wiring devices and boxes in finished areas shall be flush mounted. 15.2.3 Exposed boxes for receptacles in Pre -Sales areas shall be mounted 48" above the finished floor. 15.2.4 Wall or column mounted push- button stations shall be mounted 48" above floor. 15.2.5 Motor controllers shall be mounted with center line of operating lever 6' -6" maximum above floor. 15.2.6 All devices or equipment (except thermal sensors) mounted on steel columns shall be mounted on the column web (between flanges) for protection. 15.2.7 Lighting and receptacle panelboards shall be mounted with center of panel 4' -6" above finished floor, except that top most circuit operating handle shall not be more than 6' -6" above floor. Adjust as required. 15.2.8 All wiring devices, electrical enclosures and panels in finished areas shall be flush mounted. 15.3 Access to and work space around panels and equip- ment shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. 16. VIBRATION CONTROLS 16.1 General - It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install all conduits and boxes, avoiding direct contact with any piping or mechanical equipment which is the source of vibration or the cause of vibration transmission. Any installation by Contractor which does not comply with this general principle shall be corrected at contractor's expense. 16.2 Transformers 16.2.1 When connection is made with conduits and wires, a minimum of 18 inches of flexible conduit shall be used. 16.2.2 All floor mounted transformers shall be provided with rubber -in -shear mounts capable of providing approximately 0.25 inch of static deflection when loaded. 16.2.3 Small column- or wall - mounted power transformers shall be bolted to steel channels through rubber grommets. 16.3 Conduit Connection to Equipment 16.3.1 In general, all conduit connections to air conditioning, plumbing or building, or any rotating or oscillating equipment requiring electric motors. shall be made with flexible conduits. All flexible conduits shall be Anaconda "Sealtite ". 16.3.2 The length of flexible conduit required for each motor shall be based upon the requirements for a 360 degree loop in the conduit between the electrical motor and electrical box. When flexible conduit cannot be used due to space limitations, a neoprene or rubber bushing between the conduit and the electric motor to break the metal to metal contact may be installed. A flexible ground strap shall be provided to complete the electrical ground where required. 16.4 Ballasts for fluorescent, metal halide, high pressure sodium or mercury vapor lighting fixtures: 16.4.1 Where used inside of building, ballasts shall carry a rating of "A" whenever commercially available. 16.4.2 Remotely mounted ballasts where required will be shown on drawings. 16.4.3 Ballasts shall be high power factor. 16.5 Holes and Openings - Openings around conduits, wireways, etc., where walls or floors are pierced shall be wrapped with fiberglass insulation and shall be grouted on both sides of the opening. Grouting shall be made flush with finished surfaces. 16.6 Isolator Description and Manufacturers 16.6.1 Types of Isolators REMODEL PROTOTYPE 02/23/00 DIVISION 16' 16.6.1.1 To be used for isolation of transformers: Molded neoprene units equipped with leveling bolts. Units shall be Mason Industries Type 'ND', Amber Booth or Consolidated Kinetics Corporation sized for .35 inch static deflection. 16.6.1.2 Type W - To be used for isolation of switchboards or control cabinets. 16.6.1.3 Loading of molded neoprene pads shall be limited to a static deflection of 0.03 to 0.06 inch. The area of pad shall be selected to match the load with manufacturer's recommended unit loading. An auxiliary steel plate may be required to distribute the load uniformly over the pad area.17. EQUIPMENT. RACEWAY AND WIRING IDENTIFICATION BASIC Mi RIALS, METHODS AND REQUIREMEN 'SECTION 16A -6 17.1 General - All interior exposed raceways, wiring, and equipment shall be suitably identified by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide access to and shall open boxes, etc., as required, at time of final Inspection to satisfy Owner's Representative that the proper identification procedures for conductors, etc., have been adhered to. 17.2 Boxes and enclosures for emergency circuits shall be marked with red labels saying 'EMERGENCY" or in some other manner made clearly identifiable to Electricians or maintenance personnel. 17.3 Conductors 17.3.1 All conductors on circuits 600 - volts and below shall be color coded as specified in Section 16A -5. Color coding shall be by means of colored insulating material, colored braid or jacket over the Insulation, or by means of suitable colored permanent, non - aging, insulating tape equal to Scotch #471 to "Texcel 98' applied to conductors at each outlet, cabinet, or junction point. 17.3.2 A description of the color coding shall be permanently posted at each branch - circuit panelboard using the method described in paragraph 17.4.1 in section 16A of these specifications. 17.4 Control and Power Distribution Equipment 17.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install engraved laminated micarta nameplates. Lettering shall be approximately 1/16 to 1/8 inch thick and 1/2 to 3/4 inch tall. Plates shall be white surface and black core to produce black letters. Where equipment is not suitable for mounting the nameplate thereon, by bolting or riveting, the Contractor shall furnish a No. 14 gauge steel plate, painted black, to which the nameplate shall be bolted or riveted and which shall be suitably fastened to the equipment or mounted immediately adjacent thereto. 17.4.2 All push button stations, control switches, selector switches, motor controllers, air circuit breakers or safety switches, etc., shall be provided with nameplates as described in the previous paragraph. Such nameplates shall clearly identify by name the equipment controlled and shall state any special operating instructions which may be indicated on the drawings. All nameplate designations shall be subject to the approval of Owner's Representative. 17.4.3 All factory built control panels, breaker panels. etc., shall be equipped with suitable nameplates as specified under these individual headings. Service REMODEL PROTOTYPE 18. TESTS entrance equipment shall have a nameplate on each branch feeder protection device. 18.1 Prior to the start -up of any system, Contractor shall carefully check all devices and manufacturer's instructions for the proper procedure of start -up. 18.2 Check service entrance voltages and inform electric utility of any over - voltage or under - voltage conditions. Check ground conditions and grounding resistance. Check system for proper phasing. 18.3 Balance all single phase loads at panelboards. The total connected load on each leg of the panel shall not vary more than 10 percent. If they vary more than 10 percent the branch circuit connections shall be redistributed at the panels by exchanging the circuit wires from the branch circuit protective devices until the above conditions are satisfied. 18.4 Replace all burned out lamps and ballasts with Owner furnished lamps and ballasts at the completion of work. 18.5 Check all auxiliary systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions prior to operating systems. 18.6 Make all necessary field adjustments and set all protective relays and devices in accordance with instructions provided by the Owner. Fully coordinate all external connections to the equipment with the equipment manufacturer. 18.7 Contractor shall megger each motor winding before energizing the motor. The insulation resistance shall be recorded based on winding temperatures and voltage information furnished by Owner. Contractor shall submit recorded insulation resistance and notify Owner of all motors with low insulation resistance in order that these motors may be replaced. 18.8 Contractor shall perform such tests as are required by utility on service entrance cables. 19. OPERATING TEST 19.1 In addition to any other tests herein specified, the systems, after completion, shall be tested in operation for at least fifteen (15) days and shown to be in satisfactory operating condition. 19.2 Should any of the equipment or apparatus, furnished by the Contractor, require the service of a Factory Representative for installation or placing in proper service and /or adjustment, the Contractor shall provide same without additional cost to the Owner. 19.3 The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner three (3) sets of instruction books and spare parts list, bound in brochure form, covering each item of equipment furnished under the contract. See Division 1B of these specifications. 20. CLEANING 20.1 During construction, for all work furnished and /or installed under his contract, Contractor shall clean and /or protect interiors of all equipment devices, raceways, etc., from dust, dirt, cuttings, or other foreign matter before closing of finished work. 21. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 02/23/00 DIVISION 16' 21.1 The Contractor shall arrange with the utility company to provide a temporary construction service for temporary light and power. Location to be at the Contractor's field office remote from the building. 21.2 The Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary panel at the above location. Temporary light stringers with double pigtail sockets and temporary power stringers and outlets shall be installed by the Contractor as required by the Contractor for the various trades. 21.3 The Contractor shall lamp all sockets originally and shall maintain system during working of all trades. Subsequent tamping and fuses shall be furnished by the Contractor. 21.4 The Contractor shall pay for all energy consumed and any other charges by the Utility Company. 21.5 The Contractor shall remove all temporary equipment and wiring when it is no longer required and when directed to do so by the Owner. 22. PROTECTION_AND INSTALLATION 22.1 All electrical equipment and materials stored on the site shall be suitably sheltered from the elements. All materials and items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces. All equipment shall be protected against dirt, water, and corrosive or mechanical damage, and theft. 22.2 All electrical systems and equipment shall be stored, protected, installed, tested, adjusted, and started up in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and instructions. Each Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of any conflict between any requirement of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's instructions and shall receive the Engineer's written instructions before proceeding with the work. Any work that does not comply with the manufacturer's instruc- tions or such written instructions from the Engineer shall be corrected by the Contractor at no Increase in the contract amount or additional cost to other trades. 22.3 If the size of any conduit, conductor, switch, breaker, enclosure or related accessories or the location of any fixture or device is not clearly evident on the Drawings, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with the work. 22.4 All electrical equipment shall be installed in a rigid and secure manner and shall be installed plumb, level, and square with the building, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE BP MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIF TENTS 'SECTION 16A -7 02/23/00 DIVISION 16* TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS `SECTION 168 -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 The work under this Section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of the following: Section 16A BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS. AND REQUIREMENTS. 1.2 All work covered in this section of the specifications shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1.3 Refer to Civil Drawing for site utilities, miscellaneous work, and coordination with the exterior work of other contractors. 2. SYSTEM VOLTAGES 2.1 Incoming service and interior power distribution shall be 3 phase, 4 wire, 277/480 volts. 2.2 The majority of interior and exterior lighting shall be wired from 3 phase, 4 wire, 277/480 lighting panels. 2.3 Major HVAC equipment shall be wired 3 phase, 3 wire. 480 volts. 2.4 Convenience receptacles, light tracks and miscellaneous lighting and power shall be wired from 3 phase, 4 wire, 120/208 panelboards fed through step -down transformers, 2.5 All controls shall be wired at 120 volts, or less. 3. ELECTRICAL SERVICE 3.1 Incoming service shall be fed from the Utility Company's transformer as shown on the drawings. 3.2 Contractor shall coordinate with the Utility Company and with information shown on the drawings as to provision of the following: 3.2.1 Primary service, conduit, conductors, trenching and backfilling. 3.2.2 Transformer pad. 3.2.3 Transformer. 3.2.4 Connections of primary and secondary conductors to transformer. 3.2.5 Secondary conduit. 3.2.6 Secondary conductors. 3.2.7 Meter, meter enclosure, current and potential transformers and associated enclosures and conduit. 3.3 All work shall comply with the rules and regulations of the Utility Company. Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination with the Utility Company, including procurement of data, dimensions, and equipment. 3.4 Concrete encasement for conduit, and other concrete work required for electrical installation shall be provided by the Contractor. 4. GROUNDING 4.1 System Grounding - Connect bare copper conductors REMODEL PROTOTYPE (#2/0 minimum) from the neutral bus in the main distribution panel to the main water pipe, to nearest building column and to footing reinforcement. Install a bare copper jumper around each water meter. Where conduit is used to protect grounding conductor, bond the conductor to the conduit at both ends of the conduit. Provide copper bonding jumper across each joint in the underground water main for a minimum of 25 -feet of underground pipe. Contractor shall provide grounding to other suitable electrode to establish a path to ground not to exceed 6 ohms resistance. Coordinate with Other Contractors as required. 4.2 Transformers - Ground neutral of transformer sec- ondary to nearest suitable grounding electrode as defined by the inspection authority and the NEC. Provide bonding jumper to connect the neutral of transformer secondary to metal case enclosure of the transformer. 4.3 Equipment (Static) Grounding 4.3.1 The entire conduit network shall be electrically continuous throughout; use as the grounding system, except as otherwise specified, indicated on the drawings or required by Codes. 4.3.2 Panel Boxes, Motor Frames, and other electrically operated equipment shall be grounded per Code requirements and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4.3.3 Install a green grounding conductor inside all flexible conduit, connected to the equipment served and to the nearest outlet or junction box. Where permitted by Code, flexible conduit not over 6 -feet in length and termination fittings approved for grounding may be used in lieu of green conductor. 4.3.4 AU convenience receptacles shall be of the grounding type: ground to conduit network or to the isolated ground conductor. 4.4 Grounding Conductors - size per NEC and/or local Code. 4.5 Grounding of lighting fixtures - Incandescent lighting fixtures must be installed in accordance with the grounding requirements of the National Electric Code. 4.6 Ground telephone system as required by the Tele- phone Company. 5. MAIN SWITCH. MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL (MOP) 8 POWER PANEL (PP) 5.1 Receive, handle, unload and install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where shown on the plans, Owner - furnished main switch, service and distribution panelboard as shown on riser diagram. 5.2 Contractor shall be responsible for all field wiring within panels, between panel sections and between panel, main switch and CT enclosure. 5.3 Contractor shall provide CT enclosure in accordance with utility company requirements. 5.4 Contractor to verify that fuses are shipped with MDP. 6. LIGHTING TYPE PANELS 6.1 Receive, handle, store, install and connect, in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, Owner- furnished panels as shown on the schedules on drawings. 02/23/00 DIVISION 16' - ECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 6.2 Contractor shall be responsible for all field wiring within panels and between panels and contactors, etc. 6.3 Single pole circuits shall be numbered on the right. Multiple pole circuits shall be numbered with the lowest pole position (e.g. a 3 pole breaker on poles 8, 10 and 12 would be circuit #8). Lock -on devices shall be furnished on all nightlight circuits, timer circuits and any other circuits so indicated on drawings. 6.4 Contractor shall fill in the panel directory card with a typewritten description of each circuit and install the directory in the panel behind a clear plastic cover. Two (2) copies of each panel directory shall be furnished to the Owner's Representative at the completion of the work. 6.5 Each lighting and receptacle panelboard that is flush mounted shall be provided with three (3) one Inch empty conduits carried to a point above suspended ceiling and capped for future use. 7. GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER 7.1 Receive, handle, store, Install and connect, per manufacturer's instructions, Owner - fumished dry type transformers scheduled on drawings. 7.2 Contractor shall provide grounds for separately derived systems and equipment grounds. 8. ELECTRICAL WORK FOR PLUMQING AND FIRE PROTECTION 8.1 Electric Water Coolers: Hard wire as indicated on drawings. 8.2 Electric Hot Water Heaters: Wire units in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams and recommendations: provide equipment grounding. 8.3 When local authority requires a remote sprinkler shutoff, post indicator valve or other remote sprinkler indicating device, Contractor shall provide empty conduit and boxes from the building to the remote devices for use by the owner's alarm company. 9 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR HL/AC SYSTEM5 9.1 Provide electrical work as shown on the drawings for rooftop units, unit heaters, exhaust fans. etc. 9.2 Temperature control work shall be as indicated on the drawings. Contractor shall refer to Division 15 for coordination with Other Contractors. 10. LIGHTING CONTACTORS 10.1 Receive, handle, store install and connect Owner - furnished lighting contactors as scheduled on drawings. 11. GENERATOR (TRU Only) 11.1 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the complete installation of the emergency standby generator furnished by the Owner in accordance with all codes, requirements and manufacturer's standards. 11.2 The installation shall consist of, but no limited to, the following: 11.2.1 Receive equipment from the supplier (FOB, tailgate delivery to the job site). REMODEL PROTOTYPE 'SECTION 16B -2 11.2.2 Inspect and report any freight damage or shortages per provisions of Division 1 of these specifications. 11.2.3 Installation of all equipment as shown on the drawings, in accordance with all manufacturer's recommendations. 11.2.4 All electrical and mechanical hook -ups, including grounding. 11.2.5 Notify the supplier five (5) working days in advance of system start-up and check -out. 11.3 The equipment supplied by the Owner is limited to that indicated on the equipment checklist. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide and install all additional material necessary for a complete installation. 11.4 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility that the standby engine generator is installed ready for operation in all respects prior to the arrival of the supplier's representative for start -up. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer's representative to install and/or service the battery, lube oil and coolant as part of his start-up and check -out procedure. - END OF SECTION - 02/23/00 DIVISION 16' OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL CONTRACT WITH LIGHTOLIER/GENLYTE TO FURNISH SELECTED LIGHTING FIXTURES, AS SPECIFIED HEREIN AND NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 Products 1.1.1 Except as otherwise noted, all lighting fixtures shall be furnished by the Owner for installation by Contractor. 1.1.2 The fixture schedule on the drawings includes type designation, lamp data, mounting, catalog number and special features required. The catalog numbers specified in the schedule are for identification of fixture design only and do not necessarily describe the special or optional features required. All special or optional features shall be provided as called for in the schedule, or required for the application. 1.1.3 Equivalent fixtures by other manufacturers may be provided by Owner. 1.1.4 For uniformity in comparing bids, each contractors bid for ELC- provided fixtures (if any) shall be based on the fixtures specified on the fixture schedule. Equivalent fixtures by other manufacturers may be considered for approval only at the time of bidding. Refer to the General Requirements article regarding brands and substitutions. 1.2 Fixture installation 1.2.1 Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights indicated and as detailed on the drawings and shall be complete with all lamps, fittings, accessories, etc, for a complete finished installation. 1.2.2 Fixtures and /or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately support the complete weight of the fixture. Design of hangers and method of fastening other than shown on the drawings or herein specified shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. Neither fixtures nor conduit shall be supported from roof deck. Contractor shall provide supplemental rigid structural members as re- quired to span between roof framing members for support of lighting fixtures and /or outlet boxes. 1.2.3 Fixtures mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to a fixture stud in the outlet box. Hickies or extension pieces shall be installed where required to facilitate proper installation. 1.2.4 Pendant fixtures within the same room or area shall be installed plumb and at a uniform height from the finished floor. Adjustment of height shall be made during installation. 1.2.5 Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate light leakage between the frame and the finished surface. 1.2.6 Fixture housing, frame or canopy shall provide a suitable cover for the fixture outlet box or fixture opening. 1.2.7 Fixtures located on the exterior of the building shall be installed with nonferrous metal screws finished to match the fixtures. 1.2.8 Fixtures shall be supported at the ends of each fixture with supports not to exceed 8 foot spacing. REMODEL PROTOTYPE LIGHTING SYSTEMS 'SECTION 16C -1 1.2.9 Surface mounted fixtures longer than two (2) feet shall have one (1) additional point of support besides the outlet box fixture stud when installed individually. 1.2.10 16 foot units shall be shipped in two eight foot unit sections and shall be field assembled. 1.2.11 All units shall be furnished without "pigtail" leads from the fixture. 1.2.12 Internal wiring shall be capped off within the fixture ready for the Contractor connection from the junction box. 1.2.13 Fixtures designed for use in conjunction with the inverted T -bar ceiling suspension systems shall be of the lay -in type supported entirely by the T -bars and retained by suitable hold -down clips. Where required by seismic or other codes, Contractor shall provide for each fixture a slack wire at each of two diagonal corners. When installing fixtures, the Contractor shall notify the Ceiling Contractor should it appear that additional T -bar support will be required to prevent sag or damage. 1.2.14 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to bring all lighting fixtures to operating condition (refer to ballast replacement information supplied by Owner). 1.2.15 Fixture location shall be coordinated with structural framing system. Owner's representative shall be notified of any conflicts. Contractor shall, without additional cost to Owner, relocate any fixtures so in conflict. 1.3 Ballasts - All ballasts for fluorescent and high intensity discharge lamps shall be factory pre -wired and shall comply with the following minimum standards, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified in the fixture schedule. 1.3.1 High power factor - minimum 90 %. 1,3.2 UL labeled and CBM certified. 1.3.3 Class "P ", with built -in automatically resetting thermal protector. 1.3.4 Casing constructed with positive prevention of dripping compound. 1.3.5 Lowest manufacturer's sound level and case temperature rise rating. 1.3.6 Low energy type. 1.3.7 Manufacturer: Universal. 1.4 Lamps 1.4.1 Lamps for Owner furnished fixtures shall be furnished by Owner. Lamps for Contractor furnished fixtures shall be furnished by Contractor. Contractor shall receive, unload, store, protect from damage, uncrate, and install all lamps. Contractor shall provide lamps for temporary construction service lighting. 1.4.2 Immediately following the award of contract, the Contractor shall provide a complete lamp list stating the quantities of each type of lamp required and submit three (3) copies of the list to the Owner's Representative. 1.4.3 Install lamps at the time of fixture installation, at the appropriate time when the building is enclosed for finishing work, or as otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative. 01/03/00 DIVISION 16* LIGHTING SYSTEMS 'SECTION 16C -2 1.4.4 Replace all burnt -out lamps when the building, or any portion thereof, is turned over to the Owner for occupancy. Lamps furnished by Owner for re- tamping. 1.5 Concrete bases for exterior lighting standards shall be provided in accordance with the technical provisions of Division 3A of these specifications. 2. LIGHT TRACK 2.1 All Light Track including fittings, shall be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor, as detailed on the drawings. 3. LIGHTING CONTROLS 3.1 Exterior Lighting - Site lighting and exterior building lighting shall be wired through EMS system and lighting contactors as diagramed on the drawings for on and "off control. • END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 16' SPECIAL & AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 'SECTION t6E -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 All work under this Section of the specifications shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of: SECTION 1B - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS. 1.2 All work covered in this Section of the specifications shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. 2. TELEPHONE SYSTEM 2.1 Provide empty conduit underground, sized and located as indicated on the drawings, from the telephone relay equipment in the office area to a point near the property line designated by the telephone company. Verify location and routing with the telephone company and the Owner's Representative prior to roughing -in. Provide any pull boxes, junction boxes, etc., required by the Telephone Co. 2.2 Provide for telephone service to individual outlets. Where required by Codes. provide 3/4" empty conduit from each telephone location to telephone relay equipment as indicated on the drawings. Refer to separate paragraphs and the drawings for further requirements. Verify locations of individual outlets with Owner's Representative. 2.3 Provide for telephone service in finished areas, private offices, etc., by means of a flush mounted outlet box with 3/4" EMT extended from telephone equipment backboard to ceiling or joist area. The telephone company will furnish and install all wiring. 2.4 Provide a duplex grounded receptacle at the telephone relay equipment, and provide grounding as required by the Telephone Company. Provide 3/4" plywood backboard for mounting telephone equipment. 2.5 Provide a #6 insulated grounding conductor in conduit back to service ground per requirements of Telephone Company. 2.6 The entire installation shall comply with the Telephone Company's regulations and standards and all local Codes. 3 SECURITY SYSTEM CONDUIT 3.1 Provide junction boxes , conduit and cabling as indi- cated on Drawings. 3.2 Where required by Codes, provide 3/4" empty conduit from security system outlet locations as shown on the drawings, to security terminal location as directed by Owner's Representative. 4. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 4.1 Provide a complete system of conduits and wiring as shown on the drawings. Wiring shall be continuous between devices and equipment with NO splices. 4.2 Install all owner - furnished devices and equipment associated with the Energy Management System except as noted on the drawings. For a complete list of owner - furnished equipment see drawing EMS1. 4.3 Make all 480V, 120V and 24V terminations except as noted on the drawings. 4.4 Coordinate with telephone installer for installation of communications. 4.5 Coordinate with other Contractors for terminations within RTUs and other selected terminations as noted on the drawings. 4.6 Verify operation of contactors and associated relays using manual toggle switches within the Novar Executive Controller. 4.7 All EMS - related work shall be complete no later than the date of Substantial Completion. 5. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 5.1 The Fire Alarm System shall be comprised of Pull Stations, Hom /Strobe units, Waterflow Switches, Tamper Switches, and Low Building Temperature device. 5.1.1 Owner will purchase all Fire Alarm System hardware, except flow and tamper switches, including backboxes and fire alarm cable. The Contractor will provide all required conduit (and junction boxes) and will install all fire alarm wiring. 5.1.2 The Contractor shall make all final wiring terminations in accordance with the Silent Knight installation manual. 5.1.3 The Contractor must have at least 3 years previous experience installing, troubleshooting and repairing Fire Alarm Systems and must be qualified to install and repair all specified Fire Alarm System equipment. 5.2 Pull Stations shall be wired to the Silent Knight 5207 fire panel on two separate zones. These zones shall be designated as "Front of store" and "Rear of store ". Pull Stations are to be mounted 48" to the center of the pull station, above finished floor. 5.3 Waterflow and Tamper Switches (to be provided by Contractor) and Low Building Temp. device shall be wired to the Silent Knight 5207 as three separate, supervised zones. 5.4 Low Building Temp. device should be located at the Fire Sprinkler Riser location. Setting to be determined by Owner's OSPM. 5.5 Hom /Strobes should be wired using two of the four output circuits proved in the Silent Knight panel. Divide total strobes by 2, 'h on one circuit, 'h on the other. 5.6 Special Notes 5.6.1 Fire alarm requirements shall be coordinated with local officials and codes. Verify with Owner /Architect. 5.6.2 Submit fire system shop drawings (2 copies) to the Architectural Consultant for approval. Subtitle shall include all equipment, materials, and layout. 5.6.3 Waterflow and tamper devices are to be supplied by the Sprinkler Contractor. 5.6.4 Flex conduit from wall to valves shall be in Sealtite. Provided by Contractor. 5.6.5 Coordinate with Sprinkler Contractor. Alarm System Contractor, and Owner's Project Manager. 5.6.6 If local code dictates that the Fire Panel be monitored independent of the Morse panel, a Silent Knight 5230 Annunciator will be required and furnished by Contractor. REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 DIVISION 16' ECIAL & AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 'SECTION 16E -2 5.6.7 Contractor shall complete all programing of the fire alarm system. 5.6.8 Fire alarm system shall be installed by contractor certified to complete this work when applicable. 5.7 Refer to drawing EFP -1 and E6 for additional information. 5.8 The complete installation shall confirm to the applicable sections of NFPA -72, local code requirements and the National Electrical Code. 5.9 The Contractor shall perform a test of the Fire Alarm System in the presence of the local fire subcode official. Testing shall be as prescribed by the fire subcode official. Before meeting with the fire subcode official, a pre -test shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the Silent Knight Installation manual. All troubleshooting, system and wiring tests, and repair shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 5.10 Items listed on drawing EFP -1 are supplied by Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for unloading the storing the Owner supplied equipment and checking it for damaged or missing components. Any damaged or short shipments must be reported to the CPM within 24 hours of receiving the shipment. Any costs associated with replacing equipment Identified AFTER the 24 hour period will be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivering all equipment to the jobsite. 5.11 The Contractor shall be responsible for all mounts and /or brackets needed to hang any /all equipment that are not provided by Owner (see equipment spec sheet). - END OF SECTION - REMODEL PROTOTYPE 01/03/00 _ ._ �_...� . __ -.._, PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: Original Plan Submittal DEPARTMENTS: Buil ng Division P P blic Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Approved Complete Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route REVIEWER'S INITIALS: o APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) CORRECTION DETERMINATION: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: 11111.111111111111111=MI MEW TYROL/II MX' Response to Correction Letter It Fire Prevention AWL 4.4' Structural Incomplete E Structural Review Required Approved with Conditions n DATE: 4 -03 -01 Response to Incomplete Letter r'iC X Revision # 1 After Permit Is Issued Plannin Division iV 4 -o ( Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 4-5-2001 Not Applicable C No further Review Required DATE: DUE DATE 5- 3-2001 C Approved Fr Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) ri REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: a•1=111111•1111111► DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) n DATE: Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 3- 3 c- O 1 0 Response to Incomplete Letter # 0 Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after Permit is Issued Project Name: . 1141 R 115 Project Address: lb • . a Contact Person: C 11419y1 5144 (� Entered in Sierra on W. ' 1• s • Di City of Tukwila Department of Community Development - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Plan Check/Permit Number: poi -032 Phone Number: Summary of Revision: Ye is TY Sheet Number(s): APR 0 3 2001 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: 08/30/00 CAS CO TO: City of Tukwila Dept. of Community Development 6300 South Center Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 clh WATRO.2001 Remodel Programt600603 Tukwila, WA\pem it 032901.doc cc: Jay Ross, TRU Paramus Vince Paolicelli, TRU Paramus Steve Grima, TRU Stockton PJH, WAB, LFD, CLH, ACT JCA/File (800603, Permit) Costa Mesa, California Dallas, Texas LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL 10877 Watson Road St. Louis Missouri 63127 Tel: (314) 821 -1100 • Fax: (314) 821 -4162 ROUTING Overnight COMMtir,ii DATE: March 29, 2001 RE: Toys "R" Us — No. 8002 Tukwila, WA Permit No. 001 -038 We are transmitting herewith the following: QUANTITY DESCRIPTION Four (4) Bonds Sheet RF1, Revision No. 1 REMARKS: This revised fixture plan is submitted as a revision the above already permitted project, Permit No. D01 -038. Feel free to contact this office with any questions. Yours very truly, C SCO (6da 60L_ aron M. Stevenson RECE!'. ED APR 0 3 2001 PERMIT C iiTEQ 0 0 38 Atlanta, Georgia Edison, New Jersey ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 4 -03 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter 4 X Revision # 1 After Permit Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Approved YYIXOUII txx PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP C n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Structural Ijeview Required C No further Review Required Approvec CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Fire Prevention Structural Incomplete with Conditions l Approved with Conditions C C Planning Division C Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 4-5-2001 DATE: DUE DATE 5 -3 -2001 Not Approved (attach DATE: < Not Applicable n C C omm nts) DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 4 -03 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: Original Plan Submittal DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works Complete LI Comments: Response to Correction Letter Fire Prevention Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route LI Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) N Approved n Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: ' / . DATE: 7 ( n CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved n Approved with Conditions REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Y`RROI1II [MN Y.1 Response to Incomplete Letter /i• X Revision it 1 After Permit Is Issued n Planning Division n Permit Coordinator C n DUE DATE: 4-5-2001 Not Applicable LI No further Review Required DUE DATE 5- 3-2001 n DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) n DATE: ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 4 -03 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter -it X Revision it i After Permit Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP n c Fire Prevention Structural Incomplete n Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) C Planning Division Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 4-5-2001 Not Applicable Ri No further Review Required DATE: 4. of DUE DATE 5-3-2001 Approved n Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: DUE DATE Approved ri Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: MIIAC JI( DOC Vr1 Complete LI Comments: Please Route PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 4 -03 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: Original Plan Submittal DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works Response to Correction Letter it TUES /THURS ROUTING: C REVIEWER'S INITIA n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved LI CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved '11M01111 D C Fire Prevention Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete [1] Structural Review Required Approved with Conditions C rl n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Response to Incomplete Letter X Revision it 1 After Permit Is Issued Planning Division Permit Coordinator No further Review Required DATE: e y ._' C y. -c DUE DATE 5- 3-2001 n n DUE DATE: 4 -5 -2001 Not Applicable n Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved Oro DEPARTMENTS: B it in D ivision 3401 Public Wgrks Complete Approved n II PLAN /ROU SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: XX Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Fire Prevention ,c, ' l - 2.1 Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route pi Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Approved with Conditions REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Approved with Conditions n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: 2 -13 -01 Response to Incomplete Letter ## Revision i After Permit Is Issued Planning Iu. 2 -17,'"-0( Permit Coordinator ■ DUE DATE: 2 -15 -2001 Not Applicable n No further Review Required n DATE: DUE DATE 3 -15 -2001 N ot Approved (attach comments) DATE: DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works Complete ) i - t el Comments: PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 2 -13 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: XX Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter if Response to Correction Letter It Revision It After Permit Is Issued Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required n No further Review ' equire REVIEWER'S INITIALS: gern DATE: 0 1 APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Fire Prevention Approved F7 Approve with Condition REVIEWER'S INITIALS: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved YRROUFI Ikk vn Approved with Conditions C REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Planning Division Permit Coordinator n n DUE DATE: 2- 15-2001 Not Applicable ri DUE DATE 3-15-2001 Not Approved (atta h co ments) DATE: DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: PERMIT NO.: DO 1036 BUTLDlNG ERMITS INSPECTIONS ❑ 00001 Progress Inspection Status ❑ 00002 Pre - construction ❑ 00003 Investigation ❑ 00004 OK to Occupy ❑ 00005 Remove Stop Work Order ❑ 00006 Follow -up ❑ 00007 Pre- Ivlove Inspection ❑ 00050 WSEC Residential ❑ 00060 WA Ventilation/Indoor AQC ❑ 00070 NLEA Inspection/Mpdufar Struct ❑ 00071 Mobile Home Tic Down Insp ❑ 00072 Marriage Lines ❑ 00090 Rested ❑ 00095 Footing Drains ❑ 00100 Foundation Footings ❑ 00200 Foundation Walls ❑ 00250 Foundation Insulation ❑ 00300 Concrete Slab/Slab Insulation ❑ 00350 Crawl Space 0 00400 , Shear Wall Nailing ❑ 00450 Plywood Wall Sheathing ❑ 00500 Roof Sheathing Nailing ❑ 00523 Plywood Deck Nailing ❑ 00550 Exterior Wall Sheathing ❑ 00600 Masonry Chimney 00610 Chimney Installation/All Types Framing 00750 0700 Roof /Ceiling Insulation ❑ 00800 Floor Insulation ❑ 00801 Wall Insulation ❑ 00802 Exterior Roof Insulation ❑ 00803 Gluing Inspection ❑ 00815 Lighting and Controls ❑ X0900 Suspended Ceiling 1000 Interior Wallboard Fastening 1001 Exterior Wallboard Fastening ❑ 01110 Pre -Move Inspection ❑ 01115 Motor Inspection ❑ 01120 Pre -Demo ❑ 01140 Pre - reroof 0101400 Final -Fire 01700 Final - Building 1900 Final - Reroof • ❑ 03100 Site Visit ❑ 04000 Special - Concrete ❑ 04001 Special -Bolts in Concrete ❑ •04001 Special- Mom/Resist Cone Frame ❑ '4003 Special -Reinf Steel Prestress 04004 Special- Welding 4005 Special -High- Strength Bolting ❑ 04006 Special - Structural Masonry ❑ 04007 Special -Reinf Gypsum Concrete ❑ 04008 Special - Insulating Cone Fill ❑ 04009 Special -Spray Fireproofing ❑ 04010 Special- Piling, Piers, Caissons ❑ 04011 Special- Shotcrete ❑ 040V Special - Grading, ExcavlFill ❑ 04013 Special- Retaining Wall ❑ 04014 Special- Panels ❑ 04015 Special -Smoke Control System : h.�7". •�� {�: t:' � in.4:;.'. :.'i. ;�.K .!C� TENANT NAME Ic CONDITIONS 0013 ❑ 0014 ❑ 0015 ❑ 0016 ❑ 0017 ❑ 0013 R us 01 No changes to plans unless approved by Bldg Div 0010 Special inspection required, notify Bldg Div 0011 Special inspector shall submit final signed report 0012 New ceiling grid & light fixture shall meet lateral bracing Partition walls attached to ceiling grid Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment Engineered truss drawings & caics shall be on site Exposed insulation backing material Subgrade preparation including drainage, excavation Statement from roofing contractor verifying tire �/ retardant class of roof �q 0019 All construction to be done in conformance w /approved ,/�� plans ❑ "No work shall be done in addition to those modifications..." ❑ 0002 Plumbing permits shall be obtained through King Co ❑ 0020 Structural observation shall be provided for this project ❑ 002 I All food preparation establishments must have King Co ❑ 0022 Fire retardant treated wood shall have flame spread of ❑ 0023 Notify Building Division prior to placing any concrete ❑ 0024 All spray applied fireproofing shall be special inspected ❑ 0025 All wood to remain in placed concrete shall be treated 0026 0027 0023 All structural masonry shall be special inspected Validity of Permit Rack storage requires separate permit 0003 Electrical permits obtained through L & I 0030 No occupancy of building until final insp by Bldg Div ❑ 0032. Remove all weeds, concrete, stone foundations, flat concrete ❑ 0036 Manufacturers installation instructions required on site ❑ "BTU maximum allowed per 1997 WA State Energy Code" ❑ 0035 Contact PW Div to obtain insp for water /sewer connect ❑ 0038 A C of 0 will be required for this permit *0039 Final approval for all TI w /in the limits of the SC Mall 0004 All mechanical work shall be under separate permit 0040 All construction noise to be in compliance with 8.2 TIvIC Nj eF 004 I Ventilation is required for all new rooms & spaces 0005 All permits, insp records & approved plans available ❑ 0006 All structural concrete shall be special inspected ❑ "Applicant shall obtain a separate plumbing permit from King Co" ❑ "Anchoring — All new construct and substantial improvement shall be anchored to prevent flotation" ❑ 0007 All structural welding shall be done by WABO certified inspector ❑ 0008 All high- strength bolting shall be special inspected ❑ 0009 Bolts installed in concrete shall be special inspected ❑ 0031 Comply with requirements of TMC 16.04 ❑ 0034 Removal of septic tanks require approval and compliance with King Co Health Dept. ❑ "Obtain required inspections from appropriate water & sewer districts" ❑ "Fuel burning appliances ❑ "Appliances, which generate...." ❑ "Water heater shall be anchored...." ❑ "Reroot" Plan Reviewer: Permit Tech: Date: Date: 3 -1 -0 ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 2 -13 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: XX Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter - Response to Incomplete Letter ;`# Revision if After Permit Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete E Comments: PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP n Structural Incomplete LI TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route LI Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Fire Prevention Approved n Approved with Copditions REVIEWER'S INITIALS: 'j ktlull 0(1C C Planning Division Permit Coordinator n C MEW DUE DATE• 2 -15 -2001 Not Applicable Ft No further Review Required DATE: DUE DATE 3-15-2001 Not Approved (attach comments) I I DATE: -7 // DUE DATE CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved n Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: C .-,.., ... � v�iir i PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 2 -13 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: XX Original Plan Submittal DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works Complete Via Comments: Response to Correction Letter t Revision If _ After Permit Is Issued TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route 4IIKOt n lxx VIP n C REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Fire Prevention Structural Incomplete n, Structural Review Required APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Response to Incomplete Letter Planning Division Permit Coordinator l l No further Review Required DATE: - � - C I Approved n Approved with Conditions [ Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: n DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 2-15-2001 Not Applicable Li DUE DATE 3- 15-2001 CORRECTION DETERMINATION: DUE DATE Approved j1 Approved with Conditions r7 Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works Complete ri Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved n uK OUIItxx' vn PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D01 -038 DATE: 2 -13 -01 PROJECT NAME: TOYS R US SITE ADDRESS: 16700 SOUTHCENTER PY SUITE NO: XX Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision If After Permit Is Issued n 1111 APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Fire Prevention Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete I I Please Route Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Response to Incomplete Letter # C C Planning Division Permit Coordinator n C n DUE DATE: 2-15-2001 Not Applicable No further Review Required DATE: 0 " I DUE DATE 3-15-2001 Approved n Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: Revision No. Date Received Staff Initials l Date i Staff ( Issued ► Initials Staff Initials Date Issued Summary of Revision: Received By: • Staff Initials �� ,.„} ..1. --- LI — —0 t x-7 �—/,,2-0/ Summary of Revision: } ,,,,,_ a ; � V-' . ""- �_1 R. r t ildt A A A i , .� -14:1 -r.,.., Received By: / ' / // S �/rl� .. Revision No. Date Received Staff Initials l Date i Staff ( Issued ► Initials f � Summary of Revision: Summary of Revision: Received By: Revision No. Date • Received Staff Initials Date Issued Staff Initials Summary of Revision: Received By: ROA PROJECT NAME: \ - L(S, PERMI ■1O:.. - '03 v Site Address: l h " 1 o So 0 -'v gi F. Original Issue Date: t REVISION LOG Revision No. Summary of Revision: Revision No. Summary of Revision: Date Received Date Received Staff Initials Staff Initials Received By: Received By: Date Issued Date Issued (please print)' (please print) (please print) (please print) (please print) ) Staff initials Staff Initials Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not he accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 5-30-0( ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # [" Revision # L after Permit is Issued Project Address: Contact Person: Summary of Revision: re vi City of Tukwila Department of Community Development - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Entered in Sierra on 3 -Dl Plan Check/Permit Number: _124:21 Project Name: - 1 OLj l (flop r5ou.li4 ee t .rte Phone Number: • Q TY Cr TUK?:'LA APR 0 3 2001 Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: h5 ocph •IT CSNTER 08 /30 /00 LICENSE DETAIL INFORMATION Form * * * * * * LICENSE DETAIL INFORMATION Current Filter: None Registration# or License REYMABCO27LP Name REYMAN BROS CONSTRUCTION INC Address 151 S 18TH ST Address City SPARKS State NV Zip 89431 Phone Number 7023560150 Effective Date 6/17/98 Expiration Date 11/30/01 Registration Status ACTIVE Type CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR Entity CORPORATION Specialty Code GENERAL Other Specialties UBI Number 601869610 *VIEW OWNER(S) FOR THIS LICENSE* *VIEW CONTRACTOR BOND /SAVINGS INFORMATION *CHECK INQUIRY FOR SUMMONS AND COMPLAINTS* * * * * * VIEW CONTRACTOR INSURANCE INFORMATION * * * New inquiry by CITY, NAME, PRINCIPAL OWNER NAME, NUMBER, UBI NUMBER or return to the L &I Construction Compliance Home Page http: / /www.lni.wa.gov/ contractors /TF2Form .asp ?license= REYMABCO27LP 3/19/01 STATE OF WASHINGTON DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Specialty Compliance Services Division P. O. Box 44000 Olympia, WA 98504 -4000 THE RESULT OF YOUR INQUIRY FOR LICENSE NUMBER SELECTED IS: * ** Page 1 of 1 November 6, 2001 Ms. Caron Stevenson 10877 Watson Road St. Louis, MO 83127 RE: Permit Application No. 001 -038 16700 southcenter Parkway Dear Permit Holder: City of Tukwila. Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director In reviewing our current records the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the Uniform Building Code and /or Uniform Mechanical Code, every permit issued by the Building Official under the provisions of this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days. Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: • Call the City Of Tukwila Permit Center at (206) 431 -3670 to schedule a progress / final inspection A progress inspection is intended to determine if substantial work has been accomplished since issuance of the permit or last inspection: or if the project should be considered abandoned. If such determination is made, the Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve a one -time extension up to 180 days. Extension requests must be in writing and provide satisfactory reasons why circumstances beyond the applicants control have prevented action from being taken. In the event you do not call for the above inspection or request and receive an extension prior to December 10, 2001, your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, Stefanfa Spencer Permit Technician Xc: Permit File No. D01 -038 Duane Griffin, Building Official Steven M. Mullet, Mayor 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 1/100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 -431 -3670 • Fax: 206- 431 -3665 Z W _J O O 0 N W W J H • U. W gQ D = a I- z ►- 0 z t- w • w U O - � H W W Fh t. O Z W co H 0 z fl aj ra yam sal ?sr weft fig Al a 'ear VIM raft al z a . I I— I— z W re 2 6 D -J U 00 CO 0 (OW WI —1 1— U) LL u j 0 g :J u. a co 0 I a I 1-0 z I— IIJ iji 2 D O 0 O co O — O I— U.I uj I I-- U. 1— — 0 ...; Z LLI U) C.) O 2: 0 z x0 ARCHITECTURAL KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION 1 EXISTING ITEM(S) / AREA TO REMAIN 2 EXISTING ITEM(S) TO BE REMOVED 3 EXISTING ITEMS) TO BE RELOCATED 4 RELOCATED ITEMS) 5 EXISTING WALL TO BE EXTENDED 6 EXISTING OPENING TO BE EXPANDED 7 INFILL TO MATCH EXISTING 8 NEW WALL, PARTITION OR CLOSET 9 NEW 3' -O MAN DOOR 10 NEW 4' -0" MAN DOOR 11 3' -6" IMPACT DOOR 12 4' -6 IMPACT DOOR 13 DUTCH DOOR (INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR) 14 V.C.T. REQUIRED 15 ELECTRICAL PANELS 16 SPRINKLER RISER 17 GAS RISER 18 DOMESTIC WATER RISER 19 COMPACTOR 20 GENERATOR 21 TRANSFORMER 22 ROOF LADDER / HATCH 23 CART RAIL 24 LINE OF MEZZ ABOVE 25 NEW LIFT 26 BALER 27 FIRE WALL Q FIXTURE PLAN KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION 1 REFUND / EXCHANGE AREA 2 REGISTRY KIOSK 3 FITTING ROOMS 4 JUVENILE REGISTRY DESK 5 MANAGER'S WORKSTATION 6 BENCH 7 RGD COUNTER 8 CPU COUNTER 9 STORAGE BIN 10 BIKE ASSEMBLY COUNTER 11 ROLLER CONVEYOR 12 VENDING MACHINES 13 KIDDIE RIDE 14 SLIDING "R" ZONE DOOR Qx MISC. KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION 1 END PANEL (SUPPLIED BY FIXTURE COMPANY) 2 END PANEL (SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR) 3 PALLETS (BELOW RACK) 4 PALLETS (TYP.) 5 RACKING ABOVE DOORWAY 6 4' TAPE (TYP.) ri 00 321 emu no In PROTOTYPE 2001 TRU C3 REMODEL PROTOTYPE CHARTS – 1983 MEZZ. CONFIGURATION (COMBO) LINEAR FOOTAGE SALES I PRE -SALES SALES CUBIC FOOTAGE OVERSTOCK PRE -SALES KRU SQ. FT. COUNTS SALES SQ. FT. 5,009 PRE -SALES SO. FT. 208 AUX. SO. FT. 699 (NON SALES/PRE- SALES) LEASING SQ. FT. 5,916 PRE –SALES RACKING RACK SIZE UNEAR FOOTAGE 9' -3 1/4 PRE -SALES KALTI L TRAINING ROOM I4 a'l ' i ' G' 0(� s'o'wor , o� p '�5 9' -6 not 12' -0' to. CIO\ sp�6�1Fffip®MM fP �01501MI,S■_I�S��1 IQ. 5 -2° S i _. 55 6•-a• war : t St m ......,...0 , o -2° o• war ® 5 w - r � ''' in 5 -5 =maw, 5._6 , ��jj O S6 ® W19 7 -6• wa5rl -2• rY -E x%N 68 1 1 E 0 5' -10° " '-o x . r�r� , � {�ii�%ir3a�ra� l�i'I 3 f'fr!!'�waaRz l c"a 5' -10' 23 -5 8' -0" + 12' HIGH 1NTH 5' -0 PEG GLASS (ABOVE) " ❑ RT7 RT3 6 - 8' w/ oEar CI O r 3L4D x:1 ■ EQUIP. 11. ROOM :••u 52' -0' CPU AREA (cm's], TANT TO VFRIFYZ 1111111111111 / MP ,' C + - RECEIVING 3• -0' AREA O M \ I :�r 11 - i• - �■ ��■ 111 ©6' -0° e'-o• ww � • o• wat 5 -8 6' -7" 1! 5 -gam C=> 5 HIGH 11 �.I•i�iE7�,fIP��II�, •b. aC`' p � �` �rrilL�s fi eld w ''',4P Fn 5 U G2 6' 0• NCH # . ' # A 5 ' 3 ' �mm c(! PAL el 5113MMIWIFTWOMEHM, � L %7 -i• ® 5'_g° ' -7" m . , O ( 5' -0• Wal 1\ l�l_�I</Id__�3 ► � 5' r FA- s'-5° �� x I I / /IEiI'1'�llFk16�I %� -i S' -IG ' ®' �i 5 - 2 ° % 3. io I /z" ! � x 4.-81/25.-8- 6' -0• x:w r ., 5' - MU ,_2. l+''i- 5-2'10 5' -2 5'-4' ' IF�ltQ3�l� — 2T -5 `EXISRVNG REGISTERS 13' -6" TO REMAIN - 1 (CONSULTA11T ILVGEIE0 TRUCK DOCK =1 ENTRANCE .M> BIG. CI.S. ........ Bic.6GY UTILEE GIRLS 16' -3" BREAK ROOM Drawing References Drawings PROTOTYPE THIS PLAN THIS PLAN 3.584 4 u C n u I I I I I I I 2T -5' BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE COUNTS SALES PRE -SALES SQ. FT. 1 SQ. FT. 33,293 13,999 84 AUX. SQ. FT. (NON SALES/ PRE - SALES) 4,194 UNEAR AND CUBIC FIXTURE COUNTS 39,013 2T -5 BUILDING 50. FT. (FOOTPRINT) 39,074 7,338 EZZANINE SQ. FT. 2,412 1,292 TOTAL BUILDING SQ. FT. 51,486 FRONT END REGISTERS "R" ZONE REGISTERS TOTAL REGISTERS REFUND REGISTERS MEZZANINE PLAN SCALE: 1 /16 " =1' -0" REFUND COUNTER PHOTO & PACKAGE CHECK LAMINATED PANEL 9' -5 "L X 44 "H X 1 -1/2 "W 4 F1IRF1/ SCALE: N.T.S. BOX CORNER FOR 101 22' BASE DECK MU II CEILING HEIGHTS AT FRONT =21' -0 1/2 "t AT REAR = ON MEZZ. = 6' -11't UNDER MEZZ.= REGISTER COUNTS REFUND REGISTER WELL FILL BOX REFUND COUNTER REFUND COUNTER REFUND / EXCHANGE AREA PLAN SCALE: 1/8"–T-0" EXTEND BOX COR ER 4" (MIN.) P: 'si BAS EXTEND BOX CORNER 4" (MIN.) PAST BASE DECK BOX CORNER GENERIC PERIMETER WALL BOX CORNER = 11 = 4 = 15 1 NON- RACKING i 1 , BOX CORNER FOR 18" BASE DECK u (MIN.) 1 ,1, 1 GENERIC CORE II1 BOX CORNER n II I I II U D� n Li n u LEGEND ® ELECTRONIC DISPLAY CASE lEj PRICE CHECKER LOCATIONS FIXTURE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS OR EXISTING AREAS TO BE CARPETED El HIRING KIOSK NOTES 1. ALL PERIMETER SALES GONDOLAS ARE 12' -0" HIGH, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. PRE -SALES LINEAR & CUBIC CALCULATIONS ARE FOR MAIN LEVEL ONLY, E T -0 2S-5" 175-0 OVERALL ENSIGN 23' -5" t!, . V2c o, coaot approved pans aCrk ged. By Dote Permit No )iLnMl,�l 37' -8" FROM BACK OF G ONDOLA W20 ") � TO OUTSIDE EDGE OF RACETRACK ( " AISLE 1 13' -0' AISLE 72' -0" OVERALL WIDTH OF RACETRACK 1, 13' -0' AISLE 2D' -S' FROM OUTSIDE EDGE OF RACETRACK AISLE 1 7" 156' -1' SALES TO BACK OF GONDOLA ( "P82') 17 -8' I75 -0 "OVERALL DIMENSION CONSULTANT To VERIFY EXIT "R" ZONE PRE –SALES 35' -3 3/4" 100' -7 1/4" VESTIBULE FIXTURE PLAN SCALE: 1 /16 " =1' -0" ONSULTANT TO VERIFY 3W -1" FTV!SJON NO a Date 01 /10/01 02/07/01 Location Revisions Description ISSUED TO CONSULTANT FOR C.D.'S REV. SALES AS PER MARK -UP - MPR BID DATE: - -- PROJECT NO • - -- CAD NAME• WAVE NO . DRAWN 8Y: MPR CHECKED BY: --- PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: C3 PROTOTYPE v2.3 ATTENTION: 1999 FRONT END CONVERSION NOTE CONSULTANT TO VERIFY ALL NEW CONSTRUCTION AND RELOCATED ITEMS THAT TOOK PLACE DURING THE 1999 FRONT END CONVERSION. (I.E. CPU AREA, REGISTERS, REFUND, DOORS AND ELECTRICAL PANELS LOCATIONS) T� -03� tars YR7us Store Support Center 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 teams This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "8" US. TUKWILA WASHINGTON 16700 S.CENTER PKWY. Drawing Title R EMODEL COMBO FIXTURE PLAN Scale Date AS NOTED I 01/10/2001 Sheet No. R F1 5PI i PERM itt�" • retail space c•' � cSPACE:S -� . . "::...+��• `y"°'r 1 "P•SPACES [[ I f�. • 2 SPA*tES -, •• `' - II - ^c,ns..D I•16 s AI l CtS I 1 ..' a I 111 1 tl SnAt M I l l p I � �• e � 1 i I ,.•. 1WW. { KeYO .; ,;, e I "N" SPACE - .i •.s I "N '.SPADE :•,,, .w . QV./ LMC,k#gIN. 4 Q!• V(p'1JW:IM 14.1•4'41JAPY 9U40.1.4„,4,4 .414 0.0% ie b4.1(1•41■ "H" SPACE retail space `I,III -~ •trMITNU VM u rroo. MN) -' SITE PLAN .... SCALE I' :30' -0• 16+,:W ✓.��,y.• ii•L -M.i ,%"e� +r. I area light base /8 SPACES Toys us tst tioor 380OC '•r zzaM ^6 48255. 2 "H" SPACES TOYS 'R US 11tmQ 391n2004. 48290 441TN MO /4M, ..K M 01'..' 11 W 6:.i.41 Yj 1 il�I�llll li .1.1 I .0 1, •,�. �.Iy. i7 •''38t•PuA' me • •/•• • •a wsl T' ` fJl , • ,. 'y} 'lt a�giwa•N.�•tl. it� dam r a I 3 Lily Of 1U"vllL APPROVEU MAY pt 19,89 �',ALLING. /inirry 77 l_ :YFTN /IV! -Lot NARK r {Too ' IN6 rM 44' fJ W e•� .�' y -. . .0 3 Of •'rMN • •.. eA• : ~ ► r P ht.1i • A.• • A6 ("N••..^) . ! _ r n 1'••o rrro• ►. V/ �1•Mf •1' -1. i•1'.• (MVYtl1f / I''°✓a" / �u 51 w• t ,I ? , 3 cTPA CEA •talc ma..� .•..r MM. Ao•40V10 AIUMO 1 - 1b OC.C.UPANGY 13u5IPl 4 - Rrr NO e Cl. OCGUPANC'f oa/41 _ - 2-19 ar.4-rAotas-rr-- As NtE6IIJ1•TED TOTAL. ... . 2 a 2 AVAIL.A3Lr, oN 41!: 413 base bid na S 0* wcaf NOr NA,.000 IN . ,•1•444 74V '4 NOT& N.V"W - fir. Or fo.'? !'c0✓< 406 646. w ..1. QWVt•.: 7.'L'f• GrA•TOACr A04.0. 91.0 t*v T1-006 rr6HEi. draw Index Al silt PLAN I C TALI S A2 TION PLAN 04.1)0C/ DETAILS A;1 FLOOR PLAN 8L".:3 'C/ CErAILS A4 WauF FRAMAJG LDG 'C% CETAUS , A5 EL 40.1 3 C/ c TAJLS Ae • SECTIONS.ELE44TIIONS BLDG 'C/ CETAtS A7 SECTIONS BLDG C% DETAILS AS PLANS BLDG A/ DETAILS AG ELEUATCONS .SZC?lON BLDG 'A 4711 ELECTRIC,ALAwi II icAL euLOrG 1C1 EM2 SITE LIGHT & POWER EW 3 ELECTRICA L/MEO-IANMCAL BLDG A 44.6 t: Si s. • ••4o< PI. 34.430 CI auras .. mm rill 14 so aapas s mm -- . t -ff rmarcings fati O N yux r.rlmo •.ww 11 er ITN wr.3.o1 4w Y)WOr. fr .IYYM •••••1 I E roof Or.. w. )M11Mrl.•Ir • orrw:4 to: fill b. i7 p,, ,r turf roof ton r .o. r . Orri • as K Mr fr r Q •rr ►! rt N •!•. 1••./e. M .w .o 1 7t. W .M wnl .•. Mellor 1.• roar. U mom. • fM K• M .1.0 - -r1 C.! Vnrl.'•.�•..o.rlM r MIMw1 - • /orrl)...rP for. rMf•Mr M r 4r1 W rr...rN ••frr N nn 1l I or. WrrN, • El.. =am wool •.or• .r... .•lf•fW .1 Mr11•11 orb ...MN tr.. fro W r11 ..fro W • Arr. M W14 wr be of Wrrllos MU .y lroY l or . r rN.rf•Mr Orion . - r r• for •o. ; wt. M - M r ..• -►Mr: I..: t M . too. . .Wr1 .•Nq M. MIlw . MW.. of WAN I 0.1,11 . 1.4 1V/1.1M iN. M.. MH rM arr.. of MI.*M1 - wrMr• 4 • we.. at ••••• I.r M .fr or rr•.N W r Uro M foLtirfriraff •11yro Mo...9f fW ,tlry rW for 1W.o tlr•w of IMAM fr. IM err. Ir.. or... riff.41.1r,..r. w... M41 •1•.t r fr r....Y.bW Ur am .4 •••141r • •lo•• et Croft I. r rr 1...'..•.1. r .rf MtlYr•r w..ur11 Irr• W.► V r41. wl. dm. 1 ..W ear . • Mrrr N. 1441•41 ; or r . .r • .0o4 .0o4 of ff14 . for 4.4.. rrr. ro1M . f 41•11 r " .� i ow. 14 M.I.. f st M w -w.0 4.140 si44 r r••• .frlr•rfl ••• ww. nw•1r . r.rr rN ff.. • r..y p.rrr M rf.q /r• r 1r ,.r• ...r W. w/r or r+.Ir..wwrfl rr•reW.•Wr rre►f M:... r.f r w.rw r e Orr.. W . - Lt M.r. Mrs. 1r 41164 EXIST PRE —SALES 0000 2S -5" 0 ::IllrihIIIIIIII c ® RECEIVING EQUIP. BM EXISTING SALES AREA EXIST S ERVICE EXIST ENTRY VESTIBULE 1)0/vs.° 38 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/16 = 1' -0" PLAN NORTH 16' -3' P EXI TRAININ ROOM EXIST JANITOR EXIST MENS EXIST WOMENS CITY S TUTS ILA APPROVED MAR - 8 2001 n.,. NDIED t Ei;r, GENERAL NOTES A THIS DRAWING WAS CREATED USING THE ORIGINAL PROTOTYPE OR SPECIFIC PROJECT DRAWINGS. ALL CONDITIONS ARE TO BE FIELD VERIFIED BY G.C. TO ASSESS THE CURRENT LEVEL OF RENOVATIONS AND UPGRADES. B. THE KEYED DEMOLITION NOTES THAT FOLLOW ARE. BASED ON THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS USED TO CREATE THIS DRAWING, DISCREPANCIES ARE TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE ARCHITECT AND /OR THE TOYS "R" US CPM. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO VERIFY THE EXACT CONDITION, AND PERFORM THE APPROPRIATE AMOUNT OF WORK REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE TASK. C. REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION ITEMS. PATCH AND RESTORE CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF VARIOUS ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS. VERIFY & COORDINATE OPENINGS REQUIRED W/ THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. REFER TO PLANS FOR CUTTING AND PATCHING. PATCH ALL DISTURBED AREAS D. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING ALL PERMITS AND PAYING PERMIT FEES INCLUDING BUILDING PERMIT, TRU WILL REIMBURSE GC FOR MAIN BUILDING PERMIT. E. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE STAGING AND PHASING OF WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT WITH THE TOYS 'Fr US CPM. F. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO INSPECT THE PREMISES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOLITION REQUIRED, (BUT NOT SHOWN ON DEMOLITION DRAWINGS), DEMOLITION DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC IN NATURE, AND MAY NOT REFER TO SPECIFIC ITEMS ATTACHED TO MAJOR ASSEMBLIES INDICATED FOR REMOVAL COORDINATE ALL DEMOLITION WORK WITH NEW WORK INDICATED ELSEWHERE IN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS G. NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND /OR TOYS 'R' US CPM OF ANY CONFLICTS OR DISCREPANCIES. WHERE EXISTING MASONRY OR TILT -UP WALLS ARE REMOVED, SHORE UP AS REQUIRED DURING DEMOLITION TO PREVENT ANY DAMAGE TO THE REMAINING WALL. H. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE ALL DUST AND TRAFFIC BARRIERS NECESSARY (CLEAR OR WHITE VISQUEEN) TO MAINTAIN A CLEAN, SAFE, NEAT & ORDERLY ENVIRONMENT FOR PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEES. I. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO REMOVE DEMOLITION AND. CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS AND EQUIPMENT DAILY, STOCK PILING WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO EMPLOY A LICENSED WASTE HAULING COMPANY FOR THE DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS. COORDINATE THE LOCATION. OF DUMPSTERS WITH THE TOYS -R' US CPM. J. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE SELECT DEMOLITION REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION, OF EQUIPMENT, CONTROLS AND /OR UTILITIES WITH THE OTHER DISCIPLINES REPRESENTED IN THIS SET OF DOCUMENTS. NO .OVER - CUTTING WILL BE ALLOWED BEYOND THE NOTED HOLE SIZE FOR NEW OPENINGS IN EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR, MASONRY WALLS. PARTITIONS, OR ROOF, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED BY ARCHITECT. K. CUTTING THROUGH EXISTING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS IS NOT PERMITTED. CONTACT THE. ARCHITECT SHOULD DISCREPENCIES OCCUR. L WHERE ANY SURFACE HAS BEEN DAMAGED IN ANY WAY DURING CONSTRUCTION, G.C. SHALL REPAIR TO PROVIDE A CLEAN, SMOOTH APPEARANCE. M. SALVAGE ALL ITEMS AS DIRECTED BY THE TOYS 'R' US CPM FOR REUSE OR RELOCATION. N. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF ALL SEISMIC ANCHOR BOLTS, UPON THE DEMOLITION OF THE EXISTING SALES & PRE -SALES GONDOLA FIXTURES BY 'TRU'. SEISMIC ROI T OFM01 ITION: 1. REMOVE TILE SURROUNDING EXPOSED BOLT(S). 2. REMOVE/ DRILL OUT EXISTING BOLT COMPLETE 3. FILL VOID CREATED W/ POUR STONE, CAULKING, ETC. UNTIL FLUSH W/ SURROUNDING TOP OF SLAB. 4. RE -TILE TO MATCH EXISTING. O. THE CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE ACCESS THRU STAGED CONSTRUCTION AREAS VIA, COVERED TUNNEL OR OTHER CODE COMPLIANT MEANS VERIFY WITH TOYS 'R' US CPM FOR NATURE OF ACCESS AND LOCATION. FOR THIS PROTOTYPE, POSSIBLE. USE OF THE EXIT VESTIBULE FOR ENTRY AND EXIT IS A VIABLE OPTION. P. MFCHANICAI ALL UNIT HEATERS, AIR CURTAINS, GAS PIPING, ETC. IN AREAS TO BE, REMODELED ARE TO BE. FIELD VERIFIED. EQUIPMENT .DESIGNATED FOR REMOVAL REUSE AND /OR RELOCATION TO BE COORDINATED WITH DRAWINGS AND TOYS 'R' US. CPM. EXISTING ROOF PENETRATIONS TO BE ABANDONED ARE TO BE CLOSED AND MADE WEA.THERTIGHT NEW ROOF PENETRATIONS TO BE INSTALLED AND FLASHED PER INDUSTRY STANDARDS. ALL ROOF WORK, PATCHING, FLASHING, ETC. TO BE PERFORMED IN SUCH A MANNER AS NOT TO VOID ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES. ADHERE TO ALL CODES THAT APPLY TO WORK BEING PERFORMED. Q. GC. TO CLEAN ALL PADDLE FANS UPON COMPLETION. OF CONSTRUCTION. R. G.C. TO CLEAN ALL SUPPLY GRILLES AND REPLACE ALL FILTERS UPON COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION. S. fj,,ELTRIr.AL - REMOVE EXISTING LIGHTED GONDOLA ENDCAPS. DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL AS REQUIRED. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. (APPLIES TO C2000 PROTO ONLY.) DEMOLITION NOTES O 1 NOT USED O NOT USED O . NOT USED O NOT USED O REMOVE EXISTING PARTITION, AND /OR DOOR. FRAME, AND MUTES. O REMOVE ALL ABANDONED CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOXES. 0 EXISTING FIXTURE ATTACHMENT (GONDOLA) CHANNEL & HANGER RODS OR PLATE TO REMAIN. 0 REFER TO LIGHTING PLAN FOR EXTENT OF LIGHTING WORK. COORDINATE THE REUSE OF 'Y -BOXES CONDUITS, AND WIRING WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. O TRU TO PRE -PACK PRE -SALES AREA FOR SALES AREA CHANGEOVER. 70 TRU TO REMOVE OR RELOCATE EXISTING PRE -SALES AREA FIXTURES. COORDINATE WITH THE TOYS 'R' US CPM. 77 EXISTING CPU AREA COORDINATE WITH THE TOYS 'W US CPM AND ARCHITECT FOR THE DISPOSTIDN OF THIS AREA PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. REUSE EXISTING PARTITIONS ONLY AFTER VERIFICATION WITH TRU GPM. 12 TEMPORARY BARRIERS TO BE CONSTRUCTED PER ALL LOCAL AND STATE BUILDING CODES AND OSHA STANDARDS. THE SAFETY OF THE EMPLOYEES AND THE GENERAL PUBLIC I5 PRIMARY. BUILDING SIGN. SHOULD NOT BE REMOVED UNTIL BANNER IS INSTALLED ON BUILDING. 13 C.C. TO VERIFY CONDITION OF EXSTING DRYWALL, FURRING AND VINYL BASE. REMOVE/CR REPLACE AS. REQUIRED PER DRAWINGS AND EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS VERIFY CONDITION OF TILE BELOW GONDOLA. 14 G.C. TO VERIFY CONDITION OF VINYL TILE. REMOVE OR REPLACE AS REQUIRED PER DRAWINGS AND EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS 15 PATCH AND REPAIR ETOSRNG CONCRETE FLOOR THAT IS TO RECEIVE NEW 71LE OR CARPET REMOVE AU. PROJECTIONS, 'J' -BOXES ETC. 18 SAY/CUT AND REMOVE EXISTING. CONCRETE CART OORBS AS REWIRED MERE CONFLICTS WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION OCCUR. VERIFY WITH TOYS 'R' JS CPM THE EXTENT OF REPAIR AND PATCHING FURR OUT FOR NEW FIXTURES AS REQUIRED. NOT USED 18 SAWCUT AND REMOVE PORTON OF EXISTING CONGYAELT MASONRY WALL FOR NEW DOOR OPENING. REFER TO PLAN FOR DIMENSIONS OF SIZE AND LOCATION. OVERCUT OPENING AS REQUIRED 70 TOOTH -IN NEW FLAT -END CONCRETE BLOCK AT JAMBS INSTALL NEW UNTO, (REFER TO LINTEL SCHEDULE ON SHEET AR) AND REMOVE CONCRETE MASONRY TO 8' MINIMUM BELOW FINISH FLOOR ® STAGING AND PHASING PLAN 70 . 111 DEVELOPED IN COORDINATION WITH THU FIELD CPM. 0 NOT USED 21 REMOVE EXISRNG FIXTURE ATTACHMENT (GONDOLA) CHANNEL OR PLATE AND HANGER RODS O ALL LOOSE WIRING NOT IN CONDUIT THAT WILL BE EXPOSED IN EXPANDED SALES AREA, SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AND REMOVED OR RELOCATED. IF REQUIRED TO REMAIN, WIRING SHALL BE ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT AND PANTED TO MATCH CEILING. (VERIFY W/TRU CPM.) REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. O REMOVE EXISTING CARPETING, TRANSITION STRIPS', ETC. AS REQUIRED AND PREPARE FLOOR TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH. 24 REMOVE EXISTING CEILING COMPLETE IN 'BORUS' AREA, INCLUDING CEILING TILES, RUNNERS LIGHTS AND ALL RELATED ITEMS. (AS APPLICABLE) 45 NOT USED 26 EXISTING STAIR TO REMAIN. 27 EXISTING SECURITY SENSORS TO BE REMOVED, STORED AND RELOCATED AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE RELOCATION WITH TOYS 'R' US GPM AND RFT. O . NOT USED 29 NOT USED 30 REMOVE AND SALVAGE EXISTING CHECKOUT COUNTER MILLWORK 31 NOT USED 32 NOT USED O NOT USED ® REMOVE EXISTING SERVICE DESK AND SALVAGE FOR RELOCATION. REFER TO AI AND RFT. COORDINATE WITH TRU CPM. 35 REMOVE EXISTING SLIDE DOOR AND GIVE TO OWNER REMOVE SUPPORT STEEL AND FINISH AT FLOOR. O REMOVE MD SALVAGE EXISTING DOOR HEATER FOR POSSIBLE RELOCATION. DISCONNECT ELECTRIC. PATCH AND FINISH SURFACES TO MATCH EXISTING. 37 REMOVE TOP PORTION OF EXISTING PARTITION FOR NEW GONDOLA ATTACHMENT BLOCKING. REFER TO FIXTURE PLAN .FT AND T.& 6 /A6. PATCH AND RESTORE PARTITION AFTER INSTALLATION OF GONDOLA ATTACHMENT BLOCKING TO MATCH EXISTING. (2) FIRE HOSE & CONNECTION TO BE RELOCATED. REFER TO Al FOR NEW LOCATION. VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH TRU CPM. 39 REMOVE EXISTING VINYL RACETRACK TAPE. CLAEN SURFACE O 40 REMOVE EXISTING CHUTE REFER TO STRUCTURAL DETAIL FOR iNEU_ 47 COSTING LIFT TO REMAIN. 42 EXISTING CHUTE TO REMAIN. DEMOLITION LEGEND: EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN EXISTING WALL TO BE REMOVED EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN EXISTING DOOR TO BE REMOVED I No e No Date 2/6/01 Drawings Revisions Description PERMIT APPLICATION Drawing References BID DATE: 2 /B /0A CADD NAME 603001 PROJECT NO.: 800603 DRAWN BY: JAB' CHECKED BY: CMS PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 RFMODFL -90 COMBO Professional of record . practicing as an individual. 220 01 PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314 -821 -1100 SC. #4702 CO. DATE /10 C 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO -63127 PROJECT MANAGERS National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "H" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawing,. Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'sr US. Location TUKW ILA, WA 16700 S ITER RwWv Drawing Title DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN Scale AS NOTED I Date 2/8/01 FER i Sheet No. D1 Ai 28 ® 0 3. ). 0 0 O O 2Y 3 -5" / 25• / 23 - 5 • 23' -5° , 2S-5" 23' -5° 16' -2 1/2 PPRRE SALES DEMOLITION EXISTING PRE — SALES NO1E MEZZANINE STRUCTURE, STAIRS, CHUTE. UFT: AND ALL BUSTING ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SYSTELS TO REYARL REFER TO SHEET DT FOR DEMOLITION'. KEY NOTES & GENERAL NOTES FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/16" =1' -0" PLAN poi -o. NORTH PRE EXISTING GITY GF TUKWft 1 APPROVED MAC 8 2£68 ..:,roc I ■ No Date 2/9/01 Drawings Professional of record practicing as as individual FEB 4 2 200' PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314 -821 -1100 A C 47402 EXP DATE :/10/ Revisions PERU1T APPLICATION Drawing References BID DATE: 2/9/01 CADD NAME: 603001 PROJECT NO. 010603 DRAWN BY: ,TAB CHECKED BY: CMS PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 7001 C3 RFMCNFL -90 COMBO 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS. ',MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS National Office 461 From Road _.. Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 PEA RcC R'E'J.tA This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "fl" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS °A US. Location TUKWILA, WA i v w S . ItR PK Drawing Title DEMOLITION MEZZANINE Scale I Date AS NOTED 2/8/01 Sheet No n 1 i X❑ 'RCHITECTURAL KEYED NOTES Na DESaRI•BDN 1 EXISTING ITE1(S) / AREA TO ,REMAIN. 2 DOMING ITEU(S).1 BE REIOVEO 3 EXLSTING ITEu(S) TO BE RELOCATED 4 RELOCATED ITEMS) 5 DOSING WALL TO BE EXTENDED 6 EXISTING OPENING 70 BE EXPANDED 7 INFlLL TO MATCH EXISTING 8 NEW WALL. PARTITION OR CLOSET 9 NEW 3 MAN DOOR 70 NEW 4'-0 MAN DOOR 11 3' -6 IMPACT DOOR 12 4' -6' IMPACT DOOR 13 DUTS1 ODOR (INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR) 14 V.C.T. REWIRED _ 15 ELECTRICAL PANELS 16 SPRINKLER RISER 77 GAS RISER 18 DOMESTIC WATER RISER 19 COMPACTOR 20 GENERATOR 21 TRANSFORMER 22 ROOF LADDER / HAT.^I• i 23 CART RAIL 24 ONE OF MEZZ ABOVE 25 NEW LIFT 26 BALER 27 FIRE WALL Q FIXTURE PLAN KEYED NOTES Na DESCRIPTION REFUND / EXCHANGE AREA REGISTRY KIOSK FITTING ROOMS JUVENILEREGISO2Y DESK MANAGER'S WORKSTATION 6 BENCH 7 RGO COUNTER e CPU COUNTER 9 STORAGE BIN 10 BIKE ASSEMBLY COUNTER 11 ROLLER CONVEYOR 12 VENDING MACHINES 13 KIDDIE RIDE 14 SLIDING ° R • ZONE DOOR 0 MISC. KEYED NOTES No. DESCRIPTION 1 END PANEL (SUPPLIED BY FIXTURE COMPANY) 2 END PANEL (SUPPLIED HHIEHH BY CONTRACTOR) 3 PALLETS (BELOW RACK) 14. PALLETS (TIP.) RACKING ABOVE DOORWAY 4' TAPE (IYP.) ' 3 RF1 F1 BOX CORNER FOR 22• BASE DECK- MEZZANINE PLAN SCALE: 1/16 REPJND COUNTER PHOTO h PACKAGE CHECK LAMINATED PANEL 9' -5 X 44 'X 1 -1/2 SCALE: 1/8' =1' -0' 1551 9 5• w I_ SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. 22' I, j, 20 (MIN.) (MIN_) GENERIC CORE BOX CORNER REFUND REGISTER WELL FILL BOX REFUND COUNTER REFUND / EXCHANGE \AREA PLAN EXTEND BOX CORNER 4 (MIN.) PAST BASE DECK REFUND COUNTER BOX CORNER FOR 18" BASE DECK LEGEND ELECTRONIC DISPLAY CASE PRICE CHECKER LOCATIONS FIXTURE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS OR .EXISTING AREAS TO BE CARPETED HIRING. KIOSK 9' -3 1/4" PRE -SALES el 0" .y v .-2116-1 i Fi5°'i a1 - °4 o it El Al ®�i14� il Q' K1 11 SEA ,e rb= I !g tAININ ROOM 3 -4 M.0 NSULTANT 35 - 3 3/4• iELil3rs 13'- 0 AISLE CPU AREA 111111111111111!!I r7 ®O 1 52'-0 wTH s' -D' €c 6t1 (BELOW) k 4' -0' ❑ p EE D'A4 ( EVE) RT1 =i RT3 •� ■ �Iw RD 4 m Rf�B ® (-0 I. -4 -Y 6pr•• i rN a llt �i � 100' -7 1/4 VESTIBULE SCALE: 1 /16' =1' -0 , . 6'-6 1 7 s4 (-n' 4. 6' • 1/'' J 5-8' r 5' -6 "0,A, 9# a' -/- I ram e1miFi uimtmE31 \ryy; 6 t rmN 5-5 , itumii gig / -R1/e c10 /2. t53.1 X 4-U d♦d � 6• �i wG =M 5 -z' 115 -2• ®5 -2 - 2'®s'- 4 =W. 72'-0" OVERALL wDTH OF RACETRACK 175- O"OVERALL DIMENSION FaENNIMiNNALINIIMIliN AMEINNIMINTNNIMIINNA 5'16- a2 4'-Y u(5 D rew 23'-5 T-6 t z ( - t `E70SRING .GISTERS 13' 6' TO REMAIN - (CONSlIL TO VEfi1F�Y _ �� L 2S -5 CONSULTANT TO VERIFY BREAK " r 1 j I. D • ROOM I Itlr wI � ROOM lD5Th 2 1 AININC s- ¢.53® „0 .. /C. _ CITY Of TUKWRIA APPROVED MAR - 8 2001 AS tIOkkI) Mt.1 DH Revisions 01/113/011 ISSUED TO CONSULTANT FOR CO.'S 0 O 0 0 1 2.8 O 16' -3" 2S -5 2001 TRU C3 REMODEL PROTOTYPE CHARTS — 1983 MEZZ. CONFIGURATION (COMBO) BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE COUNTS PROTOTYPE TH15 PLAN PROTOTYPE THIS PLAN SALES SO. FT. 33,342 SALES 3,570 PRE -SALES SQ., FT. 13,999 UNEAR FOOTAGE . PRE -SALES AUX. SQ. FT. (NON SALES/ PRE- SALES) 4,145. SALES 38,805 BUILDING SQ. FT. (FOOTPRINT) 39,074 OVERSTOCK 7,185 ' MEZZANINE 5Q. FT. 12412 UNEAR AND CUBIC FIXTURE COUNTS CUBIC FOOTAGE PRE -SALES 1,412 TOTAL BUILDING SQ. FT. 51,486 CEILING HEIGHTS AT,FRONT 21 -0 1 /2•± AT REAR = ,,,g'_p•f ON MEZZ= 6 -11 t UNDER MEZZ. = 9 -0. t REGISTER COUNTS FRONT END REGISTERS •0 ZONE REGISTERS TOTAL REGISTERS REFUND REGISTERS = 11 15 KRU SQ. FT. COUNTS SALES SO. FT. PRE -SALES SQ. FT. AUX. 5O. FT. (NON SALES /PRE- SALES) LEASING SQ. FT. 5,058 08 650 5,916 PRE -SA RACK SIZE 4' -0 NON- RACKING RACKING UNEAR FOOTAGE 76 0 0 S RACKING NOTES 1. ALL PERIMETER SALES GONDOLAS ARE 12' -0" HIGH, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. PRE -SALES UNEAR 6 CUBIC CALCULATIONS ARE FOR MAIN LEVEL ONLY. No Drawings BID DATE: PROJECTNO -- CAD NAME: WAVE NO.- DRAWN BY: MPR CHECKED BY: -- PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: C PROTOTYPE v2_3 ATTENTION - 1999 FRONT END CONVERSION NOTE CONSULTANT TO VERIFY ALL NEN CONSTRUCTION AND RELOCATED ITEMS THAT TOOK PLACE DURING THE 1999 FRONT END CONVERSION. (LE CPU AREA, REGISTERS, REFUND, DOORS AND ELECTRICAL PANELS LOCATIONS) TOYS Location Store Support Center 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 TUKWILA WASHINGTON 16700 S.CENTER PKWY. FERMIT CLI, TE This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS nor The information shown may not be used the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS ° 5' US. Drawing Title REMODEL COMBO FIXTURE PLAN ; Scale I Date AS NOTED 01/10/2001 Sheet No. RF1A F N0. 01 REMARKS EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 5) 02 03 EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 5) EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 5) 04 06 08 09 10 12 13 14 DOOR SCHEDULE LOCATION ENTRY VESTIBULE TO EXTERIOR ENTRY VESTIBULE TO SALES SALES TO EXIT VESTIBULE EXIT VESTIBULE TO EXTERIOR SALES TO PRE —SALES NOT USED PRE —SALES TO EXTERIOR CPU TO EXTERIOR SALES TO EXTERIOR PRE SALES TO EXTERIOR HALL TO EXTERIOR PRE -SALES TO KRU OFFICE SALES TO PRE —SALES (IMPACT DOORS) SALES TO PRE —SALES WOW 1 NOT UCC7f TYPE SIZE H UNIT 9 —0 7' - UNIT UNIT UNIT s —o UNIT UNIT 9 _ D UNIT UNIT 3' -0" HM HM 3' -0" 2 -3 PAIR HM 'LASTIC 7, —a j{LrNIN 2 in HAW ' d5 NONE OOOR2 1 1/2 PR. BUTTS STANLEY FBB 179 4 1/2' x 4 1/2' 26D 1 LOCKSET BEST 93K7015D -626 (LEVER HAND) 1 DR. CLOSER NORTON 7500 H —BF —AL 3 SILENCERS IVES 20 1 DR STOP IVES. 407 B36D 1 KICKPLATE HAG. 10X3416GA: 32D 370 HARE EMT&CPU flO 5 PR.BUTTNEY FBB 11 1/2x. DETEX ALARM SA �(BA �. ECL 80 4 (CYLIND4 R 12 NRP KEYED) 26D 1 3/4" 1: THRESHOLD N.G.P. 425 1 SET WEATHERSTRIPPING N.G.P. #135N FAIT 2 PULL HAGER 9G 8 "C. TO C., 32D (CPU DOOR ONLY) 1. DOOR SWEEP - N.G.P. 102AV 1 DOOR CLOSER NORTON JL 7500BF —H 1 KICKPLATE HAGER 10 x 46', 16 GA. 32D (CPU DOOR ONLY) 1 BEST RIM CYLINDER 1E72 (CONSTRUCTION CORE, CPU DOOR ONLY) 1 WIND CHAIN (HEAVY DUTY) MAT. HM H.M. FRAME JAMB 8 /A5 5/A5 8/A5 HEAD 11/A5 6 /A5 11/A5 (ALL FIDE 70 BE 11 gRED INSTALLED BY CONDLACTER. SILL 15/A5 EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 5) EXISTING TO REMAIN. (SEE NOTE 4 & 6) EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 4,& 6) EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 4 & 6) EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 4) DUSTERS TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 4) EXISTING TO REMAIN (SEE NOTE 4) NEW DOOR NEW DOOR (SEE NOTE 6 & 7) (OSI) NEW DOOR (SEE NOTE 6 & 7) 2 12 NOT USED. 2) NOT USED. 3) NOT USED.. 4) CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO INSURE EGRESS DOORS & ° DETEX" DEVICE ARE OPERATIONAL TO COMPLY W/ LOCAL CODES. IF NOT, GC TO ADVISE '1140' CPM FOR REPLACEMENT. 5) CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE ID INSURE AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS ARE OPERATIONAL FOR INTENDED USE, INCLUDING EGRESS. IF NOT, GC TO ADVISE 'TRW CPM FOR REPAIR '..6) PAINT EACH FACE OF NEW DOOR TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE 7) MOUNT DOOR CLOSER TO ROOM SIDE OF DOOR. DOOR ELEVATIONS NOT USED \ / IMPACT DOORS (OSI) NOT USED HARDWARE SCHEDULE LEGEND GENERAL NOTES REFER TO SHEET AO FOR UST OF GENERAL NOTES. 5 a KEYED NOTES EXISTING SALES AREA FLOORING TO REMAIN. REPLACE ALL EXISTING VCT FLOORING WHERE DAMAGED IN SALES AREA. VESTIBULE, REGISTER'. AND SERVICE AREAS AS DETERMINED AT'PRE CONSTRUCTION WALKTHROUGII. GC AND TRU' CPM TO DETERMINE QUANTITY OF VET TO BE REPLACED. WHERE THE NEW SALES AREA IS TO EXTEND INTO THE EXISTING PRE—SALES AREA', (SHADED AREAS)'. INSTALL NEW VCT .FLOORING TO THE NEW SALES AREA'. LIMITS. i APPLY FLOOR PATCHING MATERIAL AS REQUIRED TO ■ PROVIDE A FLUSH TRANSITION FROM EXI51180 VCT TO NEW FLOOR TILE GC TO PROVIDE VCT TO MATCH EXISTING. NEW VCT FOR SALES EXTENSION AREAS AND PATCH NCRK TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY TRU CPM PRIOR 10. INSTALLATION. PRE — SALES AREA FLOOR SURFACE TO REMAIN AS IS. TRU VENDOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SUPPLIlNGAND INSTALLING THE ADHESIVE—BACKED VINYL RACETRACK DECAL AS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN. COORDINATE WITH FIXTURE PLAN, RF1, AND TRU. GPM. EXISTING COLUMNS PREVIOUSLY IN PRE—SALES AREA. NOW IN EXPANDED SALES AREA, TO BE PANTED SW1004 PURE WHITE TO DECK ABOVE. FURR OUT TO MATCH EXIST COLUMNS IF APPLICABLE (FIELD VERIFY). CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR O PAINTING WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE (COLgT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL OR STRUCTURE). AT ALL OPENINGS VISIBEL FROM THE SALES AREA AFTER FIXTURES HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR. PAINTING ALL UNPAINTED MLINGS, WALLS, AND STRUCTURE IN THE PRE — SALES. AND RECEIVING AREAS, TO MATCH EXISTING. ONLY IN AREAS VISIBLE FROM THE SALES FLOOR.: COORDINATE WITH THE '..TRU CPM. G.C. TO PAINT WHITE ALL WALL , GRAPHICS,' DECALS, STRIPING, ETC. DO NOT PAINT SPRINKLER HEADS DO NOT PAINT POWER POLES OR WIREWAYS AT REGISTER AREA_. DO NOT CUT: POWER POLES. NEW SERVICE DESK COORDINATE: UTILITY LOCATIONS'. WITH THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.. AND TRU.. CPM. REGISTERS VERIFY THE' USE OF EXISTING REGISTER. CASEWORK RELOCATE EXISTING, AND INSTALL NEW REGISTERS AND CASEWORK AS NECESSARY. COORDINATE UTILITY LOCATIONS WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH FIXTURE PLAN (RF1). AND TRU CPM. REMOVE & REINSTALL NUMBER CUBES AS RECD BY. NEW REGISTER LAYOUT. 9.334 TOTAL SQ. FT. OF CARPET, FURN. BY TRU & INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. ADHESIVE AND REDUCER STRIP FURN. A INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR (COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY TRU ) EXACT DIMENSIONS TO BE ' u: BY TRU CPM. (SEE FIXTURE PLAN) CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE OR INSTALL NEW IMPACT DOORS AS SHOWN ON PLAN AND CONCEAL FRAME FROM TOP OF DOOR TO 12' -0" &FF_ REFER': TO DOOR SCHEDULE COSTING DOOR AND FRAME PREVIOUSLY IN PRE -SALES AREA, PROPOSED TO BE IN SALES AREA PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALLS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INFIWNG EXIST RECEIVING 0 I. O NOT USED NEW V.C.T TO MATCH EXISTING NEW CARPETING NEW GONDOLA CHANNEL OR PLATE EXISTING GONDOLA CHANNEL OR PLATE TO REMAIN EXISTING WALL OR PARTITION TO REMAIN NEW WALL OR PARTITION NEW DOOR EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN r;NPARTMON TYPES 11 1 SCALLE NOINE SCALE NCI& 7 1/ PARTITION 7 i/4' PARTITIONS ARE CONSTRUCTED OF: 6 ° . 20 GA. STL STUDS 0. 16" O.C., w/5/8" GYP. BOARD. EACH SIDE OF STUDS. EXTEND PARTITION FROM FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. U.0 N IN AREAS w/LAY -IN CEILINGS EXTEND GYP. BOARD TO 6' ABOVE CEILING. U.O.N. BALANCE OF EXISTING MASONRY OR METAL STUD PARTITION ROUGH OPENINGS TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT OPENINGS NOT USED NEW OR FELOCATED SECURITY - SENSORS COORDINATE LOCATION W/FIXTURE PLAN AND TRU CPM. PATCH VCT AS REQUIRED AT ALL LOCATIONS NOT U.D. STORAGE BIN. COORDINATE LOCATION W/ FIXTURE PLAN, RF1 AND TRU CPM_ BIKE ASSEMBLY COUNTER COORDINATE LOCATION WITH FIXTURE PLAN (RF1) AND TRU CPM. VERIFY' UTILITY LOCATIONS WIN ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS... NOT USED CONTRACTOR TO REPAINT ALI_ SALES FLOOR COLUMNS SWIG. 'PURE WHITE"_ MANAGERS WORKSTATION_ COORDINATE LOCATION OF UTILITIES W/ELECTRICAL DRAWNGS, AND LOCATION W/FIXTURE PLAN. RF1. AND TRU CPM_ PAINT ALL THREADED RODS UNISTRUT: & CONDUIT TO MATCH DOSING ADJACENT STRUCTURE NOT USED T- 1 CU -11NG FIRE RISER AREA TO REMAIN.' MAINTAIN L—I ADEQUATE CLEARANCE AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL COUES G.C. TO PROVIDE & ATTACH PLASTIC LAMINATE END PANEL TO END OF FIXTURE AND WALL. COORDINATE LOCATION W/RF1 G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PAINTING INTERIOR WALLS 0 CPU G.C. TO VERIFY IF EXTERIOR RAIUNGS EXIST, & REPAIR/REPAINT AS NECESSARY. NOT USED JUVENILE REGISTRY. COORDINATE LOCATION' OF UTILITIES W/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, AND LOCATION W/FIXTURE PLAN. (RF1) AND "TRU' CPM. VERIFY NUMBER OF LAYERS OF TILE IN EXIST. SALES AREA. G.C. TO INSTALL FILLER LAYER(S) AS REQ'D TO BRING NEW TILE FLUSH w/EIOSTING IN ALL EXPANDED SALES AREAS. INSTALL NEW CALL STATION 0 3' -4" ABOVE FINISH GRADE. COORDINATE W/ELECT DINGS A TRU CPM. INFILL. ALL FLOOR CRACKS, CONTROL JOINTS ETC. BEFORE APPLYING NEW ODOR TILE RELOCATED FIRE HOSE &CONNECTION. VERIFY WITH TRU CPM. PROVIDE ANEMOSTAT GCS SUPPLY DIFFUSER AND 8x6 DUST W/ 1 INTERNAL LINER. TAP 75 CFM FROM EXIST- DUCT TO NEAREST RN. NEW A.C.T. CEILING 0 e' -0' A.F.F. REFER TO DETAIL 7 /A6 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. FITTING ROOMS. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH FIXTURE PLAN (RF1) AND TRU CPM. EXISTING. STAIRS TO REMAIN. EXISTING OFT TO REMAIN. EXISTING CHUTE TO REMAIN. ( TYPJ LINE OF NEIL ABOVE EXISTING PLATE /CHANNEL TO REMAIN EXIST PRE —SALES Da VESTIBULE MINI wlm®© REGISTER AREA m 'SERVICE II N 4 y y � J 1 ;mail_ J J. J. m EXIST 17 ©` ENTRY`nn ? VESTIBULE I eo CD CD el CD OD PLAN NIP FLOOR PLAN NORTH SCALE: 1/16" = 1' —O" EXISTING CHANNEL/PLATE TO REMAIN_ ST ROOM J � T� .' I 4 41 liWi VI E C EXIST JANITOR I EXIST MENS [ EXIST WOMENS CITY OF TIUOOViL APPROVED MAR - 8 Z((1 AS LL Na No Date 2/8/01 Drawing References Drawings Revisions PERMIT APPLICATKIN BID DATE: 2/8/01 CADD NAME :' 6 o 3 A 01 PROJECT NO- 800603 DRAWN BY: JAB - - CHECKED BY: CMX PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 RFMnnFL -90 COMBO Professional of record practicing as an individual. F EE 200 PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314. -821 -1100 UC. #4702 EDP DATE '/10/ 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 - -- PROJECT MANAGERS T SH AW ATE FWASNINOTON Na tio n al Office 46 1 From Road Paramus. NJ 07652 (20 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "A" US. The information shown may not be used nor the. Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location TUKWILA, WA 16700 S. CENTER PKWY 1rf 1 Drawing Title FLOOR PLAN DOOR SCHED.' & DETAILS Scan AS NOTED Date 2/8/01 Sheet No. Al ENLARGED PLAN SCALE: 1 /e = " 3 SECTION 0 O a® PRE SALES 1 nun 2Y -5 MEZZANINE SCALE: 1/16' = 23 -5 FLOOR PLAN PRE — SALES 7 o• 2s- NO1E: MiLf7.ANMF STRUCTURE STAIRS. CHUTE, LIFT AND ALL BUSTING ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS TO REMAIN_ ( REFER TO SHEET Al FOR KEY NOTES &. GENERAL NOTES PLAN (4\ I 23' -5 NORTH 0 16' -2 1/2• :',. PRE- SALES GOY OF TUKWILA APPROVED MAR 8 2 A. IED No Drawing References Drawings BID DATE: 2/8/01 CADD._ NAME: . 603A011 PROJECT NO-.800603 DRAWN BY: JAB CHECKED BY: COs PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION 2001 C3 RF800FL -90 COMBO PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314 -821 -1100 LIC #4702 EXP. DATE 8 /10/01 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS Professional of record practicing as an individual F E9 ,� ` 1 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "I I US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission.. of TOYS "8" US. Location TUKWILA, WA 16700 S. CENTER PKWY Drawing Title MEZZANINE PLAN Scale AS NOTED I Date 2/8/01 Al 1 A Sheet No. National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201).599 -7800. i NOTE: ALL MATERIALS CONTRACTOR p p [� /� ppI I A Li ST PLIED, U.N.O. ON SHT. A0 INTERIOR'I FINISH MATERIAL � 1P U FLAME SPREAD RATING SMOKE DEVELOPMENT RATING CODE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER'S NUMBER /COLOR LOCATION ACT. ACOUSTICAL CEIUNG TILES ARMSTRONG :.. 1749 FINE ASSURED EQUIP: ROOM. OFFICE, ' RESTROOMS, BREAK ROOM, TRAINING ROOM. HALL. JANITOR. 25 - PLASTIC FACED - WHITE CG1 CG2 CORNER GUARD CORNER GUARD. KOROSEAL WALL PROTECTION KOROSEAL WALL PROTECTION KOROGUARD THERMOFORMED K -38 FERN C128" GAUGE, P1 HAIRCELL TEXTURE, 2'.2'x3' -7" HIGH. KOROGUARD THERMOFORMED K -38 FERN .028" GAUGE. P1 HAIRCELL TEXTURE. 2 . .x6.O. HIGH: PARTITION CORNERS COLUMN CORNERS 20 20: 140 140 CT7 CTB CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE DAL TILE (PMS COOL GRAY 7C) DAL TILE 3689 COVED BASE, COLOR GRAY GRANITE; 6 HIGH B' WIDE. WITH MATCHING INSIDE /OUTSIDE CORNERS /5 -3619T SANITARY COVE. BASE. COLOR 0-799 PEARL WHITE. 6" H x 6" W. MATH MATCHING INSIDE /OUTSIDE' CORNERS RESTROOM WALL BASE JANITOR'S CLOSET' BASE N/A _ N/A N/A N /A ... GRT1 GRT2 GROUT GROUT HYDROMENT HYDROMENT ,CLASSIC BONE 96114. DESIGNER SERIES DELOREAN GRAY 96635 DESIGNER SERIES RESTROOM WALL GROUT '. RESTROOM FLOOR GROUT N/A N/A N /A ,'. N /A PLAM1 PLASTIC LAMINATE NEVAMAR S -3 -43T MALLARD TEAL- TEXTURED FINISH H-5 GRADE MAN. OFFICE, DIR. OFFICE COUNT ROOM & BREAK ROOM COUNTERTOPS COUNT ROOM BINS at ALL WAINSCOTS. 20 45 PNT1 PNT2 PAINT PAINT SHERWIN WIWAMS SHERWIN WIWAMS 5W1004 "PURE WHITE" SW1482 "TAOS TURQUOISE" :: WALL FIELD, COLUMNS DOORS &' DOOR FRAMES AREA BETWEEN BUMPERS ON MASONRY WALLS (IF ' . REQUIRED) . " 5 0 POLY1 SOLID. PLASTIC SANTANA TEAL- STANDARD SERIES RESTROOM PARTITIONS SUPP. BY OWNER/INSTALL BY G.C. 32' AFF 6'/42'L 6'/42 "L 081 2" RUBBER BUMPERS KOROSEAL WALL PROTECTION- A00DA i - VESTIBULE SSM1 SOUD SURFACE MATERIAL FORMICA FOUNTAINHEAD FX -7 -10 SPRING ICE XPRESSIONS RESTROOM VANITY 10 175 VB1 BASE ALLSTATE 20 TEAL '..' CONTACT ALLSTATE FOR DISTRIBUTOR (718) 526 -7890 WALLS - 20 130 VCTT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE D I T2000 FLOOR FIELD LESS THAN- 75 LESS ,THAN 450 VWC1 VINYL WALL COVERING GUARD " : STIPPLE L510, GARDENIA, TYPE II 24 OZ. OSNABURG, 53" WIDE '. DIRECTOR S OFFICE I MANAGER'S OFFICE 'COUNT ROOM ' 5 15 WB1' WALL BUMPER KORCGUARD SERIES C800, MODEL C800, K -38 FERN, 8° HIGH x 1 1/4 WIDE .078' THICK. WITH MATCHING END CAPS WALL PARTITIONS CLASS I 28'X48' KOROSEAL WALL PROTECTION EXISTING CONDITIONS LIST @ TOILET ROOMS 0 MALE FEMALE ITEM COMPLIANT YFS NO TYPE ACTUAL CONDITION/ LOCATION COMPUANT YRS NO TYPE ACTUAL CONDITION/ LOCATION FLUSH VALVE ORIENTATION AT H.C. TOILET TOWARD THE IWDE SIDE (44° AFF MAX) • BOBRICK IB -550 STAINLESS STEEL 33 3/4' WIDE SIDE 28" AFF • BOBRICK f B -254 STAINLESS STEEL I 19 B N. .WIDE SIDE 27 FF TOILET SEAT' HEIGHT AT H.C. TOILET Or 19 MAX.) , . 50 "O TOP 6 18' AFF • 54 ":O TOP 7 ' 18 • AFF TOILET CENTER UNE FROM WALL AT H.C. TOILET (18 ") • 30 ".O TOP 8 18'. SANTANA. SUPP. BY OWNER/INSTALL BY C.C. : - 18" DIAMETER OF GRAB BARS 1 1/4" - 1' 1/2• DIA. 1 1/2" FROM WAI1 . B -165 2436 STAINLESS STEEL 40" 0 BTOM OT - 1 1/4" O.D. • BOBRICK B -165 3636 ( STAINLESS STEEL 1 1/4' O.D. HANDRAIL HEIGHTS/ LOCATIONS/LENGTHS (33" AFF) 6' MAX FROM CORNER /36" MIN LENGTH (REAR) 12 MAX FROM CORNER /42 MIN LENGTH (SIDE) • SUPPLIED BY TRU AND INSTALLED BY ..CONTRACTOR : 32 ". 33'. AFF 67421. 6'/42 • - SANTANA SUPP. BY OWNER/INSTALL BY G.C. 32' AFF 6'/42'L 6'/42 "L 60" TURNING RADIUS AT H.C. TOILET • PRO -LINK I A00DA i - 60' 62" :. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER IN FRONT. OF.. TOILET (12' MAX.) ABOVE.. FLOOR (19 ".MIN.) CONT. PAPER FLOW • CONT. 12" 20' • : CONT. 11" 23' URINAL UP HEIGHT or MAX) 18" N/A N/A URINAL FLUSH VALVE HEIGHT (44" AFF MAX) 37' N/A : N/A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT URINAL (30 "X48') • 28'X48' N/A N/A LAVATORY SINK HEIGHT (34" AFF MAX) 34• • 34• LAVATORY. FAUCET (LEVER) LEVER 30'x 48" CLEAR SPACE AT LAVATORY S : 'YES WATER PIPES UNDER LAVATORY INSULATED • INSULATED • NOT INSULATED BOTTOM OF MIRROR HEIGHT (40" AFF MAX) • 37 0 37" SOAP DISPENSER 37 AFF • 37'. AFF DRINKING FOUNTAIN TYPE (Hl -LOW) SINGLE..: BROKEN N/A N/A DRINKING FOUNTAIN CLEAR SPACE ( 'YES N/A N/A DRINKING FOUNTAIN BUBBLER (36" MAX)' 'YES N/A :. N/A DRINKING FOUNTAIN KNEE CLEARANCE (27' MIN) 6 N/A N/A PUBUC TELEPHONE - HIGHEST. OPERABLE PART 54•, AFF 53' N/A N/A IDENTIFICATION SYMBOL MOUNTED ON SWING SIDE OF DOOR CENTERUNE.. OF SIGN MOUNTED O.5' -0" AFF. CONTRASTING COLOR, BRAILLE, LETTERING, GRAPHIC • - 8x8 SQUARE. BLUE WHITE LETTERS GRAPHIC &.TEXT • DOOR, 56' AFF 8x8 SQUARE, BLUE WHITE LETTERS GRAPHIC & TEXT 18' SWING SIDE DOOR CLEARANCE (TOILET ROOM ENTRY DOOR) . 20 1/2" (INTERIOR; 21" (EXTERIOR) • 22' (INTERIOR) 21 (EXTERIOR) UST OF ACCESSORIES NOTE ALL ITEMS SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY G.C. (U.N.O.) No : DESCRIPTION i.. MANUFACTBBER I CATALOG NO I cQLDR MTG.Nr. SOAP DISPENSER (w /EXTENDED SPOUT) BOBRICK I B-82216 I STAINLESS STEEL IN COUNTERTOP 2 TOILET ..TISSUE DISPENSER SUPPLED BY TRU AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 19" OE 3 GRAB BAR' BOBRICK IB -550 STAINLESS STEEL 33 3/4' 4 FEM. NAPKIN DISPOSAL BOBRICK f B -254 STAINLESS STEEL I 19 B N. 5 FEM. NAPKIN .VENDOR. SUPPLIED BY TRU AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 50 "O TOP 6 TOWEL DISPENSER SUPPLIED BY TRU AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 54 ":O TOP 7 WASTE RECEPTACLE BOBRICK B -277 ITTNN STEEL 30 ".O TOP 8 TOILET COMPARTMENT SANTANA. SUPP. BY OWNER/INSTALL BY C.C. : - 9 MIRROR BOURICI4 B -165 2436 STAINLESS STEEL 40" 0 BTOM OT 10 MIRROR BOBRICK B -165 3636 ( STAINLESS STEEL 40 O BOTTOM 11 .DIAPER'. DECK SUPPLIED BY TRU AND INSTALLED BY ..CONTRACTOR : 32 ". 12 URINAL SCREEN SANTANA SUPP. BY OWNER/INSTALL BY G.C. 13 AIR CARE AEROSOL DISPENSING SYSTEM PRO -LINK I A00DA i - 8' 0" l ELECTRONIC .WATER. COOLERS SCALE: NONE .', NOTE: SIGNS SHALL CONFORM TO ADA OR LOCAL GUIDELINES WHICHEVER IS MORE STRINGENT. RAISED:. GENDER SYMBOLS (TYP.) ., :. RAISED DISABLED SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED .GENDER TEXT (TYP.) :RAISED BRAILLE ,GENDER :TEXT DISABLED TOILET ROOM SIGNS ENLARGED TOILET AREA PLAN SCALE: 1 /4- DEMOUTION /CONSTRUCTION NOTES O REMOVE EXISTING TOILET ROOM SIGNAGE PATCH AND FINISH. SURFACE TO MATCH BASTING. O INSTALL NEW SIGNAGE TO COMPLY WITH ADA OR LOCAL/STATE: ACCESSIBILITY ornlx:GleMo xaarstrum to Lamp. CTRINrxNT RFFFR TD Fl FVATILNLS AS NOTEQ. REFER TO 2/A2. O INSULATE PIPES UNDER LAVATORIES. O G.C. 70 REPAIR OR REPLACE EW.C. IF REQUIRED. INSTALL NEW EWC. TO MEET ALL STATE AND LOCAL CODES, WHICHEVER IS MORE STRINGENT. SEE ELEVATION B /A2. O REMOVE PAR EUGN ENDPECE TO ALLOW FOR REQUIRED CLEARANCE REPAIR REMAINING PAWNOR AS REWIRED, FOR SUPPORT Gill OF TUIDNI-A APPROVED MAR - 8 2801 As MO(LU 2/8/01 Revisions PERMIT APPLICATION Drawing References Drawings BID DATE:. 2/8/01 CADD NAME: 603A02 PROJECT NO. 800603 DRAWN BY: JAB CHECKED BY: EMS PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 REMMIFT -90 COMBO Professional of record practicing as an individual FFB 4 e PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW Sheet No. ©L@@ 10877''. WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 : PROJECT MANAGERS National Office 461'. from Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 st p�! UF�i 6TON This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS ° R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS °O" OS. Drawing Title ENLARGED TOILET PLAN & SCHEDULES Scale Date AS NOTED 2/8/01 GENERAL NOTES (Tour RooMS) 1. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING WHERE TOILET PARTITIONS, GRAB BARS, AND LAVATORIES ARE MOUNTED TO STUD AND GYP. BD. PARTITIONS 2 ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, AND ANY OTHER MISC. CONCEALED WOOD_ ELEMENTS SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT, IF REQUIRED BY CODE (SEE SPEC.). 3. PROVIDE (2) 16 GA. MIL STUDS (NESTED) O 16' O.C. IN WALL DIRECTLY BEHIND WATER COOLER AND TELEPHONE. ANCHOR STUDS TO FLOOR AND STRUCTURE ABOVE. 4. PROVIDE (2) 16 GA. MIL STUDS (NESTED) BEHIND EACH WATER HEATER SHELF BRACKET. ANCHOR STUDS TO FLOOR AND STRUCTURE ABOVE 5. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL SONS, DECALS, SYMBOLS, AND ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DISABLED ACCESSIBIUTY AS DESIGNATED BY LOCAL CODES. 6. ALL NEW /RELOCATED. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED PER PER ADA'. (OR LOCAL AND STATE) REQUIREMENTS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS (WHICHEVER IS MORE STRINGENT). GC ALSO TO VERIFY THAT ANY TOILET' ROOM ACCESSORIES NOT TO BE REPLACED OR RELOCATED HAVE BEEN INSTALLED TO MEET ADA (OR STATE AND LOCAL). GUIDELINES. IF NOT, GC TO NOTIFY TRU' CPM AND RELOCATED AS REQUIRED: 7. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR FIXTURES AND PIPING INFORMATION. INSULATE ALL EXPOSED PIPING BELOW LAVATORIES. 8. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF ANY /ALL OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS U.N.O.. 9. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL WATER RESISTANT GYP. BOARD IN RESTROOMS, HALL AND JANITOR'S CLOSET, ON WET WALLS ONLY, AS REQUIRED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION. 10. PROVIDE SANITARY SEALANT AT FLOOR, WALL, AND MOP SINK PERIMETER JOINTS IN JANITOR'S CLOSET. (REFER TO SPECS) 11. SOAP DISPENSER NOZZLE TO BE LOCATED SO. AS TO DISPENSE INTO LAVATORY. 12. ALL MIRROR DIMENSIONS ARE OUT - -TO -OUT. 13. PAINT ALL WALLS IN HALL AND JANITOR'S CLOSET WITH SEMI- GLOSS PAINT. 14. PAINT ALL INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES (ALL SURFACES) INCLUDING JAMBS 15. CORNER GUARDS (CG1) AND WALL BUMPERS ARE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 16. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR TELEPHONE LOCATION. 17. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL LAVATORY AND COUNTERTOP OPENING CUTS WITH LAVATORY MANUFACTUER'S REQUIREMENTS. 18 REFER TO SHEET A6 FOR PARTITION TYPES 19. INSTALL PUBUC TELEPHONE SO THAT THE TOP OF THE COIN SLOT IS 48' ARE. PAY TELEPHONE HOUSING AND SHELF TO BE CLEAR PLEXIGLAS OR WHITE LAMINATE (NO MELAMINE PRODUCT). 20. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL LAVATORY COUNTERTOP LENTGHS PRIOR TO FABRICATION. 21. FWSH VALVE IN ACCESSIBLE TOILET STALLS TO BE INSTALLED ON THE SIDE OF THE TOILET WITH MORE CLEARANCE (WIDE SIDE). LIST OF ACCESSORIES A2 AJ 3 5/8' OR 6' 20 GA. MTL STUD 4D 16' SEE PART710N O.C. 16 GA. H.M. FRAME PROVIDE THREE ANCHORS 0 JAMB (2) 3 5 /8' OR GA. . 2 STUDS 3'x3'x1/4 "x3' LONG STL ANGLE. ATTACH ( OF PIVOT t OF PIVOT. TO JAMB STUDS w/ (2) 2x6 WOOD STUD JAMBS. HILT" 12 -24 HWH #5 ATTACH TO 2x6 AUGNMENT SCREWS. MEZZANINE FLOOR i SLAB & STRUCTURE. & ANCHOR TO SLAB w /(2) • HILT • HS. M -10/20 EXP. ANCHORS. PLATE ABOVE. I o I — ■ ® e MIR / \ I O �® ® a ...wwi t o i 5 /B' GYP. BSI` BOARD 7YPE '� (2) 3 5 B OR 6' 20 I GA. MTh. STUD HEADER LINTELS Erj 4'x4'x1/4' STL ANGLE FIXTURE ATTACH TO : BOTTOM CHORD OF JOISTS. '.. w/3/8' DIA. BOLT w/NUT & WASHERS. PROVIDE I '.. THICK OVERSIZE WASHER .' OTOP' OF BOTTOM CHORD. '. �. � Y 4 ` t! I � S L ® \,.� ° o ,,, I J a— 5 7(8' 16 GA. H.M. FRAME PROVIDE THREE ANCHORS ®JAMB OR 2 .DOOR DIM : FIXTURE STANDARD A ' DOOR w/ PIVOT. HARDWARE PIVOT . ' ATTACH. TO JAMB, STUDS PER MFR.'S RECOMMENDATIONS : ' 5/8" GYP. BOARD y ft.0. CiM. 2x6 WD. ALIGNMENT PLATE ABOVE : '4 -6' (I.D 8 i/ " 11 HEAD : JAMB x 2..x 1CC//EE4' CONT. ANGLE FACE OF'CHANNEC ABOVE ', SLAB rANSION 48' B TO '.. THRU NGLE, GONDOLA 1A DETAI L A 1/4'; D 0 IF/PACT JAMB DOORS ( 1/ 1 .AR '-1 CLEAR OPENING f 3 OF STANDARDS. 1 5 SCALE: NONE 1 5 SCALE: 1 1/2 = 1' -0" SCALE 1 1/2" = 1' –O" SCALE: NONE 12 NOT USED NOT USED PROVIDE .DIAGONAL BRACING O DOORS 1/2' MELAMINE BOARD END PANELS EA SIDE. 2x4 WOOD STUDS 0 16' 0.c. PROVIDE. CASING BEAD. ON ALL SIDES PAINT MITE. ► 2x6 WD. ALIGNMENT PLATE (2) WOOD MEZZANINE : SLAB ' &:STRUCTURE. NOT CONTRACTIX2 VERIFY JOIST A NGLE LEN 2x6 SUDS O JAMBS, ATTACH TO 2x6 ALIGNMENT PLATE 204 WOOD HEAD PLATE ATTACH TO JAMB STUDS. B FLOOR 4'xex1/4' CONT. THE FIXTURE '.. BRIDGING ANGLES TO FlFall wAl & ,WSHERS. SPAO.NG CORRECT 'x4'x1/4' BRIDGING BETWEEN 0'48" O.0 BOTTOM CHORD w /(2) HILT g5 HWH S CREWS. p' � T TL_ ANGLE LENGTH OF ATTACH TO STL ANGLES JOISTS ,...ATTACH TO OF JOISTS 12 -14x1 1/4 _ \ Mill \ ®® Ise d IMPACT DOORS _ m / / I / �J ® / / u AOGN F 1/4 0F ANGLE FACE OF CHANNEL ABOVE EXPANSION BOLT TO SLAB 048' O.C. B DETAILL roNDOLA SECTION OURSCT 5 5 SCALE: A SCALE: 1 5 SCALE NONE SCALE: 1" = 1' -0 SALES VCT FINISH IN SALES AREA IMPACT DOORS PRE –SALES /// 2' VINYL OR RUBBER REDUCER STRIP 0 ALL OPENING NG (SEE SPECS) CONCRETE SLAB - - 10 NOT USED auk - ' - ( - NOT USED 2x4 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE ANCHOR TIRO GYP_ BOARD TO SIIAS LONG j � I — 1 BOI OM/STEEI_ & ) 1 A.F.F. OF EXIST. STL PLATE REMAINS) . ,♦�♦♦♦� I FACE OF COLUMN BEYOND V: , ►♦ S �l �./ ►�.� -- ./ _ / ' - 1/2 L SLOT ANCHOR 0 GYP. BOARD t SRI) PEB i t l m 6 0 D.0 ANCHOR W/ 3/8' DIA. SLEEVE TYPE EXPANSION BOLT INTO MASONRY (GROUT . .CELLS SOUO) '.. PLATE NQ1E MERE DOSING M OD ANCHOR ST PLATE 6 TO REMAIN. A NEW 2o4 DIRECTLY MASONRY -TM NYIIIC -CON Fr 14 -334 1,4177.4-44 /. I. 4 YYYg � ����� BOTTOM/SIEL & ® P ♦ 9 � 4♦ � Jls p�ls. 7 \�� �`WW I1E4 6 WOOD AUGNMENT 'ATTACH TO ANGLES /(2). HILT' 12 -24 HWH #5 SCREWS '2x4 WOOD ALIGNMENT PLATE ANCHOR TO FLOOR SLAB w/ POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS ®: 24' 0.C., (ALIGN FACE w/ FACE OF 2x6 ''' � - S P�7 � ®.••• • ®e♦O4 W ���11 =� 13 THRESHOLD DETAIL Ik + ( 4 kFF PLATE REMA IIMMIEMININIRBIR DETAIL IAN ENT WOO PLATE OF REQUIRED.) DETAIL AUGNM R D PLATE 0 SCALE NONE SCALE NONE 1 5 SCALE: 3" = 1' -0° 5 5 SCALE: 2x4 BRACING 0 3 -O' D.C. - -- PROVIDE PLYWOOD PR 3/4' PLYWOOD FLAT TOP (BOTH SUES. OF WEB) TO CAP OFF COLUMN ENCLOSURE BETWEEN FLANGES COVER PLYWOOD w/ WALL PROTECTION MATERIAL (CC1) FIELD VERIFY . 2x2 MIN. CONT. CORNER BLOCKING PROVIDE / PLYNY]OD TOP & BLOCKING . TOP MELAMINE. OTT OF TUI ((I{A APPRO1'c0 MAR 8 LC�1 AS Nu1[ PANEL G.C. RESPONSIBLE FOR ASSEMBLY le OF BORED CORNERS SURFACE BETWEEN — PANELS DOWEL OR BISCUIT PANELS TOGETHER. 6' -0' HIGH VINYL CORNER WARDS CG2 5 (TYPICAL 4 CORNERS X , EXISTING �I STL TUBE COLUMN W WALL PROTECTION 1 '5/8' 25 GA MT - MATERIAL (CC1) SUDS (4 CORNERS) (TYPICAL 4 SIDES) EXISTING STL N1DE FLANGE COLUMN 6' -0' HIGH VINYL CORNER WARD 0.9 1 - _ � �� L A r- TYPICAL 4 CORNERS) ( NERS) ,, W -0' HIGH VINYL WALL PROTECTION MATERIAL (CC1) 4 SIDES) I UNE OF FIXT MELAMINE I 1x1' ALUM. TRIM ANGLE TO COVER rL -1! 3/4' PLYNOOD (4 SIDES) x 6' -0' P e�,�... . I T' I CORNER JOINT. 1'x1' ALUM. TRIM I ANGLE TO COVER .. (TYPICAL REFER TO INTERIOR FINISHES MATERIAL UST ON SHEET A2 FOR INFORMATION REGARDING (CG2) & (CC1) CONDITION ®STEEL WIDE Fl ANGE COLUMNS CORNER JOINT' I NO FIELD VERIFY WIDTH & I NOTE MELAMINE DEPTH AFTER FIXTURES ARE INSTALLED. COORDINATE I TO BE INSTALLED ON '�. SHAPE WITH THE FIXTURE 5 /8': HIGH ,DENSITY PLAN RF1& OWN fEW PARTICLE BOARD. REP. 4 DETAIL CANE FINISH FLOOR NOTE. SALES AREA COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED PNT1 FROM 6' -0'. A.F.F. TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK ABOVE. 12 DETAIL ® SALES AREA COLUMNS J I CP.93" 0 15 SCALE 3/8" = VERIFY AMOUNT, CONFIGURATION 1' -0 • i nnATInr;r Ill /nvn tor lou ANT. oc.I 5 15 SCALE; 1 ' 1 5 SCALE 1 1/2 = 1' -0 r No I Date 2/8/01 Revisions Description PERMIT APPLICATION Drawing References No .Drawings BID DATE 2/8/01 CADD. NAME: 603A05 PROJECT NO 800603 DRAWN BY. JAB CHECKED BY: CMS - PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 REMOOFL -90 COMBO IIC 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS PERM C., Professional of record practicing as an individual PROFESSIONAL "v 2n OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314 -821 -1100 I IC 4702 FOP D- ' / 0 / : I.. National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201).599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "D" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission, of TOYS 'A' US. Location TUKWILA, WA 16700 S. CENTER PKWY Drawing Title INTERIOR DETAILS Scale AS NOTED I Date 2/8/01 Sheet No. T.O. WALL 12' 0 °t A.F.F. (FIELD. VERIFY) STL JSTS. (TYP. CROSS RUNNER DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2 "' = 1' -0" 12 go. VERT. WIRE INSIDE STRUT EMT STRUT O 12' -0" O.C. RE SCHEDULE FOR SIZE FOUR 12 ga. SPLAYED SEISMIC SUPPORT WIRES AT 45' MAX. (TYP.) ANCHOR TO UNDER- JOISTS WITH #12 ga. LAG SCREW EYE BOLT. (TYP. EA. STRUT PIPE STRUT SCHEDULE HEIGHT IN FEET PIPE STRUT SIZE 7' 1/2" 0 EMT CONDUIT (H) 0' TO I TO 10' 10' TO 16' 3/4" 0 EMT CONDUIT 1 0 EMT CONDUIT 4 TIGHT TURNS I 1 1/2" LOOP BOTH ENDS (TYPJ MAIN RUNNER NOTE: THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS SHALL BE FULFILLED (FOR ALL NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS) PER BUILDING CODE A. SUSPENDED CEIUNG SYSTEM AND ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL CONFORM TO U.B.C. STANDARD 47 -18 REMOVE OVERHANG EDGE OF EXISTING MOOD CAP & TRIM, AS I TO INSTALL GONDOLA ATE NT BLOCKING. EXISTING HOOD BLOCKING TO REMAIN. FIELD VERIFY. EXISTING ZIP. BD. TO. REMAIN. EXISTING ROOD OR MET. JD & GYP. BD. PARTITION TO REMAIN. EXISTING WAINSCOT TO REMAIN. EXISTING :ART CURB TO REMAIN. J B. (4) FOUR NO. 12 GAUGE WIRES SHALL BE SECURED TO THE MAIN RUNNER WITHIN. 2" OF THE CROSS RUNNER INTERSECTION AND SPLAYED 90' FROM EACH OTHER AT AN ANGLE NOT EXCEEDING 45' FROM', THE PLANE OF THE CEUNG. THE VERTICAL STRUT, FASTENED TO THE MAIN. RUNNER, SHALL BE EXTENDED TO AND FASTENED TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ABOVE AND CEILING GRID BELOW. .THESE. STRUTS SHALL BE PLACED 12' O.C. IN DOER DIRECTIONS WITH THE OUST POINT WITHIN 6' FROM EACH WALL ATTACHMENT OF THE RESTRAINT . WIRES TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL BE ADEQUATE FOR LOAD IMPOSED. C. MAIN RUNNERS AND CROSS RUNNERS MAY BE ATTACHED AT (2) TWO ADJACENT WALLS WITH CLEARANCE BETWEEN. WALL AND RUNNERS MAINTAINED AT THE OTHER (2) TWO WALLS. 0. DISCONTINUOUS' ENDS OF THE CROSS RUNNERS AND. MAIN RUNNERS SHALL BE VERTICALLY SUPPORTED WITHIN 8" OF SUCH DISCONTINUITIES. nSEIS DETAIL SCAL£: NONE SCALE: NONE NEW 2x WOOD BLOCKING. FACE TO AUGN W/EXISIING CURB BELOW ATTACH TO EXISTING BLOCKING. 3/8" DIA THRU BOLT W/ LOCK - NUT AND OVER SIZED WASHERS (EACH JOIST) 2 X 2 X 1/8 ANGLE AT EACH PIPE STRUT ANGLE #12 MIN. EYE BOLT W/NUT ON BOTH SID. OF ANGLE ROOF/FLOOR FRAMING EMT STEVE ONE SIZE LARGER THAN STRUT. SAT END OF STEVE TO FIT OVER MAIN RUNNER CONNECT W/ (2) TEK SCREWS 8" 20 GA MTL DEFLECTION TRACK TO FIT OVER GYP. BOARD. COPE GYP. BD. AROUND STL JOISTS PROVIDE 1/2" CLEAR SPACE TO ALLOW FOR DEFLECTION. 2' CONTINUOUS 4"x1 /4 SR_ PLATE. SECURE TO 2x4 ORE RETARDANT WD. BLOCKING W/ 1/2" DIA FLATHEAD W0. SKEWS (COUNTERSINK) DOE OF OFFICE (SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS) SUSPENDED ACT. CLUNG (NO CEUNG 0 KRU STOCK - EMEND GYP. BD.. TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK) KRU STOCK 1 /4' DIA. TAPCON. SCREWS 0 4' -0" O.C. SCALE: 3/8" = 1' -0" ( CEUNG 1 16 SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" ADJUSTABLE SURFACE MID_ WALL STANDARDS (TYP.) "-0"xY-0"x3/4" COMP. BOARD SHELVING W/ (2) 12 LONG BRACKETS FOR EACH SHELF. (TIP.) SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY D.C. PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" COMP. BD. - COUNTER TOP & EDGES PLASTIC LAMINATES TO BE "FORMICA" #925 CHAMPAGNE - SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY G.C. 2 "x4" LEDGER BOARD (TYP.) CHROME SUPPORT LEG 1 1/4" DIA (MIN) W/ BASE FLANGE BOLTED TO FLOOR (TYP.) AS REED. COUNTERTOP SUPPORT DETAIL r TRU SAI FS KEYED NOTES a a a m 0 1 NEW DOOR AND FRAME. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE. NEW PARTITION. PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL OR PARTITION. NEW VCT IN KRU OFFICE & PRE-SALES. REFER TO SHEET Al FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COUNTER TOP PROVIDED & INSTALLED. BY G.C. REFER TO DETAIL 4 /A6 FOR MORE INFORMATION. EXISTING STAIR TO REMAIN. ACOUSTICAL 11LE CEIUNG: 24"048" LAY IN PANELS TO BE ARMSTRONG 1749: FINE FISSURED - PLASTIC FACED. COLOR: WHITE: REFER TO SHEET AS &OET 7/A6. NEW 24"x48" FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES. COORDINATE'. WITH TRU REPRESENTATIVE. OPEN TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. AUGN NEW WALL WITH EXITING PARTITION. NEW SUPPLY DIFFUSER. l (SEE SHEET Al. FOR ADDITIONAL MECHANICAL INFORMATION) EXISTING FIRE RISER AREA TO REMAIN. 12 LINE OF EXISTING MEZZANINE AREA ABOVE TO REMAIN. NOTES: - - -- 1. REFER TO SHEET Al FOR PARTITION TYPES. 2. NEW PARTITIONS TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK ABOVE. 3. INSTALL OR RELOCATE SPRINKLER HEADS IN OFFICE AS REQUIRED. REFER TO SHEET A2 FOR INTERIOR FINISH UST. 3"x3"x 1/4" CONT. STE. ANGLE WELDED TO BOTTOM CHORD OF JOISTS PROVIDE 1 1/2" LONG SLOTS O 16 O.0 TO ATTACH TO STUDS w/ #14 SHE MIL SCREWS. 1'- 0. (TYP) OVERSTOCK SELF BRACKET. BOLT TO SOFFIT PANELS W /(2) BOLTS PER PANEL (MIN.) PER 4 SECTION: Y - 0TH.. x 4 W WHITE MELAMINE LAMINATE SOFFIT PANEL FIRMS. AND JLISTABLE SOFFIT BRACKET, BOLT TO SOFFIT PANEL. (MIN. (4) BOLTS PER SECTION). SINGLE T -5. LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP LIGHT (4-0" OR 8'-0 LENGTH). SIPPUED & INSTALLED BY TRU I(RU PANEL TO 9' -0" AFT. PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. PONT STANDARD TO 12' -0" A.F.F. PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. B ACKBOARD (DIVIDER AT 9' - PROVIDED & INST BY TRU. 0" A.F.F.) 6' 20 GA Mm. STUDS .. 16 O.C. W/ 5/8' GYP. BD. EACH SIDE-TYPICAL 1B DEEP GONDOLA BASE DECK (TIP.) DEPTH OF SOFFIT TO MATCH DEPTH OF BASE: DECK EXISTING CONC. FLOOR SLA ENLARGED PLANS SCALE: AS NOTED 21/2 20 GA. MR STUD. BRIDGING.) 48" O.C. ATTACH RUNNER TRACKS TO TOP CHORD OF JOISTS w/12-24 AWN TEKS /S. SCREWS 0 24' O.C. 6" 20 GA. Mm. RUNNER. TRACK. ATTACH TO S STUDS w/(2).. #14 SHT M1L SCREWS. DO NOT ATTACH TO DEFLECTION TRACK CONTINUOU54"x1 /4" STL PLATE TARDAN TO 2x4 FIRE RETARDANT WD. BLOCKING W/ 1/2' DIA FLATHEAD: WD. SCREWS AT� SALES SSIDE OF OFFICE.. (SEE. FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS)., SUSPENDED' A.C.T. CEILING (NO. CEIUNG' 0 KRU STOCK - IXTEND GYP. BD. TO UNDERSIDE. OF ROOF. DECK) )KRU STOCK 1/4" DIA. TAPCON SCREWS SECTION REFLECTED, CEILING PLAN SCALE: 3/16 1 16 SCALE: 3/4" ' = 1' -0" 11 I i 11 II IETAL DECK COMING STEEL JOIST 11 6 3/4 MALL CAP 10 FfF. DYER GYP- BOARD. ATTACH TO 2 1/2 SRO E:OQIG w/ (2) j14 SHT MIL SCREW PER SITU_ 20 GA. ME DEFLECTION TRACE TD FIT OVER GYP_ BOARD. TRU SALES KRU PANEL TO 9' - 0' PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. UPRK;tiT STANDARD TO 12' -0" A.F.F. PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. . (DIVIDER AT 9' -O" AFT.) PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. 0 20 GA .MIL STUDS GIs" O.C. W/ 5/8: GIP. BD. EACH SIDE- TYPICAL 18" DEEP GONDOLA BASE DECK (TYP.) DEPTH OF SOFFIT TO HATCH, DEPTH OF BASE DECK COMIC CONC. FLOOR SLAB FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 3/16' = 1' -0" 2 SECTION 1 ,, 16 SCALE: 3/4" = 1' -0" CONTINUOUS 4x1/4 STL. PLATE PLAN COUNTERSINK 1/2" DIA x 4 1/2' FLATHEAD EXPANSION ANCHORS ®.4 -0' O.C.. SET INTO MASONRY GROUT CELL SOLID / NORTH CIiY OF (T)'((LA 2" x 2" x 1/4" ON STEEL ANGLE Pi'PRMED ALIGN W/FACE OF CHANNEL ABOVE. EXPANSION BOLT TO. SLAB 0 48" R 8 280 A s AJ`)EA No Date No 2/e /DH Drawing References Drawings Description BID DATE: 2/8/01 CADD. NAME: : ' 603A06 PROJECT NO 800603 -_.- DRAWN -. BY: JAB- CHECKED BE GINS PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 REMODFL - 90 COMBO Professional of record practicing as an individual. 47a2 Pea 1 2 20a1 PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314 -821 -1100 UC. 44702 EXP'.DATE = /10 01 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "fl" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without .permission of TOYS "0" US. Location TU , 16700 S. t i1 WA PPK'WY Drawing', Title ENLARGED PLANS & SECTIONS Scale AS NOTED Sheet No Revisions PERMIT APPLICATION @clog@ 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS. MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS Pe, . National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599-7800 glpgitKaTB I Date 2/8/01 nI 8" D. (TYP) OVERSTOCK SHELF 0 11-0" A.F.F. W /SOFFIT MOUNTING BRACKET BOLT TO SOFFIT PANELS W /(2) BOLTS PER PANEL (MIN_) PER 4' 0' SECTION. 'j'.1'tl. �.O -�ZI 11 ,,. •' 2-0 x 4'-0" W. WHITE MELAMINE LAMINATE SOFFIT PANEL. FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY TRU_ ii ADJUSTABLE SOFFIT BRACKET, BOLT TO SOFFIT' PANEL (MIN. (4) BOLTS PER SECTION). s SINGLE T -5 LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP UGHT. (4" -0" OR 8' -0 LENGTH). SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY TRU KRU PANEL TO 9 " -0" A.F.E. PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. UPRIGHT STANDARD TO 12 A.F.F. PROVIDED & INSTALLED Fn BY TRU. BACKBOARD DIVIDER. AT 9 PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. EHBSRNG CONC: BLOCK WAFT 18" DEEP GONDOLA BASE DECK (TYP.) DEPTH OF SOFFIT, TO MATCH DEPTH OF. BASE DECK. EXISTING CONC. FLOOR SLAB FIN. FLOOR T.O. WALL 12' 0 °t A.F.F. (FIELD. VERIFY) STL JSTS. (TYP. CROSS RUNNER DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2 "' = 1' -0" 12 go. VERT. WIRE INSIDE STRUT EMT STRUT O 12' -0" O.C. RE SCHEDULE FOR SIZE FOUR 12 ga. SPLAYED SEISMIC SUPPORT WIRES AT 45' MAX. (TYP.) ANCHOR TO UNDER- JOISTS WITH #12 ga. LAG SCREW EYE BOLT. (TYP. EA. STRUT PIPE STRUT SCHEDULE HEIGHT IN FEET PIPE STRUT SIZE 7' 1/2" 0 EMT CONDUIT (H) 0' TO I TO 10' 10' TO 16' 3/4" 0 EMT CONDUIT 1 0 EMT CONDUIT 4 TIGHT TURNS I 1 1/2" LOOP BOTH ENDS (TYPJ MAIN RUNNER NOTE: THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS SHALL BE FULFILLED (FOR ALL NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS) PER BUILDING CODE A. SUSPENDED CEIUNG SYSTEM AND ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL CONFORM TO U.B.C. STANDARD 47 -18 REMOVE OVERHANG EDGE OF EXISTING MOOD CAP & TRIM, AS I TO INSTALL GONDOLA ATE NT BLOCKING. EXISTING HOOD BLOCKING TO REMAIN. FIELD VERIFY. EXISTING ZIP. BD. TO. REMAIN. EXISTING ROOD OR MET. JD & GYP. BD. PARTITION TO REMAIN. EXISTING WAINSCOT TO REMAIN. EXISTING :ART CURB TO REMAIN. J B. (4) FOUR NO. 12 GAUGE WIRES SHALL BE SECURED TO THE MAIN RUNNER WITHIN. 2" OF THE CROSS RUNNER INTERSECTION AND SPLAYED 90' FROM EACH OTHER AT AN ANGLE NOT EXCEEDING 45' FROM', THE PLANE OF THE CEUNG. THE VERTICAL STRUT, FASTENED TO THE MAIN. RUNNER, SHALL BE EXTENDED TO AND FASTENED TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ABOVE AND CEILING GRID BELOW. .THESE. STRUTS SHALL BE PLACED 12' O.C. IN DOER DIRECTIONS WITH THE OUST POINT WITHIN 6' FROM EACH WALL ATTACHMENT OF THE RESTRAINT . WIRES TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL BE ADEQUATE FOR LOAD IMPOSED. C. MAIN RUNNERS AND CROSS RUNNERS MAY BE ATTACHED AT (2) TWO ADJACENT WALLS WITH CLEARANCE BETWEEN. WALL AND RUNNERS MAINTAINED AT THE OTHER (2) TWO WALLS. 0. DISCONTINUOUS' ENDS OF THE CROSS RUNNERS AND. MAIN RUNNERS SHALL BE VERTICALLY SUPPORTED WITHIN 8" OF SUCH DISCONTINUITIES. nSEIS DETAIL SCAL£: NONE SCALE: NONE NEW 2x WOOD BLOCKING. FACE TO AUGN W/EXISIING CURB BELOW ATTACH TO EXISTING BLOCKING. 3/8" DIA THRU BOLT W/ LOCK - NUT AND OVER SIZED WASHERS (EACH JOIST) 2 X 2 X 1/8 ANGLE AT EACH PIPE STRUT ANGLE #12 MIN. EYE BOLT W/NUT ON BOTH SID. OF ANGLE ROOF/FLOOR FRAMING EMT STEVE ONE SIZE LARGER THAN STRUT. SAT END OF STEVE TO FIT OVER MAIN RUNNER CONNECT W/ (2) TEK SCREWS 8" 20 GA MTL DEFLECTION TRACK TO FIT OVER GYP. BOARD. COPE GYP. BD. AROUND STL JOISTS PROVIDE 1/2" CLEAR SPACE TO ALLOW FOR DEFLECTION. 2' CONTINUOUS 4"x1 /4 SR_ PLATE. SECURE TO 2x4 ORE RETARDANT WD. BLOCKING W/ 1/2" DIA FLATHEAD W0. SKEWS (COUNTERSINK) DOE OF OFFICE (SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS) SUSPENDED ACT. CLUNG (NO CEUNG 0 KRU STOCK - EMEND GYP. BD.. TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK) KRU STOCK 1 /4' DIA. TAPCON. SCREWS 0 4' -0" O.C. SCALE: 3/8" = 1' -0" ( CEUNG 1 16 SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" ADJUSTABLE SURFACE MID_ WALL STANDARDS (TYP.) "-0"xY-0"x3/4" COMP. BOARD SHELVING W/ (2) 12 LONG BRACKETS FOR EACH SHELF. (TIP.) SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY D.C. PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" COMP. BD. - COUNTER TOP & EDGES PLASTIC LAMINATES TO BE "FORMICA" #925 CHAMPAGNE - SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY G.C. 2 "x4" LEDGER BOARD (TYP.) CHROME SUPPORT LEG 1 1/4" DIA (MIN) W/ BASE FLANGE BOLTED TO FLOOR (TYP.) AS REED. COUNTERTOP SUPPORT DETAIL r TRU SAI FS KEYED NOTES a a a m 0 1 NEW DOOR AND FRAME. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE. NEW PARTITION. PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL OR PARTITION. NEW VCT IN KRU OFFICE & PRE-SALES. REFER TO SHEET Al FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COUNTER TOP PROVIDED & INSTALLED. BY G.C. REFER TO DETAIL 4 /A6 FOR MORE INFORMATION. EXISTING STAIR TO REMAIN. ACOUSTICAL 11LE CEIUNG: 24"048" LAY IN PANELS TO BE ARMSTRONG 1749: FINE FISSURED - PLASTIC FACED. COLOR: WHITE: REFER TO SHEET AS &OET 7/A6. NEW 24"x48" FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES. COORDINATE'. WITH TRU REPRESENTATIVE. OPEN TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. AUGN NEW WALL WITH EXITING PARTITION. NEW SUPPLY DIFFUSER. l (SEE SHEET Al. FOR ADDITIONAL MECHANICAL INFORMATION) EXISTING FIRE RISER AREA TO REMAIN. 12 LINE OF EXISTING MEZZANINE AREA ABOVE TO REMAIN. NOTES: - - -- 1. REFER TO SHEET Al FOR PARTITION TYPES. 2. NEW PARTITIONS TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK ABOVE. 3. INSTALL OR RELOCATE SPRINKLER HEADS IN OFFICE AS REQUIRED. REFER TO SHEET A2 FOR INTERIOR FINISH UST. 3"x3"x 1/4" CONT. STE. ANGLE WELDED TO BOTTOM CHORD OF JOISTS PROVIDE 1 1/2" LONG SLOTS O 16 O.0 TO ATTACH TO STUDS w/ #14 SHE MIL SCREWS. 1'- 0. (TYP) OVERSTOCK SELF BRACKET. BOLT TO SOFFIT PANELS W /(2) BOLTS PER PANEL (MIN.) PER 4 SECTION: Y - 0TH.. x 4 W WHITE MELAMINE LAMINATE SOFFIT PANEL FIRMS. AND JLISTABLE SOFFIT BRACKET, BOLT TO SOFFIT PANEL. (MIN. (4) BOLTS PER SECTION). SINGLE T -5. LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP LIGHT (4-0" OR 8'-0 LENGTH). SIPPUED & INSTALLED BY TRU I(RU PANEL TO 9' -0" AFT. PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. PONT STANDARD TO 12' -0" A.F.F. PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. B ACKBOARD (DIVIDER AT 9' - PROVIDED & INST BY TRU. 0" A.F.F.) 6' 20 GA Mm. STUDS .. 16 O.C. W/ 5/8' GYP. BD. EACH SIDE-TYPICAL 1B DEEP GONDOLA BASE DECK (TIP.) DEPTH OF SOFFIT TO MATCH DEPTH OF BASE: DECK EXISTING CONC. FLOOR SLA ENLARGED PLANS SCALE: AS NOTED 21/2 20 GA. MR STUD. BRIDGING.) 48" O.C. ATTACH RUNNER TRACKS TO TOP CHORD OF JOISTS w/12-24 AWN TEKS /S. SCREWS 0 24' O.C. 6" 20 GA. Mm. RUNNER. TRACK. ATTACH TO S STUDS w/(2).. #14 SHT M1L SCREWS. DO NOT ATTACH TO DEFLECTION TRACK CONTINUOU54"x1 /4" STL PLATE TARDAN TO 2x4 FIRE RETARDANT WD. BLOCKING W/ 1/2' DIA FLATHEAD: WD. SCREWS AT� SALES SSIDE OF OFFICE.. (SEE. FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS)., SUSPENDED' A.C.T. CEILING (NO. CEIUNG' 0 KRU STOCK - IXTEND GYP. BD. TO UNDERSIDE. OF ROOF. DECK) )KRU STOCK 1/4" DIA. TAPCON SCREWS SECTION REFLECTED, CEILING PLAN SCALE: 3/16 1 16 SCALE: 3/4" ' = 1' -0" 11 I i 11 II IETAL DECK COMING STEEL JOIST 11 6 3/4 MALL CAP 10 FfF. DYER GYP- BOARD. ATTACH TO 2 1/2 SRO E:OQIG w/ (2) j14 SHT MIL SCREW PER SITU_ 20 GA. ME DEFLECTION TRACE TD FIT OVER GYP_ BOARD. TRU SALES KRU PANEL TO 9' - 0' PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. UPRK;tiT STANDARD TO 12' -0" A.F.F. PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. . (DIVIDER AT 9' -O" AFT.) PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY TRU. 0 20 GA .MIL STUDS GIs" O.C. W/ 5/8: GIP. BD. EACH SIDE- TYPICAL 18" DEEP GONDOLA BASE DECK (TYP.) DEPTH OF SOFFIT TO HATCH, DEPTH OF BASE DECK COMIC CONC. FLOOR SLAB FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 3/16' = 1' -0" 2 SECTION 1 ,, 16 SCALE: 3/4" = 1' -0" CONTINUOUS 4x1/4 STL. PLATE PLAN COUNTERSINK 1/2" DIA x 4 1/2' FLATHEAD EXPANSION ANCHORS ®.4 -0' O.C.. SET INTO MASONRY GROUT CELL SOLID / NORTH CIiY OF (T)'((LA 2" x 2" x 1/4" ON STEEL ANGLE Pi'PRMED ALIGN W/FACE OF CHANNEL ABOVE. EXPANSION BOLT TO. SLAB 0 48" R 8 280 A s AJ`)EA No Date No 2/e /DH Drawing References Drawings Description BID DATE: 2/8/01 CADD. NAME: : ' 603A06 PROJECT NO 800603 -_.- DRAWN -. BY: JAB- CHECKED BE GINS PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 REMODFL - 90 COMBO Professional of record practicing as an individual. 47a2 Pea 1 2 20a1 PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314 -821 -1100 UC. 44702 EXP'.DATE = /10 01 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "fl" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without .permission of TOYS "0" US. Location TU , 16700 S. t i1 WA PPK'WY Drawing', Title ENLARGED PLANS & SECTIONS Scale AS NOTED Sheet No Revisions PERMIT APPLICATION @clog@ 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS. MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS Pe, . National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599-7800 glpgitKaTB I Date 2/8/01 nI ELECTRICAL & TELEPHONE SYMBOLS RECEPTACLES/PLUGMOLD .QUAD RECEPTACLE LLLii S - SECTION OF PLUGMOLD tb GENERAL PURPOSE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 4' -0" SECTION OF DOUBLE SIDED ELECTRIC SPANNER - 09 4' -0" SECTION OF SINGLE SIDED ELECTRIC SPANNER - OSI LIGHTING FIXTURES ® 2 LE VELS OF "BIKE TYPE" IN -RACK LIGHTING ® AT B IKE RACK (4' -0" SECTIONS) - OS! o T LEVEL OF VALANCE GHTING (4' -0" SECTIONS) LI = 3A LEVELS OF "BIKE TYPE" IN -RACK LIGHTING ® AT BIKE RACK (4' -O" SECTIONS) - 051 1 LEVEL OF VALANCE LIGHTING (3' -0" SECTIONS m IF APPLICABLE) 1 LEVEL OF IN -RACK LIGHTING LOCATED ON o ( O SEC TIO lO NS) - OS LOW PROFILE VALANCE LIGHTING (4' - 0" SEC E, LOWER LEVEL (ENVIRONMENTAL FIXTURE. 8' -0' SECTIONS) 1 LEVEL OF IN -RACK LIGHTING LOCATED ON E4 LOWER LEVEL (ENVIRONMENTAL FIXTURE, 4' -0" SECTIONS) m (2) LEVELS OF LOW PROFILE VALANCE LIGHTING m (3' -0" SECTIONS) - 051 MIS/PHONES B TELEPHONE (MULTI -USE) IMI CALL BOX Q TELEPHONE (INCOMING ONLY) CI PRICE CHECKER ® TELEPHONE (INTERNAL ONLY) MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRONIC. DISPLAY CASE, PREWIRED WITH ® LIGHTING. AND WHIP (REFER TO THIS. PLAN FOR #, SIZE & LOCATION). 0 JUNCTION BOX & LOCATION OF POWER DROP GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL PLUGMOLD TO BE MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY /LEVEL (ELC. TO PROVIDE PLUGMOLD AS MANUFACTURED BY WIREMOLD # 2000GB SERIES, WITH RECEPTACLE ON 6' CENTERS, COLOR TO BE WHITE. P RF1.1 SCALE: N.T.S. -BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE' TRU GONDOLA CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR TYPICAL (INSIDE GONDOLA) GENERAL PURPOSE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 3' (TIP) UNLESS, OTHERWISE NOTED ENDCAP MOUNTED GP DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTING DETAIL IymmimosumusemoNs MID. 7' -6 AF.F. MID- OM TOP POWER POLE OF FD ❑ 0 S Rn DESK 0 SCALE: 1/16' =1' -0' n n n n • n n n 1 1 � , I I I I 1 I I 11 11, 01' NM Mai �FS+ MTD- BEHIND FIXTURE REGISTRY KIOSK TD. ON BOTTOM RAIL ❑ MTD. ON BOTTOM RAIL GIVi O TUI ILA p1.pRuIED i - 8 2,t'U1 SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. / -ENDEAF II -JB (MOUNTED ABOVE FIXTURE) �I PLAN VIEW CONDUIT JB ROUTE CONDUIT INSIDE FIXTURE (TYP) 1 (TIP.) UNLESS sam OTHERWISE NOTED PLUGMOLD ELEVATION TYPICAL 8'- 0 "/12' -0" HIGH GONDOLA MOUNTED EQUIPMENT (FED FROM ABOVE) 1 LEVEL IN —RACK LIGHTING DETAIL *-ENDCAP ROUTE CONDUIT INSIDE FIXTURE (TYP) SCALE: N.T.S. CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR TYPICAL 2 LEVELS BIKE RACK LIGHTING DETAIL SCALE N.T.S. z (MOUNTED UNDER FIXTURE) PLAN VIEW CONDUIT ROUTE FLEX INSIDE FIXTURE (TYP) ENDCAP 3' (TYP.) UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED JB BOUNTID PLUGMCLD LOCATION FOR A UNDER FIXTUR 5-X " HIGH FIXTURE ELEVATION TYPICAL 5'- 0 "/5'- 6 76' -0" HIGH GONDOLA MOUNTED EQUIPMENT (FED FROM ABOVE) 3-BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE 3 LEVELS BIKE RACK LIGHTING DETAIL SCALE WIS. J- BOX,MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE I I I 8 v 1 ° w _ „�cw 'yam• - 'HK - n n n n n n n nn n n H I I II II II II II II II II II II 1 . 1 H L_J u L_J L.J H I®I 1__1{ H H, LJ I J LJ LJ L-I L J L i LJ L MTD. 0 4' -0” AF.F No Dote 12 /2B /DO Revisions Description ISSUED TO CONSULTANT FOR C.D:S Drawing References No ,Drawings BID DATE: PROJECT NO - CAD NAME:Tp WAVE NO.: - -- DRAWN BY: CLP. CHECKED BY: - -- PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: C3 REMODEL COMBO v23. Location Store Support Center 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800. This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "A" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "Sr US. 2001 REMODEL PROTOTYPE 90C (R /H: 1990 CONFIGURATION COMBO) I Drawing Title IN RACK LIGHTING, POWER & MIS PLAN S cale Date AS NOTED 12/28/2000 Sheet No. RF1 / i TYPICAL 8'- 0 "/12' -0" HIGH GONDOLA MOUNTED EQUIPMENT (FED FROM ABOVE) SCALE: N.T.S. J —BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE TRU GONDOLA SCALE: N.T.S. / ,—ENDCAP _J6 (MOUNTED ABOVE FIXTURE) PLAN VIEW ELEVATION RECEPTACLE AT GONDOLA HEIGHT FOR OWNER SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED "VL1" STRIP LIGHTING. 1 LEVEL IN —RACK LIGHTING DETAIL TYPE "VL1" UGHT TYPICAL ENDCAP HARD WIRE WHIP FROM COUNTER INTO J —BOX FOR NORMAL POWER, MOUNT IN CABINET, AFTER CABINET IS INSTALLED. PLAN VIEW CONDUIT JB MOUNTED PLUGMOLD LOCATION FOR A UNDER Fl 5 -0' HIGH FIXTURE ELEVATION TYPICAL 5'- 0 "/5'- 6 76' -0" HIGH GONDOLA MOUNTED EQUIPMENT FED FROM ABOVE) SCALE N.T.S. 2 LEVELS BIKE RACK UGHTING DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. 2 x6 "PULL BOX 2" CONDUIT FOR DATA (3) SECTION POWER POLE, ONE (1) SECTION FOR NORMAL POWER, (1) ONE SECTION FOR IG POWER, (1) SECTION. FOR PHONE/DATA. / —ENDCAP �JB (MOUNTED UNDER FIXTURE) — ENOCAP ROUTE FLEX INSIDE FIXTURE (TYP) 6" x 6" PULL BOX 1. ROUTE CONDUIT AND WARE INSIDE CABINETS. 3. ALL WIRING TO BE #10, 1/2" CONDUIT. 6" x 6" PULL BOX LC -20,22 LA -33 PLUGMOLD 2" CONDUIT FOR DATA AND PHONE. SEE SHEET E2 FOR CONTINUATION. 2 MOUNT ALL VICES REFUND /EXCHANGE ARA E ON CABINET WAL AFTER IN CABINET HAS BEEN INSTALLED. SCALE N.T.S. SCALE N.T.S. ' -BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE TRU GONDOLA CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR TYPICAL (INSIDE GONDOLA) GENERAL PURPOSE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ENDCAP MOUNTED GP DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTING DETAIL UGHT FIXTURES TIP THREADED ROD RECEPTACLE. FOR SODA AND ICE CREAM COOLERS TYP. OF. 3. (IF APPLICABLE) J—BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST SPACE CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR TYPICAL 3 LEVELS BIKE RACK UGHTING DETAIL ROOF FRAMING MEMBER � UNISTRUT SUPPORT FOR UGHT FIXTIRE.. PROVIDED AS NEEDED BY ELC BRACKETS MAX 5 -0 �0.C. GENERAL NOTES 1. BEFORE SUBMITTING THE BID PROPOSAL, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE JOB SITE AND FULLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF. WITH SHE JOB CONDITIONS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL NECESSARY. PULL BOXES, SIZE AND NUMBER OF CONDUITS AND CONDUCTORS, SWITCH GEAR, METERING, CABLE CHARGES, ETC., WHETHER SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR NOT BUT REQURED TO MAKE A COMPLETE AND OPERATING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM WITHOUT ADDIi.EEO. COST - TO THE OIWJER.' 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS NITRIC WITH THAT OF ALL OTHERS AND ACCOMMODATE FIXTURES WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS.'. PRIOR TO FINISH OF EFFECTED WORK, ELC SHALL INSTRUCT THE OWNER AND /OR'. MANAGER ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 3. ELECTRICAL WORE AND MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH LATEST "N.EC." AND ALL LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES IN CASE CF CONFLICT BETWEEN REQUIREMENTS. THE MOST RESTRICTIVE SHALL APPLY. 4. GROUT T ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER'"N.EC_" AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 5. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE / 12 MC. � EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED OR AS REQUIRED FOR VOLTAGE DROP (SEE SPECS.). ALL CONDUIT EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED.. 6. EIERGEJCY WIRING (INCLUDING BRANCH CIRCUITS) SHALL BE CARRIED IN A SEPARATE CONDUIT SYSTEM, BOXES AND ENCLOSURES SHALL BE MARKED SO THEY WILL BE READILY IDENTIFIABLE AS COMPONENTS OF AN EMERGENCY SYSTEM. 4DIM FOR ,� HONE \ / IIII' � WHIP ,/ TO REAR OF STORE PROVIDED TWTFI POWER POLE WI1H... m' OF FLEC.. ELC TO ROULE THRU CAST AND PLUG INTO OTHER POWER PEE CASH REGISTER ISOMETRIC SCALE: NONE NOTE 1. REFER TO THIS DETAIL ONLY IF FRONT END CONVERSION HAS NOT BEEN PERFORMED. lo i -o38 2" CONDUIT FOR IC POWER FROM. FRONT WALL (2) 3" CONDUIT FOR DATA AND PHONE FROM FRONT WALL POWER. POLE TYPICAL AT EACH CASH REGISTER LANE GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL VALENCE LIGHTING WIRING TO BE PERFORMED BY ELC. ABBREVIATIONS AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR EC EMPTY CONDUIT EF EXHAUST FAN ELC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER HAC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR JB JUNCTION. BOX WIC. NOT IN CONIRACT MDP '.MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL MT. HT. MOUNTING HEIGHT RTU ROOF TOP, UNIT TRU TOYS 'II US UH UNIT HEATER 0ON UNLESS OTHERWISE, NOTED WEATHER PROOF W/ WITH CIC CUSTOMER INFORMATION CENTER RGD RETURNED, GOODS DAMAGED ETR. EXISTING TB REMAIN CPU CUSTOMER PICK. UP ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS VALENCE UGHTING FIXTURES 2 LEVELS OF "BIKE TYPE' IN —RACK LIGHTING AT BIKE RACK (4' -0" SECTIONS FURNISHED BY RACK MANUFACTURER) ® 3 LEVELS OF "BIKE TYPE" IN —RACK LIGHTING AT BIKE RACK (4' -0" SECTIONS FURNISHED BY RACK MANUFACTURER) = (2) LEVELS OF LOW PROFILE VALANCE LIGHTING (4' -0" SECTIONS FURNISHED BY RACK MANUFACTURER) = (2) LEVELS OF LOW PROFILE VALANCE LIGHTING (3 -0" SECTIONS FURNISHED BY RACK MANUFACTURER) 0 EXIT SIGN WITH BATTERY BACK —UP, WITH DIRECTIONAL ARROW. MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT: ABOVE CEILING, IN WALLS, EXPOSED OR CONCEALED. Q. JUNCTION BOX 13 JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST AREA FOR CONNECTION TO RACKING. CONDUITS CONNECTED BETWEEN SUCH BOXES. SHALL BE ROUTED IN JOIST AREA TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX, WALL TYPE (MT HT 5 -2 AFF WITH 1/2" C. ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNS BACK TO TELEPHONE. EQUIPMENT' BACKBOARD AND 48 " AFF WITH 3/4" C. BACK TO TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT BACKBOARD IN NON —SALES AREAS. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) REVISION. MARK ti1R - 825 As Ni)1EU No Date Revisions Description PERMIT APPLICATOR Drawing References Drawings BID DATE: CADD NAME: 603001 PROJECT NO 1309603 DRAWN BY: SOH CHECKED BY: OUP CtKPJK PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 REMODFI —NB COMBO Professional of :record practicing as an individual.' Location IIE 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS FE8 2001 PROFESSIONAL ° °•OF RECORD: JAMES C. ALBERTS #C001839 X314 -821 -1100 National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "A" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "fl" US. TUKWILA, WA 16700 S. CENTER' PKWY Drawing Title ELECTRICAL I ; SYMBOLS & NOTES S cale I Date AS NOTED Sheet No. E1 \e LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FlXT. TYPE SPECIFICATION LAMP DATA 1 MOUNTING OF LIGHT FIXTURE TOTAL WATT PER FlXT USED IN PLAN MARK B1 FURNISHED . WRACK (BY OWNER) FURNISHED W/ 8' FIXTURE (2) 4' FD32/TB FURNISHED ON BIKE RACK BY MANUFACTURER, CIRCUITED BY. ELC 64 BRt BR2 BR3 B2 FURNISHED W /RACK (BY OWNER) FURNISHED W/ 4' FIXTURE (') 4' F032/T8 ON BIKE RACK BY MANUFACTURER, CIRCUITED BY ELC '32. BR1 BR2 BR3 V FURNISHED W/RACK (BY OWNER) FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE (2) 4. F032/18 LOW PROFILE RACK LIGHTING FURNISHED ON RACK BY MANUF. WIRED BY ELC 64 V1 FURNISHED W/RACK (BY OWNER) FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE (2) 3' F025/T8 LOW PROFILE RACK LIGHTING FURNISHED ON RACK BY MANUF. WIRED BY ELC 50 V2 INSTALLED ON RACK (BY OWNER) FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY OWNER (2) 2 CF40/TS ELC TO PROVIDE RECEPTACLE AT 8' - AFF ON WALL OR RACK. OWNER WALL INSTALL UGHT FIXTURE 80 VLT V3 INSTALLED ON RACK BY OWNER) (BY FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY OWNER 'B" cE39/T5 ELC TO PROVIDE RECEPTACLE AT B' - AFF ON WALL OR RACK OWNER WALL INSTALL LIGHT FIXTURE 78 VL1 V4 FURNISHED W /RACK (BY OWNER) FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE IN RACK LIGHTING LOCATED ON LOWER LEVEL, ENVIRONMENTAL RACK 64 LLR1 VS FURNISHED WRACK (BY ONTIER) FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE (2) 3' F025/T8 IN RACK LIGHTING LOCATED ON LOWER LEVEL, ENVIRONMENTAL RACK 50 LLR1 .• LAMPS: I— INCANDESCENT F— FLUORESCENT MV— MERCURY. VAPOR MH —METAL HALIDE Q— QUARTZ BPS —HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM RACKING ELECTRICAL KEY PLAN MARK DESCRIPTION MO . (1) 5 - SECTION OF PLUGMOLD IMI (2) 5' -0 " SECTION OF PLUGMOLD iglii 4' -0" SECTION OF ELECTRIC SPANNER PLUG MOD, "R" ZONE AREA MOUNTED ABOVE BASE DECK ,,��.{{,, V,Y IS GENERAL PURPOSE GROUND TYPE RECEPTACLES MOUNTED ON RACK U.O.N. "IG" DENOTES ISOLATED GROUND TYPE OF APPLCABLE)_ IG QUAD GENERAL PURPOSE GROUND TYPE RECEPTACLES MOUNTED ON RACK U.O.N. 'IG" DENOTES ISOLATED GROUND TYPE OF APPLICABLE). PC PRICE CHECKER REQUIRING ISOLATED GROUND POWER, DATA AND TELEPHONE. i ELECTRONIC DISPLAY CASE, PREWIRED WITH LIGHTING AND WHIP, (SEE PLAN FOR NUMBER AND SIZE). O WORK STAT ION WITH NORMAL POWER, ISOLATED GROUND POWER AND 3 / 4 " CONDUIT FOR DATA/TELEPHONE USES N9g: 1. DEVICE CALL OUTS SHOWN ON DRAWING, ARE LOCATED ON THE SIDE OF THE RACKS ON WHICH THE DEVICES NEED TO BE PLACED. 2. ALL PLUGMOLD TO BE MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY/LEVEL (ELC. TO PROVIDE PLUGMOLD AS MANUFACTURED BY WIREMOLD # 2000GB SERIES, WITH RECEPTACLE LE -2,4,6 LE- 25;27,29. VL1 SEE PLAN NOTE #5 (TYP. ALL AUTOMATIC DOORS) J —BOX FOR BULL—NOSE LIGHTING. CONNECT TO EXISTING EXTERIOR CIRCUIT. EXISTING J —BOXES FOR SIGNAGE TO BE REMOVED. AFTER NEW VESTIBULE HAS BEEN CONSTRUCTED IF FRONT END CONVERSION HAS NOT BEEN ACCOMPUSHED. VERIFY WITH TRU REP. (TYPICAL FOR 7). 6 I Gial SEE PLAN NOTE 1 RACKING POWER PLAN C. TO MOUNT RECEPTACLE IN , t FIXTURE. BEHIND ® _ MONIT ` J -BOXES FOR SIGNS RELOCATE AND RECONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUITS IF FRONT END CONVERSION HAS NOT BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. VERIFY LOCATIONS WITH TRU REP. (TYPICAL FOR 7). ELC TO PROVIDE' J -BOX. FOR LOGO AND CONNECT TO EXISTING SIGN CIRCUITS. LE- 27,23: a RI ® 7. .._ ELC. TO MOU NT.'e =: AT 8'— AFF' SEE ENLARGED PLAN SHEET El J —BOX FOR BULL—NOSE LIGHTING. CONNECT TO EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT MID. SIDEWAYS & IMMEDIATELY ABOVE BASE. DECK EVERY 32' -0 IN APPAREL SECTION (TYP.) oUNT THIS J—BOX ON WALL JUST ABOVE DRESSING ROOMS FOR DRESSING ROOM POWER. NORTH Drawings Revisions PERMIT APPLICATION Drawing References BID DATE: CADD'..NAME- 6D3eR2 PROJECT NO BDD603 DRAWN BY: SDH. CHECKED BY: GT.R/P.AH PROTOTYPE DESIGNAl1ON: 2001 C3 RFMOBFl -90 COMBO 10877 WATSON ROAD _ ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS eERMITC,EB Professional of record practicing as an individual. PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAMES C. ALBERTS #C0018394 314 -821 -1100 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. ALL LIGHTING SUTURES, LAMPS AND BALLAST WILL BE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY ELC. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ELC SHALL. BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION AND LOCATION OF EXIT LIGHTS CMt' FIXTURES) WITH LOCAL AUTHORITIES. 3. ..PENDANT MOUNT EXIT SIGNS AT 1(F—Cr AFF EXCEPT SURFACE MOUNT OVER SLIDING DOORS. EXIT SIGNS SHALL BE CLEAR OF ALL RACKING. PLAN NOTES: 1. ALL WIRING TO BE #12, 1/2" C. U.O.N., AND ARRANGED TO BE BALANCED (3 HOTS AB,C) TO NEUTRAL. THIS INCLUDES ALL TWO AND THREE WIRE CONNECTIONS 2 IN A S MUCH POSSIBLE, RUN ELECTRICAL CONDUITS IN SUCH A WAY AS TO AVID PENETRATION.BY AS ROOF INSULATION ALL FASTENERS. 3. POWER POLES FROM JOIST TO SHOWCASE COUNTER AREA PROVIDE NORMAL AND ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUITS IN 1" CONDUITS TO RECEPTACLES IN CABINETS. PROVIDE (1) 2" CONDUIT FROM COMMUNICATIONS PLYWOOD IN EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM TO JUNCTION BOX IN JOIST SPACE ABOVE POWER POLES PROVIDE 2" BUSHED HOLE IN BOX FOR COMMUNICATION AND DATA CABLE EXIT TO POWER POLES. 4. FOR ICE CREAM AND SODA MACHINES, ROUTE POWER FROM POWER POLES. 5. DISCONNECT EXISTING AUTOMATIC DOOR OPENER AND EXISTING DOOR HEATERS- EXTEND AND RECONNECT EXISTING CIRCUITS TO NEW AUTOMATIC DOOR OPENER IF FRONT ENO CONVERSION HAS NOT BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. VERIFY WITH TRU REPRESENTATIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES 1. DISCONNECT EXISTING POWER POLES AT EXISTING REGISTERS, RELOCATE POLES TO NEW REGISTER LOCATIONS, AND RECONNECT IF FRONT END CONVERSION HAS NOT BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT 'WHIPS" AS REQUIRED. REGISTERS SHALL REMAIN IN OPERATION DURING BUSINESS HOURS. COORDINATE ALL "CUTOVERS" AND VERIFY THAT REGISTERS ARE TO BE RELOCATED WITH TRU REP. 2. RELOCATE EXISTING UGHT FIXTURES IN PRE —SALES AREA TO NEW LOCATION AS SHOWN IN ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS, REINSTALL AND RECONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUITS 3. DISCONNECT EXISTING ABANDONED POWER DROPS IN SALES AREA. 4. DISCONNECT EXISTING POWER. AND DATA DROPS IN SALES. AREA, TO EXISTING (PC). AND RECONNECT POWER AND DATA TO RELOCATED (PC) IN SALES AREA. STORE RACKING WIRING STORE RACKING WILL, BE LOCATED TO NEW LOCATIONS IN THE SALES 'AREA ELC TO PROVIDE A UNIT PRICE PER EACH STORE RACK TO ACCOMPUSH THE FOLLOWING 1. DISCONNECT EXISTING WIRING AT RACK AND AT J —BOX IN JOIST SPACE ABOVE RACK. 2. REMOVE EXISTING, CONDUIT'. DROP AND WIRING AND PROVIDE A BLANK COVER PLATE ON J —BOX 3. EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUITS FROM EXISTING J —BOX TO NEW J—BOX ABOVE NEW RACK LOCATION USING 2 #12, 1/2 EMT CONDUIT. 4. PROVIDE NEW 2 # 12, 1/2" C. DROPS FROM NEW J —BOX IN JOIST SPACE TO RACK, CONNECT TO POWER IN RACK IN NEW LOCATON. 5. VERIFY LOADING ON EXISTING CIRCUITS TO ASSURE THAT CIRCUITS ARE NOT OVERLOADED. 0- SCALE: 1/16" = 1'- O " 11 1 411 \ Afolk " Oka LA1 -33 EXISTING-EXIT-SIGNS-LOCATED THROUGHOUT THE SALES AREA TO BE RELOCATED AS REQUIRED. ELC TO CONNECT TO EMERGENCY CIRCUIT (NIGHT. UGHT FIXTURE) IN NEAREST ROW OF FLUORESCENT UGHT FIXTURES. LC -21 MOUNT PLUGMOLD. ABOVE COUNTER ELC TO RELOCATE EXISTING PRE — SALES LIGHTING AS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND CONNECT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT J—BOX MOUNTED ABOVE PLUG MOLD FOR DATA, STUB 3/4 . C. UP TO JOIST AREA AND STUB —OUT WITH INSULATED BUSHING, VERIFY IN FIELD WITH OWNERS REP. GC(9 viNtos11R Nth - s 241 ;cU This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "A" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "A" US. Location National Office 461 From Road Paramus. NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 TUKWILA, WA 16700 S. MIER PKWY Drawing Title RACKING POWER PLAN Scale I Date AS NOTED Sheet No. F9 A I ( SURFACE. (X) LO ) -C-0--. FLUSH PANEL LB 120/208 V, 30, 4W,, 100 A CKT # DESCRIPTION 1 SPARE' LOADS KW MCB CKT DESCRIPTION # 1 PKWY. SO SIGN AO n BD CD SIGN OVER ENTRY (1 1.5 1 2 , °KWY, SQ SIGN 5 SIDEWALK SALE RECEPT 2 5 n FKWY: SO SIGN 7 TRU SIGN e SI GN OVER EX.T 9 TRU SIGN (1 SPARE 10 SPARE .-` rl SPARE 12 COST PICK -UP SIGN (1 E ( SPARE 14 15 SPARE rl- SPARE 16 77 WATER HEATER 11= h r1 SPAR_ 18 F 7 H P. LASER n rs - (-' ® ® ® =„ Egrilla -ME [AMMO 28 M 29 '.. I T 30 31 E®\__ 33 121110.161g 34 35 ' A. 117.1 n S 36 MI r ® ®12 iii ( -'1114 FF" BKR 1P,20A,UNLESS NOTED. 4:5' '4.3 2 TOTAL', CONNECTED ii.7 'KW - HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE LOAD INFORMATION: CONNECTED DEMAND LIGHTING 0 KW X 7.25 0 KW OTHERS 11.7 KW X 1.00 _ 71.7 KW TOTAL 11.7 KW = 71.7 KW NOTE: THIS PANEL IS TO BE FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED ISOLATED GROUND BUS UPS SYSTEM &BY -PASS SWITCH MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME PHASE LEG SURFACE ( %) PANEL LC 120/2401, 10, 3W, 80 A MLO FLUSH M CB DESCRIPTION 1 MAIN 1 .O 5 , . 5 REpSIRY DESK � AD ` B0 � pL,] ®- n DESCRIPTION El UPS 2 PNL. STD 4 REGISTER RECEPT: 6 7 CASH RE G- rig &13 REGISTER RECEPT. 9 CCUNr RCO M R . RECEPT n y �} n REGISTER RECEPT. 10 n REGISTER RECEPT, 12 F3 RETURN CENTER RECEP i. n n REGIS iER RECEPT: 14 7 5 LASER H P "4 4 ^ WORK STATION 16 F 7 H P. LASER n Illt .4. '4 n PRICE CHECKERS 18 t9 . BIG TICKS' I n n REFUND Dui( 20 21 KRU OFFICE RIxPT. n 29 : T:: 1 `INICI-_ n n REFUND DESK 22 n 1 26 II® 28 3 =� n 34 35 36 37. �k 39 ® . B4„,V 2 00C I S EVICED %E11�//. 38 ®51 TOTAL CONNETTED 10.1 KW LOAD INFORMATION:. CONNECTED 1 DEMAND LIGHTING G0.0 Kw X 1.25 = .00.0 KW OTHERS 10.1 KW X 1.00 - 10.1 KW TOTAL 10.1 KW = 10.1 Kw NOTE THIS PANEL IS FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED ISOLATED GROUND BUS CK 13 2 25 27 29 39 9 ACE D C SON DOOR OPENER wATER COOLER RECEPT_ DF TEL. BRD. RECEPT. - n1 COMPUTER AC. 1 5 RECEPT. 7 RECEPT. 1 RECEPT_ CEPT 25 WATER HEATER 27 TOWER ,REC. 29 TOWER REC. =AN 31 TOWER REC. 33 REFUND AREA RECEPT 35 GREETING CARD RAC 37 COUNT ROOM RECEP COUNT ROOM RECEPT. !ANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE LIGHTING OTHERS TOTAL SURFACE (A) FLUSH KT DESCRIPTION SAI LIGHT, OTHERS ES LIGHTING SALES LIGHTING SALES LIGHTING SALES LIGHTING SALESJGHTNG 17 1 SALES LIGHTING SPACE '1111 1.7 I(1 rl 23 FEATURE AISLE PLUGMO_D rl 1 '1' 1.2 I' i rl I 1 COUNT R004 RECEPT. (1 %/ rl rl SALES LIGHTING .(1 F N rl 1 , LA i2C/ 30. 3. 14.5 3 -3 2 3 KvJ X '25 1;. Kw X 1 . 2� .4 2 LOAD INFORMATION: CONNECTED DEMAND G KW X 1.25 - C KW 39.4 KW X 1.00 39.4 KW 39.4 KW PANE_ HA 277/480 V, 30=W. TO 8 • ; 8 \ _ - 11.9 73 0 r OTAL C.. , TED 394 42 LOADS KW AD BD ICU 21 .7 1 33 SALES ':GHT'JG rl 1.0 1.0 LOAD NFOR,1A ION ,DING , RE0-MAT (AISLE 5-01 1, PECEPT. (COMPUTER) :CND n (l ;CO NT 04 FOR PNL 'LB 3 SALES LASH ( 1 . z 6 4 IDLE / i24 111 6 -z 39.4 K'+ M1 DESCRIP,ON ,R HEATER =AN • .E A . T AISLE 12 -C) NN NDC - DROPS RKE RAMPS SALES LIGH11, SALES SRARE SLE 5-E1 28 ; 38 102 _ E SCRIP - CN =AN AN :CLEANING RECEPT. CLEANING RECEPT. Li\ UGM.._D ( l 0D U NOD I =,I REG_PT. REGISTRY DESK WORKSTATION 30 • 102U' OFFICE PLUGAIOLD I rl S ACE 39 EESCRiPTICIK _PAR GENERAL NOTES:' 1. EXISTING, CIRCUIT. BREAKERS ARE TO BE USED TO PROVIDE NEW LOADS WHICH ARE TYPICALLY MORE EFFICIENT AND RESULT IN LESS POWER DEMAND- 2. ALL PANELS AND FEEDERS ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN AS IS AND ARE NOT TO BE RELOCATED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. DESCRIPTIONS AND. LOADS IN SOFT UNEWEIGHT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. DESCRIPTIONS AND LOADS SHOWN IN HEAVY UNEWEIGHT REPRESENT NEW WORK TO BE ACCOMPUSHED. 4. EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS ARE TAKEN FROM EXISTING RECORD DRAWINGS AND ARE SHOWN FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. ELC SHALL VERIFY PANELS AND CIRCUITS. 5. ELC SHALL PROVIDE NEW TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORIES IN PANELBOARDS WHERE CIRCUITS HAVE BEEN REVISED OR ADDED, INDICATING LOAD CHANGES OR ADDITIONS. 6. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH. LATEST APPLICABLE LOCAL AND NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODES. PANEL ARESALES LTD. ^.TED. LoA I AO �=�., i n ; R1L -8 1 i'1 i HE r 1 I Lq 208v 30. 4W, 100 A _1H 0^K -0\ DENA t;%jf 6.1 89 15.5 LOAD INFORMATION: CONNECTED DEMAND 0 KW X 1.23 G KW 245 - HA :: 20.5. KW 20.5 KW - 20.5 KW 3 %zo .9 G D,GHTINC r,; TOAD 1 CONNECTED KW I TIn SPACE I SPACE 1 SPACE I nI SPACE 77/480 V 304W, 100 CADS KW 40 (CO S 2.0 23 I 1, ;DOOR OPERATOR '.2 . '�. 1 , 7 3 2. 2. ORMATCN: DEMAND 85.d K'W DESCRIPTION Ir1 ;DOOR OPERATOR (1;DOOR H rl1DOCR HEATER r\IALARM RECEPT_ I OF P AUGMOLD 4 CE PLUG OLD 1 1 18 20 rl SPACE n 1DOOR HEATER n SPARE !. IPEPSI COOL 1 , j T IMECI OCK .4 (' ' SPACE (SPACE i(I I Irl G E.:.E K.. DESCR':PT'ON IMLO Mca2=E M C A T MLO C %1 116 22 I24 1 26 8 30 132 1 34 IC 8 r N SPACE IAA 142 K TOTAL CONNECTED 20.5 KW Y /// III SALES/PRESALES O. f 2 rTh 16 1 ^ T SPARE 6 5.1 (21.8 / jTCTAL LC,I 55, LW LIGHTING OT'HE'RS CONNECTED 46.7 KW 0 1.25 0 KW X 1.00 46.7 KW LOAD INFORMATION: DEMAND 58.4 KW 0 KW 58.4 KW SURFACE fXS FLUSH 3 CONT. Cl & CZ 7 SPARE 9 SPARE SPAR= POWER RM- L UN'S 1,4 &5 B 1P 3A U,1AESS "NE, _oC O - ' ..E IGHTING OTHERS TOTAL DESCRIPTION AMC 5 3.^a i(,IzV i (' `I -62 277/ V. 100 A LOADS KAI 0 90 :C2 -(l; NI s EM_R LTG. SITE & EMER. LAC. V Ni TE LTG. 1 ll1 NIT-, LOG. ! , I ! NIT L F,. N l_ LOG. LOAD ',\FORMA - 10N: CJ \NEC -D DEMAND 22.6 KW X ".25 = 28.3 Kw 31 Kw x 1.00 = 30_2 8W 52.8 K•N = 56.5 KW DESCRIPTION MLO MCB ) CKT 0 0- _. CONNECTED 32.8 KW S URFACE LUSH' ICI CKT 3 QUAD RECEPT DESCRIPTION MAIN SPACE QUAD RECEPT SPACE OUADRECEPT SPACE SPACE 17 : RECEPT PANEL BKR 1P ,20AUN , LE NO HANDL LOCK -ON S DEVICE TED 120/2401, 10, 3W, 40 A LOADS KW AD B0 DESCRIPTION QUAD RECEPT QUAD SPACE OUAD RECEPT. SPACE QUAD RECEPT SPACE SPACE RECEPT RECEPT 2 kiff1=11119111111 ■r INIMIMINEMIll ilit11. ®� / ® ®m■-.101 11 ,siu 2 2 8 1 2 a 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 ///A TOTAL CONNECTED 2.4 KW LOAD INFORMATION. CONNECTED .DEMAND.. LIGHTING OOO KW 'X 1.25 00.0. KW OTHERS a KW X1.00 _ 24 KW TOTAL 2.4 KW _ 2 4' KW NOTE: THIS PANEL IS TO BE FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED ISOLATED GROUND BUS SURFACE (X) FLUSH ;KT 7 15 7 23 25 27 29 33 35 LIGHTING OTHERS TOTAL DESCRIPTION PANEL S. DOOR HEATER O I pi DOCR HEATER (f 14 \I H 13 C N. DOOR r� cR XFMR FOR PNL. LC COMP. RM- LTG. P.U. DOOR HEATER d 114.2 (1 SPARE 39 --4717 , , 8KR 7 °, 2GA JNLESS FO`EJ °1 HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE ��// /� ' RE 277/480 V, 3AyW 225 A LOADS KW AD B0 CO 2 2 2 20 LOAD i.JFORMA:!ON CONNECTED 3.3 KW X i.25 1315 KW X 1.00 2 42 z 2 -0 UH -7 n I DEMAND = 4.2 KW 131.5 KW 134.8 KW 135.7 NW DESCRIPTION MLO I MCB S. DOOR HEATER RTU -7 LIFT SPARE 16 CAP( OF - 11:1! MA KPPRiPto MAR 3 Zni. L CK 2 4 20 22 24 UH -6 26 28 30 RTU -5 32 34 36 38 42 45.0 4 TOTAL CONNECTED 134.8 KW No Date No Drawings Location Scale Sheet No. Revisions Description PERMIT APPUCATION Drawing References BID DATE: CADD NAME: 603e03 PROJECT NO - 00060 DRAWN. BY :. UJC CHECKED BY: GLR/Rm PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: 2001 C3 REMO0FI - 90 COMRa practicing as an individual 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERR 4 _ a PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAMES C. ALBERTS#C00183 314 -821 -1100 NONE National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS. "R" US. TUKWILA, WA 16700 S. t'ENTER PKWY 121(01 / -21 -01 Drawing Title ' PANEL SCHEDULE I Date S IRF —EEL PAIL, LL 120/208. V. 22,131, §2A 16 o .... 7 CT LOADS KW CKT 6 DESCRIPTION f ; T DE710N 2n. POLES SW. 1 X FOR. J-BOX & REC. /l "LA" SOKVA XFRM 3 n RACK. MOUNTED ENCE 2 LIGH7ING AND RE 3 'X' EXT. J-BOX & REC. (\ . 4 T -2 (1 RACK MOUNTED VALENCE 4 UGHTDIG AND RECEPT. 5 SALES AREA REST (l .100 1 n N YOUNTED VALENCE 8 7 SALES AREA PWGYOLD (1 .. 100 !'1 REC. FOR RACK MOUNTED 8 VALANCE LIGHTING 9 SALES AREA RECEPT. ('1 1.8 B PANEL "H13" REC. FOR. RACK MOUNTED !'� VAUWCE!LIGHTING 10 17 &VALANCE um 100 FRS-Ft (RK 5) 7.8 DRESS RY RACK T. /'1 12 VALENCE.. LTG. RECEPT . 'X' 13 X FIXTURE J-DOX. (\ 60 . 45 (\ RACK 1IOlAJ7ED 14 LNiLiING AND RECLPT. ''. 15 X FIXTURE J -BOX (1 1.7 3 RACK t MOIIMED EVALENCE 16 rl ...RACK 17 X FIXTURE J -BOX (l 39.0 7 n RAQC 18 LIGHTI MOUNTED VALANCE NG & PLUGMOLD 19 X FIXTURE J-1300 (' 4$ ERS -R (RK -5) LIGHTI MOUNTED VALANCE !'1 R11CK 20 NG & PLUGYOLD 21 X EXT. J-BOX & REC. RTU -1 3 60 RACK MOUNTED VALANCE 22 LIGHTING & flLGYOLD 23 X FIXTURE J-BOX T1 ` - I� n JOUST AREA. RECEPT. 24 25 REYID- V,nr- FDR ALAN RACK LI GHTIN G � -Kim FRS -R (RK -S) 56.2 n SALES AREA PWGMOLD 26 27 - R - US AREA PLUGMOLD /'1 60 (l SALES AREA PLUGMOLD 28 RACK MOUNTED VALANCE 29 LIGHTING & PWGiIOLD ( PANEL "HE ". 3 KIOSK AREA PWGMOLD 6 JOIST AREA RECEPT. 30 31 SPARE C' 162.2' 600A MAIN SWITCH VI/ 600A FUSES (T -TRON JJS) (l SPARE 32 33 SPARE ('1 r SPARE 35 SPARE /'1 r SPARE 36 37 SPARE 11 n CALING FANS 38 39 SPARE /"1 /l CEILINGFAiS 40 41 SPARE n /-1 °DUNG FANS 42 EP 1P, 20A UNLESS NOTED. . HANDLE LOCK-CH DEVICE j 13"4 13.3 12.1 / Tom,. CONNECTED 38.8 KW MAIN DISTRIBUTION 600A, 277/480V PROTECTION KVA 30,4W,SN PANEL CKT SERVING FUSE TYPE 2n. POLES SW. FUSE 1 "LA" SOKVA XFRM 3 100 'WO T -IRON (JJS) 31.3 T -2 PANEL "HD" 100 .100 T -7RON (JJS) 63.3 3 PANEL "HA" .. 100 100 FRS -R (RK 5) 37.7 HC PANEL "H13" . 100 100 FRS-Ft (RK 5) 82.6 5 RTU -3. . 60 . 45 FRS -R (RK -5) 39.0 RTU -2 3 60 '. 4$ FRS'' -R (RK 5) 39.0 7 RTU -4 3 60 4$ ERS -R (RK -5) 39.0 RTU -1 3 60 45 FRS- R.(RK - 5) 39.0 PANEL "HC" 3 60 60 FRS -R (RK -S) 56.2 10 PANEL "LC" - NA XFRM 3 60 60 FRS -R (RK -S) 4.5 11 PANEL "HE ". 3 200 200 FRS -R (RK-S) 162.2' 600A MAIN SWITCH VI/ 600A FUSES (T -TRON JJS) TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE FLAN RK MA KVA PHASE PRI LTS V O S VOLT SECS FED FROM SERVING LOCATION REMARKS 1 480 120/240 HE LC T -2 50 3 480 120/208 MDP LA - T-3 45 3 480 120/208 HC LE - TRAPEZE MID. FROM', ROOF FRAM LIMBERS IN PNR.RM. F PANEL 3 #4, # (G), 1 '.14 "C n8 CC'PEY EXISTING EQUIPMENT — 60 UPS 7 3�c C. �BY' -PASSi SWITCH \ II \ 2 #8. 1 , F, (iG), 3/4 "C. PANEL "LD" 40A, 120/2484', 10, ('SOLATED CND.) SQUARE 'C' NOOK - PANE'._ BOARD L PANEL "LC" 80A, SQUARE 'D' NODE ELEC SHALL REMO INSTALL NEW A COMPUTER RM. 10 1F1 TO 10-2 T -1 PANEL MAX S1F I IGHTING CONTRO ELC ro PRONE cvr01Cia2 SOONE b � � jj P I Q � RL�'N6 jjII�� 1.24 S�?I 000 COMECT TO DBMS MOST HEICCNECr IMMO CROAT /1IRFCTORY AND DISPI AY CONTROL ME IMMO ELC TO RE EOSINS CCIEUC10R SCALE N.T.S. ELC TO PROVIDE PANEL ° LE" ELC TO PROVIDE NEW 20 AMP. 3 POLE CONTACTOR 'C PANEL 'LAW" TO SNITCH CIRCLES 1 -3 INSTEAD OF ENTIRE PNL 'HC' 100A, 120/208M, 3m, 8W ELECTRICAL SERVICE RISER DIAGRAM RTU -7 PANEL FLOOR RTU -8 TO PANE'S LA1 COMPA,TOR 7_ROOF GENERAL NOTES. 1. ALL PANELS. FEEDERS, FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE EXISTING TO, REMAIN AND ARE NOT TO BE MOVED, OR MODIFIED UNLESS. OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. EQUIPMENT AND LOADS IN SOFT UNEWEIGHT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. EQUIPMENT AND LOADS SHOWN: IN HEAVY UNEWEIGHT REPRESENT NEW WORK. TO BE ACCOMPLISHED. 3. EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS ARE TAKEN FROM. EXISTING RECORD DRAWINGS AND ARE SHOWN FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. ELC SHALL . VERIFY PANELS AND CIRCUITS. ELC SHALL PROVIDE NEW TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORIES IN PANELBOARDS .WHERE CIRCUITS HAVE BEEN REVISE) OR ADDED, INDICATING LOAD CHANGES OR ADDITIONS. 5. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH LATEST APPUCABLE LOCAL AND NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODES. o 3$ v, a No No Date Drawing References Drawings Description PERMIT APPLICATION BID DATE: CADD NAME: . 03 . 04 PROJECT ND 8 _- DRAWN BY: JJC CHECKED BY: GLR/PJH PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION :2001 C3 RFMOnF/ -9n COMBO Drawing Title Scale AS NOTED Sheet No. Revisions ©1 @@ 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS Date Location OF 1 �2 oo t SIO s ., OF RECO E�••' JAMES C. ALBERTS #C001 N �XP 21 -01 314 -821 -1100 S 7121/1 .t National 0 "'- 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "9" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "9" US. TUKWILA, WA 16700 ' S. CENTER ',PKWY RISER DIAGRAM F4 �� - • it i i O 6 GENERAL NOTES P PROJECT TEAM T TEAM MEMBERS THE THE FOLLOWING INDIVIDUALS WERE T 1. cONTRACTOR I IS RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING THAT S FIRM /CONSULTANT L LEAD CONTACT P PHONE # OWNER - APM: T TOYS "R" US V VINCE:PA000ELU ( (201) 225 -6734 1 ( CASCO ( LESUE DERRICK ( (314) 821 -1100 No No Date Description Drawings Revisions 2 /8/01 PERMIT APPLICATION Drawing References BID, DATE:. 2/8/01 CADD. NAME: . 6o3A00. PROJECT NO - Boos. DRAWN BY: JAR CHECKED BY: CMS PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION 2001 CO RFMUOFL 40 con 10877 WATSON ROAD ST. LOUIS, MO 63127 PROJECT MANAGERS Professional of record practicing as an individual PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: RALPH R. SHAW 314 -821 -1100 LTC ::# 4702'.. IXP DA ' 8/1 +/ National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 - 7800: - This drawing is the Exclusive - Property of TOYS "0" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced ithout permission of TOYS "A" US. Location TUKWILA, WA 16700 S. 1 CEN1ER PKWY Drawing Title COVER SHEET Scale I Date AS NOTED 2/8/01 Sheet No. AOAJ